Copyright: Copyright © 1993-2003 Cerious Software, Inc.


Contents
Introduction Title Page Introduction Getting Started Feature Summary Thanks To... What's New Release Notes Location Bar Color Management Web Page Wizard Enhancements Image Loupe Window Multiple Undo/Redo File Types Supported Plug-in Support License and Ordering Evaluation License Network Licenses How to order	Program Operation Program Dialog Boxes Supported File Types Selecting Files Thumbnail Views Program Navigation Main Window Menus Keyboard Toolbar View Window Menus Keyboard Mouse

Additional References

Windows Display Drivers
DDE Commands
Error Messages
Other Messages
Glossary


Title Page

Software copyright © 1993-2003 Cerious Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Documentation copyright © 1993-2003 Cerious Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Credits

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
This software is based in part on the work of Group 42.
Portions © 1988-1995 Sam Leffler
Portions © 1991-1995 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
LZW compression is licensed from Unisys Corp. under U.S. patent 4,558,302 and foreign counterparts.
LZH-Light compression © 1998 Sergey Ignatchenko
Several of the photographic toolbar images were licensed from PhotoDisc
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corp.
GIF is a service mark of CompuServe, Inc.
Word for Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corp.
PhotoCD is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.
Various other product names mentioned in passing are trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.

Published in the UK and France by The Thompson Partnership.
German version published in Germany by Atlantic Software Exchange, Inc.
German and English versions available in Germany from Der PD Profi.
Japanese version published in Japan by Village Center Inc.
Distributed in Belgium and the Netherlands by CopyCats Software and Services.
Distributed in Australia and New Zealand by ThumbsPlus Pty. Ltd.

Disclaimer

ThumbsPlus is supplied "AS IS." The author disclaims all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The author assumes no liability for damages, direct or consequential, which may result from the use of ThumbsPlus.

US Government Restricted Rights

The software and documentation is provided with restricted rights. The use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in subdivision (b)(3)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause 252.227-7013. Contractor/manufacturer is Cerious Software, Inc., 1515 Mockingbird Ln. Suite 1000, Charlotte, NC 28209.

Distribution with commercial products

Any unlicensed version of ThumbsPlus may not be distributed as part of or for use with any commercial product without express written permission from Cerious Software, Inc.

For information about the CD-ROM Developer's Kit for ThumbsPlus (Thumbs+CDK), please contact Cerious Software, Inc.


Introduction

ThumbsPlus is a graphic file viewer, locator and organizer that simplifies the process of finding and maintaining graphics, clip-art files, fonts and animations. It displays an image (thumbnail view) of each file. You can use ThumbsPlus to browse, view, edit, crop, launch external editors, and copy images to the clipboard. You can use drag-and-drop to organize graphics files by moving them to appropriate folders. ThumbsPlus will also create a slide show from selected graphics, and install bitmap files as Windows wallpaper.

You can print individual graphics files, or the thumbnails themselves as a catalog.  ThumbsPlus can convert to several formats, either one at a time or during batch processing. You can also perform image editing in batch mode. ThumbsPlus will also convert metafile graphics to bitmaps (rasterize). You can create graphic contact sheets with thumbnails and descriptions of files, and even build web pages of thumbnails!

ThumbsPlus can process dozens of file types internally.  Here's a comprehensive list and details on each format.

You can also use Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) to create thumbnails for and view any proprietary file type for which the server application is loaded on your system.


Getting Started
Getting Started with ThumbsPlus

The main window consists of the normal Windows interface (title bar, menus, etc.) and three functional areas, as shown below:

Click on the picture above (anywhere the cursor becomes a hand) to find out about the various parts of the display.

Additional information:

The toolbar provides short cuts to several frequently used commands.

The folder tree displays disks and folders from which you may select a folder to display. Unless disabled from the Tree menu, folders are color-coded to indicate the presence of previously thumbnailed images:

Selecting a folder works much like Windows Explorer; most operations and menu short-cuts work similarly, and you can drag-and-drop selected files to move or copy them to different folders and drives.

When you select a folder from the folder tree, file names (and thumbnails, if generated), display in the thumbnail view.

You may select one or more files from the thumbnail view, then take action on the selected image(s) from the toolbar or menus.

You may also drag the selected files to a new folder or disk.


Feature Summary

Various function groups and capabilities of ThumbsPlus are listed below.

General Features

Image Viewing Functions

Image Processing Functions

File Types Supported

Database Information

Main window areas:

Tool Bar

Location Bar

Tasks Tab

Preview Tab

Info Tab

Thumbnail View

Status Bar

Various features:

Searching

Find Similar Images

Keywords

User Fields

Galleries

Tag Images

Edit IPTC Info

Send Files via E-Mail

Online Photos: Printroom.com, Picturetrail.com

Flexible File Printing

Watched Folders

Synchronized Views

Batch Processing

Quick File Conversions

Building Web Pages

Canned Slide Shows

Contact Sheets

Printed Image Catalogs

Extensive Options

Customization


Thanks To...

Many thanks to everyone involved in the development and testing of ThumbsPlus. Special recognition goes to:

Laura Shook,  Sister and President, for her incredible devotion, unflagging support, and for being so wonderful to work with.

Pam Perry,  Website Administrator, for her psychological muscle and limitless energy.

Roger Johnson,  Software Poet, for his time spent developing code and playing guitar.

Phyllis Auer,  Teller & Doer of Things, for coming along at the perfect time and helping to hold it all together.

Seth Telles,  Solutionist, for his devotion to technical support, creativity in graphics design and commitment to finding and playing every online game out there.

Chuck Crews, Brother and world wide web insider.

Daniel Shook and Shawn O'Sullivan, for the new templates for the Web Page Wizard.

Dino Ignacio, for the new and much prettier ThumbsPlus icons. You can see his other work at http://www.fractalcow.com.

David Hanna, for excellent suggestions and great insight into what ThumbsPlus should become (and I hope it has!).

Tom Lane and the Independent JPEG Group. Many thanks for routines that are well-written, easy to understand, straightforward to implement, and were simple to integrate into ThumbsPlus.

Andy Anderson, for the wonderful Auto Color Balance algorithm.

Ray McVay and Mike Edgerton, of 'Go Graphics,' for their continued support for ThumbsPlus. Other members who have also supported and encouraged us are: Curt Bradshaw, Matt Drury, Bruce Herzog, Rollie Jones, Richard Lindner, John Parker, Tom Potocki, Tom Price,  Charlotte Smith, John Swenson, Howard Thue and Larry Wood.

Our overseas evaluation and retail distributors: Kenji Hino and Mr Nakamura at Village Center (Japan), Patrick Hochner at P&A Evaluation (Japan), Hans Fremuth, and Norbert Burkhard at Atlantic Software Exchange (Germany), Gerd Zottelein at PD Profi (Germany), Nick Thompson at The Thompson Partnership (UK), Daniel van Rooijen at CopyCats (Netherlands, Belgium).

Other people who have greatly encouraged or influenced ThumbsPlus: Uwe Zimmerman, Joel Diamond, Ed Hoffman, Brian Priebe, Rich Pasco and Ralph Mariano.

All of the beta testers, without whom many more bugs would have made it into the released product.

But, the most thanks are due to YOU. Without your dollars and support, we couldn't continue this interesting adventure!

SPECIAL RECOGNITION FROM THE REST OF US HERE AT CERIOUS:

We would like to offer our heart felt thanks and appreciation to the man who started all of this, Phillip Crews.  He gave us, not just a port in the corporate storm, but a home.  Thanks, Phillip!


Searching for Files in ThumbsPlus
Features - Searching for Files

ThumbsPlus allows you to search for thumbnailed files, using several different search criteria, including similar images


What's New - User Fields
ThumbsPlus - User Fields

ThumbsPlus supports defining and adding user field values to image thumbnails.  All information about user fields is stored internally in the database.  You may create any number of user fields with a variety of field types to convey additional information about the thumbnailed images.

After creating the user fields, you can enter user field values simply by selecting the desired thumbnails and picking the menu selection Thumbnail | Assign User Fields.

You may also find thumbnailed images (based on user field values) by selecting Edit | Find by Query... from the main menu and clicking on the User Fields tab

See also:	Main Window -File | Database | User Fields,
Main Window -Thumbnail | Assign User Fields...
Main Window -Edit | Find by Query - User Fields...


Main Window, File | View Synched
 Main Window - File | View Synched	Shift+F8

Opens a view window for each of the currently selected files, up to the maximum specified in the Options | Viewing - Window dialog box. This option will be grayed if no files are selected.  Additionally, each opened view window will be tiled on the desktop.  In view synched mode, you can right mouse drag one of the synched images (to scroll it around) and the other view windows will follow the scrolling offsets and adjust their displays accordingly.

See also: Window | Synch Views.


Release Notes
ThumbsPlus - Release Notes

Click here to view ThumbsPlus version 5.0 release notes

6.0 Release Notes

Color Management

New color management dialog, now included in Options | Preferences and Options | Viewing.

Color management can now be enabled separately for color, grayscale and indexed (palette-based) images.

All printers may now be assigned separate color profiles.

You can now assign color profiles to scanners and digital cameras. These will be applied when acquiring images using TWAIN.

Color Management is now used when printing images and catalogs.

Navigation (Folder Tree)

Added tabs for each major location category to the location bar (above the folder tree), as well as "Up to parent folder" and "Favorites" buttons.

Image Viewing and Editing

Added a "Fit to Height" in Options | Viewing | Window and View | Zoom. This option works well for side-scrolling panoramic images.

Added the ability to display a loupe (magnifier) for viewing details within images (View - Loupe, etc.).

View window status bar enhancements (the MOD entry replaced with several icons relating to image status).

Improved panning/scrolling speed for images zoomed to 10/20/25/50/100%.

Image editing now comes with multiple undo/redo capability, limited by available memory. You can set a specific memory limit in Options | Preferences | Advanced. The default is 200,000 Kb; however, when Undo is enabled, T+ will always save at least one Undo/Redo level, regardless of image size.

When a selection is active in a view window, pressing Delete (or Edit | Delete) will replace the selected area with the current view window background color. Ctrl+Delete is now the keystroke to delete a file. There is also an option in Options | Viewing | Other to enable file deletion when no selection is active, which will provide previous behavior.

Added Edit | Cut to image windows, which copies the current selection to the clipboard, then clears it.

Any image operation that does not change the image size (i.e., filter, color adjust, color balance, cut/paste) can now be faded; the image is combined with the Undo image at the opacity selected. Undo must be enabled (Options | Viewing | Other) for this feature to be available.

Added the ability to assign or remove color profiles to Image | Quick Process | Modify File Info.

Added several new image filters: Pop Art, Dark Edges, Gray Edges, and Drawing.

Added a preview to Image | Combine, and added a "Fade" option.

Added an option in Options | Viewing | Window to use all monitors when tiling or synching images, even if only one monitor is selected for single-image views.

Added the ability to show thumbnail annotations in the slide show, made the sequence number (1 of n) optional, and added an option to position the text at the top of the window.

Added the ability to retain zoom and position when advancing through images in a view window.

Many additional fixes to the slide show, especially regarding the audio. Also added an option to control whether the slide show loops or stops after the last file.

Added an optional confirmation for a prompt when changing wallpaper.

Added a Compare Image feature that shows the computed similarity between two images. This is most useful for seeing how much lossy compression affected an image. The following values are computed: Mean Square Error (MSE), Peak signal-to-noise ratio (PSNR) and an approximated Wang & Bovik quality index. Also shown are the number of identical and the number of different pixels.

Rotate to Line will now use the last background color selected in Image | Rotate.

Added support for red, green and blue channel histograms in Image | Histogram.

When files are saved, ThumbsPlus now propagates the original file's creation date and time.

Added an option (Options | Viewing | Appearance) to select whether to show the entire path or only the file name in the view window title bar.

File Formats - New and Updated

Added support for Kodak 14n (Pro4) camera files.

Color profiles for 16-bps TIFF and PSD images (grayscale or RGB) are now properly applied while loading (translating to 8-bps).

Fixed a problem loading 32-bit FITS files.

Large (> 100Mb) uncompressed TIFF files will now be read in chunks (rather than mapped to memory), enabling T+ to handle larger images.

Improved loading speed for thumbnailing and previewing very large TIFF files.

Fixed a bug that was not correctly orienting TIFF files with orientation=6 (Left-Bottom) and orientation=8 (Right-Top). Also added an Thumbs.Ini option to prevent auto-orientation of TIFF files (add AutoOrient=0 to the [TIFF] section).

Added support for 48-bit files read by the Photoshop plug-in.

Thumbnailing and viewing icon libraries will now correctly produce a mosaic of all of the icons in the library.

ThumbsPlus is now compatible with more Photoshop File Format filters.

.NEF - Nikon D1 (D1X and D100 support will hopefully be available by release).

.ORF - Olympus raw.

.MRW - Minolta raw.

.DCR - Kodak professional camera.

.SFW - Newer Seattle Filmworks files

.MBM - Psion bitmaps.

Photoshop (.PSD) files without a composite image may now be loaded by changing Load Using to "Polyimage." (However, this does not read the IPTC info.)

Added an option (Options | File Loading | JPEG) to ask whether to trim or skip rotated JPEGs (Image | Quick Process | Turn) whose dimensions are not multiples of eight.

Added Image | Quick Process | Turn support for Kodak .DCR files.

Making and Viewing Thumbnails

Greatly improved scanning speed when scanning already-thumbnailed folders or trees.

You can now display up to 9 user-defined fields in the thumbnail view.

Enabled the ability to create thumbnails of unsupported files from the clipboard (Thumbnail | Make from Clipboard). There is also an option (Options | Preferences | Thumbnails) to save the clipboard information as a .tp_jptn file for when thumbnails are remade. These files are automatically moved, copied and deleted along with the corresponding originals when they are moved from within ThumbsPlus. When T+ cannot load a file, it checks for the presence of a .tp_jptn file with the same name and uses that to make the thumbnail.

File Metadata (EXIF, IPTC, Comments, Annotations, User Fields)

Multiple IPTC keywords and supplemental categories are now show in the Info pane.

Items on the Info tab are now colored based on their source (EXIF, IPTC, User Fields, etc.) You can customize the colors (or turn of the coloring altogether) in Options | Customize | Info Colors. Additionally, the items in the "Available" list box for selecting info items are grayed if they are already in the Selected list.  Altough an item can still be added twice, it's useful when the list is large

Modifying multiple files with IPTC info is now supported. When you edit IPTC info with multiple files selected, each field has a checkbox to indicate whether it should be changed in the files.

Added drop-down fields for assigning user fields; they come from the current database and are not retrieved until you click the dropdown arrow.

Added support for the EXIF GPS (Global Positioning Satellite) fields.

Added the ability to copy annotations from the database to image comments (Image | Quick Process | Modify File Info).

Added the ability to set or remove color profiles to images in Image | Quick Process | Modify File Info.

Added the color profile as image info (for display in the Info pane, or on catalogs and printouts).

Exif version 2.2 fields are now supported. Also, Maker Note information is supported from more file types, including Minolta and Olympus.

Movie and Sound Viewing

Audio files can now show a waveform while playing, and you can use the waveform as the thumbnail (both options are available on Options | File Loading | Movies & Sound).

Implemented software volume control for sound and movies.

Navigation, File Management & Searching

Improved error reporting and duplicate handling when copying and moving folders.

Fixed the problem where searching by keywords that did not exist in the database would return all files.

Added several new categories to Edit | Find by Query - Restrict search to: current disk, local drives only, network drives only, removable drives only.

Added a File History (File | View Recent) and a toolbar button to quickly open any of the last 32 files viewed in ThumbsPlus.

Added an option to select files by their file attributes (read-only, system, etc.) and by whether they are tagged.

Added thumbnail decorations to show read-only and tagged files.

Added "Count" and "Clear All" buttons to each tab in Edit | Find by Query. Count will provide a count of results that match the current query. Clear all will clear all tabs.

Added the ability to retain the original file dates when quick processing files (Image | Quick Process). Similarly, added a batch step that will set the destination files to the original files' dates and times.

Added statistics showing how many files were copied, renamed, skipped or deleted when copying and moving files.

Added an entry field in the folder tree that can be used to enter a specific path directly. Also, there is a drop-down that lists the history of paths in alphabetical order.

Printing, Contact Sheets and Web Pages

Improved handling of print schemes so that ThumbsPlus remembers the last scheme used and notices changes to it, and fixed a bug that could occur when changing printers or schemes.

Added the ability to convert and resize images in the Web Page Wizard (Image | Web Page Wizard). This avoids having to batch process files before building web pages. The wizard also shows the number of files selected and the number of pages that will be generated. There is now a "Finish" button on each page of the wizard to quickly bypass the remaining pages. (Tabbed dialogs are planned for a future version.  This will require some redesign because some pages only appear when options on other pages are selected; this was quite confusing in earlier versions.) On most browsers, links to Java pop-up windows now show the "hand" cursor when passing over them. If you create or edit your own image page template (.tptp file), you can now add {{Comments}} to the image pages themselves. This will use the same comments from the index pages. Finally, added a warning if you try to preview or build web pages with no files available to process.

Added the ability to convert, resize and zip images in File | Send to... This also shows the number of files selected, the original size, the attachment size, and the encoded attachment size.

Added the option to generate pages for each image in the Web Page Wizard.

Added a Preview option to the Web Page Wizard.

Made a separate web page wizard item for the page title.

Added the ability to open auto-sized Javascript pop-up windows from generated web pages.

Miscellaneous

A new About (splash) screen, which chooses from random background images.

The license codes have changed for version six, and now provide for incremental multi-user license counts (instead of just 5-user, 10-user, etc.)

Program update will now use HTTP GET rather than POST, improving compatibility with firewalls.

The ThumbsPlus screen saver now works with version 6.

Added list of saved info sets to right-click info tab menu for quick picking.

To prevent excessive memory or CPU use, you can now limit the number of concurrently running threads (Options | Preferences | Advanced). When more than this number of background tasks are started, the later ones will queue up and wait for earlier ones to finish. The background task icons have also been updated.

Modified the installer to ask how you want ThumbsPlus to store the database and preferences on Windows XP, 2000, and NT. This offers the options to:

Install like prior versions

Share a database and preferences between all users.

Share the database, but maintain separate preferences for each user.

Let each user have a separate database (and preferences).

Install for the currently-logged in user only.

ThumbsPlus now uses ANSI delimiters for database objects in non-Access databases (and uses braces in Access databases). This avoids conflicts with reserved words in some databases, such as Oracle.

Improved error reporting when files cannot be moved, copied or deleted.

Added an option to remember Zip passwords (Options | Preferences | Disks & Folders). If you select this option, they are saved in the Thumbs.Ini file.

Added an "Edit Using" option "Assocation(Edit)" in Options | Preferences | File Types to open files using the Windows "Edit" method rather than the associated "Open" method. This can be used, for example, to change whether .html files are opened in the default application (usually a browser), or in the currently-configured web page editor.

Added a selection for the default file type for saving images pasted, scanned, or opened from a format that ThumbsPlus can't save (Options | Preferences | File Types).

Added support for multi-byte character sets in the English version. (ThumbsPlus is not a Unicode application, so your system will have to be set to the right language. You'll also need to select appropriate fonts.) This works for file and folder names, annotations, keywords, user fields, etc.

Added an option so that wheel-scrolling in the thumbnail view only moves by one row (otherwise the current mouse settings are used).

Made the path history (forward/back and location drop-down) separate for each database.

ThumbsPlus no longer watches for changes in folders on removable devices; this was preventing ejection.

Added the following DDE commands:

WebPages(...) - Build web pages

Acquire(...) -TWAIN acquire

ShowWindow(0/1) Minimize/Show the main T+ window

ShowFiles(mask) Show files matching a particular mask (or all selected types if blank)

Maximum thumbnail size has been increased to 600 x 600.

Files that were not loaded at full bit-depth (i.e., 16 or 48-bit TIFF files) and files not loaded at full resolution (i.e., resampled for the slide show) will now produce a warning when saving that the full information was not loaded.

Improved the Windows Still Image (STI) support for auto-starting T+ when scanning or plugging in a camera.

Added an "Apply" button to Options | Preferences, Options | Viewing and Options | File Loading.

Limited the annotation database entry field to the maximum number of allowed characters (4095).

When an image editing dialog is invoked during the slide show, T+ will now show the cursor until it is dismissed.

Improved file date/time handling when extracting from ZIP files.

Improved error reporting for TWAIN scanning, and made each available TWAIN source available directly on the menu, rather than having to "Select Source."

The shortcut keys available for toolbar buttons are now shown on the pop-up hints.

Non-file shortcuts no longer show in the thumbnail view.

Added the ability to watch sub-folders as well in Tree | Watch Folders, and added a separate timer for rescanning folders located on a network. (Network folders aren't watched for changes, since Windows doesn't report them; but they will now be scanned at the frequency requested.)

Corrected the generation of the 3x3x2 palette in Image | Color Depth.

ThumbsPlus now correctly reports the color depth of images with more than 24 bits per pixel.

Added an option (Options | Viewing | Other) for ThumbsPlus to build the Next Image/Previous Image file list when a file is opened in ThumbsPlus by association (i.e., from Explorer).

When in galleries, found lists, or showing child folders, Edit | Select by Mask will now match anything in the folder name as well as the file name.

There is now an option that you can set manually in the .TDO file that will copy each image to the clipboard as it displays during the slide show. In the [SlideShow] section, add a line: CopyClipboard=1

Known Issues

The color processing for MRW and ORF files is not complete.

5.0 Release Notes

International ODBC versions

Some international ODBC versions are available from the Cerious Software web site at  http//www.cerious.com/downloadodbc.htm.  We recommend that you install the ODBC version corresponding to the language of your Windows system before installing ThumbsPlus.  Be sure to unselect "Microsoft ODBC 3.5 (English)" during the ThumbsPlus installation to avoid overwriting your localized version!

Labeling disks

In order for ThumbsPlus to keep track of the thumbnails for files on different volumes, the disk labels are used.  This means that you must provide each disk, CD and removable disk with a unique volume label.  ThumbsPlus will prompt you for these for local disks if they do not have labels or if multiple disks have the same label.

Using SUBST drives

ThumbsPlus does not support "virtual" drives created with the DOS SUBST command, and will prompt for labels for these drives because they appear to be different drives with the same label as the host. In order to ignore them, place the following entry in [Tree] section of the THUMBS.INI file

  [Tree]
  IgnoreDrives=PQR

(Where PQR represents the drive letter(s) to ignore.)

Database

1. Database access is accomplished via ODBC, so most ODBC-compliant databases should work.  The default configuration uses an Access database (.mdb - we use our own .td4 extension).  We have also tested with MS SQL Server. If you are interested in testing in a client/server configuration (with SQL Server or another database), please contact regsupport@cerious.com
2. You can define your own fields in the database (File | Database | User Fields), and set values for thumbnailed images using either the menu selection Thumbnail | Assign User Fields or the File | Properties selection for a thumbnbail. You can also search by your user defined fields (Edit | Find by Query - User Fields).
3. ThumbsPlus computes similarity metrics for thumbnails, and you can sort the current thumbnail view by similarity (select a thumbnail and the click Options | Sort by | Similarity on the main menu), or search for images similar to a specific image (Edit | Find by Query - Image Similarity). You can also search the entire database for duplicate thumbnails (Edit | Find Similar Images).
4. You can create galleries of thumbnails, and order these as desired for slide shows, etc.
5. Database repair and compact are now integrated into the main program (File | Database | Compact, File | Database | Repair) rather than through an external program.

Folder Tree & File Organization

1. The folder tree uses the new Windows Explorer format.
2. You can drag folders to new locations to move or copy them, and you can rename folders.
3. There are several non-disk-related categories in the folder tree
   - Galleries To organize files in galleries (separate from disk organization)
   - Found Files For viewing sets of files found by search criteria (Edit | Find by Query, Edit | Find Similar Images)
   - Offline CD-ROMs For viewing thumbnails of offline CD-ROMs
   - Offline Floppies For viewing thumbnails of other offline media
4. The Network Neighborhood appears in the folder tree, and you can access and thumbnail files without mapping a drive letter.
5. In order to make it easier to find locations in the folder tree, you can add them to a "Favorites" list (Edit | Add to favorites). You can assign names to the folders here as well.
6. You can quickly move files to your favorite locations (File | Move To). From a view window, you can use the period (.) and the number of the Favorite Place to move the files to, allowing for fast "sifting" of many files into specific folders.

Thumbnails

1. You can choose either a vertical (scroll up and down) or horizontal (scroll side to side) display for thumbnails.
2. There are five ways to display thumbnails Small, Large, Custom Size, List and Report. You can customize each of these views, deciding which items to display in each view and what font to use.
3. There are several new sort orders for displaying thumbnails
   - Similarity. Arranges the thumbnails by finding the most similar.
   - Orientation. Arranges the thumbnails by orientation (portrait vs.landscape).
   - Image size. Arranges the thumbnails by the area of the image (width x height).
   - Thumbnails first (combined with any other sort order).
   - Thumbnails last (combined with any other sort order).

Image Viewing, Editing and Batch Processing

1. Batch processing is now step-based; you select what steps to perform for files. These steps can be saved as "batch sets" which can be used to process other files as well.
2. DIgimarc watermark detection when viewing, thumbnailing or both. You can embed watermarks one image at a time, or in batch mode.
3. Image stamping. Apply images or text to an image (or multiple images in batch mode). Many options are available, including opacity, rotation, location, scaling and more.
4. You can zoom to an arbitrary percentage of the original image size.
5. You can choose whether image view windows receive Windows task bar entries or not. From the ThumbsPlus task bar icon, you can select open view windows from the Windows menu.
6. Synchronized view windows (for image comparison). Scrolling, panning or zooming one window performs the same action in all other open view windows.
7. Tiling view windows.
8. "Web target" option for color reduction to an optimized palette. This ensures that any web-safe colors in an image are in the generated palette.
9. Several new image filters are available, including new effects and some edge-protected and edge-processing filters.

Multithreading

You can now perform most multi-image actions (making thumbnails, batch conversion, etc.) in separate threads (processes), so that you do not have to run multiple copies of ThumbsPlus in order to do work in the background. (You can also disable multi-threading in Options|Preferences|Advanced.)

Evaluation Limitations

The following limitations apply to the evaluation version of ThumbsPlus
1. Digimarc Image watermarking cannot be applied in batch mode
2. The following file types are supported only in the registered release
   - PFB, Adobe Type 1 Fonts
   - DXF, AutoCAD Exchange Format
   - FLI/FLC, Animation formats
   - FPX, FlashPix format
   - DCS, Kodak Professional Cameral formats
3. Zip files may be viewed as folders only in the registered version.
4. You can only save two named schemes each for catalogs, web wizard pages, and contact sheets.
5. You can only save two named batch sets.


Supported File Types

The list below shows the file types that ThumbsPlus supports.
Note: Items marked with (P) are available in the registered ThumbsPlus Pro version only.

.AIFF, .AIF, .AU, .SND	Sound files
.ASF, .WMV	Windows Media files
.AVI	Video for Windows files
.AWD	Microsoft Fax format files
.BMP,.DIB,.RLE	Windows Bitmap files
.CAL	CALS Raster image files
.CAM	Casio Camera format files
.CDR,.PAT,.BMF	CorelDRAW, CorelGALLERY files
.CEL	AutoDesk Animator CEL files
.CEX	CEX files
.CGM	Computer Graphics Metafile (binary encoding)
.CLP	Windows Clipboard/Picture
.CMP	Lead Tools compressed image
.CT	CT-scan files (Raw grayscale)
.CUR,.ANI	Windows Cursor files
.CUT	Dr. Halo files
.DCA	IBM MMR CCIT G3 2D fax format files
.DCR (P)	Kodak Pro3, Pro4 & ProBack
.DCS (P)	Kodak Professional DCS Camera files
.DCX	Multi-image PCX files
.DXF (P)	AutoCAD Exchange format files
.EPS	Encapsulated Postscript files (preview image only)
.FAX, .FXD, .FXR	Fax format files
.FIF	Fractal image files (Iterated Systems, Inc.)
.FPX	FlashPix image files
.FITS,.FTS,.HDR,.LBL	NASA FITS format
.FLC	Autodesk Animator
.G3, .G4	CCITT Group 3 (1-D, 2-D) & Group 4 fax format files
.GEM	GEM Metafiles
.GIF	CompuServe Graphics Interchange Format files
.ICL	Icon library files
.ICA	IOCA Raw Group 3 (1-D, 2-D) & Group 4 fax format files
.ICO	Windows Icon files
.IFF,.LBM	Amiga IFF format
.IMG	GEM Image format
.IMQ	NASA Compressed PDS format
.IPL	IPLab files
.J6I	Ricoh Camera format (JPEG with header)
.JPG,.JFI,.JIF,.JPEG	JPEG compressed files (in JFIF format)
J2K, JP2	JPEG 2000 files
.KDC	Kodak DC40, DC50 and DC120 digital camera native files
.KQP	Konica camera native files
.KIZ	Kodak Digital Postcard files
.LZR	LaserData CCITT G4 fax format files
.MAC	Macintosh Paint files
.MAM	Mammography files (raw grayscale)
.MDC (P)	Minolta RD-175 digital camera files
.MIC	Microsoft Image Composer
.MID	Windows MIDI files
.MND,.MNI	Mandelbrot for Windows image files
.MOV	QuickTime Movies
.MPG	MPEG compressed movies
.MRI	MRI scans
.MRW (P)	Minolta DiMAGE Raw files
.NAN	Nanoscope files (raw grayscale)
.ORF (P)	Olympus raw format files
PBM, .PGM, .PPM, .PNM	Conversion formats from PBMPlus/NETPBM
.PCX,.PCC	ZSoft Picture files
.PCD	Kodak PhotoCD files
.PCT,.PICT	Macintosh PICT files (V1, V2, raster, vector)
.PDS	NASA Planetary Data System format
.PIC	BioRAD Confocal PIC files
.PIC	SoftImage PIC
.PFB,.PSS	Adobe Type 1 Font files
.PMP	Sony digital camera format (JPEG with header)
.PNG	PiNG format files
.PSD, .PDD	Adobe Photoshop, PhotoDeluxe files
.RAS,.SUN	Sun Raster format
.RAW	Raw grayscale or RGB images
.RGB, .SGI	Silicon Graphics RGB files
.SCT	SciTex CT
.SFW	Seattle FilmWorks - mangled JPEG files
.SMP	Xionics Raster files
.ST4	Santa Barbara Instrument Group (SBIG) files
.STX, .ST5, .ST6, .ST7, .ST8	Santa Barbara Instrument Group (SBIG) files
.TGA,.WIN	Targa Truevision™ files
.TIF,.TIFF	Tagged Image Format files
.TTF,.TTR	TrueType fonts
.UUE	UUencoded files
.WAV	Windows Sound files
.XBM	Xwindow Bitmap files
.XPM	Xwindow Pixelmap files
.WBM, .WBMP	Wireless Bitmap files
.WFX	WinFax data files
.WMF,.MF	Windows Metafiles and Placeable Metafiles
.WPG	WordPerfect graphics files


Standard Dialog Boxes
Program Dialog Boxes

Several types of dialog boxes are used throughout ThumbsPlus.

Several of the most commonly seen are:

Progress Dialog Box

Browse Dialog

Confirm Dialog

Confirm File Replacement Dialog


Selecting Files

You select files from the thumbnail view (the area of the screen with thumbnails) by using the mouse or keyboard.

Using the Mouse to Select Files

You can use a mouse to select a file or group of files. Before you can select files, they must be visible in the thumbnail view.

To select a file:

Click the filename or thumbnail.

To select multiple items in sequence:

1.	Click the first file you want to select.

2.	Press the SHIFT key while you click the last file to select.

To select two or more file out of sequence:

Press and hold CTRL while you click on each file.

To cancel the selection of a file:

Press and hold CTRL while you click the selected file.

Using the Keyboard to Select Files

You can use the keyboard to select a file or group of files. Before you can select files, they must be visible in the thumbnail view.

To select a file:

Use the following keys to select a file or folder.

Press	To select

Up, Down	A file above or below the current selection.

End	The last file in the list.

Home	The first file in the list.

PageUp	The file at the top of the previous screen.

PageDown	The file at the bottom of the next screen.

To select two or more items in sequence:

1.	Use the up or down arrows to move to the first file that you want to select.

2.	Press and hold SHIFT while continuing use the arrow keys to move to the last file to be selected.

To select two or more items out of sequence:

1.	Use the arrow keys to move to the first file that you want to select.

2.	Press and hold CTRL while continuing use the arrow keys to move to the next file to be selected.

3.	Press the SPACEBAR (continue to hold CTRL) to select each file.

To cancel the selection of a file:

1.	Press and hold CTRL.

2.	Move to the selection that you want (by using the arrow keys) to cancel and then press the SPACEBAR.


Thumbnail Views

Small	Large	Custom	List *	Report *

* These views require "Show For Files" to include "Thumbnail"

ThumbsPlus supports five customizable thumbnail views.  In small, large, and custom views, the thumbnails are displayed much like the icon display for files in Windows Explorer.  The following is an example of the large thumbnail view.  The thumbnail view caption bar allows dynamically setting of the displayed thumbnail size percentage and thumbnail caption font.  In addition to the actual thumbnail, ThumbsPlus can optionally display other indicators (decorations).  These decorations indicate information regarding to file state, file contents, short cut links, etc.  For more information see: thumbnail decorations.

You can right-click on the thumbnail view caption bar, and the thumbnail view popup menu will be displayed.  Through this menu, you can select which view to display and its orientation.   You can also specify how to sort, what to display for each file, and which file types to display. Finally, you can select other thumbnail view related options, by clicking on this menu's Preferences option
You may also configure the thumbnail views small, large, and custom to not display a thumbnail.  When you do this the thumbnail display looks similar to Windows Explorer List View.  One big difference between this "no Thumbnail" view and Windows Explorer is that when hovering over an image with a thumbnail, ThumbsPlus will display an image tip for the image. Image tips can be disabled by checking the Disable popup image tips on the Preferences tab.


Main Window Menu

File 	Edit 	Tree 	Image 	Thumbnail 	Options 	Window 	Help

Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

The File menu group contains menu selections for operating on files as a whole.  Some of the functions available are:

View/Edit, Copy, Move, Rename, Delete, Volumes, Tasks, Properties, etc.

The Edit menu group contains menu selections for operating files selected in the thumbnail view. The functions available are:

Copy (to the clipboard), Paste (from the clipboard), Select All, and Clear All.

The Tree menu group contains menu selections for operating on folders in the folder tree.  Some of the function available are:

Collapse All, Refresh Tree, Create Folder, Delete Folder, etc.

The Image menu group contains menu selections for operating on the type and appearance of image files.  Some of the functions available are:

Convert to..., Turn functions, Flip functions, Slide Show, Wallpaper, Twain Acquire, etc.

The Thumbnail menu group contains menu selections for making and removing database thumbnails.  Some of the functions available are:

Make and Scan functions, Remove functions and  Annotate, etc.

The Options menu group contains menu selections for view window options.  Some of the functions available are:

Full Screen, Autosize, Zoom, Wallpaper, Toolbar Settings, Preferences, etc.

The Options menu group contains menu selections for all program settings.  Some of the functions available are:

Preferences, Viewing options, Display (thumbnail view), Sort by (thumbnail view order), Which Files (to display), etc.

The Help menu group contains menu selections for help options.  Some of the functions available are:

Contents, What's This, Search, Cerious web site, and the About box.


Keyboard - Main Window

TAB - Switch between the folder tree, thumbnail view and tasks & preview window.

You may type the first letter of a folder or file name to jump to the first name in the folder tree or thumbnail view (beyond the current position) with that name. In the folder tree, continue pressing the same letter to jump to other folders beginning with that letter.  In the thumbnail view, continue typing additional characters to narrow down the search to a file name.

See also: Selecting Files for more information on the keyboard interface for selecting files.

Menu accelerator keystrokes:

F1	Help | Contents

F2	File | Rename...

F3	Thumbnail | Make Selected

F4	Window | Show All Views

F5	Window | Refresh Thumbnails

F7	Image | Wallpaper | Centered

F8	Image | Slide Show

F9	Options | Preferences...

F12	Image | Batch Process...

Tab, Shift+Tab	Tabs and backtabs between the folder tree, thumbnail view and the tasks, preview, and info tabs.

Enter	File | View

Delete	File | Delete

Pause	Pauses & continues a slide show

*	Tree - Expand Branch (keyboard only)

/	Tree | Collapse to Path

+	Tree - Expand Selected (keyboard only)

-	Tree | Collapse Selected (keyboard only)

Alt+0	Options | Sort By | Similarity

Alt+1	Options | Sort By | Name

Alt+2	Options | Sort By | Numeric Name

Alt+3	Options | Sort By | Type

Alt+4	Options | Sort By | File Size

Alt+5	Options | Sort By | Date

Alt+6	Options | Sort By | Width

Alt+7	Options | Sort By | Height

Alt+8	Options | Sort By | Orientation

Alt+9	Options | Sort By | Dimensions

Alt+Y	Thumbnail Popup Menu | Configure Type...

Alt+,	Edit | Tag Selected

Alt+F3	Thumbnail | Scan System

Alt+F4	File | Exit

Alt+F8	Image | Slide Show with Options (keyboard only)

Alt+F9	Image | Web Page Wizard...

Alt+Enter	File | Properties...

Alt+Delete	Tree | Delete Folder

Alt+Home	Edit | Go to Start of Selection

Alt+End	Edit | Go to End of Selection

Alt+Backspace	Options | Sort By | Descending

Alt+Left  Arrow	Tree | Back

Alt+Right Arrow	Tree | Forward

Ctrl+1	Options | Display | Small View

Ctrl+2	Options | Display | Large View

Ctrl+3	Options | Display | Custom View

Ctrl+4	Options | Display | List View

Ctrl+5	Options | Display | Report View

Ctrl+A	Edit | Select All

Ctrl+C	Edit | Copy

Ctrl+E	Thumbnail | Annotate...

Ctrl+F	Edit | Find by Query...

Ctrl+G	Options | File Loading...

Ctrl+I	File | Edit IPTC Info...

Ctrl+J	Options | Viewing...

Ctrl+K	Thumbnail | Assign Keywords | Other...

Ctrl+M	File | Send to...

Ctrl+N	File | New Database...

Ctrl+O	File | Database | Open Database...

Ctrl+P	File | Print...

Ctrl+Q	Options | Customize...

Ctrl+R	Tree | Add to Favorites...

Ctrl+T	File | Database | Statistics...

Ctrl+U	Thumbnail | Assign User Fields...

Ctrl+V	Edit | Paste

Ctrl+W	Image | TWAIN Acquire

Ctrl+Y	Options | Main Font...

Ctrl+F1	Help | Search for Help on...

Ctrl+F2	File | Copy...

Ctrl+F3	Thumbnail | Scan Disk

Ctrl+F4	Window | Minimize All Views

Ctrl+F5	Tree | Refresh Tree

Ctrl+F6	File | Remove Font

Ctrl+F7	Image | Wallpaper | Remove

Ctrl+Enter	File | View (Full screen)

Ctrl+Delete	Thumbnail | Remove | Orphans

Ctrl+-	Tree | Collapse All

Ctrl+Num 2	Image | Quick Process | Turn 180°

Ctrl+Num 4	Image | Quick Process | Turn 90° CCW

Ctrl+Num 6	Image | Quick Process | Turn 90° CW

Ctrl+Alt+0	Options | Sort By | Unsorted

Ctrl+Alt+1	Options | Sort By | Path

Ctrl+Alt+7	Options | Sort By | Thumbnails First

Ctrl+Alt+8	Options | Sort By | Thumbnails Last

Ctrl+Alt+9	Options | Sort By | Advanced...

Ctrl+Alt+C	Edit | Copy Thumbnail

Ctrl+Alt+H	Options | Display | Arrange Horizontal

Ctrl+Alt+I	File | Volumes | Properties...

Ctrl+Alt+K	Edit | Copy Keywords

Ctrl+Alt+N	Window | Open New Window

Ctrl+Alt+V	Options | Display | Arrange Vertical

Ctrl+Alt+Left	Image | Quick Process | Turn 90° CCW

Ctrl+Alt+Right	Image | Quick Process | Turn 90° CW

Ctrl+Alt+Down	Image | Quick Process | Turn 180°

Ctrl+Shift+1	Options | Show for Files | Thumbnail

Ctrl+Shift+2	Options | Show for Files | Name

Ctrl+Shift+3	Options | Show for Files | File Size

Ctrl+Shift+4	Options | Show for Files | Date/Time

Ctrl+Shift+5	Options | Show for Files | Dimensions

Ctrl+Shift+6	Options | Show for Files | Resolution

Ctrl+Shift+7	Options | Show for Files | Keywords

Ctrl+Shift+8	Options | Show for Files | Annotation

Ctrl+Shift+A	Edit | Clear All

Ctrl+Shift+B	Window | Toolbar

Ctrl+Shift+C	Edit | Auto Clip Save

Ctrl+Shift+D	File | Database | Edit Keywords...

Ctrl+Shift+E	File | Database | Connect...

Ctrl+Shift+F	Edit | Find Similar Images...

Ctrl+Shift+G	Tree | Watch Folders...

Ctrl+Shift+H	Options | Which Files | Hidden

Ctrl+Shift+I	Tree | Indicate Thumbnails

Ctrl+Shift+J	Tree | Just Thumb Folders

Ctrl+Shift+K	Options | Which Files | By Mask...

Ctrl+Shift+L	Window | Status Line

Ctrl+Shift+M	Edit | Select Mask...

Ctrl+Shift+N	Options | Which Files | Child Folders

Ctrl+Shift+O	Tree | Indicate Expandable

Ctrl+Shift+Q	Image | Quick Process | Modify File Info

Ctrl+Shift+R	Tree | Edit Favorites...

Ctrl+Shift+S	Options | Which Files | Selected Types

Ctrl+Shift+T	Image | Common Palette...

Ctrl+Shift+U	File | Database | User Fields...

Ctrl+Shift+V	Edit | Invert Selection

Ctrl+Shift+W	Image | TWAIN Multiple Acquire

Ctrl+Shift+X	Thumbnail | Export...

Ctrl+Shift+Y	Options | Save Startup Options

Ctrl+Shift+Z	Tree | Zip Files as Folders

Ctrl+Shift+F2	Tree | Create Folder...

Ctrl+Shift+F3	Thumbnail | Scan Tree

Ctrl+Shift+F5	Tree | Copy Folder...

Ctrl+Shift+F6	Tree | Delete Folder

Ctrl+Shift+F7	Image | Wallpaper | Stretched

Ctrl+Shift+F9	Image | Contact Sheets...

Ctrl+Shift+F12	Window | Synch Views

Ctrl+Shift+Delete	Thumbnail | Remove | In Tree

Ctrl+Shift+Alt+E	Help | System Information - Generate & E-Mail Tech Support Info

Shift+F2	File | Move...

Shift+F4	Window | Close All Views

Shift+F5	Tree | Rename Folder...

Shift+F6	File | Install Font

Shift+F7	Image | Wallpaper | Tiled

Shift+F8	File | View Synched

Shift+F9	Image | Print Catalog...

Shift+F12	Window | Tile Views

Shift+Enter	File | Edit

Shift+Delete	Thumbnail | Remove | Selected

Shift+Alt+1	Options | Show for Files | Path

Shift+Alt+C	Edit | Copy File Name

Shift+Alt+K	Thumbnail | Assign Keywords | Regenerate

Shift+Alt+F2	File | Auto Rename...

Shift+Alt+F3	Thumbnail | Scan Folder

Shift+Alt+F5	Tree | Move Folder...

Shift+Alt+F7	Image | Wallpaper | Fully Stretched


Toolbar

This is the default toolbar supplied with ThumbsPlus. You may customize the toolbar to your taste using Options | Customize - Toolbar.

Click on any button below to see a description of its action


View Window Menus

File 	Edit 	Image 	Transform	View 	Help
Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

The File menu group contains menu selections for operating on the file as a whole.  Some of the functions available are:

Save, Save As, Upload, Copy, Move, Rename, Delete,  Annotate, etc.

The Edit menu group contains menu selections for operating on the file contents.  Some of the functions available are:

Select, Copy (to the clipboard), Paste (from the clipboard), Undo, Revert to Saved, etc.

The Image and Transform menu groups contain menu selections for operating on the appearance of the file.  Some of the functions available are:

Adjust (color adjustment), Rotate, Resize, Turn & Mirror, Filter (sharpen, blur, effects, etc), Process (image enhancement), Trim to Size, Remove Red Eye Crop, etc.

The View menu group contains menu selections for view window options.  Some of the functions available are:

Full Screen, Autosize, Zoom, Wallpaper, Toolbar Settings, Preferences, Customize, etc.

The Help menu group contains menu selections for help options.  Some of the functions available are:

Contents, What's This, Search, Cerious web site, and the About box.


Mouse - View Window

Here are the various clicks, control-clicks, and drags that you can perform in a view window:

Button	Key	Operation	Description
Left		Drag	Select an area of the image.
Left	SHIFT	Drag	Select an area from the center outward.
Left	CTRL	Drag	Pan (scroll by dragging the image in the window).
Left	ALT	Drag	Make a freehand selection.
Left		Double-click	Toggle full screen mode.
Right		Click	Show the menu (full-screen only)
Right		Drag	Pan (scroll by dragging the image in the window).
Right		Double-click	Close the image.
Middle		Click	Close the image


Windows Display Drivers

ThumbsPlus works best with highcolor (15 or 16 bit) and truecolor (24 bit) color, but also works well in 256-color (8 bit) modes. You should select an appropriate driver for your display adapter using the Control Panel.

Click here to set up your display drivers using the Control Panel.

Several different color depths and screen resolutions may be available; here is some information on the possible choices:

Four different color depths are generally considered "Super VGA;" these are:

256-color (8 bits required per pixel)

This provides the minimum number of colors to display a single color graphic; multiple graphics must usually share some colors, so quality is sacrificed on all but the "top most" window. 24-bit graphics must be pre-processed before display to achieve reasonable color; ThumbsPlus uses a fast "quick-dither" to the thumbnail palette. This is indicated by a [Q8] appended to the file name in the view window title bar.

32768-color (16 bits required per pixel)

This mode divides the 16 bits into 5 red, 5 green and 5 blue pixels. One pixel is not used. This provides much better viewing capability than the 256-color mode, but requires more video memory. You can simultaneously view multiple 256-color graphic files. Truecolor (24-bit) files will suffer some loss in quality (because nine bits of each pixel are ignored), and may be somewhat slower to display because the display driver has to "map" the colors.

65536-color (16 bits required per pixel)

This mode provides similar capability to the 32768-color mode, with (very) slightly better results. The extra (16th) bit is usually used for green.

16-million color (24 bits required per pixel)

Eight bits are used for each color (red, green, blue). This provides true color viewing -- no color information is lost from 24-bit images, and as many as desired may be viewed simultaneously. This is the most accurate color mode, but generally slower than 256-color mode.

Your video card may be capable of several different color depths and several different resolutions. Here is a table showing the minimum amount of video memory required for most popular color resolutions for each color depth, rounded up to 512Kb (Kilobytes) increments. Note that video memory is separate from system memory -- it's on the video card itself, and not usable for programs or data.

	256 (8-bit)	32768/65536 (Hicolor)	16.7 Million (Truecolor)
640x480	512Kb	1Mb	1.5Mb
800x600	512Kb	1Mb	2Mb
1024x768	1Mb	2Mb	2.5Mb
1280x1024	1.5Mb	3Mb	4Mb
1600x1200	2Mb	4Mb	6Mb
Video cards with less than 512K of memory are not capable of running Windows with more than 16 colors.

Your monitor must also be capable of displaying the required vertical and horizontal resolution.

Using higher color depths also requires more system memory, as bitmaps are often stored in system memory at the color depth (bits per pixel) required for the current display.


DDE Commands

ThumbsPlus will respond to the following DDE commands, each of which is covered in detail more detail:

Acquire	Get Image via TWAIN Acquire.
Close	Close a view window.
Convert	Convert selected files to another supported output file format.
CopyClipboard	Copy an image or metafile to the clipboard
Exit	Exit the program
Find	Find files by assigned keyword
Keyword	Assign/remove keywords from files
LocateFile	Locate and select a file or set of files (by mask)
MakeThumb	Make a thumbnail for a file or for currently selected files
Open	Open a file and show it in a view window
OpenDB	Open a specific ThumbsPlus database
OpenDir	Position the folder tree in a specific folder
Print	Print a file
RefreshTree	Rereads the folder tree
RemoveThumb	Remove thumbnail from selected files
RemoveTree	Remove thumbnails from a folder tree
ScanTree	Scan a folder tree and create thumbnails
ShowFiles	Set (or clear) the file name mask used in the thumbnail view.
ShowWindow	Show or hide main TuhmbsPlus window.
SlideShow	Start a slide show
BatchProcess	Perform a predefined batch process on a set of files.
WebPages	Runs the Web Page Wizard with a saved scheme.
UpdateDir	Update all thumbnails in a specific folder or the current folder.
Note: Many commands accept a file or folder name as a parameter. You may enclose the name in quotes if you wish, but this is not required. When the filename parameter is optional for a command, it is shown in blue. You should always use the complete path to the file.

If you use a UNC name (i.e., \\PHILLIP\C\TEMP) for OpenDir or LocateFile, ThumbsPlus will automatically map a drive letter for you.


ThumbsPlus Error Messages

Code	Message	Description
5000	A fatal exception error (<except_code> at <except_address>) has occurred in ThumbsPlus or a Windows system component. Details have been written to the log file: <log_filename>	A program exception occurred in the main ThumbsPlus process. This is most likely the result of a program bug. This type of exception will cause ThumbsPlus to terminate. You will need to restart ThumbsPlus. You can generate (and e-mail to Cerious Software: support@cerious.com) a technical support log, which includes detailed information about this error, by running ThumbsPlus again and pressing Ctrl+Alt+Shift+E.
5001	Out of memory!	ThumbsPlus was unable to allocate the amount of memory required to do the function you selected. There are several things you can do to make more memory available: • Close (rather than minimize) any applications that you aren't using. • Close any ThumbsPlus view windows which are open. • You can increase the amount of virtual memory that is available for programs under Windows.  Please refer to your Windows documentation or the on-line help for information. If all else fails, you can buy more memory!  If the problem seems unrelated to actual memory usage on your machine, please report it to Cerious Software technical support.
5002	Error creating child window!	ThumbsPlus failed during initialization or re-initialization to create a necessary window (i.e., the thumbnail view, the folder tree, the toolbar, etc). This is a fatal error. ThumbsPlus will exit. The only known causes are insufficient or corrupted memory. Restart Windows and try again.
5003	Error creating dialog box!	ThumbsPlus could not create a dialog box for the selected function. Possible reasons for this error are: The Windows system is hosed and needs to be restarted. Memory or resources are very low, so Windows should be restarted. The executable file: THUMBS.EXE is corrupt and needs to be reinstalled after running SCANDISK.
5004	Error registering window class for toolbar!	ThumbsPlus could not create the toolbar. Your system may be low on memory or resources. Restart Windows and try again.
5005	Error registering thumbnail view control: TPVIEW.OCX!	ThumbsPlus cannot register its thumbnail view control for use in displaying thumbnails. See error 5003 for possible reasons and solutions.
5006	Error loading keyboard accelerators.	This error is reported during startup if ThumbsPlus cannot access the keyboard accelerator tables in the resource. THUMBS.EXE is most likely damaged, or your system is very low on memory (see error [5001]).
5007	Error loading resource id: <resource_id>.	Many of the tables, icons, bitmaps, cursors, strings and other information required during running ThumbsPlus are stored in the THUMBS.EXE file as resources. ThumbsPlus could not locate one it expected to be there. Most likely, the THUMBS.EXE file is damaged. Reinstall and try again.
5008	System resource levels are low. You may wish to exit some application(s) or restart Windows.	ThumbsPlus periodically checks system resource levels and will warn you if they become to low to continue processing. It warns you if free GDI or USER space drops below 20%, or if the largest available memory block is less than 4K.
5010	Error allocating Windows device context. There may not be enough available GDI resource space.	ThumbsPlus could not allocate a Windows device context (used for rendering bitmap graphics). Possible reasons for this error are: • The Windows system is hosed and needs to be restarted. • Resources are very low, so Windows should be restarted.
5011	Error allocating Windows bitmap. There may not be enough available GDI resource space, or memory may be low.	See errors 5003 and 5010 for possible reasons and solutions.
5012	Error creating metafile. There may not be enough available GDI resource space, or memory may be low.	See errors 5003 and 5010 for possible reasons and solutions.
5013	Common dialog error: <error_code>.	ThumbsPlus received an unexpected error from a Windows common dialog. The reported error code may be useful for diagnosing the problem by Cerious Software .
5014	Memory heap corruption: <heap_name>.	The referenced memory heap has been corrupted, either by a bug in the program or a problem with an external library. Please report this error to Cerious Software. You may want to exit and restart ThumbsPlus.
5015	Database error: <error_message>.	An error occurred in a database operation. The "error_message" text will contain more detailed information about the specific database error.  If you are connected to a local database (.TD4 database file), you may need to repair your database using the File | Database | Repair menu selection. This error text will be useful for diagnosing the problem by Cerious Software.
5016	Internal error: Attempt to free an image structure already on free list.	This error should not occur  Please report it to Cerious Software. You should exit and restart ThumbsPlus, as its internal image structure lists are no longer valid.
5017	An exception <except_code> occurred attempting to identify <filename> as <type>.	A program exception occurred while trying to load the specified file for file type identification. This can be caused by invalid file data in certain file types.  This type of exception will not cause ThumbsPlus to terminate. See error 5000 for information on how to report this error to Cerious Software.
5018	An exception <except_code> occurred attempting to load <filename> as <type>.	A program exception occurred while trying to load the specified file for display or thumbnailing. This can be caused by invalid file data in certain file types.  This type of exception will not cause ThumbsPlus to terminate. See error 5000 for information on how to report this error to Cerious Software.
5019	The background task failed with exception <except_code>. Details have been written to the exception log.	A program exception occurred in a background task. This is most likely the result of a program bug.  This type of exception will not cause ThumbsPlus to terminate. See error 5000 for information on how to report this error to Cerious Software.
5020	Available image memory restricted total open images to <count>.	In the Viewing Options dialog box, you specified a maximum number of open images (view windows) larger than could be accommodated by your available system memory. Select a lower number to avoid this message. Also, if you receive this message, you are probably running low on memory. The only memory ThumbsPlus attempts to allocate is memory needed for control information; no actual image memory has been allocated, so as soon as you try to operate on some file, you'll most likely get an 5001 Out of Memory error.
5021	Unable to create palette for gamma test.	.ThumbsPlus could not create a color palette for determining the proper gamma for your monitor. Be sure you're running a video mode with at least 256 colors, and that there is enough memory and free system resources.
5022	Cannot execute command <command>.	ThumbsPlus could not execute the command (most likely specified in the File Type Configuration dialog box). Check the command for syntax, and be sure that the program specified is either in a folder specified by the current PATH environment variable, or that the complete path is specified in the command line.
5023	Error accessing clipboard.	When ThumbsPlus attempted to open the clipboard (to copy or paste), another application had opened it without closing it. You may want to close other applications to see if you can find the faulty one -- applications should not keep the clipboard open. If you cannot determine which application has locked the clipboard, restart Windows and try again.
5024	Unable to copy <filename> to the clipboard (no metafile or bitmap contents).	To copy a file to the clipboard, ThumbsPlus must be able to load it as a graphic (metafile or bitmap). Some types that cannot be copied to the clipboard are: • Movies • Sounds • Executables • Other
5025	The clipboard does not contain a palette to paste.	If the current palette selection in the Color Depth dialog is "Paste from clipboard," there must be a palette (or an image with a palette) on the clipboard to use.
5026	Unable to register ThumbsPlus shell extensions.	ThumbsPlus was not able to write the registry keys necessary to enable its shell extension functions. Make sure that you have enough space on the disk containing the registry database (Windows system folder).  Also if running under Windows NT, make sure that your maximum registry size is less than the current size, by going to Control Panel - System, click on the Performance tab and then the Change button.  The registry size option is located at the bottom of the Virtual Memory dialog.
5027	Unable to find and edit linear filter: <filter_name>.	ThumbsPlus was not able to locate a selected linear filter (in its internal filter table) for editting. Your system may be very low on memory (see error 5001) and need to be restarted.
5028	Only linear filters may be editted.	You may adjust the convolution mask only for linear filters. Other types (statistical, noise, and multi-pass) are defined internally. You may create or modify multi-pass filters by editing the THUMBS.FLT file.
5029	<filename>: Unable to allocate enough memory to filter image.	ThumbsPlus cannot allocate enough memory for the filter buffer. See error 5001 for information on increasing the amount of memory available to ThumbsPlus.
5030	This image is too wide to be filtered. The maximum width is approximately 9000 pixels (for grayscale images), or 3000 pixels (for color images).	ThumbsPlus cannot currently filter images larger than this. This restriction will be removed in a future release.
5031	The mask defined for <filter_name> is all zeros.	An all-zero filter mask would produce simply an all-black image.
5032	ThumbsPlus could not find any duplicate or similar images matching your criteria.	The find similar images function wsa unable to locate any similar or duplicate image files based on the settings that you specified.  Either pick another source image for the search or change the matching criteria on the Find Similar Images dialog.
5033	Unable to find any files in your selection to process for <function_name>.	The current folder or sub-folders do not contain any files that ThumbsPlus could process for the contact sheet or catalog. Make sure that you've selected the correct folder, and that the desired file types are selected (see Options | Preferences - File Types).
5034	No files could be loaded for the slide show, or all loadable files were too small.	None of the files selected were capable of being shown. The files were either not recognized or not viewable, or were smaller than the minimum dimensions specified in the Slide Show Options dialog box.
5035	No files selected, or unable to extract color information from selected files.	While trying to create a common palette, ThumbsPlus either found no files to process or was unable to load color information for the selected files.
5036	<batchset_filename>: Invalid batch set file.	While either selecting an batch set name from the "Set Name" dropdown list (on the Batch Process | Set Information dialog) or attempting to execute a batch process on a group of files, ThumbsPlus determined that the content of the batch set file is not validand has become corrupted. Run SCANDISK on the drive that contains the batch set file and then recreate and save the batch set.
5037	The set name field is empty.  Please specify a name for the set.	In order to save a batch set, you must supply a batch set name in the "Set Name" field (on the Batch Process | Set Information dialog).
5038	The set name entered is invalid.  Please enter a different set name.	In order to save a batch set, you must supply a valid batch set name in the "Set Name" field (on the Batch Process | Set Information dialog).
5039	The scheme name field is empty.  Please enter a name for this scheme.	In order to save a webpage, contact sheet or catalog scheme, you must supply a valid scheme name in the "Scheme" field.
5040	<filename>: File not cropped - nothing would be left.	When cropping an image by value (see Image | Crop / Add Borders) horizontal and vertical amounts were entered that were greater than or equal to the dimensions of the image to be cropped.  Cropping with these values would result in a 0 x 0 image and therefore is not allowed.
5041	The thumbnails in the import file are larger than the current database.  The imported thumbnails will be cropped to fit the current database size.	When importing thumbnails into ThumbsPlus, if the imported thumbnail dimensions are larger than those of the destination database, they will be cropped to fit the destination database's thumbnail dimensions.
5042	<filename>: Cannot process file (must be raster or vector).	In batch processing, ThumbsPlus will report this error if the file in question is not a raster or vector (metafile) type.
5043	ThumbsPlus cannot delete the Windows or System folder.	ThumbsPlus is designed to detect and disallow deletion of the Windows and Windows\System folders.   If you really want to trash your system, try restarting in MS-DOS mode and delete the folder(s) from the command line.
5044	Cannot detect a Digimarc® watermark in the image.	The image does not contain an embedded Digimarc® watermark.
5045	<filename>: Cannot watermark file with insufficient color information (needs to be 8-bit grayscale or 24-bit color).	The Digimarc® watermarking algorithm redundantly encodes the digital watermark id within the image pixel data itself.  Files with color depths or 256 color or less do not contain enough color information for this encoding process.
5046	<filename>: Image already contains a watermark.	A Digimarc® watermark already exists in the specified file.  ThumbsPlus cannot embed more than one watermark in an image file.
5047	<filename>: Cannot watermark using invalid Digimarc® ID.	The Digimarc® ID entered on the Digimarc® ID dialog box is not valid.  Click the Register button on this dialog to go to Digimarc's web site and obtain a new Digimarc® ID.
5048	<filename>: Cannot watermark using invalid image or transaction ID. Please specify a number between 0 and 16,777,215.	The image or transaction ID entered on the Embed Watermark dialog box is not valid. Enter a valid value for the field in error and retry.
5049	<filename>: Cannot watermark with invalid copyright year(s). The years must be between 1922 and the present year. If you enter both years, the second year must be later than the first.	The copyright years entered on the Embed Watermark dialog box are not valid. Enter a valid value for the field in error and retry.
5050	<filename>: Unable to retrieve watermark after embedding.  The image may be too small to watermark.	Most likely the image dimensions were less than the required 256 x 256 dimensions.  The Digimarc® watermarking algorithm will not be able to embed a watermark in an image with width and height less than the minimum stated above. See also warning message 6016.
5051	<filename>: Cannot watermark - unexpected watermarking error (<watermark_error>).	An unexpected error occurred while trying to embed the watermark.  The error code given after the message will assist Cerious Software in diagnosing the problem.
5052	Cannot tile that many windows on your screen(s).	ThumbsPlus was unable to either synchronize or tile all of the selected files or open view windows. Eiter select fewer files or close some of the open view windows and try again.
5053	A background task is already making thumbnails for <foldername>.	An attempt was made to start a thumbnail scan on the selected disk or folder while a thumbnail scan task was already running in the selected area. Either quit the task (Image | Tasks | Quit Task) OR let the task complete before attempting to start another scan in the same area.
5054	Unable to create process to read version 3 database.	An error was encountered while trying to execute the external process which reads an existing ThumbsPlus version 3.x database and outputs thumbnail records for export. An additional OS error code will be reported after the ThumbsPlus error code.  Cerious Software technical support will need this OS error code to diagnose the problem.
5055	Unable to create communication pipe for version 3 database conversion process.	An error was encountered while trying to create a communication pipe. This pipe is used for reading (as import data) the export output generated by the external version 3.x export process. An additional OS error code will be reported after the ThumbsPlus error code.  Cerious Software technical support will need this OS error code to diagnose the problem.
5056	Unable to open communication pipe to version 3 database conversion process.	An error was encountered while trying to open the newly created import communication pipe. This pipe is used for reading (as import data) the export output generated by the external version 3.x export process. An additional OS error code will be reported after the ThumbsPlus error code.  Cerious Software technical support will need this OS error code to diagnose the problem.
5057	Conversion process read pipe error:  <message>.	An error was encountered while reading import data from the import communication pipe. This pipe is used for reading (as import data) the export output generated by the external version 3.x export process. An additional OS error code and read buffer message will be reported after the ThumbsPlus error code.  Cerious Software technical support will need this additional information to diagnose the problem.
5058	ThumbsPlus could not replace the original database <filename> with the temporary compacted copy.	An error occurred while trying to copy the temporary compacted database file to the original database filename. An additional OS error code will be reported after the ThumbsPlus error code.  Cerious Software technical support will need this additional code to diagnose the problem.
5059	ThumbsPlus cannot watch the folder <foldername>. This may be because: - The folder does not exist - The folder is on an unsupported volume (network, CDROM, or floppy) - The folder is on a read-only volume.	An error was encountered while trying to watch a folder for changes.  Make sure that the folder exists and is not on a readonly or network volume.
5060	ODBC tracing could not be disabled. Please ensure you have the proper administrative privileges and disable using the ODBC32 Control Panel.	ThumsPlus could not update the ODBC Trace registry value. If you are running under Windows NT, log on as Administrator and open ODBC under Control Panel to change the tracing option.
5061	The credit card number is invalid. Please enter a valid Visa or Mastercard number before printing.	Verify your credit card number and re-enter.
5062	The credit card expiration date is invalid. Please enter the date in the form MMYY; for example, 0797.	Verify your credit card expiration date and re-enter.
5063	No product license specified on order. Please select a license before printing.	Use the "License" drop-down to select the type of license you want to order.
5064	In the evaluation version of ThumbsPlus, you may only save 2 schemes for each function. Please reuse another scheme name.	ThumbsPlus is designed to allow you to evaluate all of its functionality before purchasing.  However, certain functions have been slightly restricted inorder to encourage user registration after the trial period has expired.
5065	In the evaluation version of ThumbsPlus, you may save only 2 batch sets. Please reuse another batch set name.	For more information, see error 5064.
5066	In the evaluation version of ThumbsPlus, you may only create 2 galleries. Please remove or reuse an existing gallery.	For more information, see error 5064.
5067	In the evaluation version of ThumbsPlus, you may only create 2 found file lists. Please remove or reuse an existing found file list.	For more information, see error 5064.
5068	This BETA version of ThumbsPlus will expire on <expiration_date>.	New versions of ThumbsPlus are submitted for review and testing to a group of experienced ThumbsPlus users prior to actual product release.  Each BETA (test) version is built with an internal expiration date.  This date is there to insure that our testers are running (and reporting bugs on) the most recent BETA version of the software. This error message will only display in BETA versions that are run after 15 days prior to the expiration date.
5069	This BETA release of ThumbsPlus has expired. Please obtain the released version from Cerious Software (http://www.cerious.com).	This error message will only display in BETA versions that are run on or after the expiration date. For more information, see error 5068.
5070	ThumbsPlus cannot be run from a network after the trial period has expired.	You must purchase a site or concurrent use license to run ThumbsPlus on a network. for information regarding site and concurrent license pricing, please see our web page at: http://www.cerious.com/ordering.htm#site_licenses.
5071	Warning: the ThumbsPlus trial period has expired. After a fifteen day grace period, you will not be able to run from a network.	For more information, see error 5070.
5072	No network license installed. Please run ThumbsPlus from a local disk.	Neither the executable (THUMBS.EXE) or the database (THUMBS.TD4) may be located on a network unless you have installed a site or concurrent usage license. For more information, see error 5070.
5073	Please enter a number between <min_number> and <max_number>.	The current field requires a number between the specified values. When you click OK, ThumbsPlus will position the cursor and set focus to the control with the invalid entry.
5074	Invalid path entered.	You have entered an invalid folder path or file name for your operating system. For DOS, the rules are: Each folder name must be a valid file name. Directory names are separated by backslashes (\). File names are 8 characters with a 3 character extension, separated by a period. There can be only one period. The following are not valid in file names or extensions: control characters space / slash \ backslash : colon ; semi-colon * asterisk [] square brackets ? question mark | vertical bar (pipe) % percent  Lower case and upper case letters are considered equivalent. Multinational characters may also be used.
5075	You must enter a value in this field.	The field in the dialog box requires a value. The field in error will receive the input focus (caret cursor) after you click OK.
5076	The file extension entered is already defined.	This error is reported if you attempt to use the New button from Options - File Types to define a file type and enter an extension that is already configured. Either enter a unique file extension that is not already configured OR select the desired file extension in the types list and double-click it (or click Modify) to change its configuration.
5077	<filename>: Cannot convert type <filetype> to format suitable for wallpapering.	Windows can only wallpaper with bitmap (.BMP) files. ThumbsPlus converts any other metafile or raster types to the BMP type (a temporary file) before installing as wallpaper. Some file types that ThumbsPlus handles, such as Sounds, do not make sense as wallpaper. Other types, such as fonts and movies, are wallpapered using the thumbnail.
5078	<filename>: Unable to obtain image from file for wallpaper bitmap.	ThumbsPlus determined that the file type for this file should be a valid source for creating a Windows wallpaper bitmap.  However, after loading the file, the necessary metafile or raster image data was not found.
5079	The Width and Height must be a value less than <value>, or a percentage less than <percent>%.	Enter a non-zero value for the width and height. Use '%' to enter percentages; i.e., 50%.
5080	Invalid color depth <value> requested.	ThumbsPlus can modify files to 1-bit (bi-level), 4-bit (up to 16 colors), 8-bit (up to 256 colors), or Truecolor. The most likely cause of this message is manually editing the .INI file and specifying an invalid color depth.
5081	ThumbsCD could not locate the CD-ROM Registration file (ThumbsCD.Reg). If you have installed ThumbsCD on a local disk, please be sure that you copied the registration file as well.	ThumbsCD requires the THUMBSCD.REG file be located in the same folder as the THUMBS.TDB file. If you've copied this file from your CD-ROM to the hard disk (to improve performance, or to see the thumbnails without having to insert the CD-ROM), you must copy the THUMBSCD.REG file to the same folder.
5082	Due to licensing restrictions by Unisys, this version of ThumbsCD cannot support GIF or LZW TIFF files.	For more information, see GIF and TIFF file types.
5083	The CD-ROM Registration File contains an invalid code.
5084	ThumbsCD could not locate a CD-ROM drive containing a ThumbsCD Database. Please insert the CD-ROM titled <volume_label>.
5085	You cannot run ThumbsPlus directly from a CD-ROM. For information on the ThumbsCD Developer's Kit, please contact Cerious Software, Inc.	In order to produce CD-ROMs containing ThumbsPlus, a ThumbsPlus database, and supporting image files that can be browsed by running ThumbsPlus from the CD-ROM, you must use the ThumbsPlus companion product ThumbsCD Developer's Kit. For more information about ThumbsCD, please visit our ThumbsCD web page at: http://www.cerious.com/cdk.htm
5086	Please insert the disk containing <pathname> in drive <drive_letter>.	ThumbsPlus requires the disk that has the specified file name. This message is usually generated if the specified file <pathname> is on removable media and the disk is inserted. Also, if the file is on a network drive and the drive becomes unavailable, you may see this message.
5087	The label <label> is already in use on drive <drive_letter>. Please enter a unique label.	When ThumbsPlus starts up it checks your system for any missing or duplicated volume labels on your local disk drives.  If it finds any drives that are either missing a volume label or have a volume label already assigned to another drive, it will prompt you to enter a new label for the drive in question. This error will be displayed if you try to assign a volume label that already exists on a different drive.
5088	Unable to write disk label to drive %c:.	ThumbsPlus could not write the disk label. Note that ThumbsPlus cannot label: • CD-ROM drives. • Write-protected diskettes. • Network volumes
5089	Cannot access disk %c:.	ThumbsPlus could not access the specified disk drive. Be sure the disk is valid, formatted, and inserted.
5090	Volume <volume_name> is not accessible; orphans cannot be checked or thumbnails made.	This error message will be displayed during a database import operation if either "Make new thumbnails images" or "Skip orphans" is checked on the import dialog box AND the volume on which the imported thumbnail was made cannot be accessed to obtain volume matching information (see File | Database | Import). Volumes that may cause this problem are: • CD-ROM drives without the CD-ROM inserted. • Network volumes that are no longer connected
5100	<folder_name>: Cannot create folder.	ThumbsPlus could not create the folder (folder). Some things that may cause this error are: • The folder name is invalid. • The disk is read-only or write-protected. • The disk is full. • The network drive is no longer available. • The folder is locked by another application on your system, or by another system on the network. • You don't have sufficient permission to create folders in the folder on the network drive. • The file information on disk is invalid; run SCANDISK or CHKDSK to validate file and folder allocations. An additional OS error code will be reported after the ThumbsPlus error code.  Cerious Software technical support will need this OS error code to diagnose the problem.
5101	<foldername>: Cannot remove folder.	ThumbsPlus could not remove the folder (folder).  An additional OS error code will be reported after the ThumbsPlus error code.  Cerious Software technical support will need this OS error code to diagnose the problem.
5102	<foldername>: Cannot move folder (destination folder already exists).	ThumbsPlus could not move the folder (folder) because the destination folder already exists.
5103	<src_foldername>: Cannot copy folder to <dest_foldername>.	ThumbsPlus could not copy the source folder (folder) to the specified destination folder.  An additional OS error code will be reported after the ThumbsPlus error code.  Cerious Software technical support will need this OS error code to diagnose the problem.
5104	<foldername>: Cannot rename folder to <newfolder>.	ThumbsPlus could not rename the folder (folder) to the specified new folder name.  An additional OS error code will be reported after the ThumbsPlus error code.  Cerious Software technical support will need this OS error code to diagnose the problem.
5105	<foldername>: Invalid folder.	When browsing for a folder, you entered a folder specification that was not valid. Check the entry or use the browse button to select the folder.
5106	<filename>: Cannot open file.	ThumbsPlus could not open the specified file. Some probable causes for this error are: • The file no longer exists. • The network drive is no longer available. • The file is locked by another application on your system, or by another system on the network. • The file information on disk is invalid; run SCANDISK or CHKDSK to validate file and folder allocations.
5107	<filename>: Cannot create file.	ThumbsPlus could not create the specified file. Some probable causes are: • The file name is invalid, or the folder path or drive doesn't exist. • The disk is read-only or write-protected. • The disk is full. • The network drive is unavailable. • The file is locked by another application on your system, or by another system on the network. • You don't have sufficient permission to create files in the folder on the network drive. • The file information on disk is invalid; run SCANDISK or CHKDSK to validate file and folder allocations.
5108	<filename>: Cannot delete file.	ThumbsPlus was unable to remove the file. The most likely reasons are: • The file is on a read-only (CD-ROM) or write-protected disk. • The file is on a network drive and you do not have sufficient permission to remove it. • The file is open by another application on your system, or on another system on the network.  • The file doesn't exist (the thumbnail is an orphan). In this case, you may remove the thumbnail without attempting to remove the file by using the Thumbnail | Remove | Selected menu option, or Shift+Delete.
5109	<filename>: Cannot delete file after move (file was copied).	When moving a file, ThumbsPlus was unable to delete the original, so the file was copied instead. See error 5108 for possible reasons for this error.
5110	<filename>: Cannot rename file to <new_filename>.	ThumbsPlus could not rename the file. Most probable causes are: • A file already exists in the same folder with the same name. • The file is on a read-only (CD-ROM) or write-protected disk. • The file is on a network drive and you do not have sufficient permission to rename it. • The file is open by another application on your system, or on another system on the network.  • The file doesn't exist (the thumbnail is an orphan). In this case, you may remove the thumbnail by using the Thumbnail | Remove | Selected menu option from the main ThumbsPlus menu, or Shift+Delete.
5111	<filename>: Cannot copy file to <new_filename>.	ThumbsPlus could not copy the file.  An additional OS error code will be reported after the ThumbsPlus error code.  Cerious Software technical support will need this OS error code to diagnose the problem.
5112	<filename>: Error writing file.	This error occurs when ThumbsPlus gets an operating system error attempting to read the contents of a file. It is generally caused by: The disk or diskette is write protected. A network drive has become unavailable. Network permissions do not permit writing to the file. The physical disk has bad sectors. A SCANDISK with surface test is recommended. The allocation tables for the disk are invalid. A SCANDISK is recommended. On a compressed partition, the operating system may not have reported the actual amount of free space, so ThumbsPlus cannot tell before writing that the disk would fill up. ThumbsPlus could not identify the drive as read-only when it opened the file. Except for some brain-damaged network software, this is not usually a problem.
5113	<filename>: Error reading file.	This error occurs when ThumbsPlus gets an operating system error attempting to read the contents of a file. It is generally caused by: • Internal file problems (i.e., pointers past end-of-file) • Invalid disk allocation information (run SCANDISK or CHKDSK to verify the integrity of your file and folder information on the disk). • A bad disk sector. Run SCANDISK with a surface test to see if there are bad (unreadable) sectors on the disk. • Disk drive failure. • A network drive becoming unavailable.
5114	<filename>: Format error in file.	ThumbsPlus reports this error when it cannot process the contents of the file because they do not match published specifications, or because ThumbsPlus does not support the particular "flavor" of file. Sometimes ThumbsPlus will report this error for newer versions of a file type, as it no longer matches earlier specifications.
5115	<filename>: Unsupported file format.	ThumbsPlus reports this error when it finds unusual values in file information which preclude it from processing the file.  This may be because of a limitation in ThumbsPlus (for example, YCbCr TIFF files are not currently supported), or because a field in the header which ThumbsPlus depends on to decode the file has an invalid or unrecognized value.
5116	<filename>: Unrecognized file.	ThumbsPlus could not identify the contents of the file. Note that ThumbsPlus uses the actual file contents rather than the file extension to make positive identification. The file may be in a format that ThumbsPlus does not support, or may be corrupted, or may be a more recent revision of the file format.
5117	<filename>: No image data in file.	This error is reported when an image is opened or used that does not contain any image data.
5118	<filename>: Incomplete file (some image data missing).	The file does not contain all of the image data specified in its header, so some of the picture may not be available. The file may have been damaged on download, or truncated by SCANDISK if cross-linked sectors were found, or written incorrectly.
5119	<filename>: Insufficient memory to load file.	ThumbsPlus could not allocate enough memory to load the file. For suggestions on making more memory available, please see error [5001] Out of Memory. Some file types which are compressed require quite a bit more memory to load than is indicated by their file size. For raster (bitmap) types, the memory required will be at least as much as the width x height x color depth. In some cases, file decompression may require large amounts of memory in addition to this.
5120	<filename>: Load aborted by user.	This message is displayed if you abort loading a file (by pressing the ESC key).
5121	<filename>: No palette in file.	To load a palette from a file, it should either be a ThumbsPlus .PAL file, or an image containing a color map (palette). Some types that often (but not necessarily always) contain a palette are: .BMP, .GIF, .IFF, .PCX, .IMG, .TIFF
5122	<filename>: An exception <exception_code> occured while rendering metafile.	A program exception occurred while trying to render the specified metafile. This can be caused by invalid file data in certain file types.  This type of exception will not cause ThumbsPlus to terminate. See error 5000 for information on how to report this error to Cerious Software.
5123	<filename>: Cannot save unsupported output file type <filetype>.	ThumbsPlus does not know how to write (save) the particular file type.  Try saving file as another file type that ThumbsPlus can write, by using File | Save As from the view window menu.
5124	<filename>: Cannot save vector image as raster type <filetype> (image must be converted to bitmap).	This error is displayed during batch processing if a vector (metafile) is processed and the output file type is a raster file type. Convert the file (either manually from the view window menu item Image | Convert to Bitmap or as a batch step) to a bitmap.
5125	<filename>: This file type must be rasterized before saving to another type.	When you try to save a metafile to a raster type you will be prompted to rasterize the metafile.  This error is displayed if you click the Cancel button on the rasterize dialog box.
5126	Unable to save image to the zipfile: <zipfilename>.  This zipfile is marked as 'Read-only'.	This message is displayed when you attempt to save a file that was loaded from a read-only zip file. Either remove the zip file's read-only attribute (through Explorer) OR use File | Save As (from the view window menu) and specify a new folder path for the saved file.
5140	<filename>: Cannot load OLE library (CSWOLE.DLL).	This message is displayed if the OLE library (CSWOLE.DLL) cannot be loaded when trying to load a file via OLE. See error 5003 for possible reasons and solutions.
5141	<filename>: OLE error attempting to link to server.	ThumbsPlus could not link with the server application to process the file. Ensure that: • The server application is loaded on the machine. • It has not been moved to a different folder or disk (unless you also updated the Windows Registration Database). • It is not already running, processing another OLE request, or busy with some other task. Sometimes, the server application itself will report an error before ThumbsPlus reports this error. In this case, the error reported by the other application generally describes the problem (an unsupported file, for example). Known OLE server problems: Designer 4.0 and 4.1 often fail when attempting an OLE link. This is unrelated to ThumbsPlus -- the same failures occur when linking from other applications. Micrografx is supposedly working on the problem. Word for Windows and many other applications often have problems linking when a document includes linked or embedded objects of its own.
5142	Unable to access OLE mutex.	Multiple simultaneous access from ThumbsPlus to an OLE server is not allowed.  An error occurred while trying to access to the OLE server mutex.
5143	OLE is too busy in other threads.	Multiple simultaneous access from ThumbsPlus to an OLE server is not allowed.  A timeout error occurred while waiting for access to the OLE server.
5150	<filename>: Invalid Aldus Rev. 1 graphic import filter.	ThumbsPlus could not locate the proper routines in the specified .DLL or .FLT file to call it as an Aldus filter. The most reliable way of finding and using external filters is to use the "Hunt for Filters" button in the File Type Configuration dialog box. ThumbsPlus will search any or all disks for Aldus Rev 1 filters. Then, you can associate the appropriate filter with a file type by selecting it from the drop-down list.
5151	<filename>: File cannot be loaded using the filter: <filtername>. The filter file is missing.	ThumbsPlus has been directed to use a Graphics Import Filter to access the specified file, but the specified filter was not found or could not be loaded. Check the File Type Configuration for the file type and correct if necessary.
5152	<filename>: File cannot be loaded using the filter: <filtername>  The filter is not able to handle path names longer than 124 characters.	ThumbsPlus has been directed to use a Graphics Import Filter to access the specified file, but the specified filter could not handle a pathname longer than 124 characters.  Some older Aldus Rev 1 filters exhibit this problem. Try shortening the path by moving the file to a different location OR check the File Type Configuration for the file type and select a new filter for loading.
5153	<filename>: An exception error was encountered while trying to load the file using the filter: <filtername>.	ThumbsPlus has been directed to use a Graphics Import Filter to access the specified file, but the specified filter produced an exception error when executed. Try editting the File Type Configuration for the file type and select a new filter for loading.
5160	<filename>: JPEG library error: <error_message>	The JPEG library encountered an error attempting to read the file. More information about the specific problem should follow.
5161	<filename>: JPEG library warning: <warning_message>	The JPEG library reported a warning about the file; however, the file was processed. If there are problems with the appearance of the file, this warning may give more information on why.
5162	<filename>: GIF library error: <error_message>	The GIF library could not process the file. There will be additional information following this message which should give more detail for the problem.
5163	<filename>: TIFF library error: <error_message>	The TIFF library could not process the file. There will be additional information following this message which should give more detail for the problem.
5164	<filename>: TIFF library warning: <warning_message>	The TIFF library reported a warning about the file; however, the file was processed. If there are problems with the appearance of the file, this warning may give more information on why.
5165	<filename>: CGM library error <error_message>	The CGM library could not process the file. There will be additional information following this message which should give more detail for the problem.
5166	<filename>: CGM library warning: <warning_message>	The CGM library reported a warning interpreting the file; however, the file was processed. If there are problems with the appearance of the file, this warning may give more information on why.
5167	<filename>: WPG library error: <error_message>	The WPG library could not process the file. The message should give more detail about the problem.
5168	<filename>: WPG library warning: <warning_message>	The WPG library could not completely process the file. Processing does continue after this warning. Note that ThumbsPlus suppresses multiple identical WPG warnings to avoid needless repetition.
5169	<filename>: PNG library error: <error_message>	The PNG library reported an error processing the file.The message should give more detail about the problem.
5170	<filename>: PDC library error #<error_code>	The PDC library reported an error processing the file.The library reported error code will be useful by Cerious Software technical support detail about the problem.
5171	<filename>: TIFF library error: Missing required COLORMAP tag.	The TIFF file is set as a color mapped file, but there is no color map tag. The software that created the file did so improperly.
5172	<filename>: TIFF library error: Unsupported image format.	The TIFF file has an unsupported image or color format. See the TIFF information for known limitations of TIFF file processing in ThumbsPlus.
5173	<filename>: TIFF library error: Insufficient memory for buffer.	ThumbsPlus could not allocate enough memory for the TIFF strip buffer. See error 5001 for more information on memory problems.
5174	<filename>: Invalid TIFF compression for image (<compression_method> compression used instead)	Some TIFF compressions are valid only for certain color depths; for example, the CCITT Group 3 and Group 4 compression methods are only valid for bi-level (monochrome) images. In batch mode, ThumbsPlus uses another compression method instead (generally LZW).
5175	<filename>: Unsupported TIFF color mode.	ThumbsPlus does not support the color mode of the TIFF file; for example, L*a*b. More information about TIFF support can be found in the TIFF information.
5176	<filename>: Unrecognized raw image grayscale size.	ThumbsPlus recognizes raw files by their physical size on disk (based on width x height, as entered in the THUMBS.INI file). The specified file does not match any size listed in the INI file. See the page on the Raw file type for more information on setting up raw files.
5177	<filename>: Unrecognized or invalid EPS file.	ThumbsPlus only accesses EPS files with TIFF or WMF previews. The specified file may be a MAC format file (with a PICT preview), may have an EPSI preview, or may not have a preview at all. ThumbsPlus only processes the preview image or metafile. No attempt is made to interpret the PostScriptTM text. A built-in PostScript interpreter is planned for a future version of ThumbsPlus.
5178	<filename>: Invalid or unsupported IFF file.	ThumbsPlus detected a problem in the header of the (supposed) IFF file which made it impossible to process. If the file is recognized as a proper IFF file by other software, please send a copy to Cerious Software for evaluation.
5179	<filename>: Error opening as GEM metafile.	The GEM library could not recognize the file as a GEM metafile.
5180	<filename>: Invalid or unsupported IMG (GEM raster) image.	ThumbsPlus could not process the IMG file as a GEM image. If other software recognizes the file as an IMG file, please send a copy to Cerious Software for evaluation.
5181	<filename>: Error opening as CGM file.	The CGM library could not recognize the file as a CGM file. NOTE: ThumbsPlus only supports binary-encoded CGM files.
5182	<filename>: Cannot locate CorelDRAW preview bitmap.	When CorelDRAW! (CDR) files are set for Internal loading (from the File Type Configuration dialog box), ThumbsPlus only loads the preview bitmap from the file. You must save Corel files with previews enabled. Another option is to set up Corel files for OLE access, which does not use the preview bitmap (but it does require that CorelDRAW be installed on the machine).  NOTE: Loading files through Corel's OLE server is very slow.
5183	<filename>: Error loading via DirectShow interface.	ThumbsPlus loads and plays MPG, MOV, AVI, and WAV format files via Microsoft's DirectShow COM interface.  This error usually means that either the specified file is corrupt OR that there is no appropriate decoder (codec) installed on your machine for use in rendering the format via DirectShow.
5184	<filename>: Out of memory for DirectShow interface.	ThumbsPlus loads and plays MPG, MOV, AVI, and WAV format files via Microsoft's DirectShow COM interface.  This error occurrs when the DirectShow interface cannot allocate enough memory to render the specified file. See error 5001 for possible causes and solutions.
5185	<filename>: An exception <except_code> occurred attempting to load file via DirectShow interface.	ThumbsPlus loads and plays MPG, MOV, AVI, and WAV format files via Microsoft's DirectShow COM interface. This error occurs when the DirectShow interface encounters an exception while processing. Try downloading and installing the latest Direct Media installation from Microsoft.  This type of exception will not cause ThumbsPlus to terminate. See error 5000 for information on how to report this error to Cerious Software.
5186	<filename>: No valid PhotoCD resolutions located in file.	PhotoCD files may be available at several standard resolutions; ThumbsPlus could find none of these in the PCD file. It may still load the file, using whatever default resolution it can load as.
5187	<filename>: Skipped -- PhotoCD file is encrypted or watermarked for retrieval at <width> x <height>.	During batch processing, ThumbsPlus skips PhotoCD files that are encrypted or watermarked. You can process these files individually and enter the appropriate password when loading.
5188	<filename>: Unable to load as DXF file.	The DXF library was unable to recognize and process the file.
5189	<filename>: The metafile does not contain a bitmap.	This error message is displayed when you have selected Image | Extract Bitmap from the view window menu and ThumbsPlus cannot find an embedded bitmap in the open metafile..
5190	<filename>: Cannot locate PDS image.	This error message is displayed when ThumbsPlus attempts to load a PDS file and cannot load its image data.
5191	<filename>: Required PDS labels not found.	This error message is displayed when ThumbsPlus attempts to load a PDS file and cannot locate its internal information labels.
5192	<filename>: PDS Referenced file <external_filename> not found.	This error message is displayed when ThumbsPlus attempts to load a PDS file, determines that it references and external image data file and cannot open its external image data file.
5193	<filename>: No PDS record length specified.	This error message is displayed when ThumbsPlus attempts to load a PDS file without an internal record length specified.
5194	<filename>: Compressed PDS files (IMQ) must have 8-bit samples.	This error message is displayed when ThumbsPlus attempts to load a compressed PDS file that does not have an 8-bit color depth.
5195	<filename>: Error opening as a PICT file.	This error message is displayed when ThumbsPlus fails to load a PICT file. The file may have an invalid or empty bounding rectangle or may be an unrecognized version.
5196	<filename>: File <output_filename> already exists; not overwritten.	The uudecoded destination file already exists, so ThumbsPlus did not overwrite it. You can modify this behavior using Options | File Loading - UUdecode.
5197	<filename>: Unable to create uudecode output file <output_filename>.	ThumbsPlus could not create the output file specified in the Uuencoded file. The file name may be invalid, or you may need to change the output folder (from  Options | File Loading - UUdecode).
5198	<filename>: End-of-file and no continuation file found (while decoding to <output_filename>).	While uudecoding the file, ThumbsPlus could not find the 'end' record or a continuation file. Continuation files should have the same name as the first file, with the extensions '.002', '.003', etc.
5199	<filename>: Invalid input line in file (continuing)...	While uudecoding the file, ThumbsPlus detected and skipped an invalid line.
5200	<filename>: No 'end' record found.	ThumbsPlus could not locate an 'end' record in the uuencoded file. The file is processed through end-of-file instead.
5201	<filename>: Error deleting uudecode temporary file <output_filename>.	ThumbsPlus could not remove the temporary file used for uudecoding. It may have been removed by another program, or currently open. You can remove the file manually.
5202	<filename>: Cannot delete after decoding to <output_filename>.	ThumbsPlus could not remove the original encoded file after decoding. It may be open by another program. You can remove the file manually.
5203	<filename>: <number> warnings encountered during decode to <output_filename>.	ThumbsPlus encountered several problems decoding the file. These warnings will be listed preceding this message.
5204	<undo_filename>: Error opening Undo file.	ThumbsPlus could not create or re-open the temporary file (for saving a copy of the image before performing the operation). Be sure that your TEMP environment variable points to a valid, writable disk drive with sufficient free space.
5205	<undo_filename>: Error writing Undo file.	ThumbsPlus could not write to the Undo file. Make sure the folder specified in the TEMP environment is valid and on a writable disk drive with enough free space. Large images take large amounts of disk space for the Undo file. For example, a 1024x768x24-bit image takes about 2.5 Mb of disk space. It can also take a while to write the undo file. The storage is released when the image is closed, so it's not permanently used. However, you can disable the Undo capability from the Options | Viewing - Other dialog tab.
5206	<undo_filename>: Error reading Undo file.	ThumbsPlus could not read from the Undo file. Make sure the folder specified in the TEMP environment is valid and on a writable disk drive with enough free space.
5207	Insufficient memory to read Undo buffer.	ThumbsPlus could not allocate enough memory to retrieve the image from the Undo buffer. See error 5001 for information on memory usage.
5208	<filename>: Unable to create or open temporary file for details.	ThumbsPlus writes any file details (TIFF tags, for example) to a temporary file. It was unable to create it, or unable to open it to read the details in. The disk may be full, unwritable, or corrupted. ThumbsPlus writes this file in the folder specified by the TEMP environment variable.
5209	<filename>: Cannot write to temporary details file.	ThumbsPlus could not write detail information to the temporary file.  See error 5208 for more information.
5210	<filename>: Error reading temporary details file.	ThumbsPlus could not read detail information from the temporary file.  See error 5208 for more information.
5211	<filename>: File details trunctated.	ThumbsPlus is not able to display the entire detailed information from the file. Is is possible that the system is low on memory.
5212	Note: Overwriting file <filename> with file <filename>.	This message appears in the 'Errors Encountered' area of the progress box when you have selected "Replace" on the Confirm File Replacement dialog box and a file is overwritten.
5213	Note: File <filename> already exists - skipping file <filename>.	This message appears in the 'Errors Encountered' area of the progress box when you have selected "Leave Alone" on the Confirm File Replacement dialog box and and a file already exists.
5214	Note: Overwriting file <filename> with newer file <filename>.	This message appears in the 'Errors Encountered' area of the progress box when you have selected "Replace if Newer" on the Confirm File Replacement dialog box and a file is overwritten.
5215	Note: File <filename> skipped; newer than file <filename>.	This message appears in the 'Errors Encountered' area of the progress box when you have selected "Replace if Newer" on the Confirm File Replacement dialog box and a file is not overwritten because the destination file was newer than the file being moved or copied.
5216	Note: File <filename> renamed from file <filename>.	This message appears in the 'Errors Encountered' area of the progress box when you have selected "Rename", "Auto Rename" or "Auto Renumber" on the Confirm File Replacement dialog box and an incoming file is renamed because the destination file already exists.
5217	Note: File <filename> already exists; file <filename> was deleted.	This message appears in the 'Errors Encountered' area of the progress box when you have selected "Delete incoming if identical" on the Confirm File Replacement dialog box and an incoming file (identical to the destination file) is deleted.
5218	<filename>: File skipped (destination file already exists).	This error message is displayed during batch processing when the output file already exists and you did not select "Overwrite files with the same name" on the Batch Output dialog tab.
5230	<filename>: Cannot match font in file.	ThumbsPlus could not find the font name specified in the font file after it added to the system temporarily. Usually this is caused by: • Invalid information in the .TTF file. • ThumbsPlus searching for the font name in a different encoding than Windows (both try to handle as many encodings as possible, but the order and types of encodings supported by Windows are not (yet?) documented, so we're doing our best!) Please let Cerious Software know the font name and vendor of any fonts producing this message.
5231	<filename>: Unable to add font.	ThumbsPlus could not add the font to the Windows environment. There may not be enough memory, or the font file may be invalid. The system may also report an additional error.
5232	<filename>: Error removing font.	Windows could not remove the selected font; perhaps it is in use or corrupted. Try restarting windows and removing the font again.
5233	<filename>: Unable to copy font file to <foldername> for installation.	ThumbsPlus copies any font files to be installed from removable media (diskette or CD-ROM) to the Windows system folder (or to the folder specified in the CopyToDir entry of the [Fonts] section of the THUMBS.INI file). The folder may not be accessible or the disk may be full.
5234	<filename>: Unable to match font name.	After loading the font, ThumbsPlus could not locate the name using ATM. The font may be corrupted or invalid.
5235	<filename>: Unable to load ATM font.	ThumbsPlus could not install the font. The font file may be corrupted or invalid.
5236	<filename>: Unable to locate associated font metrics (PFM).	Each ATM font is composed of two files: the PFB file, which contains the actual font outlines, and the PFM file which contains metric information. Both files must be present, and the PFM files should be in the "PFM" sub-folder of the folder containing the PFB files. This is the standard Adobe installation format.
5250	ThumbsPlus cannot access the printer <printer>. Check your printer connections and settings.	ThumbsPlus could not open the printer. Use the Windows Control Panel to be sure that a valid printer is configured correctly and is accessible.
5251	The page size selected is not large enough to contain the catalog.  Please select a large page size and try again.	The selected page size  is not large enough. Since ThumbsPlus can print as small as diskette labels, the selected size must be really small!
5252	Invalid margin(s) specified.	You have selected margins that are either: • Smaller than allowed by your printer (for example, most LaserJets do not allow margins less than about .25 inches). • Too large (there's no space left to print after accounting for the margins).
5253	<filename>: Don't know how to print <file_class> files.	ThumbsPlus can print bitmaps (raster images) and metafiles (vector images). Most documents are imported as metafiles.
5254	<filename>: Error printing <message>.	The message should give more information about the problem, such as: Print job aborted  The print job was aborted, probably by Print Manager or a network print server. Insufficient disk space The disk used for temporary files is full. Insufficient memory There is not enough memory in the system to print the file. See the tips for error message 5001 for ideas on increasing available memory.
5255	<filename>: No print routine defined for type <file_type> (<description>).	The print method is set to "None" for the specified file type. If the print method is set to "internal" instead, but ThumbsPlus doesn't have the capability to print the type, error 5253 is issued instead.
5256	Unable to print catalog.	ThumbsPlus could not print the catalog. This error code will be accompanied by a system error code that will aid in diagnosing the problem.
5257	Error initializing print job on printer <printer>	ThumbsPlus could not start the print job. This error code will be accompanied by a system error code that will aid in diagnosing the problem.
5259	TWAIN: Unable to find data source <source names>.	TWAIN could not locate the data source. Be sure that a TWAIN module is installed and valid for your scanner or other acquisition device. Also be sure that the source name matches a valid TWAIN data source name.
5260	TWAIN: Unable to open data source manager.	Ensure that 32-bit TWAIN is installed and properly configured on your system.
5261	TWAIN: Unable to open data source.	TWAIN could not open the data source. Be sure that a TWAIN module is installed and valid for your scanner or other acquisition device. Also be sure the scanner is on and connected correctly.
5262	TWAIN: Unable to start data source user interface.	ThumbsPlus could not communicate with the selected device's user interface. Be sure that it's not active for some other applications, and be sure it is installed properly.
5263	TWAIN: Unable to read image from source.	The TWAIN data source may have aborted unexpectedly or otherwise failed, or the image may be in an unrecognized format.
5264	TWAIN: Unsupported bits-per-pixel from data source. ThumbsPlus requires 1, 4, 8 or 24 bits per pixel.	ThumbsPlus cannot currently handle other scanned image formats, such as 2, 4, 16 or 48 bits per pixel. Use the data source user interface to select a bit depth that ThumbsPlus can handle.
5265	TWAIN: Unable to load palette from data source.	The data source failed trying to send the palette (color map) data to ThumbsPlus for an indexed image.
5266	TWAIN: Unsupported color mode. Please select bi-level, grayscale, RGB, or RGB palette.	ThumbsPlus can only support scanning using these color modes. Here are some alternate names that a data source may use: » bi-level: monochrome black & white bitmap » grayscale: intensity single channel gray black & white » RGB: Truecolor Full color 24 bit » RGB palette: indexed mapped 8 bit
5267	TWAIN: Error attempting to coordinate memory transfer.	ThumbsPlus retrieves images from a data source using memory transfers, and was unable to negotiate an acceptable method of retrieving the data from the source.
5268	TWAIN: Please close current acquisition dialog before selecting a data source.	You cannot use a different data source when an acquisition screen (File - TWAIN Acquire) is active. Close the scanner user interface window and try again.
5269	TWAIN: Unable to select a data source.	ThumbsPlus could not access the TWAIN source manager. Make sure that TWAIN is properly installed on your system.
8001	Error adding volume (serial=<serial_no>, label=<label>, net=<net_name>).	The following error messages are internal database errors.  Please contact Cerious Software technical support and give a detailed description of how the error occurred along with the specific error code and message.
8002	Error adding record for path '<path_name>' on volume #<volume_no>.	See error: 8001
8003	Unable to update thumbnail record.	See error: 8001
8004	Unable to add thumbnail record.	See error: 8001
8005	Unable to retrieve volume information for drive <drive_letter>.	See error: 8001
8006	Unable to initialize database.	See error: 8001
8007	Unable to open database table <table_name>.	See error: 8001
8008	Unable to allocate memory.	See error: 8001
8009	Invalid paramter in database function call.	See error: 8001
8010	Unable to create file.	See error: 8001
8011	Output of table file number entries.	See error: 8001
8012	Unable to initialize resources in thumbnail database.	See error: 8001
8013	Invalid dbinfo paramter in call.	See error: 8001
8014	Unable to open file '<file_name>'	See error: 8001
8015	Unable to create database table <table_name>.	See error: 8001
8016	Invalid database handle.	See error: 8001
8017	Unable to update thumbnail record.	See error: 8001
8018	Unable to add thumbnail record.	See error: 8001
8019	Internal error: Invalid parameter passed to routine '<routine_name>'.	See error: 8001
8020	Unable to read thumbnail record.	See error: 8001
8021	Unable to initialize <database_name> for rebuilding (must be able to open the database exclusively).	See error: 8001
8022	Unable to rebuild table '<table_name>'.	See error: 8001
8023	Unable to add record for keyword '<keyword_name>'.	See error: 8001
8024	Unable to add keyword reference (<keyword_id>, <thumb_id>).	See error: 8001
8025	Unable to delete keyword reference (<keyword_id>, <thumb_id>).	See error: 8001
8026	Unable to delete keyword  (<keyword_id>, <thumb_id>).	See error: 8001
8027	Unable to convert volume table from old format to new.	See error: 8001
8028	Database is opened read-only.	See error: 8001
8029	Database version is incompatible.	See error: 8001
8030	Timeout occurred while waiting for database update access.	See error: 8001
8031	SQL Error (BindParameter).	See error: 8001
8032	SQL Error (BindCol).	See error: 8001
8033	SQL Error.	See error: 8001
8034	SQL Error (Commit).	See error: 8001
8035	SQL Error (Rollback).	See error: 8001
8036	SQL Connect Error.	See error: 8001
8037	Error setting database info.	See error: 8001
8038	The selected database is not a ThumbsPlus database. If you are connecting to a client/server ThumbsPlus database, check with the database administrator to ensure your login has appropriate priveleges.	See error: 8001
8039	Error copying database template (.tdd) to new database file (.td4).	See error: 8001
8040	The maximum number of licensed users <user_count> are already accessing the database. Would you like to wait for someone to exit?	See error: 8001
8041	This computer is not properly registered for license validation. The database may be damaged.	See error: 8001


Glossary
ThumbsPlus Glossary

Copyright © 1993-2002 Cerious Software. All Rights Reserved.

A

Aspect Ratio

Autocrop

.AVI

.ANI

B

Bitmap

Bi-level

.BMP

.BMF

Burkes, see Dither

C

CD-ROM

.CDR

.CEL

.CGM

CIE L*a*b

CMYK

Color Depth

Color Quantization

Compact

Convolution mask, see Digital Image Filtering

Crop

.CUR

Cursor

D

Desktop

.DCX

.DIB

Digital Image Filtering

Dither

DPI, see Resolution

Drag and Drop

.DXF

E

.EPS

Error diffusion, see Dither

F

.FIF

Floyd-Steinberg, see Dither

Font

G

Gamma

.GEM

.GIF

Graphic Import Filter

Grayscale

H

Highcolor

I

.ICO

Icon

Identity palette

.IFF

.IMG

Import filter, see Graphic Import Filter

Indexed color

Interpolation

J

.JFI

.JIF

.JPG

K

.KDC

.KIZ

L

.LBM

M

Metafile

Median cut, see Color Quantization

.MF

.MID

.MND

Monochrome

.MOV

.MPG

N

O

OLE

Orphan Thumbnails

Offline Thumbnails

P

Palette

Path

.PCC

.PCD

.PCX

.PFB

Pixel

Profile (.INI file)

.PNG

.PSD

Purge, see Compact

Q

Quantization, see Color Quantization

R

.RAS

Raster, see Bitmap

Rasterize

.RAW

Resolution

RGB, see Truecolor

S

Stucki, see Dither

.ST4, .STX, .ST5, .ST6, .ST7, .ST8

T

Targa

.TGA

 Thumbnail

.TIF

Token

Truecolor

TrueType

.TTF

U

.UUE

V

Vector graphic

W

Wallpaper

.WAV

.WMF

.WPG

X

Y

Z


Evaluation License
Evaluation License / Registration Benefits

Evaluation License

ThumbsPlus is supplied "as-is". The author disclaims all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The author assumes no liability for damages, direct or consequential, which may result from the use of ThumbsPlus.

ThumbsPlus is provided free of charge for a thirty day evaluation period. Any use beyond this period requires that ThumbsPlus be registered with the author, Cerious Software). This registration fee will license one copy of ThumbsPlus for use on a single computer. Multi-user network licenses are also available.

You must contact Cerious Software for authorization and terms of distribution if you wish to distribute ThumbsPlus, either alone, as part of a package, or in any publication and you receive any type of remuneration as a result of said distribution.

If you believe ThumbsPlus is valuable and useful, please give an evaluation copy to anyone else you think would be interested, and encourage them to register their copy.

ThumbsPlus may not be distributed as part of or for use with any commercial product without express written permission from Cerious Software, Inc.

For information about the CD-ROM Developer's Kit for ThumbsPlus (Thumbs+CDK), please contact Cerious Software.

License statement required by Unisys Corp. for licensing LZW compression:

Use of this software is permitted only to the extent reasonably required to determine whether to purchase the software.

After payment is made, use of this software is limited to use on only a single personal computer or workstation which is not used as a server. An additional payment is required for each use on another personal computer or workstation.

Only a single copy may be made of this software solely for backup or archival purposes. The software may also be transferred to a single hard disk.

Any use of this software in violation of the above is not licensed.

For information concerning licensing the LZW compression and/or decompression capability, please contact:

Unisys Corporation
Welch Licensing Department - CISW19
Township Line & Union Meeting Roads
PO Box 500
Blue Bell, PA 19424 USA

Registration Benefits

Here's some of what you get when you register ThumbsPlus Standard Edition.

1. Apply Digimarc Image watermarking as a batch process step.

2. Zip files may be used as folders.  Including creating new zip file folders, adding files to a zip file folder, deleting files from a zip file folder, and saving modified files back into a zip file folder.

3. Save any number of named schemes each for printed catalogs, contact sheets and web page wizard.  The evaluation version limits the number of schemes to two for any given type.

4. Save any number of named batch sets in batch process.  The evaluation version limits the number of batch sets to two.

5. Create any number of galleries.  The evaluation version allows creating no more than two galleries.

Here's some additional features ONLY in the ThumbsPlus Professional Edition.

1. Professional camera formats: DCS, DCR, MRW, ORF, NEF, MDC

2. ODBC compliant SQL database server connectivity.

3. Networked multi-user access.


Network Licenses
Multi-user Network Licenses

Cerious Software, Inc. offers network and corporate licensing for ThumbsPlus™.  These licenses provide all major upgrades to ThumbsPlus for one year, unlimited support by telephone or e-mail (AOL or Internet), and maintenance releases when required.

Licenses may be upgraded for the difference between the price paid for the original license and the current cost of the new license.  Licenses may be renewed each year for 25% of the license cost.  This will continue the updates and support for an additional year.

Cerious Software, Inc. will provide a single distribution, which may be installed on the number of licensed systems or placed on an internal company network for use by no more than the licensed number of users at any given time.

Click here for network license pricing for ThumbsPlus in the US.

Click here to find your international distributers contact information for international license pricing inquires.


Ordering Information

ThumbsPlus is distributed as trial software for evaluation for thirty days (see License). Please remember that using unlicensed trial software past the evaluation period is unethical and illegal. To register and receive the latest version of ThumbsPlus, please complete the order form OR place your order online here.

Ordering ThumbsPlus Online:

Internet

Ordering ThumbsPlus by telephone (credit card orders)

Cerious Software, Inc.

Ordering ThumbsPlus by mail, fax or phone:

U.S.	United Kingdom
The Netherlands	France
Belgium	Japan
Germany	Australia & New Zealand
Norway, Sweden & Denmark	India
Other Countries


ThumbsPlus Order Form (U.S. and Other)
      ThumbsPlus Order Form (U.S. and Other Countries)
 Click here to print this order form

Name_________________________________________________________________

Organization_________________________________________________________

Address______________________________________________________________

City_____________________________________ State______________________

Country______________________________ Zip/Postal Code________________

Telephone Number________________ E-mail Addr_________________________

Product #	Description	Price  x  Qty	Subtotal

LSTD-V6	ThumbsPlus V6 Std Edition	49.95  x  _____	____________
(single user standard edition)

LPRO-V6	ThumbsPlus V6 Pro Edition	89.95  x  _____	____________
(single user professional)

NETH-V6	ThumbsPlus V6 Pro Edition	149.95 x  _____	____________
(home network 5 PCs max)

NETC-V6	ThumbsPlus V6 Pro Edition	 95.00  x  _____	____________

(multi-user network)	(per user)

NET-UNL	ThumbsPlus V6 Pro Edition	 CALL
(unlimited users)

U.S. shipping	5.00	____________

Canadian shipping	7.00	____________

Other Int'l Shipping	10.00	____________

NC Sales Tax (7.5%)	____________
(NC Residents only)
Total (USD):	____________

Email sales@cerious.com or call 1-888-CERIOUS for volume discount pricing.

Payment: [ ] Check/MO [ ] Visa [ ] MasterCard [ ] AMEX [ ] Discover

|__|__|__|__| |__|__|__|__| |__|__|__|__| |__|__|__|__|	|__|__| / |__|__|

Authorized Card Holder Number	Exp month   /  year

_________________________________________	______________
Authorized Cardholder Signature	Date

Please remit to:

Cerious Software, Inc.
1515 Mockingbird Lane
Suite 1000
Charlotte, NC 28209  USA

(You may also fax credit card orders to 704-529-0497)


Order Form - Germany (English or German version)
      Ordering in Germany (English or German version)
 Click here to print this order form

Kundeninformationen	Web:  www.pd-profi.de

Name ________________________________________________

Firma ________________________________________________

Straße ________________________________________________

Plz/Ort ________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________

Tel. _______________________________________________

Fax. _______________________________________________

EMail _______________________________________________

Hiermit bestelle ich zu Ihren Geschäftsbedingungen:

___ x Version ThumbsPlus Standard v6 englisch 	€ 60

___ x Version ThumbsPlus Pro v6 englisch  	€ 90

___ x Version ThumbsPlus Pro v6 Home Network (5 PCs)englisch  	€ 150

___ x Version ThumbsPlus Pro v6 Concurrent Network englisch  	€ 100

Updates auf Anfrage zuzueglich Versandkosten, nur gegen Kreditkarte.

Alle Preise freibleibend.

Porto/Verpackung Inland € 5.--

Nachnahme zuzüglich € 3.--

total: € _____

Zahlungsweise: Visa  [   ]   MC  [   ]   AMEX  [   ]   Scheck/bar  [   ]

Lastschrift  [   ]   Nachnahme  [   ]

Lastschrift: Kontoinhaber: _____________________________

   Kontonummer: _____________________________

   BLZ:  _____________________________

   Bank:  _____________________________

Kreditkartenbestellungen:

Karten-Nummer: ______________________________  gültig bis:  ____/____

Karteninhaber:   __________________________________

Auslandskunden erfragen die Preise bitte telefonisch oder per Fax.

Unterschrift (des Erziehungsberechtigten)  _______________________________

Bitte senden oder faxen an:

PD-Profi Zöttlein Software Vertrieb Tel.  +49-(0)174-9954166

Schulweg 13                                Fax. +49-(0)8222-4129625 /

(0)8432-8674

D-86666 Burgheim-Wengen           mailto: sales@pd-profi.de

                                                   web:  www.pd-profi.de


Order Form - United Kingdom
      Ordering in the United Kingdom
 Click here to print this order form

	The Thompson Partnership (United Kingdom) You can order from The Thompson Partnership by payment with cheque or credit card.  The credit cards accepted are: MC, Visa, Diners Club, and American Express.   Telephone Orders: +44 (0) 845 456 8412 Fax Orders: +44 (0) 845 456 8413 Internet Orders: sales@ttp.co.uk Internet Support: support@ttp.co.uk
Please use this form when ordering by fax or mail:

Name ________________________________________________

Company _____________________________________________

Address ______________________________________________

Address ______________________________________________

Town _________________________________________________

County _______________________________________________

Country _______________________  Postal Code ____________

VAT Number (Applicable to non-UK orders ONLY)

_____________________________________________________

Telephone _______________________________

Credit Card Type __________________________

Credit Card Number _______________________

Expiration Date ___________________________

____ Copies of ThumbsPlus Standard 6 @ £32.95	£____________

____ Copies of ThumbsPlus Professional 6 @ £59.95	£____________

ThumbsPlus Professional Concurrent license @ £62.50 (per user)	£____________

V.A.T.  @ 17.5%	£____________

Shipping and Handling	£	3.00

Total:	£____________

Make cheques payable to: The Thompson Partnership.

Mail to:

The Thompson Partnership

Lion Buildings

Market Place Uttoxeter

Staffs

ST14 8HZ


Internet (World Wide Web)
Order via the Internet (World Wide Web)

You can purchase ThumbsPlus on the internet using either our secure or unsecure order form.

Select "Order or Upgrade ThumbsPlus - Secure (SSL)" from our order page at http://www.cerious.com/ordering.shtml.

If you have problems with the secure order page, you may have an older web browser that doesn't support secure sockets.  If so, please select "Order or Upgrade ThumbsPlus - (Unsecured)" from the above link.


Legend

	Available only in the registered release.
	Available only with a network license
	Available on Windows 95
	Available on Windows 98/2000
	Available on Windows NT (3.51, 4.0)
Save	This file format can be saved (not just loaded)
Batch	Can be used during batch conversion/editing
Thumb Only	This format can be thumbnailed, but not viewed
Preview Only	Only the preview is available for thumbnailing and viewing; for some types OLE can be used for more complete loading


General Functions
General Features

Feature	Standard Edition	Professional Edition
OLE client (load files using OLE)	x	x
Import filters (32-bit Aldus filters)	x	x
TWAIN scanning (32 or 16-bit data sources)	x	x
Treat ZIP files as folders	x	x
Create and delete folders	x	x
Label disks	x	x
Install and remove fonts	x	x
Automatically save clipboard (screen capture)	x	x
View multiple images	x	x
Launch external editing programs	x	x
Show picture properties	x	x
Batch process	x	x
Slide Show	x	x
Wallpaper (tiled, stretched, centered)	x	x
Store picture annotations in the database	x	x
Store comments in image files	x	x
Assign keywords	x	x
Print images and catalogs	x	x
Generate image contact sheets	x	x
Copy and paste images from the clipboard	x	x
Automatically show new and changed files in a folder	x	x
Select thumbnail size and color depth	x	x
Select folder and text colors	x	x
Automatically assign keywords based on file information	x	x
Select which types of files to show in thumbnail view	x	x
Automatically uudecode files	x	x
Customize toolbars	x	x
Copy, move, rename, delete files	x	x
Map and disconnect network drives	x	x
DDE command processing	x	x
Web Page Wizard (build web pages)	x	x
Create logical galleries of thumbnails	x	x
Professional Camera format support   ( DCS, DCR, ORF, MRW, MDC)		x
Connect to  ODBC SQL datasources		x
Share thumbnail databases on a network		x


 Image Viewing Functions

Move to next/previous file in folder

Access/split multi-page images (GIF, TIFF, DCX)

Copy, move, rename, delete viewed file

Make thumbnail from portion of image

Full-screen viewing

Zoom In (to 16x)

Customizable toolbar

On-the-fly gamma adjustment

Copy selection to clipboard

Stretch view to fit entire window or width

Select view background color

Select metafile background color

Several selection cursor choices

Automatically show comments when available

Optimized metafile display for 256 colors

Multiple open view windows

Align view windows

Scale to gray for bi-level images

Ordered dither for 15 or 16-bit (highcolor) displays

Stamp images with text or other graphics

Panning


Image Processing Functions

Crop images

Auto-crop images (remove same-color borders)

Save image palettes

Undo editing operations

Add comments to images

Set image resolution (dots per inch, dots per centimetre)

Digital image filtering (sharpen, blur, emboss, median, etc.)

User-defined image filters

Image histograms, with equalization and stretching

Adjust images (brightness, contrast, hue, saturation, lightness, gamma, color balance)

Modify color depth (palette optimization, ordered & error-diffusion, dithering, 6- or 8-bit quantization, many palette options)

Rotate images (.01º increments, select background color, bi-cubic interpolation)

Resize images (Many preset options, bi-cubic or bi-linear interpolation, aspect ratio options)

Miscellaneous pixel operations (swap red & blue, invert, mirror horizontally, mirror vertically)

Convert metafiles to bitmaps, with 4 levels of anti-aliasing

Extract bitmaps from metafiles

Remove background from metafiles

Save selected area to file

Dynamically view effects of JPEG lossiness based on quality level

Set GIF transparent color

Auto color balance and several other image processes

Multi-image common optimized palette generation

JPEG cleanup (DCT block edge smoothing)

Automatic color balance

Histogram stretching


Directory Color Codes
Folder Color Codes

If the option to Indicate Thumbnails is on from the Tree menu, each folder folder is colored to indicate the presence of thumbnails on the path. You may select the desired colors for folders using main menu Options | Customize - Colors.


Selected File

The captions (file names) of selected files are highlighted. Some toolbar and menu options will be grayed if no files are selected.


Scrollbar
Main Scrollbar

A scrollbar allows you to select the part of a list of items you want to display, when all of the items will not display in the area. For vertical scroll bars, click on the left and right arrows to move a column at a time; for horizontal scroll bars, click on the up and down arrows to move a line at a time.

You can drag the box to move proportionally within the scrolled data; you can click on either side of the box to move a full window of information at a time.


Selected Folder

The currently selected folder in the folder tree is highlighted. This is the folder that contains the files displayed in the thumbnail view.


Disk, Volume and Folder Icons
Folder Tree Icons

All disk drives in your system including all removable disks (floppies and CDROMs), along with any found lists and created galleries are represented by the following icons in the folder tree.

	Windows "Desktop" folder.
	Windows "My Documents" folder.
	Windows "Fonts" folder.
	Windows "Recent Documents" folder.
	Removable media, such as 3.5" diskettes, ZIP disks, etc.
	Local, fixed hard drive.
	CDROM drive.
	A fixed drive (previously scanned in ThumbsPlus) that is currently unavailable. Eg. A hard disk crash or physical removal from the computer.
	A network (remotely mounted) drive.
	An offline CDROM which has been scanned for thumbnails. You can view the thumbnails without having to insert the CDROM.
	An offline floppy or removable drive which has been scanned for thumbnails. You can view the thumbnails for these volumes without having to insert the floppies.
	A network drive that was previously mapped but is not currently available.
	A ZIP file that is scanned and treated like a folder by ThumbsPlus (based on the setting for Tree | Zip Files as Folders).
	A found thumbnail list created by selecting Edit | Find by Query from the main ThumbsPlus menu.
	A thumbnail gallery created by selecting a group of thumbnails in the thumbnail view and selecting Thumbnail | Gallery | Create from the main ThumbsPlus menu.


Disk Labels

Every disk or diskette used in DOS and Windows can have a volume label. If you want to keep track of files on multiple disks, it will be much less confusing (to you and to ThumbsPlus) if each disk is labeled uniquely. ThumbsPlus will use serial numbers instead if they are present. For read-only media (such as CD-ROMs), ThumbsPlus will synthesize a name based on the first character of all files in the root folder if it has neither a serial number nor a label.


Vertical Split Bar

The cursor will change when over this area. You can press the left mouse button and drag the split bar to the desired position, so the separated windows are the sizes you want.


Maximize

This button maximizes ThumbsPlus (resizes it to fill the screen). You can click this button again to restore ThumbsPlus to its previous size.


Minimize

This button minimizes ThumbsPlus (reduces it to an icon). You can double-click the icon to restore ThumbsPlus.


Title Bar

This caption shows the current program (ThumbsPlus in this case), along with the file it has open.


System Menu

Selecting this button brings down the standard Windows system menu, from which you can move, size, restore, minimize, maximize, or close ThumbsPlus. You can also bring up the Task List (with the Switch To option) to switch to another application in Windows.


Status Line

The status line shows information about the currently selected drive, folder and files. It also shows the number of files in the folder.  When dragging to a folder, the text in the status line will turn red if there is insufficient space to copy the selected files.  When selecting from a menu or passing the mouse over toolbar buttons, a description of the action appears on the status line.  The status line may be turned on or off using the Window | Status Line menu selection.


Progress Dialog Box
Progress Dialog

ThumbsPlus displays this dialog box when doing something that may take a while. Errors that occur show in the Errors Encountered area. For most operations, a Cancel button is available that will cancel the operation in progress. There is also a Background button that will minimize ThumbsPlus so that you can easily switch to another application. The title bar shows the activity in progress; directly below this appears additional information about the progress, such as the current folder or file name. There is also a percentage complete indicator (both numerical and graphed).

To receive more information about any error in the list, select it and then click the Help button or press F1. The error codes are also listed in this document.


Confirm Dialog

The Confirm dialog box displays whenever you perform a function that is set up to be confirmed; you may configure which actions require confirmation using the Options | Preferences - Confirmations dialog box. There's a convenient Yes to All button that allows you to avoid confirming each operation individually.

When a file would be replaced by moving or copying and confirmation for overwriting files is turned on, the Confirm File Replacement dialog will be used instead.


Confirm File Replacement
Confirm File Replacement Dialog

When a move or copy operation would overwrite an existing file with the same name, ThumbsPlus will display this dialog box. Information and thumbnails (if available) for both the existing and new file.

Use same options for other conflicts. Check this option to apply the current action to any other conflicts that may occur in subsequent move or copies.

Delete incoming if identical. Check this option to delete the file being moved.  This option is disabled for files that are being copied.

Leave Alone. Don't replace the existing file with the incoming file.  Abort the operation for this file.

Replace. Replace the existing file with the incoming file.

Replace if Newer. Replace the existing file if the incoming file is newer.  Incoming files older than the existing files will be skipped  An informational message will appear for any skipped files in the Progress box.

Rename. Move or copy (depending on operation) the incoming file after allowing the user to specify a new name for the file.  The rename dialog is displayed for any conflicts that occur.  Note: After specifying a new name for the incoming file the same existence checking is performed again with the new incoming file name.

Auto Rename. Rename the incoming file by appending the next highest number (not found in the existing files folder) to its file name.

Auto Renumber. Rename the incoming file by first searching the incoming file name for a numeric string and incrementing that number by 1.  If no numeric string is found then Auto Renumber behaves like Auto Rename.

Compare Files. Open both files (in View Synched mode) for comparison. Once the file to keep is determined, close both view windows and either cancel the replacement or choose one of the above options.


Browse Dialog

Whenever ThumbsPlus requires a folder path name, you can click on the Browse or [...] button to bring up this dialog box. From it, you simply select the desired folder path. ThumbsPlus also remembers the last place selected for each operation and initializes the dialog box to the last picked folder.  Some of the functions for which the Browse dialog box are available are:

File | Copy

File | Move

Image | Batch Process - Output Details

Edit | Auto Clip Save

Image | Contact Sheets


Ordering - Cerious Software, Inc.

You may place credit card orders (Visa, MasterCard, American Express or Discover) with Cerious Software, Inc. directly. Please have your information ready (see the order form) and call 704-529-0200.

You may also fax orders to 704-529-0497, or use our secure (SSL) ordering system on the Internet.

Our mailing address is:

Cerious Software Inc.
1515 Mockingbird Ln. Suite 1000
Charlotte, NC 28209 USA

Our online addresses are:

World Wide Web:	http://www.cerious.com
Internet E-mail:	sales@cerious.com, support@cerious.com
CompuServe:	76352,142


Japanese Version
ThumbsPlus - Japanese Version


 ThumbsPlus Warning Messages

Code	Message	Description
For warning messages reported by ThumbsPlus (the message number is displayed as part of the message), you can press F1 from the message box to go directly to the help topic for that message.


No Help Available for This Error

Unfortunately, the error you have requested help for does not have an entry in this help file. Often newer error messages take some time to be incorporated into the Help file.

Please contact Cerious Software support if the message was not clear or not useful.


Drag and Drop

Drag-and-drop is the process of moving files by pointing with the mouse, clicking the left mouse button, and "dragging" to the desired location. In ThumbsPlus, you can use this method to move or copy graphics files.


Aspect Ratio

The relation between the height and width of an image. For example, a square has an aspect ration of 1-to-1 (the height is the same as the width).


Pixel

A pixel is a dot in a raster image, or bitmap. Depending on the color resolution, a pixel takes from 1 to 24 bits to represent in memory and on disk. Therefore, an uncompressed bitmap which is 100 pixels wide by 100 pixels high can require from 10,000 to 240,000 bits (1250 to 30,000 bytes).


Metafile

A metafile is a stored sequence of drawing commands which the computer can repeat to generate an image. Like vector graphics, metafiles can contain simple drawing commands (such as line, rectangle, circle, arc, polygon); they may also contain commands to set colors, fill areas, display text. Unlike vector graphics, metafiles can include bitmaps. Thus, metafiles are much more flexible than bitmaps, but they are more difficult for programmers to support and usually slower to display.


Grayscale

A grayscale image contains various levels of gray. At its simplest form (two levels of gray -- black and white), this is a bi-level image. Usually, grayscale images contain from 4 to 256 levels of gray, though some file formats (notably TIFF) can store as many as 65,536 levels of gray per pixel.


Monochrome

This term is sometimes used to refer to a bi-level  graphic; other times it refers to a single-channel (grayscale) image. In ThumbsPlus, it is used as a synonym for bi-level.


Bi-level

Of two intensities (generally black and white). Bi-level graphics are sometimes referred to as monochrome or black and white, but either of these terms can be misleading, as each sometimes refers to single-channel color, which can be grayscale. Bi-level is a much less ambiguous description of a one-bit-per-pixel bitmap.


Bitmap

A bitmap (also known as raster graphic) is a graphics image composed of small dots (pixels). These dots can be simple on-or-off bits (a bi-level bitmap), or represent colors. Windows supports four levels of raster images: bi-level (1 bit per pixel), 16-color (4 bits per pixel), 256-color (8 bits per color), or 16 million color (24 bits per pixel, also known as truecolor). Raster graphics do not generally scale to larger sizes very well; the dots become squares or rectangles and the image appears grainy. Also, raster images use lots of disk space and memory. However, they generally display faster than metafile or vector graphics and can show much more true-to-life detail than vector graphics. Scanned images, such as CompuServe GIF files, are raster images.


Autocrop

A method to automatically remove same-colored borders from an image. In ThumbsPlus, this may be accomplished using the Image-|-Autocrop menu option, or during batch processing as a batch step.


Color Depth

For images, Color Depth refers to the amount of information required to specify the color or level of a pixel. Here are some common depths (in bits), and corresponding common names for them:

1-bit	Bi-level	Monochrome

4-bit	Indexed color	Grayscale

8-bit	Indexed color	Grayscale

24-bit	Truecolor	RGB

32-bit	CMYK	RGBA

48-bit	Truecolor	RGB


Crop

Cropping an image involves selecting an area and removing the rest. ThumbsPlus can crop manually (where you select the crop area) from the View Window; ThumbsPlus can also autocrop, removing unnecessary space from around an image. You can control when ThumbsPlus does this automatic cropping from the General Options dialog box.


Color Quantization

Color quantization is the process of finding the best set of colors (palette) for representing an image. Two methods are provided in ThumbsPlus - median cut, which does a very good job for real-world (scanned or photographed images), and popularity, which does well for drawn images.

The popularity method simply picks the n colors used the most in the image; this tends to leave out colors for highlights in photographs, which are important even though not the most popular.

The median cut method assigns all available colors to boxes, then splits the boxes to determine a representative set of colors. There are three median cut options in ThumbsPlus: 5-bit, 6-bit and 8-bit. The more bits available for each color component, the more memory and time required to quantize, and the better color matches that are obtained.


Gamma

Generally, gamma correction is a process to make pictures appear more accurately on a specific monitor. Differences in color value do not exactly map to changes in brightness on the screen; the gamma value defines a curve which specifies the way a monitor displays specific color values. The Monitor Gamma dialog box helps you find the appropriate gamma value for your monitor.

The other piece of the equation is figuring out the corrected gamma value to which an individual picture was adjusted. The CompuServe GIF definition specifies that GIFs should be adjusted for a gamma value of 2.0 -- you can set the assumed gamma for any picture, or set the default for any file type.

Generally, if pictures appear dark and have little detail in the shadow regions, they're probably linear (gamma = 1.0). Try setting your monitor gamma to an appropriate value, and the assumed gamma to 1.0.

Note: If either the assumed gamma or the monitor gamma is zero, ThumbsPlus will not gamma correct the image for display.


Desktop

The window that acts as the background for all windows in Windows. Other windowing systems generally call this the root window. Icons appear on the desktop window.

Wallpaper appears on the desktop.


Palette

A color palette is much like an artist's palette -- it is the selected color values that are used to represent an image. 24-bit (truecolor) images don't have a palette; each pixel includes the color information in it. When reducing a 24-bit image to an 8-bit or 4-bit image, you'll need to select an appropriate color palette, or have ThumbsPlus compute an optimized palette for you, using color quantization.

A palette stored with an indexed color image is also known as a color map.


Wallpaper

A  Windows bitmap displayed in the background (the desktop). From ThumbsPlus, this image may be tiled (repeated to fill the screen) or centered.


Graphic Import Filter

A program or library (DLL) which can convert graphics from one format to another. Microsoft provides several filters with Word for Windows and other products. ThumbsPlus can sometimes use these filters to import graphics files, though because they are not written or supplied by Cerious Software, they cannot be guaranteed to work.


Token

A sequence of letters or symbols which represent something else. For example, '%F' is a token which represents a file name in the editor command string invoked by ThumbsPlus.


Indexed color

Indexed color images contain several colors or levels of gray and a palette (or color map) which specifies the color of each given level. Most indexed color images are 4 or 8 bits per pixel (16 or 256 colors).


CMYK

This color specification derives from the names of the colors of inks combined for printing in color:   Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and blacK

The more common method of specifying color for display is RGB (red, green, blue).


Truecolor (RGB)

A truecolor image is most often represented by a full color value for each pixel of the image. In most cases, 8 bits (256 levels) each of red, green and blue (RGB). Other schemes may represent colors using other methods, such as HSI, HSL, YUV, YCbCr, L*a*b, or CMYK. Because RGB is the prevalent method for representing images for display, it is used internally by ThumbsPlus.

Some file formats may allow more bits per pixel (12 or 16), but the difference in image quality is usually slight. The chief advantage of a wider range of pixel values is less information loss during image processing.


Dither

Dithering is a process which allows many colors to be represented by a few. For example, the standard Windows VGA driver only has 16 colors, and combines these in simple patterns (ordered dither) to represent many more. An ordered dither is acceptable when viewed from a distance, but often causes images to appear grainy and cluttered. Better dithering methods, called error diffusion, provide a better appearance, especially for real-world images. One key to a successful dither is providing enough and appropriate colors to work with (palette selection or color quantization).

ThumbsPlus provides several error diffusion dithers for use when reducing the number of colors in an image: Floyd-Steinberg, Burkes and Stucki; and a single ordered dither (ThumbsPlus Quick), which is used to quickly dither truecolor (24-bit) images for an 8-bit (indexed color) display.


Profile (.INI file)

Lists configuration options and selections for a program. The Windows profile is called WIN.INI; the general profile for ThumbsPlus is THUMBS.INI. Profile files are generally stored in the Windows folder to be unique for each user in a network environment. Also, ThumbsPlus stores database-specific options in a THUMBS.TUO file, in the same folder as the database. For more information on the THUMBS.INI file and THUMBS.TUO files, see INI & TUO File Settings.


Identity palette

An identity palette is a 256-color palette that includes the 20 reserved Windows colors in the first 10 and last 10 positions in the palette. Files created with such palettes may be somewhat quicker to display in 256-color display mode. Also, some graphics applications require files with identity palettes. You can make any palette with 17 or more colors (and 236 or fewer) into an identity palette by selecting the option in the Color Depth dialog box.


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Object linking and embedding is a method used in Microsoft Windows to connect documents of one type to another. For example, a Paintbrush picture (BMP) may be embedded in a Word document, or a Corel drawing may be linked into a Write file. ThumbsPlus can sometimes use OLE to create thumbnails of file types which aren't directly supported; see the File Type Configuration dialog box for more information.


Digital Image Filtering

Digital image filtering performs processing on an image by combining or comparing individual pixels with their neighbors. Many interesting and useful affects can be obtained, such as sharpening, blurring, edge detection and embossing. Many such filters are available in ThumbsPlus from the Image - Filter - Select Filter menu selection.

Linear filters -- those with a fixed array (or convolution mask) defining how to combine a pixel with its neighbors to compute the result -- may be defined in ThumbsPlus using the Image - Filter - New Filter menu selection.


Path

The DOS Environment variable which specifies where DOS and Windows look for executable files when no explicit drive or folder information is given. It is usually set in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, which runs when DOS starts up.

Also, a folder specification may be referred to as a path.


CD-ROM
	CDROM
A CD (Compact Disk) is used to store data. ROM stands for "Read-Only Memory." In the past, you could not write to a CDROM disk, but with the introduction of CD writer drives you know can burn your own data and music CDs. They are quite useful for distribution of large amounts of data, and much more reliable than floppy disks.


Compact

To eliminate unneeded, unused or deleted space. You can compact a ThumbsPlus database (local  Microsoft Access databases only) by selecting File | Database | Compact from the main ThumbsPlus menu. This will release all disk space occupied by deleted or moved thumbnails so it can be used for other files.


Icon

An icon is a small representation of something. Icons in the Windows environment are not usually worshiped; but judging by the size of some people's icon libraries, they're at least admired.


Resolution

The resolution of an image describes the detail at which it was obtained, or at which it is designed to be printed. For example, a 300 dpi image was scanned at or designed to be printed at 300 dots per inch. (So, a 300 x 300 pixel image at 300 dpi should print as 1 inch by 1 inch).

Except in the U.S., resolution is usually referred to as dots per centimeter (dpc) or pixels per meter (ppm).

Note that changing the resolution of a bitmap does not change its information content -- resolution is really a hint to an application program to suggest a suitable size for printing. Most applications scale for the output device to present the image at or close to its original size.

Most applications also allow you to scale an image to a desired size. Also, many images do not contain resolution information.


TrueType

A TrueType font is a font developed using a particular font technology which describes each character as a sequence of closed b-spline curves. There are also provisions for hinting, which provides better-looking characters at small point sizes.


Font

A font is a particular type style. For example, Arial is the font in which this help file is rendered. ThumbsPlus can create thumbnails of and view character sets of  TrueType fonts.


Highcolor

This term usually refers to display hardware that is capable of reasonably good color depth, but not as realistic as Truecolor (24-bit).

Most high-color displays are 15-bit (32,768 colors -- 5 bits each for red, green and blue) or 16-bit (65,536 colors -- 5 bits each for red and blue; 6 bits for green because the eye is more sensitive to green).

Although high-color displays save some video memory, they generally run slightly slower than truecolor displays because of the translation requirement (Windows runs in truecolor mode, but the display driver must translate the 8-bits-per-pixel RGB pixels to the high-color representation).


Interpolation

Interpolation is a process of computing intervening values from given values (generally by averaging). For example, when ThumbsPlus changes the size of a bitmap, it can interpolate and compute the extra pixels as weighted averages (based on closeness) of neighboring pixels.


Rasterize

Rasterizing (or rasterization) is the process of drawing a metafile or vector graphic to a bitmap. This creates a fixed-size raster graphic from the metafile or vector graphic.


Thumbnail

A small representation of an image, used as an aid in indexing or cataloging graphics images.  ThumbsPlus is particularly adept at creating useful thumbnails for bitmaps , metafiles, fonts, video and audio files.


Vector graphic

Vector graphics are graphic objects composed of the definition of drawn shapes and lines -- rectangles, arcs, ellipses, curves, etc. Metafiles  are similar, but more robust; they may also contain text and bitmap (raster) elements.

Because they are descriptions of shapes rather than a table of individual dots (pixels), vector graphics may be scaled more readily and more accurately than raster graphics.


CIE L_a_b Colorspace
CIE L*a*b

The L*a*b colorspace was designed by CIE to provide a device-independent way to specify colors. Photoshop PSD files can be saved in L*a*b format, as can TIFF files.

ThumbsPlus converts the colors to RGB based on default values for monitor settings.


Hints and Tips

Explorer Drag & Drop. ThumbsPlus fully supports drag-and-drop client from File Manager. Simply drag file names from File Manager to the ThumbsPlus window (or icon). ThumbsPlus will open a view window for each file (up to the maximum number of view windows specified in the Viewing Options). You can also drag files from ThumbsPlus to other applications.

View Window Shortcuts. Double-clicking with the left mouse button in a view window will change it to full screen mode. Double-clicking with the right mouse button in a view window will close the window.

Metafile Viewing. If you're displaying true-color (24-bits) or standard VGA, turn on "Dither Metafiles" from the Viewing Options dialog box. In the case of true-color, Windows never dithers; in the case of standard VGA, the special code to create solid colors for the dithered colors cannot work.

Background Colors. For full-screen displays of 256-color images on a palette-based (256-color) display, select either black or white as the background color from the Viewer Options or the Slide Show Options dialog box, as ThumbsPlus steals the other system colors to more accurately display the image.

Internal Drag & Drop. Although ThumbsPlus has only a single window, you can drag files to folders not visible on the folder tree by scrolling it after selecting the files you want to move or copy OR by dragging the mouse cursor to the top or bottom edges of the folder tree and letting it scroll up or down automatically.


.INI and .TDO File Settings

The following tables list the global and database-specific parameters, and indicate the menu or dialog box from which the parameter can be changed:

Global Parameters (THUMBS.INI)

Section	Parameter	Menu/Dialog box	Description
[Startup]	WindowLeft, WindowTop, WindowWidth, WindowHeight	Options >Save for Startup >Window Position	These parameters store the initial position and size of the ThumbsPlus main window for startup.
	ThumbnailFile	Options >Save for Startup >Initial Database	Path and file specification of the initial database for ThumbsPlus to load when starting. This may be overridden by specifying a database on the Command Line for the ThumbsPlus icon.
	No3dControls	(none)	When non-zero, disables 3-D controls and dialog box appearance.
[Confirmations]	FileDeletions	Options>Confirmations	When non-zero, requests you to confirm deletion of any file.
	FileCopies		Requests for confirmation for copying files.
	FileMoves		Requests for confirmation for moving files.
	Directory...		(Not yet implemented)
	CloseModified Window		Requests confirmation when closing a view window that has changed (been edited).
	CloseApplication		Asks "Are you sure you wish to exit ThumbsPlus" when you close the main window.
	FileOverwrite		Requests confirmation before overwriting a file with the same name (copy or move).
[KnownFilters]		Options >File Types >Configure >Hunt for Filters	This sections contains a list of the graphic import filters which have been located using the Filter Hunt dialog box.
[JpegLoading]	QuantizeColors	Options>Jpeg Loading	Selects whether the JPEG library reduces the color depth during the load of an image.
	TwoPassQuant		When quantizing colors, selects whether a two-pass quantization is selected.
	Grayscale		Discards color information and loads JPEG images in grayscale.
	Dither		Selects whether dithering is performed when reducing the color of a JPEG image on load.
	QuantColors		The number of colors to reduce to, when QuantizeColors=1.
[Batch]	Format	File >Batch Edit/Convert	File format (i.e., BMP) in which to store batch converted files.
	AutoCrop		Autocrop images during the batch conversion.
	Resize		Rotate or resize during the batch conversion.
	ColorAdjust		Images are color adjusted during the batch conversion.
	Depth		Specifies whether the color depth is adjusted.
	Overwrite		Overwrite files with the same name.
	AltExtension		Specifies an alternate file extension for output files.
	OutputPath		Specifies the folder where converted files are placed.
[AutoPaste]	Prefix	Edit>Auto Clip Save	Indicates the prefix for file names that are saved.
	Sequence		Next sequence number to use for Auto Clipboard Save.
	Format		File format for files saved from Auto Clipboard Save.
	ConvertMetafiles		Specifies whether metafiles are converted to bitmaps.
	OutputPath		Location to store Auto Clipboard Saved files.
[Directories]	SaveAs	View>File>Save As	Destination folder for Save As... dialog box.
	Copy Files	File>Copy	Destination folder for copying files.
	Move Files	File>Move	Destination folder for moving files
Local (Database Specific) Parameters (THUMBS.TDO)

Section	Parameter	Menu/Dialog box	Description
[Startup]	InitialDirectory	Options>Save Startup Directory	Initial open folder in the folder tree.
[FileTypes]	SelectedTypes	Options>File Types	List of file types which are selected in the File Types dialog box.
[Options]	AutoCropClipboard	Options>General	Set to one (1) to automatically crop images when copied to the clipboard.
	AutoCropThumbnail		Set to automatically crop images when making thumbnails
	AutoCropView		Set to automatically crop images when viewing.
	MinimizeOnCopy		Set to automatically minimize the ThumbsPlus window whenever an image is copied to the clipboard.
	MinimizeOnView		Set to automatically minimize ThumbsPlus whenever an image is viewed.
	MinimizeOnEdit		Set to minimize ThumbsPlus whenever an image is passed to an external editor.
	AutoRemoveOrphans		Set to automatically remove orphans when changing to a new folder.
	DefaultAction		Specifies the default action to perform when double-clicking an image.
	Font		The parameters for the font used for the file and folder trees. (size; weight; italic; typeface; style)
[FileList]	Order	Options>File List	Specifies the order in which files are listed.
	ShowFlags		Coded value for what to show for each file.
	UseMask		Whether or not to use a file mask rather than the list of selected types from the Options>File Types dialog box.
	Mask		The file name mask to use for the file list.
	ThumbnailSize		The size of thumbnails, in percent (100, 150, 200).
	ShowFontNames		Whether to show font names rather than the file names for Truetype fonts.
[Menu]	IndicateExpandable Branches	Tree>Indicate Expandable	Show expandable (or collapsible) folders with a "+" (or "-").
	IndicateBranchesWith Thumbnails	Tree>Indicate Thumbnails	Show folder branches with thumbnails by color-coding.
	ShowThumbnail BranchesOnly	Tree>Show Thumb Dirs Only	Only show folder branches with thumbnails.
	ShowOfflineVolumes	Tree>Show Offline Volumes	Include off-line (i.e., diskette and CDROM) volumes in the folder tree.
	StatusLine	Options>Status Line	Hide (0) or display (1) the status line.
	Toolbar	Options>Toolbar	Hide (0) or display (1) the toolbar.
	DirectoryListWidth	(none)	Specifies the last set folder tree width (using the vertical spacer between the folder and file lists).
[Catalog]	Font	File>Print  Catalog	Parameters of the font for catalog printing. (size; weight; italic; typeface; style)
	Margins	File>Print Catalog	Margins for the catalog pages (left, top, right, bottom)
	PrintFileNames		Print file names below thumbnails in catalog (0,1).
	CatalogTitle		Title to print at top of catalog.
	LineSpacing		Spacing between lines
	ThumbnailSize		Scaled size of thumbnails (100-1000 percent)
	Columns		Number of columns of thumbnails
[PageSetup]	LeftMargin, RightMargin, TopMargin, BottomMargin	File>Print Setup >Page Setup	Margins for image printing (in units defined from International Control Panel settings).
	StretchToFit		Stretch images to fit page (within margins).
	MaintainAspectRatio		Maintain aspect ratio when stretching images.
	DrawBorder		Draw a border around the image.
[SlideShow]	BackgroundColor	File>Slide Show	Color index for background color for slide show.
	DelaySeconds		Number of seconds to delay between "slides."
	ManualControl		Set to advance slides with left mouse or keystroke.
	StretchToScreen		Stretch images to fit screen.
	MaintainAspectRatio		Maintain height : width aspect ratio when stretching.
	HideCursor		Hide the mouse cursor
	ConvertMetafilesTo Bitmaps		Convert metafiles (vector graphics) to bitmaps before displaying.
	SkipSmallFiles		Skip any files smaller than the specified size.
	SmallFileWidth, SmallFileHeight		Minimum size of files to display in slide show
	RandomOrder		Set to process files in random order (shuffled).
[Viewer]	StretchImageToFit	File>View	Stretch images to fit window when window is resized.
	FitPageWidth		Stretch image to fit the width of the window (vertical scroll only).
	MaintainAspectRatio		Maintain the proper aspect ratio when stretching images or metafiles.
	DitherMetafiles		Use quick (unoptimized) display for metafiles.
	InitialSize		Coded value for the initial window size.
	BackgroundColor Index		Color index of background color.
	MaxViewWindows		Maximum number of view windows that may be simultaneously opened (2-40).
	AutoDisplay Comments		Automatically bring up a comment display window when viewing any image that has internal comments.
[Comments]	Font	View>View >Comments	Font parameters for displaying comments (size; weight; italic; typeface; style)


DDE, CopyClipboard
CopyClipboard	 DDE Command

Syntax:	CopyClipboard(filename)

Alt Syntax:	Copy(filename)

Abbreviation:	B(filename)

Copies the currently-selected file or a specific file to the clipboard.  If a file is specified, the folder tree and thumbnail view are positioned, and the file becomes selected.


DDE, Close
Close (DDE Command)

Syntax:	Close(filename)

Abbreviation:	C(filename)

This function closes any view window for the file specified by filename.


DDE, Exit
Exit (DDE Command)

Syntax:	Exit()

Abbreviation:	X()

This function closes ThumbsPlus.


DDE, Keyword
Keyword (DDE Command)

Syntax:	Keyword(keyword-list|filename)

Abbreviation:	K(keyword-list|filename)

This command assigns keywords to or removes keywords from a file.

The keyword list is separated by semicolons; each keyword may be preceded by a '-' or '+' to indicate that the keyword should be removed or added. The default is to add.

Examples:

Keyword("+large;+dog;+animal;-cat|c:\images\animals\dog.jpg")


DDE, Find
Find (DDE Command)

Syntax:	Find(keyword-list)

Abbreviation:	F(keyword-list)

Finds files associated with particular keywords. The keyword-list is formatted as follows:

[how]keyword1;keyword2;...

'how' is a single character to indicate whether all ('&'), any ('|'), or most ('*') keywords must match.

Examples:

Find("&raster;.jpg;truecolor")

Find("*raster;truecolor;palette")


DDE, LocateFile
LocateFile (DDE Command)

Syntax:	LocateFile(filename)

Abbreviation:	L(filename)

This function locates a file. The thumbnail view is positioned at the file's folder, and the file itself is selected. You can use a file mask to specify a set of files to select; for example:

LocateFile(C:\Temp\*.*)


DDE, MakeThumb
MakeThumb (DDE Command)

Syntax:	MakeThumb(filename)

Abbreviation:	M(filename)

This function creates thumbnails for a specific file or a set of files. The filename parameter is optional; if not specified, thumbnails are made for any currently selected files. Like LocateFile, this command will accept a mask for the file name. The folder tree will be repositioned if the file is in a different folder from the current one.


DDE, Open
Open (DDE Command)

Syntax:	Open(filename)

Abbreviation:	O(filename)

This command opens a specific file in a view window. The current folder position and file selections are not modified by this command, and this command does not accept a file mask.


DDE, OpenDB
OpenDB (DDE Command)

Syntax:	OpenDB(database)

Abbreviation:	DB(database)

This command closes the currently-open ThumbsPlus database and opens another specified by the database parameter.

Note: This parameter can be either a fully qualified pathname to a valid ThumbsPlus TD4 database file or a valid ODBC Data Source Name (DSN).


DDE, OpenDir
OpenDir (DDE Command)

Syntax:	OpenDir(path)

Abbreviation:	D(path)

This command positions the ThumbsPlus folder tree to a specific folder.


DDE, Print
Print (DDE Command)

Syntax:	Print(filename)

Abbreviation:	P(filename)

This command prints a specific file. The current folder position and file selections are not modified by this command, and it does not accept a file mask.


DDE, RefreshTree
RefreshTree (DDE Command)

Syntax:	RefreshTree()

Abbreviation:	T()

This command causes ThumbsPlus to reread the folder tree, allowing updates from other programs to be visible. It's also useful as a DDE command to initialize the tree when ThumbsPlus is started minimized (ThumbsPlus does not read the tree by default until the main window is visible -- this improves performance when the "simple" DDE commands are used, such as Open and Print).


DDE, RemoveThumb
RemoveThumb (DDE Command)

Syntax:	RemoveThumb(filename)

Abbreviation:	R(filename)

Removes the thumbnail from the currently selected file, or from a specific file. This also removes any associated keywords.


DDE, RemoveTree
RemoveTree (DDE Command)

Syntax:	RemoveTree(path;option)

Abbreviation:	V(path;option)

Removes thumbnails from the current tree, or from a specific path.

Parameters:
path	(optional) Folder to scan and create thumbnails.
If blank, ThumbsPlus will scan the current folder.

option	(optional) A value of "wait" will instruct ThumbsPlus
to wait for the scan to complete before returning.


DDE, ScanTree
ScanTree (DDE Command)

Syntax:	ScanTree(path;option)

Abbreviation:	S(path;option)

This operation scans the current or a specific folder tree, creating thumbnails.

Parameters:
path	(optional) Folder to scan and create thumbnails.
If blank, ThumbsPlus will scan the current folder.

option	(optional) A value of "wait" will instruct ThumbsPlus
to wait for the scan to complete before returning.


DDE, SlideShow
SlideShow (DDE Command)

Syntax:	SlideShow(path)

Abbreviation:	W(path)

This function runs a slide show from the current folder (if no path is specified), or in the specified folder. If a folder is specified, the folder tree is repositioned to that folder.


DDE, UpdateAll
UpdateDir (DDE Command)

Syntax:	UpdateDir(path)

Syntax:	UpdateAll(path)

Abbreviation:	U(path)

This function updates all thumbnails in the current folder (if no path is specified), or in a specified folder. If a folder is specified, the folder tree is repositioned in that folder.


Main Window - File Menu

File 	Edit 	Tree 	Image 	Thumbnail 	Options 	Window 	Help

Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Database
New Database...	Ctrl+N	Creates a new ThumbsPlus database.
Open Database...	Ctrl+O	Opens an existing ThumbsPlus database.
Connect...	Ctrl+Shift+E	Connect to a predefined ODBC datasource (Eg. ThumbsPlus SQL Server).
Edit Keywords...	Ctrl+Shift+D	Edits database keywords.
User Fields...	Ctrl+Shift+U	Edits database user fields.
Statistics	Ctrl+T	Shows database statistics.
Export...		Exports database thumbnails (and other information) to a text file.
Import...		Imports database thumbnails (and other information) from a text file.
Import v3 Database		Imports a ThumbsPlus, version 3, TDB database file.
JPEG Compress		JPEG compresses database thumbnails.
Compact...		Compacts the current database file.
Repair...		Repairs the current database file.
Open in MS Access		Opens the current database in Microsoft Access.
View	Enter	Opens the selected image(s) in ThumbsPlus view window(s).
View Synched	Shift+F8	Opens the selected image(s) in synchronized view windows.
View Recent		Displays a menu of recently view files.
Edit	Shift+Enter	Opens the selected image(s) in the configured editor or default associated application.
Edit IPTC Info...	Ctrl+I	Opens the IPTC/NAA file information dialog box.
Open with		Open the selected file(s) with an external program.
Properties	Alt+Enter	Displays a file properties (information) dialog box.
Move to...		Moves the selected file(s) to a favorite folder.
Move...	Shift+F2	Moves the selected file(s) to another location.
Copy...	Ctrl+F2	Copies the selected file(s) to another location.
Rename...	F2	Renames the selected file(s).
Auto Rename...	Shift+Alt+F2
Delete	Del	Deletes the selected file(s).
Install Font(s)	Shift+F6	Installs the selected font file(s).
Remove Font(s)	Ctrl+F6	Uninstalls (and removes) the selected installed font files.
Volumes
Properties	Ctrl+Alt+I	Displays the properties dialog box for the currently selected disk.
Label Disk...		Creates a volume label on a local drive, diskette, zip drive, etc.
Volume Alias...		Assigns a volume alias to the selected disk.
Eject		Ejects removable volume disks.
Connect Network Drive...		Connects a network drive.
Disconnect Network Drive...		Disconnects a network drive.
Print...	Ctrl+P	Prints the selected image(s).
Send by E-mail...	Ctrl+M	Sends the selected files by e-mail
Online Photos
Printroom.com
Account Settings...		Creates a new Printroom account or modifies existing account settings.
Visit Printroom.com		Opens your internet browser and visits the Printroom web site.
Upload Selected...		Upload selected images to a Printroom album or shopping cart.
Picturetrail.com
Account Settings...		Creates a new Picturetrail account or modifies existing account settings.
Visit Picturetrail.com		Opens your internet browser and visits the Picturetrail web site.
Upload Selected...		Upload selected images to a Picturetrail account online.
DigiPrintStore.com		Opens your internet browser and visits the DigiPrintStore web site.
Shutterfly.com		Opens your internet browser and visits the Shutterfly web site.
Exit	Alt+F4	Exits ThumbsPlus.


Main Window - File | Database | New Database
Main Window - File | New Database	Ctrl+N

Use this option to create a new thumbnail database. There are several options you can set for the database, including the size of the thumbnails and their color depth.

Thumbnail dimensions.  (The following options affect the thumbnail storage size in the ThumbsPlus database)

Width. Enter the desired width for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.

Height. Enter the desired height for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.

Color Depth. Pick the desired color depth for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.  ThumbsPlus supports the following thumbnail color depths:

Grayscale (32 level)	Back and white thumbnails with 32 different grayscale levels.

236 color palette	236 color thumbnails based on the ThumbsPlus color palette.

Highcolor (15-bit)	32768 color (Blue,Green,Red) thumbnails with 5 bits per color
sample. The 16th bit is unused.

Truecolor (24-bit)	16 million color (Blue, Green, Red) thumbnails with 8 bits per
color sample.

Thumbnail compression.

None. Check this option to store uncompressed thumbnails in the database (not recommended).

LZH (lossless).  Check this option to compress the thumbnail data, using LZH compression, prior to being stored in the database.  This option is faster than JPEG compression with NO loss of image quality.

JPEG (lossy).  Check this option to use JPEG compression when storing thumbnails in the database.  A Quality value must be entered in the range of 25-90.  This value affects the amount of compression performed.  JPEG compression with a low quality value can yield higher compression results than LZH, yet the JPEG compressed thumbnail will exhibit a noticeable reduction of image quality with lower quality (higher compression) values.

Database Description.  This is the user entered description of this ThumbsPlus database.  For any ODBC data sources this field will contain an ODBC data source name description (entered during the DSN setup).

Use Access 97 compatible database format.  Check this option to create a MS Access 97 compatible .TD4 database format.  If unchecked the default format is MS Access 2000 compatible.

Note: Larger and/or higher color depth (Eg. Truecolor) thumbnails will require more database storage space.


Main Window - File | Database | Open Database
Main Window - File | Database | Open Database...	Ctrl+O

If you have a lot of graphics files, you may want to organize them into separate databases. This option allows you to select another database to open.

ThumbsPlus databases have the extension ".TD4". Each of these databases has an associated option (INI) file, with the extension ".TDO".

ThumbsPlus can only open a single database at a time, though you can run ThumbsPlus multiple times, each time with a different (or the same) database.

You can specify the database for ThumbsPlus to use on the command line, from Explorer. You can also double-click on .TD4 files from File Manager or Explorer to bring up ThumbsPlus with a specific database.

To create a new database, use the File | Database | New Database menu option.


Main Window - File | Copy
Main Window - File | Copy...	Ctrl+F2

View Window - File | Dispose | Copy File...

Prompts for the desired destination folder to copy the selected files to, and copies them there. Alternately, you can drag the selected files to the intended folder in the folder tree. To force copying (rather than moving, which is the default when dragging files to a folder on the same disk), you can hold down the CTRL key while dragging.

Note: If the file was pasted or scanned (rather than loaded from disk), this option is unavailable.


Main Window - File | Install Fonts
Main Window - File | Install Font	Shift+F6

This option is available if the first file selected is a TrueType font. It installs any selected fonts that are not already installed, and updates Window's registry so they will be available the next time Windows starts.


Main Window - File | Remove Fonts
Main Window - File | Remove Fonts	Ctrl+F6

Any selected TrueType fonts that are currently installed will be removed, and removed from the WIN.INI file. Be sure the first selected file is a TrueType font so that this selection will be available.


Main Window - File | Volumes | Label Disk

Use this selection to create a volume label on a local drive, diskette, zip drive, etc.  ThumbsPlus uses the volume label to keep track of which disk contains which thumbnailed files.


Main Window - File | Volume Alias
Main Window - File | Volumes | Alias

You can assign volume aliases so that a different description of the drive (other than volume label or serial number) appears in the folder tree. This does not affect the volume at all - it is simply an alias stored in the ThumbsPlus database for the volume.

This is especially useful for CD-ROMs with cryptic or nondescript volume labels.

Note: You must have made thumbnails on the volume before assigning a volume alias is effective.


Main Window - File | Volumes | Properties
Main Window - File | Volumes | Properties	Ctrl+Alt+I

This shows the properties of the current volume. If the volume is currently mounted in ThumbsPlus (available as a drive letter), the physical information will show. If the volume is offline, or is matched in the database, then the matching database information will show as well. The discussion about Volume Matching tells how the drive and database fields are used to match physical drives with database volume entries.


Main Window - File | Volumes | Connect Network Drive
Main Window - File | Volume | Connect Network Drive...

Volume Popup Menu | Connect Network Drive...

This brings up the standard Windows "Map Network Drive" dialog so that you can map a network drive to a drive letter.


Main Window - File | Disconnect Network Drive
Main Window - File | Volumes | Disconnect Network Drive

Volume Popup Menu | Disconnect Network Drive...

When called from the main ThumbsPlus menu, this starts the standard Windows "Disconnect Network Drive" dialog so you can disconnect from network drives.

If called from the Volume Popup Menu, this disconnects the currently selected network drive.


Main Window - Tree | Create Directory
Main Window - Tree | Create Folder...	Ctrl+Shift+F2

Prompts for a folder name to create as a sub-folder for the currently selected folder in the folder tree.


Main Window - Tree | Delete Folder
Main Window - Tree | Delete Folder	Alt+Del

This selection removes the current folder, any files in it, and any sub-folders.  If Use Windows recycle bin settings is selected under Options | Preferences - General, you will be able to restore any deleted folders by opening the Windows recycle bin and selecting the restore menu option.

Note: You must have enabled Allow folder operations under Options | Preferences | General in order to use this function.


Main Window - Image | Print Catalog
 Main Window - Image | Print Catalog...	Shift+F9

Printer	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This selection prints a catalog of the thumbnails in the database. There are many configuration options divided among the tabs in the Print Catalog Options dialog box.


 Main Window - Image | Print Catalog - Printer

Printer	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab..

Scheme.  After completing all print catalog options, you may create a scheme by entering a scheme name in this field and clicking the Save button.  This saved scheme will be available for subsequent catalog printing.

Printer

Name.  Use this field to select the printer you desire.

Properties.  Click this button to edit the properties specific to the printer (i.e., page orientation, page size, color and dithering options).

Print to File.  Check this option, if you wish to print to a file that can be copied to the printer later.

Color output

Color.  Select this option to print color thumbnails.

Black & White.  Select this option to print grayscale thumbnails.

Default.  Select this option to use the printer default color settings.

Print thumbnail borders.  Check this option to print a border around the thumbnails.

Copies.  Enter the number of copies to print.


 Main Window - Image | Print Catalog - Layout

Printer	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this tab to determine the layout on the page of the catalog.

Margins (units)

Select the Left, Right, Top and Bottom margins (based on Units).

Units

Select the desired units Pixels, Inches, or Centimeters.

Thumbnail size (units)

Select the Width and Height of thumbnails to print, in pixels, inches, or centimeters (based on Units).

Thumbnail spacing

Columns.  Enter the number of columns of thumbnails to print.

Line spacing.  Enter the spacing (based on Units) between lines of thumbnails or text.

Items selected for output.  This field displays the number of files to be processed, if using selected files or current folder.

Thumbnails per page.  This field displays the number of thumbnails to be printed on each page.

Approximate # of pages.  This field displays the approximate number of pages to be printed.  Printer margins, thumbnail dimensions, font selections and selected items for display can all effect the number of pages generated.


 Main Window - Image | Print Catalog  -  Header & Footer

Printer	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this tab to enter a Header (page title) and Footer for the catalog. Each may be multiple lines, and may contain the following tokens that ThumbsPlus will use to substitute the appropriate value:

\p	Page number.

\d	Date

\t	Time

\f	Current Folder

\jl	Left justify text

\jc	Center justiy text

\jr	Right justify text

\b	Current database name


 Main Window - Image | Print Catalog - Fonts

Printer	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this tab to select the fonts (typefaces) and text colors for the catalog printout. You can select separate fonts for the header and footer, folder entries, and thumbnail captions.


 Main Window - Image | Print Catalog - Options

Printer	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

The Options tab provides several choices for the contents of the catalog.

Files to process

Selected files only.  Select this option to print only the currently selected files in the thumbnail view.

Current folder.  Select this option to print the files located in the currently selected folder in the folder tree.

Current tree.  Select this option to print the files in the currently selected folder and all of its sub-folders.

Entire database.  Select this option to print all files that have been previously thumbnailed with ThumbsPlus.

Offline and orphan thumbnails.  Select this option to include any offline and orphan thumbnails.

Select Items.  Click this button to select which items to display beneath each thumbnail.  See also: Selecting Items for more information.

Include blank items.  Check this option to include space for selected items that are empty.  This ensures that the item formatting is consistent accross thumbnails.

Center text under thumbnails.  Check this option to center justify the selected items under each thumbnail.

New page for each folder. Check this option to start a new page for each folder or sub-folder encountered.

Print heading for each folder. Check this option to print a heading for each folder printed in the catalog. This heading will contain the volume and folder names.

Automatically crop images. Check this option to automatically crop images before making the thumbnails. This removes excess single-color borders from images.  This option will be disabled when Rebuild thumbnails at printer resolution is not checked.

Rebuild thumbs at printer resolution. Check this option for high-resolution thumbnails, which take longer to generate (the disk files must be read and reduced to the proper size), but can be much higher quality.  When this option is checked, Entire database and Offline and orphan thumbnails options under Files to process will be disabled.

Extra lines to reserve for printed selected items.  Enter the desired number of extra lines to use when formatting selected item text.  Items like annotations may have multiple lines and need extra space.


Main Window - File | Exit
 Main Window - File | Exit	Alt+F4

Use this menu selection to exit ThumbsPlus.


Main Window - Edit Menu

File 	Edit 	Tree 	Image 	Thumbnail 	Options 	Window 	Help

Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Copy	Ctrl+C	Copies the first selected file to the clipboard.
Copy Thumbnail	Ctrl+Alt+C	Copies the thumbnail of the first selected file to the clipboard.
Copy File Name	Shift+Alt+C	Copies file name of the first selected file to the clipboard.
Copy Keywords	Ctrl+Alt+K	Copies any keywords for the selected thumbnails to the clipboard.
Paste	Ctrl+V	Pastes the current clipboard contents into a new view window.
Auto Clip Save...	Ctrl+Shift+C	Automatically saves changing clipboard contents to files.
Select All	Ctrl+A	Selects all thumbnails displayed in the thumbnail view.
Clear All	Ctrl+Shift+A	Deselects any selected thumbnails in the thumbnail view.
Select by
File Attributes...	Ctrl+Alt+A	Selects thumbnails by file attributes (read-only, hidden, etc)
Name Mask...	Ctrl+Shift+M	Selects thumbnails by a file name mask.
Tagged	Ctrl+Alt+T	Selects thumbnails that have been tagged.
Invert Selection	Ctrl+Shift+V	Inverts the current selection in the thumbnail view.
Tag Selected	Alt+,	Tag the selected thumbnail(s).
Untag Selected	Alt+;	Untag the selected thumbnail(s).
Go to Start of Selection	Alt+Home	Scroll the thumbnail view to show the first selected
Go to End of Selection	Alt+End	Scroll the thumbnail view to show the last selected
Find by Query...	Ctrl+F	Finds images by file names, keywords, user fields, etc.
Find Similar Images...	Ctrl+Shift+F	Finds images by thumbnail similarity.


Main Window - Edit | Copy
 Main Window - Edit | Copy	Ctrl+C

This option copies the first selected file to the clipboard in the appropriate format for the file for raster images or metafile for vector images).  If no files are selected, this menu option is disabled.

You can make this option the default (double-click) option from the main menu selection Options | Preferences - General.


Main Window - Edit | Paste
 Main Window - Edit | Paste	Ctrl+V

This option pastes the current clipboard contents into a new view window. If the clipboard is empty, or the contents are not in a recognized graphics format, this option is disabled.


Main Window - Edit | Clear All
Main Window - Edit | Clear All	Ctrl+Shift+A

This option deselects all selected files in the thumbnail view.


Main Window - Edit | Select All
Main Window - Edit | Select All	Ctrl+A

This option selects all files in the thumbnail view for processing by any of the commands which accept multiple files, such as view, properties, slide show, etc.


Main Window - Edit | Select Mask
Main Window - Edit | Select Mask	Ctrl+Shift+M

This option prompts for a filename mask (i.e., "A*.GIF") and selects all files matching the mask. Any previous selection(s) are cleared.


Main Window - Edit | Auto Clip Save
Main Window - Edit | Auto Clip Save	Ctrl+Shift+C

This selection allows you to automatically save the clipboard contents to a disk file each time they change (and a compatible format -- bitmap or metafile -- is on the clipboard).

This is very useful for window or screen capture, too -- turn it on, and each time you press [Print Screen] (for the entire screen) or Alt+[Print Screen] (for the current window), ThumbsPlus will save the screen or window as a graphic file.

Enable. When checked, automatic clipboard saving is enabled. The Auto Clip Save menu selection is also checked when enabled.

Convert metafiles. When checked, metafiles on the clipboard will be rasterized and saved; otherwise, they will be saved as Windows metafiles (.WMF).

Image File save format. Select the desired file type to save.

Output Folder. Select the folder where you want the auto-saved files to be stored. The [...] button allows you to find a folder easily.

Next file name. Displays an example of the next auto-generated file name.

Setup. Use this button to setup automatic file name generation.

Next file name settings. Displays auto-generated file name settings.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Export
Main Window - Thumbnail | Export...	Ctrl+Shift+X

This option creates bitmap files of all currently selected thumbnails. The files are 96 x 72 pixels, 8-bit color (236 colors used), and stored in Windows Bitmap (BMP) format with a .TNB extension and the same name as the original file. You will be prompted for a destination folder for the thumbnail files.

The files created with this option may be renamed or converted to other types. You can select the .TNB file type in the File Types dialog box as equivalent to BMP files so they may be viewed, renamed or converted in ThumbsPlus.


Main Window - Image | Common Palette...
Main Window - Image | Common Palette...	Ctrl+Shift+T

This option uses the selected images to create an optimized common palette with 256 colors. Note that you can also create a common optimized palette using the Color Depth option during batch processing.

After the files are prompted, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to enter the location and name of the palette (.PAL) file.


Tree Menu
Main Window - Tree Menu

File 	Edit 	Tree 	Image 	Thumbnail 	Options 	Window 	Help

Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Collapse All	Ctrl+Num -	Collapses the entire folder tree, closing all open branches.
Collapse to Path	Ctrl+Num /	Collapse the folder beneath the open (selected) folder.
Refresh Tree	Ctrl+F5	Reinitializes the folder tree, scanning local and network drives.
Back	Alt+Left	Selects the previous viewed folder tree path.
Forward	Alt+Right	Selects the next viewed folder tree path.
Indicate Expandable	Ctrl+Shift+0	Indicates folder tree paths that have sub-folder paths.
Indicate Thumbnails	Ctrl+Shift+I	Color codes folder tree folder icons to indicate thumbnails.
Zip Files as Folders	Ctrl+Shift+Z	Shows ZIP files in the folder tree as folders with files.
Just Thumb Folders	Ctrl+shift+J	Shows only those folders that contain thumbnails.
Create Folder...	Ctrl+Shift+F2	Creates a folder on the selected disk and folder path.
Delete Folder	Ctrl+Shift+F6	Deletes the selected folder.
Rename Folder...	Shift+F5	Renames the selected folder.
Copy Folder...	Ctrl+Shift+F5	Copies the selected folder to another folder path.
Move Folder...	Shift+Alt+F5	Moves the selected folder to another folder path.
Watch Folders...	Ctrl+Shift+G	Configures a set of folders to be watched for file changes.
Add to Favorites	Ctrl+R	Adds the currently selected path to your favorites list.
Edit Favorites	Ctrl+Shift+R	Edits the favorites list.
Go to		Selects a favorite folder in the folder tree.


Keyboard, Tree | Expand Selected
Tree - Expand Selected (keyboard only)	+

This option expands the currently selected folder entry in the folder tree by showing any sub-folders. Double-clicking an expandable entry also performs this action.

If Indicate Expandable is checked, the folders which have sub-folders are marked with a '+'.

If Indicate Thumbnails is checked, folders are color-coded to indicate the presence of thumbnails.


Main Window - Tree | Expand Branch
Tree - Expand Branch (keyboard only)	*

This keyboard option expands the currently selected folder entry in the folder tree by showing any sub-folders. Any sub-folders are also expanded, thereby showing this "branch" of the tree in its entirety.

If Indicate Expandable is checked, the folders for folders which have sub-folders are marked with a '+'.

If Indicate Thumbnails is checked, folders are color-coded to indicate the presence of thumbnails.


Main Window - Tree | Collapse Branch
Tree | Collapse Selected (keyboard only)	-

This option collapses any sub-folders of the currently selected entry. Double-clicking on an expanded entry also does this.

If Indicate Expandable is checked, the folders which can be collapsed are marked with a '-'.


Main Window - Tree | Collapse All
Main Window - Tree | Collapse All	Ctrl+Num -

This menu item collapses the folder tree, hidding all open folder paths, leaving only the top level (drive and off-line volume) entries.


Main Window - Tree | Collapse to Path
Main Window - Tree | Collapse to Path	Ctrl+Num /

This menu option collapses all folder tree entries except those folders on the currently-selected path. For example, if the current folder is C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM, all entries for drives other than C are fully collapsed, all first-level folders of C: are shown, and all sub-folders of C:\WINDOWS are shown.


Main Window - Tree | Refresh Tree
Main Window - Tree | Refresh Tree	Ctrl++

This option rereads the folder tree. Use this option if you change the folder structure from another application. This option also collapses the tree to the current path (Tree | Collapse to Path).


Main Window - Tree | Indicate Expandable
Main Window - Tree | Indicate Expandable	Ctrl+Shift+O

Checking this menu item causes ThumbsPlus to only display a '+' beside folder entries which contain sub-folders and may be expanded, or '-' in folder entires which are already expanded.  Otherwise, '+' is displayed for all folder entries, until the are actually opened.  Then the '+' is updated to reflect the true existence of sub-folders.


Main Window - Tree | Indicate Thumbnails
Main Window - Tree | Indicate Thumbnails	Ctrl+Shift+I

Checking this option causes ThumbsPlus to use differently colored folders to indicate "interesting" folders. Folders for folders which contain thumbnails are colored green; folders for folders which do not themselves have thumbnails, but whose subordinate folders do, are colored blue. This option is really useful only after drive(s) have been scanned for images.

See also: Scan Disk.


Main Window - Tree | List Thumb Dirs Only
Main Window - Tree | Just Thumb Folders	Ctrl+Shift+J

Select this option to only show folders which contain files that have been thumbnailed.

This is only useful once graphics files have been located (usually by Thumbnail | Scan Disk).


Main Window - Tree | Zip Files as Directories
Main Window - Tree | Zip Files as Folders 	Ctrl+Shift+Z

This option, available only in the registered release, causes ThumbsPlus to treat ZIP (PKZIP-compatible) files as folders (folders). You can thumbnail, view, print, catalog and process files within ZIP files just as if they were located in regular Windows folders.


Main Window - Image Menu

File 	Edit 	Tree 	Image 	Thumbnail 	Options 	Window 	Help

Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Batch Process	F12	Performs a batch process on the selected file(s).
Contact Sheets	Ctrl+Shift+F9	Creates contact sheets.
Print Catalog...	Shift+F9	Prints a catalog of images.
Web Page Wizard	Alt+F9	Create web pages of images.
Common Palette	Ctrl+Shift+T	Create an optimized common palette with 256 colors from the select images.
Build Slide Show		Creates a self executable slide show of images.
Quick Process
Turn 90° CW	Ctrl+Alt+Right	Turns the selected image(s) 90 degrees clockwise.
Turn 90° CCW	Ctrl+Alt+Left	Turns the selected image(s) 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
Turn 180°	Ctrl+Alt+Down	Turns the selected image(s) 180 degrees (upside down).
Flip Horizontally		Flips the selected image(s) from right to left.
Flip Vertically		Flips the selected image(s) from top to bottom.
Modify File Info...	Ctrl+Shift+Q	Sets resolution, comments and/or file date and time.
Quick Convert to
bmp - Windows Bitmap pcx - Zsoft Picture png - Portable Network Graphic jpg - JPEG Compressed tif - Tagged Image File		Converts the selected images to the chosen file type
Quick Batch		Performs a batch process on the selected images
Tasks
Pause Task		Pauses the selected task (task window).
Resume Task		Resumes the selected task.
Quit Task		Quits the selected task.
Pause All Tasks		Pauses all running tasks.
Resume All Tasks		Resumes all paused tasks.
Quit All Tasks		Quits all running or paused tasks.
Show Errors		Displays an error list for the selected task.
Clear Errors		Clears an error list for the selected task.
Clear All Errors		Clears all task error lists.
Slide Show	F8	Displays the selected images as a slide show.
Wallpaper
Tiled	Shift+F7	Tiles the selected image as your desktop wallpaper (tiled).
Centered	F7	Makes the selected image your desktop wallpaper (centered).
Stretched	Ctrl+Shift+F7	Makes the selected image your desktop wallpaper (stretched with aspect ratio maintained).
Fully Stretched	Shift+Alt+F7	Makes the selected image your desktop wallpaper (stretched with out maintaining aspect ratio).
Remove	Ctrl+F7	Clears your desktop wallpaper setting.
TWAIN Setup...		Configures options for TWAIN Multiple acquire
TWAIN Acquire...	Ctrl+W	Acquire an image from the selected TWAIN data source.
TWAIN Multiple Acquire...	Ctrl+Shift+W	Acquire multiple images from the selected TWAIN data source.


Main Window - File | View
 Main Window - File | View 	Enter   (Ctrl+Enter)

Opens a view window for each of the currently selected files, up to the maximum specified in the Options | Viewing - Window dialog box. This option will be grayed if no files are selected.

Notes: If you open a view window, using the keyboard accelerator Ctrl+Enter, the view window will open in full screen mode.  Also, from the Options | Preferences - General dialog box, you can select View image as the default (double-click) action for files.


Main Window - File | Edit
Main Window - File | Edit	Shift+Enter

Edits the first selected file by launching the editor defined for its file type.

From the Options | Preferences - General dialog box, you can select Edit image as the default (double-click) action for files.


Main Window - File | Properties - Physical
Main Window - File | Properties - Physical	Alt+Enter

    View Window - File | Properties - Physical

Physical	 Details	Info	Database	Keywords	User Fields	Galleries
Click on any of the links above to display help for the different property tabs

This tab in the File Properties dialog box shows physical file characteristics as stored on the disk or in a ZIP file.

DOS name. This field displays the old style 8.3 MS-DOS file name.

File size. This field displays the size of the physical file on disk.  This does not represent the amount of memory need to load the file as many file formats support pixel data compression.  For the amount of memory this file will occupy when loaded see the Details tab.

Modified. This field displays the last modified date of the file.

Created. This field displays the creation date of the file.

Accessed. This field displays the last accessed date of the file.

Attributes These check boxes display the current file attributes (they will be disabled if the file is stored in a ZIP file or on Read only media)

Read-only. Use this option to set or clear the "Read only" file attribute.

Hidden. Use this option to set or clear the "Hidden" file attribute.

Archive. Use this option to set or clear the "Archive" file attribute.

System. Use this option to set or clear the "System" file attribute.

Full Pathname. This field displays the full pathname of the file.

NOTE: The following fields will not display if the file is NOT stored in a ZIP file.

In ZIP file. This field displays the full pathname of the ZIP file that contains the file, if applicable.

Compressed size.  This field displays the compressed size and percentage compression for the file.

Compression method. This field displays the ZIP compression method used when the file was added to the ZIP file.

CRC-32. This field displays the cyclical redundancy checksum (CRC) value for the compressed file.


Main Window, File | Properties - Details
Main Window - File | Properties - Details	Alt+Enter

    View Window - File | Properties - Details

Physical	 Details	Info	Database	Keywords	User Fields	Galleries
Click on any of the links above to display help for the different property tabs

This tab in the File Properties dialog box shows detail information about the file.

Detail type.  This field displays more information like modified format info, type specific details, compression, etc.

Dimensions.  The file's width, height (in pixels) and color depth are display here.

Resolution.  The resolution of the image, in dpi, is given here.

Printed size.  The resulting physical page area (when printed) is displayed in this field.

Mem size.  The field displays the uncompressed file size.

Extra information. This area displays internal file information found in special file tags available in some image file formats.


Main Window - File | Properties - Database
Main Window - File | Properties - Database	Alt+Enter

    View Window - File | Properties - Database

Physical	 Details	Info	Database	Keywords	User Fields	Galleries
Click on any of the links above to display help for the different property tabs

This tab in the File Properties dialog box shows information stored in the database about the file. You can also edit the annotations stored in the database.


Main Window - File | Properties - Keywords
Main Window - File | Properties - Keywords	Alt+Enter

    View Window - File | Properties - Keywords

Physical	 Details	Info	Database	Keywords	User Fields	Galleries
Click on any of the links above to display help for the different property tabs

This tab in the File Properties dialog box shows the keywords associated with the file in the database. You can use the New button to associate new keywords with the file, and the Delete button to remove keyword associations.


Main Window - File | Properties - Info
Main Window - File | Properties - Info	Alt+Enter

    View Window - File | Properties - Info

Physical	 Details	Info	Database	Keywords	User Fields	Galleries
Click on any of the links above to display help for the different property tabs

This File Properties tab shows IPTC/NAA captions and other information such as EXIF which are stored in JPEG and TIFF files by some software. It will also show the contents of an INF file if one exists in the same folder with the same name as the image file.


Main Window - Image | Slide Show
 Main Window - Image | Slide Show	F8

     Main Window - Image | Slide Show with Options (keyboard only)	Alt+F8

This option displays the selected images, one at a time, in full-screen mode.  Use Space and Backspace to advance forward or go backward, respectively.  The Pause key can be used to pause and resume the slide show.  Press the Escape key [Esc] to exit the slide show.  To configure the various slide show options, select Options | Viewing - Slide Show.

Note: If you use the keyboard accelerator Alt+F8 to start a slide show, ThumbsPlus will display the Options | Viewing - Slideshow dialog prior to starting the slide show.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Annotate
Main Window - Thumbnail | Annotate...	Ctrl+E

    View Window - File | Thumbnail | Annotate...

Use this selection to enter or change a comment in the database about the selected file(s). The file must have a thumbnail to be able to save an annotation. The annotation may also be entered, viewed and edited using File | Properties - Database.

Annotation.  Use this edit field to enter the desired annotation text.

Replace.  Select this option to completely replace any existing thumbnail annotations.

Append.  Select this option to append the annotation text to any existing thumbnail annotations.

Leave unchanged.  Select this option to skip thumbnails that already have an annotation.


Main Window -Thumbnail | Keyword
 Main Window - Thumbnail | Assign Keywords | Other...	Ctrl+K

     View Window - File | Thumbnail | Assign Keywords | Other...

Use this menu selection to assign a keyword (or multiple keywords) to the selected thumbnail(s).  You may either select an entry from the drop-down list or type new keyword(s) in the edit field.

Note: You can assign multiple keywords to the file (or files) by separating each with a semi-colon (;).

You may search for images using keywords you have assigned by using the Edit | Find by Query - Keywords selection from the main menu.  You can have ThumbsPlus automatically assign some keywords using Options | Preferences - Keywords.


Main Window - Edit | Find Similar Images
Main Window - Edit | Find Similar Images	Ctrl+Shift+F

Use this function to find duplicate and similar images.  Any images to be found must have already been thumbnailed in ThumbsPlus.

Threshold.  Adjust this slider from top to bottom to indicate the level of similarity desired (from 0 to 100).

Threshold value.  Use this field to enter directly the threshold amount (from 0-100).

Restrict search to.

Current thumbnail list.  Select this option to search for similar images within the list of thumbnails currently displayed in the thumbnail view.

Current tree.  Select this option to search for similar images in the currently selected folder (and its sub-folders) displayed in the folder tree.

Entire database.  Select this option to search for images in the entire ThumbsPlus database.

Include file types

All file types.  Select this option to include all file types known to ThumbsPlus.

Selected types only.  Select this option to include only those file types that you have selected for display through Options | Which Files | Selected Types (See also: Options | Preferences | File Types) or Options | Which Files | By Mask...

After clicking OK, the following progress dialog will be displayed indicating the status of the search:

After completion the found images' thumbnails will display in the thumbnail view and be available under the folder tree's Found Files group, in the Similar Images icon


Main Window - Edit | Find by Query
 MainWindow - Edit | Find by Query - Filename	Ctrl+F

Filename	Keyword	User Fields	Advanced	Image Similarity

Click on the links above to see extended information on each tab.

Use this selection to search for thumbnailed files based on file name masks, keywords, user fields, advanced SQL, and optionally image similarity.  This produces a list of thumbnails for files that match the query  criteria you enter. You may also restrict the search to the current folder or the current tree if desired.

Found List.  Enter the name for this found list that will display in the folder tree under the Found Files group.  The default list name is "Found Files".

File name mask.  Enter one or more file name masks (semi-colon separated) to include in the search.  These file name masks may contain any combination of valid file name characters and wildcard characters '*'.

Restrict search to

Current folder.  Select this option to search only in the current folder.

Current Tree.  Select this option to search in the current folder and all of its sub-folders.

Entire Database.  Select this option to search the complete ThumbsPlus database.

Current Folder.  This display field shows the current folder selected at the time of the first execution of this query.

And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.

Clear.  Click this button to clear (and reset) the current tab from the search criteria.

Clear All.  Click this button to clear the criteria for all tabs.

Count.  Click this button to count the number of thumbnails that match the current criteria.  The resulting count displays below this button.

Selected Criteria.  This display field gives a textual representation of all criteria chosen so far.


Main Window - Image | Wallpaper | Center
 Main Window - Image | Wallpaper | Centered	F7

     View Window - View | Wallpaper | Centered

This option installs the first selected file in the thumbnail view as the Windows wallpaper on the desktop. If the file is not a Windows bitmap file, or if it is not on a local hard drive, it is converted to a bitmap and copied to a temporary file, which is installed.

This option centers the bitmap on the screen, and is recommended for large images.


Main Window - Image | Wallpaper | Tiled
 Main Window - Image | Wallpaper | Tiled	Shift+F7

     View Window - View | Wallpaper | Tiled

This option installs the first selected file in the thumbnail view as the Windows wallpaper on the desktop. If the file is not a Windows bitmap file, or if it is not on a local hard drive, it is converted to a bitmap and copied to a temporary file, which is installed.

This option tiles the screen with the bitmap, and is recommended for small images.


Main Window, Image | Wallpaper | Remove
Main Window - Image | Wallpaper | Remove	Ctrl+F7

View Window - View | Wallpaper | Remove

This option removes the currently displayed Windows desktop wallpaper.


Main Window - Image | TWAIN Acquire
Main Window - Image | TWAIN Acquire | [TWAIN Data Source]	Ctrl+W

This selection will acquire one or more images from the selected TWAIN data source. You must have TWAIN software from your scanner, camera, or other TWAIN data source vendor to use this option.  You will most likely receive a dialog box that lets you preview, crop and set-up the scanner. ThumbsPlus does not provide support for any devices that are not TWAIN compliant.

If you have multiple TWAIN data sources, they will appear as flyout menu items underneath this menu.

If you wish to acquire multiple images without having to open a window for each one, you can use the Image | TWAIN Multiple Acquire option to do so. Multiple Acquire also allows you to select the file name prefix, sequence number, default format and output path for both single and multiple TWAIN acquisitions.


Main Window - Image | TWAIN Multiple Acquire
Main Window - Image | TWAIN Multiple Acquire | [TWAIN Data Source]	Ctrl+Shift+W
Main Window - Image | TWAIN Setup

With TWAIN Multiple Acquire, ThumbsPlus will automatically save each scanned image, retrieved from the selected TWAIN data source, to a sequentially numbered file. You can select the desired image file save format and the output path for the acquired images.  When selecting the output path, you can enter the full path name or click the [...] button to browse for a folder.  If you enter a "." (period) in the output path field, ThumbsPlus will use the currently selected folder (from the folder tree) for the output path.  You can also set the file name prefix, suffix, next sequence number and other options by clicking on the [Setup] button.

The same file information is used for Image | TWAIN Acquire so that if you mix the two, you'll still end up with sequentially numbered files.

Note: When performing Image | TWAIN Setup from the main ThumbsPlus menu, this dialog is displayed for settings configuration only.  Clicking [OK] will save the settings without executing the TWAIN Multiple Acquire function.


Main Window - File | Print
Main Window - File | Print... 	Ctrl+P

    View Window - File | Print | Current page...

Layout	Text & Options

Click on the links above to see help for the individual tabs

This menu selection prints all selected graphics files.

Scheme.  Select and existing scheme or enter a new name for the current settings and click the [Save] button.

Printer

The currently selected printer will display in this area. Click the [Printer] button to select the desired printer.

Preview printer colors.  Check this option to preview printer color representation using color management.

Margins (inches)

Use printer defaults.  Check this option to use the default margin settings obtained from the currently selected printer.

Set the Top, Left, Right and Bottom margins on the page (in inches or centimeters).

Print size

Show all sizes.  Check this option to display in the Size dropdown list all sizes (inches and centemeters), regardless of your system's regional settings.

Size.  Select the sizing mode that ThumbsPlus will use when determining how large to scale the selected image(s) when printing.  The available options are:
Stretch to fit	Stretch the image(s) to fill the printed page (within the margins)

Image red (dpi)	Size the image(s) using resolution defined within the image(s)

Printer res (1:1)	Size the image(s) at 1:1 (based on the printer resolution)

1.5 x 2 in	Size the images(s) to specific sizes (in inches)

2 x 3 in (wallet)

3.5 x 5 in

3.5 x 6 in

4 x 5 in

4 x 6 in

4 x 7 in

4 x 10 in

5 x 7 in

8 x 10 in

11 x 14 in

16 x 20 in

7 x 10 cm

9 x 13 cm	Size the images(s) to specific sizes (in centemeters)

10 x 15 cm

10 x 13 cm

13 x 18 cm

18 x 24 cm

20 x 27 cm

20 x 30 cm

35 x 50 cm

50 x 74 cm

Custom...	Select a custom size

Images per page.  Select the number of images to print on each page (for use with the specific in inches sizes above)

Fit.  Select the fit method that ThumbsPlus will use when filling the selected print area.  The available fit methods are:

Stretch	Stretch the image(s) to fill as much of the print area
as possible while maintaining aspect ratios

Expand and crop	Expand the images(s) to fill the entire print area while
maintaining aspect ratios.  Any excess image data is
cropped before printing.

Fill completely	Stretch the image(s) to fill the entire print area without
regard to aspect ratio.

Auto rotate 90° to fit layout.  Check this option to allow ThumbsPlus to rotate the image(s) if necessary to more closely fit the selected print area, before stretching methods are applied.

Autocrop images.  Check this option to auto crop images before printing.

Pre-print batch process.  Select a predefined batch process to perform on each image before printing.

Image copies.  Enter the number of copies to print for each image.

Note: To print a catalog of thumbnails, use the Print Catalog menu option.


Main Window - Thumbnail Menu

File 	Edit 	Tree 	Image 	Thumbnail 	Options 	Window 	Help

Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Make Selected	F3	Creates thumbnails for the selected file(s).
Make from Clipboard	Ctrl+Alt+F3	Creates a thumbnail for the selected file using the image previously copied to the clipboard.
Scan Folder	Shift+Alt+F3	Scans the selected folder, creating thumbnails for all files found.
Scan Tree	Ctrl+Shift+F3	Scans the selected folder and sub-folders, creating thumbnails for all files found.
Scan Disk	Ctrl+F3	Scans the selected disk, creating thumbnails for all files found
Scan System	Alt+F3	Scans all local disks (and optionally all network drives), creating thumbnails.
Rescan
In Folder		Rescans the selected folder, creating thumbnails for all files found.
In Tree		Rescans the selected folder and sub-folders, creating thumbnails for all files found.
On Disk		Rescans all local disks (and optionally all network drives), creating thumbnails.
Remove
Selected	Shift+Del	Removes thumbnails for the selected files.
In Folder		Removes thumbnails for any files in the selected folder.
In Tree	Ctrl+Shift+Del	Removes thumbnails for any files in the selected folder and it's sub-folders.
On Disk		Removes all thumbnails for any files located on the selected disk.
Orphans	Ctrl+Del	Removes any orphaned thumbnails (options for disk, tree and folder).
Export...	Ctrl+Shift+X	Exports the selected thumbnail(s) to external .TNB files.
Annotate...	Ctrl+E	Adds or edits database annotations for the selected file(s).
Assign Keywords
[Recent Keywords]		Assigns keywords (from the recent keywords 'fly-out' menu) to the selected thumbnails.
Other	Ctrl+K	Prompts for keywords to assign to the selected thumbnail(s).
Regenerate	Shift+Alt+K	Regenerates keywords for the selected thumbnail(s).
Remove Keywords
All keywords		Removes all keywords from the selected thumbnail(s).
Selected keywords...		Prompts for keywords to be removed from the selected thumbnail(s).
Assign User Fields...	Ctrl+U	Assigns a set of user field values to the selected thumbnail(s).
Gallery
Create...		Creates a gallery from the selected thumbnail(s).
Remove		Removes the selected gallery from the database.
Remove From		Removes the selected thumbnail(s) from the gallery.
Save Order		Saves the current gallery order.
Properties		Displays the current gallery's properties dialog.
Add to Gallery		Add the selected thumbnail(s) to an existing gallery
Move to Gallery		Moves the selected thumbnail(s) to another gallery.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Make
 Main Window - Thumbnail | Make Selected	F3

This menu selection causes ThumbsPlus to read the graphic files selected in the thumbnail view and reduce them to create thumbnails, and stores the thumbnails in the ThumbsPlus database.  These miniature copies of your graphics files make life with Windows easier by helping you find specific images or drawings quickly and easily.

To create or update thumbnails for all files in the current folder, use the menu option Thumbnail | Scan Folder.  To do this scan in the current folder and its sub-folders, use the menu option Thumbnail | Scan Tree.  To scan a disk drive for all recognized files, use Thumbnail | Scan Disk.  To scan your entire PC, use Thumbnail | Scan System.  Unlike the other thumbnail scanning selections, Thumbnail | Make Selected does not check for updated files and always makes thumbnails, regardless of whether one is already stored in the ThumbsPlus database.

Note: Your original files remain unchanged and only the thumbnail sized copy is stored in the ThumbsPlus database.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Scan Folder
 Main Window - Thumbnail | Scan Folder	Shift+Alt+F3

This option creates or updates thumbnails for all recognized files in the current folder.  If a thumbnail already exists for a file, its update date and time are checked against what is stored in the Thumbs Plus database. If the file has been modified since the thumbnail was made, it is regenerated from the file.

When running ThumbsPlus in multi-threaded mode, a scan task entry with progress indicator displays in the tasks window.  You can click on this scan task entry and then select Image | Tasks | Quit Task.  If any errors occurred during the thumbnail scan, its task entry will remain in the task window.  You can then double click on the task entry to review the errors that occurred.

If not running in multi-threaded mode, a modal progress box will be displayed during the scan.  You can click Cancel in the progress box to quit making thumbnails. This progress box also contains a list box containing any errors that occurred. These errors include the file name being thumbnailed at the time of the error. If any errors occur, the progress box will remain until you click OK.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Scan Drive
 Main Window - Thumbnail | Scan Disk	Ctrl+F3

When you select Scan Disk, ThumbsPlus examines all files on the current drive looking for files that it recognizes and creates a thumbnail for each of them. If a thumbnail already exists for a file, its update date and time are checked against what is stored in the ThumbsPlus database. If the file has been modified since the thumbnail was made, it is regenerated from the file.

While running in single threaded mode, a progress box displays which indicates how much of the work is complete. This progress indicator is based on the total space in use on the drive, and is updated by the size of each file as it is examined. Since graphics files are usually grouped together, and different types of files take various amounts of time to analyze and reduce, this indicator does not really indicate the amount of progress made in time, but only how far through the disk ThumbsPlus has looked.

In multithreaded mode, no progress box is displayed.  Instead, a new task entry is added to the tasks window.  This entry displays the task name and the folder path that the task was started in.  You can double click on the task entry for a running task and ThumbsPlus will select and display the folder that the task is currently working on.

In single threaded mode, you can click Cancel in the progress box to quit making thumbnails. This progress box also contains a list box where any errors which occur are listed. These errors include the file name being "nailed" at the time of the error. If any errors occur, the progress box will remain until you click OK.

In multithreaded mode, you can right click on the task displayed in the task window and select Quit Task to cancel the task. If any errors occur, the task entry will remain in the task window.  You can double click on the task entry to review the errors that occurred.

Note: Most CD-ROM disks have useless "total size" information stored on them, so the progress percentage is essentially meaningless for these drives.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Scan Tree
 Main Window - Thumbnail | Scan Tree	Ctrl+Shift+F3

When you select Scan Tree, ThumbsPlus examines all files in the current folder and any of its sub-folders.

While running, a progress box displays which indicates how much of the work is complete. This progress indicator is based on the total space in use on the drive, and is updated by the size of each file as it is examined. Since graphics files are usually grouped together, and different types of files take various amounts of time to analyze and reduce, this indicator does not really indicate the amount of progress made in time, but only how far through the disk ThumbsPlus has looked.

When running ThumbsPlus in multi-threaded mode, a scan task entry with progress indicator displays in the tasks window.  You can click on this scan task entry and then select Image | Tasks | Quit Task.  If any errors occurred during the thumbnail scan, its task entry will remain in the task window.  You can then double click on the task entry to review the errors that occurred.

If not running in multi-threaded mode, a modal progress box will be displayed during the scan.  You can click Cancel in the progress box to quit making thumbnails. This progress box also contains a list box containing any errors that occurred. These errors include the file name being thumbnailed at the time of the error. If any errors occur, the progress box will remain until you click OK.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Remove | Selected
Main Window - Thumbnail | Remove | Selected	Shift+Delete

    View Window - File | Thumbnail | Remove Thumbnail

This menu selection removes all thumbnails that are selected. This option does not delete the corresponding files.

Note: For view windows this option removes the thumbnail for the current open file only.


Main Window, Thumbnail | Remove | In Tree
Main Window - Thumbnail | Remove | In Tree	Ctrl+Shift+Del

This option removes all thumbnails for the current folder (including any sub-folders) selected in the folder tree. The corresponding files are not deleted.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Remove | Orphans
Main Window - Thumbnail | Remove | Orphans	Ctrl+Del

This selection will remove any orphaned thumbnails (those for files that have been deleted or moved by another program) in the current tree, current disk or on all local disks.

If the option Automatically remove orphans in the Options | Preferences - Thumbnails dialog is checked, orphaned thumbnails will be removed automatically whenever you navigate to a new folder.

Some users prefer that orphans remain for deleted files.  Keeping orphans can be especially useful for those files that have been archived to tape and subsequently removed.


Main Window - Image | Contact Sheets
 Main Window - Image | Contact Sheets...	 Ctrl+Shift+F9

Output	Background & Borders	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above or the related dialog tabs to see a description of their contents.

ThumbsPlus will generate contact sheets (graphic files containing thumbnails) either from thumbnails already in the database or from the original files themselves.

There are many configuration options that you can set; these are covered in the various tabs shown above.


 Main Window - Image | Contact Sheets - Output

Output	Background & Borders	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Scheme.  After completing all contact sheet options, you may create a scheme by entering a scheme name in this field and clicking the Save button.  This saved scheme will be available for subsequent contact sheet operations.

Output folder. Select the destination folder for the contact sheets. Use the [...] button to browse for the desired folder.

File name or prefix. When a single sheet is selected, this field is used as the complete file name. When multiple sheets are created, this field is used as the file prefix, and a sequence number (001, 002, etc.) is appended.

Output dimensions. Select a size (in pixels) for the contact sheets. Several standard choices are provided, or you may define a custom size.

Output file type. Select the output file format for the contact sheet files

Make a single sheet. This option will cause ThumbsPlus to create a single contact sheet.

Overwrite existing file(s). If this option is selected and the file already exists, it is overwritten.


Main Window, Image |  Contact Sheets - Background & Borders
 Main Window - Image | Contact Sheets - Background & Borders

Output	Background & Borders	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Background. Select the type of background.

Solid fill color. Select this option to fill the contact sheet background with a solid color.

Load from file Select this option to specify a graphics file as the contact sheet background. If the file is smaller than half the dimensions of the contact sheet, it will be tiled. Otherwise, it will be stretched to fill the sheet. You can use the [...] button to browse for the desired graphics file.

Borders. Select the type of borders for the thumbnails.

None. Select this option to have NO border drawn around each contact sheet thumbnail.

Simple. Select this option to have a simple (flat) border drawn around each contact sheet thumbnail.

Sunken. Select this option to have a sunken (3D) border drawn around each contact sheet thumbnail.

Line. Select any line drawing options (applies to border drawing).

Line color. Select the color for the borders (simple style only).

Interior fill.

Color button. Select a color for filling the interior of the thumbnail boxes on the contact sheet.

Don't fill. Select this option to place the border around the thumbnail itself, rather than around the area reserved for it.


 Main Window - Image | Contact Sheets - Layout

Output	Background & Borders	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this tab to determine the layout on the page of the catalog.

Margins (units)

Select the Left, Right, Top and Bottom margins (in pixels).

Units

Pixels. This unit is the only one applicable to contact sheets.

Thumbnail size (units)

Select the Width and Height of thumbnails to print, in pixels.

Thumbnail spacing

Columns.  Enter the number of columns of thumbnails to print.

Line spacing.  Enter the spacing (in pixels) between lines of thumbnails or text.

Items selected for output.  This field displays the number of files to be processed, if using selected files or current folder.

Thumbnails per page.  This field displays the number of thumbnails to be printed on each page.

Approximate # of pages.  This field displays the approximate number of pages to be printed.  Printer margins, thumbnail dimensions, font selections and selected items for display can all effect the number of pages generated.


Main Window, Image | Contact Sheets - Header & Footer
 Main Window - Image | Contact Sheets - Header & Footer

Output	Background & Borders	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this tab to enter a header and footer for the contact sheets. Each may be multiple lines, and may contain the following tokens that ThumbsPlus will use to substitute the appropriate value:

\p	Page number.

\d	Date

\t	Time

\f	Current Folder

\jl	Left justify text

\jc	Center justiy text

\jr	Right justify text

\b	Current database name


Main Window, Image | Contact Sheets - Fonts
 Main Window - Image | Contact Sheets - Fonts

Output	Background & Borders	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this tab to select the typefaces and text colors for the catalog printout. You can select separate fonts for the header and footer, folder entries, and thumbnail captions.


 Main Window - Image | Contact Sheets - Options

Output	Background & Borders	Layout	Header & Footer	Fonts	Options

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

The Options tab provides several choices for the contents of the contact sheets.

Files to process

Selected files only.  Select this option to include only currently selected files in the thumbnail view.

Current folder.  Select this option to include files located in the currently selected folder in the folder tree.

Current tree.  Select this option to include files in the currently selected folder and all of its sub-folders.

Entire database.  Select this option to include all files that have been previously thumbnailed with ThumbsPlus.

Offline and orphan thumbnails.  Select this option to include any offline and orphan thumbnails.

Select Items.  Click this button to select which items to display beneath each thumbnail.  See also: Selecting Items for more information.

Include blank items.  Check this option to include space for selected items that are empty.  This ensures that the item formatting is consistent accross thumbnails.

Center text under thumbnails.  Check this option to center justify the selected items under each thumbnail.

New page for each folder. Check this option to start a new page for each folder or sub-folder encountered.

Print heading for each folder. Check this option to include a heading for each folder encountered.  This heading will contain the volume and folder names.

Automatically crop images. Check this option to automatically crop images before making the thumbnails. This removes excess single-color borders from images.  This option is enabled only when Rebuild thumbnails at printer resolution is checked.

Rebuild thumbs at printer resolution. Check this option for high-resolution thumbnails, which take longer to generate (the disk files must be read and reduced to the proper size), but can be much higher quality.  When this option is checked, Entire database and Offline and orphan thumbnails options under Files to process will be disabled.

Extra lines to reserve for printed selected items.  Enter the desired number of extra lines to use when formatting selected item text.  Items like annotations may have multiple lines and need extra space.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Scan System
 Main Window - Thumbnail | Scan System	Alt+F3

Use this menu selection to select the categories of drives you want to scan and thumbnail.

The following dialog box will be displayed:

To start the scan click OK and ThumbsPlus will scan each area selected for files that can be thumbnailed.


Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard...	Alt+F9

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

The Web Page Wizard, available on the Image menu, provides a way for ThumbsPlus to generate web pages of thumbnails for publishing on the World Wide Web.

The wizard will guide you through the steps required to make an on-line catalog of images, and several templates are available for different web page appearances.  The catalog can be a single page, or may span several pages.  If you select more graphics than will fit in the table, ThumbsPlus will automatically generate multiple pages; each generated page will have link to the next and previous pages.

It requires a fair amount of information to build the web pages and there are several wizard dialogs you will encounter when running the Web Page Wizard.  Click on any link above to find help for a particular dialog.

Also, to customize the appearance of the generated web pages, you can create your own Web page templates that ThumbsPlus can use.


Creating Custom Web Page Templates
Web Page Wizard - Creating Custom Web Page Templates

If you wish to create your own templates, you can do so using any text or HTML editor. ThumbsPlus replaces tokens in the template with the information you provide using the wizard, and with a table of thumbnails. You should give your templates different names, as updates to ThumbsPlus may overwrite the templates provided. Your template file should have the extension ".tpt".

ThumbsPlus recognizes the following tokens in the web page template:

{{Title}}	This text is used for the HTML title tag.
{{Heading}}	The heading for the web page. This text is shown at the top of the page.
{{Comments}}	Comments (general text). The text may contain HTML directives.
{{Thumbnails}}	The thumbnail table itself. The wizard includes options to specify the width (in columns), the height (in rows), and the border size for the thumbnail table. You can also specify the size of thumbnails, and which information will be shown for each file.
{{Page}}	Current page number.
{{Pages}}	The total number of pages generated.
{{Prev}	The beginning of the link to the previous page.
{/Prev}}	The end of the link to the previous page.
{{Next}	The beginning of the link to the next page.
{/Next}}	The end of the link to the next page.
{{Home}	The beginning of the link to the home page.
{/Home}}	The end of the link to the home page.
{{Index}}	The index links to other generated pages.
In addition to the above tokens, ThumbsPlus recognizes the following tokens in the image page template:

{{Image}}	The image itself
{{Info}}	The selected information to display with each image.
{{PrevThumb}}	The thumbnail of the previous image in relationship to the current image
{{NextThumb}}	The thumbnail of the next image in relationship to the current image.
If your template references graphics, you should either provide references which you know will be valid when transferring to your web server, or give them names that start with the template name, so that ThumbsPlus will automatically copy them to the destination folder. For example, the provided template "Fancy" has several associated graphics: FANCYLT.GIF, FANCYRT.GIF, FANCYBG.GIF, and FANCYHM.GIF. (These names are in the 8.3 short file name format; yours do not have to be.)

See also: Web Page Wizard - Style Templates and Image Page Templates.

For information on where to save your own template files, see Options | Preferences | Sets & Schemes.


Options Menu
Main Window - Options Menu

File 	Edit 	Tree 	Image 	Thumbnail 	Options 	Window 	Help

Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Preferences...	F9	Opens the preferences dialog.
Viewing...	Ctrl+J	Opens the viewing options dialog.
File Loading...	Ctrl+G	Opens the file loading options dialog.
Customize...	Ctrl+Q	Opens the menu customization dialog.
Main Font...	Ctrl+Alt+Y	Sets the font used for the folder tree and status line.
Display		Changes the thumbnail view display mode.
Small View	Ctrl+1	Small view display mode.
LargeView	Ctrl+2	Large view display mode.
Custom View	Ctrl+3	Custom view display mode.
List View	Ctrl+4	List view display mode.
Report View	Ctrl+5	Report view display mode.
Arrange Horizontal	Ctrl+Alt+H	Arranges thumbnails in the thumbnail view horizontally.
Arrange Vertical	Ctrl+Alt+V	Arranges thumbnails in the thumbnail view vertically.
Sort By		Sorts thumbnails in the thumbnail view.
Show for Files		Displays thumbnail information in the thumbnail view.
Which Files
Selected Types	Ctrl+Shift+S	Shows all selected file types in the thumbnail view.
By Mask	Ctrl+Shift+K	Shows files that match a user enter file mask.
Hidden	Ctrl+Shift+H	Shows hidden files as well as 'selected' or 'by mask'.
Child Folders	Ctrl+Shift+N	Shows files for the selected folder and it's sub-folders.
Save Startup Options	Ctrl+Shift+Y	Saves your program settings immediately.
File Plug-Ins		Sets options for any file loading plug-ins.


Main Window - Options | Preferences
 Main Window - Options | Preferences...	F9

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This selection opens a dialog box with a tab for each of several categories of preferences that you can control.

Other ThumbsPlus options are available for file viewing (Options | Viewing), file loading (Options | Loading) and user interface customization.(Options | Customize).


Main Menu - Options | Preferences - Advanced
 Main Window - Options | Preferences - Advanced

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this tab to select modify several advanced parameters for ThumbsPlus.

Memory

Maximum image bitmap cache size. For images that require less than this much memory to load, ThumbsPlus maintains an image bitmap to speed up repainting when the image must be displayed. This size is based on the in-memory size of the image, not the disk size of the image file.

Bitmap window size for larger images. For images larger than the maximum bitmap cache size, ThumbsPlus uses a bitmap "window" to display the image a piece at a time. This parameter selects the size, in kilobytes, of that window.

Maximum memory for scale-to-gray and view resampling. If either "Scale bi-level images to gray" or "Resample images when reduced" is checked under Options | Viewing | Appearance, this setting is used to determine how much memory is allocated for the resample or scale-to-gray buffer.

Maximum file size to load for preview. This setting controls which images will be loaded for display in the preview tab when a thumbnail is selected. Images with file size larger than the specified number of kilobytes will not be loaded for preview.

Maximum local database buffer cache. For local (MS Access) databases, this number will affect how much physical RAM is used by the Access database engine (Jet). Setting it to low can starve the database engine and cause poor database retrieval speed.  Setting it to high can cause overall system performance to degrade as well.  The default setting for this option is zero.  This disables the buffer size override and allows the Access database engine to calculate and set its own buffer size based on the amount of physical RAM installed on the system.

Maximum memory for image undo buffers. This setting controls how much memory ThumbsPlus will allow for multiple undo buffering for image operations in a view window.  See: View Window - Edit Undo for imformation on undo edit operations for images.

Thumbnail cache count. ThumbsPlus maintains a cache of thumbnails in memory. This field specifies the maximum number of thumbnails to cache. If you specify a larger count, the thumbnail view will display more quickly. The approximate amount of memory needed to cache a given number of thumbnails is shown below the count.

Setting this field to 1 works around problems with some display adapters and drivers.

Copy metafiles to clipboard

Using actual size. Some applications do not handle proportional metafiles from the clipboard well. If you find metafiles pasted into other applications upside down or at really unusual sizes, select this option.

Proportionally. This option works for most applications. If metafiles are pasted very large when actual size is set, try proportional instead.

Performance

Yield frequency. The frequency (in milliseconds) that ThumbsPlus will yield to other desktop applications.

Watch folders frequency. If "Watch changes in folder" is checked under Options | Preferences | Thumbnail View, this setting will control the frequency (in milliseconds) that ThumbsPlus checks watched folders for any file changes.

Use multi-threaded mode. Select this option to allow ThumbsPlus to run certain functions as background tasks instead of running them in the foreground.  Background tasks do NOT display a modal progress dialog box and therefore do not stop you from continuing to use other ThumbsPlus functions.

Background threads at normal priority. This option causes ThumbsPlus to execute background threads (tasks) at normal system priority.  By default, background threads in ThumbsPlus are started at below normal priority so as not to steal CPU time from other applications.

Use Twain Native mode.  Sets the TWAIN acquisition mode to native rather than memory.

Disable banded printing.  Sends printed output to printer in a single device output, instead of breaking images into bands or sections before sending to the printer.

Bypass Internet proxy. Check this option to attempt to connect directly to a specified internet host when performing functions such as File | Online Photos | (Site) | Upload selected... and Help | Program Updates....

Show library warnings when loading files. Check this box to receive more detailed warning when ThumbsPlus encounters unusual files. The types for which this "warning" feature works are: TIFF, JPEG, CGM, PICT and WPG.

Autocrop tolerance.  Enter a value between 0 and 250 for RGB color range matching while autocropping


Main Window, Options | Customize - Colors
Main Window - Options | Customize - Colors	Ctrl+Q

View Window - View | Customize - Colors

Menus     Toolbar     Colors     Info Colors

Click on any of the links above to see other customizable settings.

Use this dialog tab to select the colors for the various ThumbsPlus user interface elements. To modify a color, simply click on the button and select a new color from the color picker dialog.

Use thumbnail view colors in folder tree and other panes. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus use the above "Thumbnail view" color settings for the folder tree and tasks, preview and info tabs text and background colors.

Use window skins. Check this option to use an image file for the background of all ThumbsPlus dialog boxes.  Click the [Select] button to configure the window skin settings.

Use Defaults. Click this button to clear any color settings changes and restore the default settings.

Like V3. Click this button to clear any color settings changes and use the old style (like version 3) color settings.


Main Menu - Options | Preferences - Keywords
 Main Window - Options | Preferences - Keywords

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

ThumbsPlus can automatically generate keywords for images when making thumbnails. Use the selections in this tab to control that process.

Complete file name. Assigns a keyword based on the file name of each image.

File type. Assigns a keyword based on the file type of each file (i.e., .JPG).

Words in file name. Assigns a keyword based on each word in the file name of each image.

Words in file name (ignore numbers). Assigns a keyword based on each word in the file name (ignoring any embedded numeric characters) of each image.

Folder names in path. Assigns a keyword based on each folder name in the path name of each image.

Words in folder names. Assigns a keyword based on each word in each folder name in the path name of each image.

Attributes (color, etc.). Assigns a keyword for color and encoding attributes of the file; for example: raster, vector, palette, RGB, grayscale.

IPTC keywords. JPEG and TIFF images can have IPTC/NAA keywords already in them. Selecting this option will cause those keywords to be automatically copied to the ThumbsPlus database.

Image Comment. Assigns keywords based on each word in the comments residing in each image (for GIF, JPEG and TIFF file types).

Create drop-down lists for keywords. You can elect whether or not ThumbsPlus generates drop-down lists of available keywords when finding or assigning keywords. It's especially useful to turn this option off if you have thousands of keywords -- this speeds up both the assigning and lookup operations.


Main Window - Options | Viewing - Monitor
Main Window - Options | Viewing - Monitor Gamma	Ctrl+J

View Window - View | Preferences - Monitor Gamma	F9

Appearance     Window     Color Management     Monitor Gamma     Slide Show     Other

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This tab allows you to calibrate the gamma correction value for your monitor.

Enable Windows color management (ICM). Check this option and then click the [Setup...] button to configure Windows Color Management in ThumbsPlus.

Monitor gamma value. A gamma value of zero (0.0) means that ThumbsPlus will not gamma correct any image.

Simply adjust the scroll bar, using either the arrows at the ends or by dragging the central box, until the central gray square is as close as possible to the color of the surrounding pattern. For best results, calibrate in a darkened room.

As some monitors exhibit different characteristics at different display resolutions and color depths, ThumbsPlus will save a different gamma value for each combination.

Some image types have a specific gamma value for which they are corrected (for example, GIF files are corrected for a monitor gamma of 2.0). If you choose to use gamma correction, you need to set each type appropriately, from the Assumed Gamma dialog box. Unless this value is set for a specific file type, it will not be adjusted.


Main Menu - Options | Preferences - File Types
 Main Window - Options | Preferences - File Types

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

File types to show in thumbnail view. This list shows all configured file types (by category)  that can be shown in ThumbsPlus. The check box be side the type indicates whether or not the type will be shown in the thumbnail view. You can quickly check all types within a particular category by checking the box beside the category name.  If the category's checkbox is checked and has a gray background, only some of its file types have been selected for display.

New. Opens the File Type Configuration dialog box so you can define a new file type for ThumbsPlus to handle.

Edit. Opens the File Type Configuration dialog box to change the configuration of a specific file type.

Remove. Removes the file type configuration from ThumbsPlus.

Select All. Select this option to show all configured file types in ThumbsPlus. Files that are not recognized will not have thumbnails, but you can move, copy, delete and rename these files.

Clear All. Select this option clear all selected file types, so you can start selecting from scratch.

Associate Selected Types with ThumbsPlus. Check this option to associate the selected (types with a "check" beside them) file types with ThumbsPlus.  This will cause ThumbsPlus to be the default viewer for the selected file types.  File types may be individually associated with ThumbsPlus by using the Associate with ThumbsPlus option on the File Type Configuration dialog box.

Default file type for saving new files.  Select the desired file type to be used for saving new files.


File Type Configuration
Main Window - Options | Preferences | File Types - New/Edit

Thumbnail Popup Menu | Configure Type	Alt+Y

This dialog box (available from the Options | Preferences - File Types tab by clicking the New or Configure button) allows you to define a new file type for ThumbsPlus to support, or to modify the configuration of an existing file type.

ThumbsPlus can recognize any file type it supports internally, regardless of its specific name or extension. However, for files accessed through external filters or OLE, the correct extension may be necessary.

Extension. Enter the one, two or three character extension (without the period) for the file type to define.

Description. Enter a description of the file type. If the file type is equivalent to another (see below) you can leave the description blank --ThumbsPlus will automatically use the description of the base file type.

Equivalent to type. If the file type is equivalent to a type already known to ThumbsPlus, select that type here. This will disable most of the other entries in the dialog box, since the access to the type is defined through its base type.

Category. Select the category for this file type. This category is used in grouping the types on the Options | Preferences - File Types tab.

Class. Select the type of file. For most purposes, Vector and Raster are appropriate. Several of the types give more information about the type of file and may be useful for categorizing OLE-based files. OLE-based types not classed as Raster are loaded as Vector.

Load file using. Select the method that ThumbsPlus should use to load the file:

None	ThumbsPlus should not attempt to load the file. It can still be shown in the thumbnail view, with an appropriate icon, if Edit file using is set to Association.
Internal	ThumbsPlus should use its internal loading routines to load the file. The file must be recognizable by ThumbsPlus.
Filter	Use a Aldus Rev. 1 filter to load the file. The next field (>>) should be used to select the filter; if the list is blank, use the Hunt for filters button to search for filters on your system.
OLE	ThumbsPlus should attempt to attach to an OLE server for the file type to render it as a metafile or bitmap. Select the appropriate server from the next (>>) field.
Susie Plug-in	ThumbsPlus will attempt to load the image using the specified Susie Plug-in.
Cerious Plug-in	ThumbsPlus will attempt to load the image using the specified ThumbsPlus Plug-in.  You can write your own ThumbsPlus Plug-in for your own proprietary file type by using our Plug-in API.  For more info, visit our web site at:  http://www.cerious.com.
Photoshop Plug-in	ThumbsPlus will attempt to call an Adobe Photoshop Plug-in to load the file type.  Adobe Photoshop Plug-ins are available only on systems with Adobe Photoshop installed.
LEAD Tools	ThumbsPlus will use the LEAD Tools library to load the file image data.
Poly Image	ThumbsPlus will use the Poly Image library to load the file image data.
Edit file using. Select the method that ThumbsPlus should use to edit the file. Note that raster images may be edited to some degree from within a ThumbsPlus view window.

None	ThumbsPlus should not attempt to launch an editor for this file type.
Association	Use the Windows File association to launch the program to open the file. If you don't select a specific item from the next list (>>), ThumbsPlus will use the file extension to attempt to locate an association.
Command	Enter a specific command to edit the file. You can use '%F' in the string as a token to be replaced by the file name.
Association (Edit)	Use the Windows File association to launch the program to edit the file. If you don't select a specific item from the next list (>>), ThumbsPlus will use the file extension to attempt to locate an association.
Print file using. Select a method for printing the file type. If it can be loaded into ThumbsPlus, the Internal method will work. Otherwise, you can disable printing the file type by selecting None.

Associate with ThumbsPlus. Check this option to associate the file type with ThumbsPlus. File types that have been associated with ThumbsPlus will be opened using the view utility tpview.exe when they are double-clicked on in Windows Explorer.

Hunt for filters & plug-ins. Click on this button to search for Aldus Rev. 1 filters and Adobe Photoshop Plug-ins on your system.  Aldus Rev 1 filters are available when Load file using is set to: Filter.  Adobe Photoshop Plug-ins are available (on systems with Adobe Photoshop) when Load file using is set to: Photoshop Plug-in.


Main Window - Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This option displays a dialog box from which you can control the display of the thumbnail view and thumbnails in ThumbsPlus. Note that many of these options can be controlled more quickly using the Options | Displayl, Options | Sort By, Options | Which Files, and Options | Show for Files menu selections.

Order by

Selects the primary and secondary sort orders in which files are displayed in the thumbnail view. You can sort by Name, Numeric name, Type, File Size, Date, Width, Height, Orientation, Image size, Similarity, Path or None (unsorted). You can also change the sort method using the Options | Sort by menu selection.  You may also sort in descending order Descending, with Thumbnails first or Thumbnails last.

File options

Name mask. Check this option and enter a mask that ThumbsPlus should use when displaying files in the thumbnail view.  This mask will override the types selected in the File Types dialog box.  These items may also be selected using the Options | Which files menu selection.

Include hidden files. Causes ThumbsPlus to display system and hidden files in addition to normal files.

Watch changes in folder. Uncheck this option to disable ThumbsPlus watching for updated, new or deleted files in the current folder. This may improve performance in folders with many files.

Always show child folders. This option turns "Child folder" viewing on for all folders and drives -- too slow for general use, but added by request.  To display the current folder only with files from its child folders, use Options | Which Files | Child Folders, or right-click the folder and pick Child Folders from the context menu.

Mouse wheel behavior

Use windows mouse settings.  Check this option to Window's settings for mouse wheel scrolling.

Always scroll one row.  Check this option to only scroll one row at a time when using the mouse scroll wheel.

Thumbnail display.

Select the thumbnail view to configure by picking from the Thumbnail Display dropdown list.

Select the items you wish to view for each file by checking the options Thumbnail, Name, Path, File Size, Date/Time, Dimensions, Resolution, Annotation, Keywords.  These items may also be selected using the Options | Show for files menu selection.

Font. Use this button to specify a custom font for each of the five available thumbnail views

Size %. You can also enlarge or reduce the thumbnails on the fly.  This is especially useful for very high resolution displays (1240x1024 and higher), or if you want to see a lot of thumbnails simultaneously. The stretching operation makes the thumbnail view display slightly slower.  The size percentage ranges from 10% to 400%.

The font selection and thumbnail size percentage selections may also be made from the thumbnail view caption bar.

Layout. Select the desired layout for the thumbnail view.  Available layouts are either Vertical or Horizontal.

Show grid. Select this option to display a grid around the thumbnail area in the thumbnail view.

Expanded. Select this option to enlarge (when displaying) thumbnails that are smaller than the currently stored thumbnail dimensions.

3D thumbnail frame.  Select this option to display a three dimensional border around the edges of thumbnails.

Enable popup tips. Select this option to display popup image tips in the thumbnail view.  Click [Setup] to configure options for the popup image tips.

Autoscroll partial thumbnails. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus automatically scroll the thumbnail view when you click on a thumbnail that is not completely visible in the thumbnail view.

Enable color management. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus use Windows Color Management when displaying thumbnails.


Main Menu - Options | Preferences - General
 Main Window - Options | Preferences - General

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Default Action. Selects the default action (taken for a double-click with the left mouse button). Select one of the following actions:

View Image
Edit Image
Copy to Clipboard

Minimize ThumbsPlus. Selects times when you would like the ThumbsPlus main window to automatically reduce to an icon for less screen clutter.  You may elect to minimize ThumbsPlus at any of the following times:

When viewing an image
When editing an image
When copying to clipboard

Save files in. Selects the default output location for any "Save as" operation from a view window. Select one of the following settings:

Currently opened  folder. 	Use the current path from the main ThumbsPlus window.

Last saved folder location 	Remember each time you save a file, and use that location as the default the next.

Allow folder operations (rename, delete, copy, move). Allow file and folder operations from within ThumbsPlus.  The allowed operations include: rename, delete, copy and move.

Show ThumbsPlus items in Explorer right-click menus. Enables ThumbsPlus menu items (for making and removing thumbnails, viewing files, etc.) on Windows Explorer's file and folder context menus.

Use Windows recycle bin settings. Causes ThumbsPlus to use the Windows settings for deleting files (or moving them to the recycle bin).  If checked (and the recycle bin is enabled in Windows), ThumbsPlus will move files to the Recycle Bin, rather than directly deleting them from the disk.

Automatically crop images when copying to clipboard. Automatically crop (remove all continuous border of the same color) images when copying them to the Windows clipboard.  This cropping does NOT alter the original image file, only the resulting clipboard image.

Show exact file sizes.  Selecting this option will display the actual file size, rather than a rounded file size based on a scale of Kb, Mb, and Gb.  This affects file size display on the thumbnail view, printed catalogs, contact sheets and generated web pages.

Formatted numbers.  Check this option to format file sizes with commas.  This option is disabled if Show exact file sizes is unchecked.

Enable tracking of file and folder changes when ThumbsPlus isn't running. Enables folder monitoring while ThumbsPlus is not running. If you rename, move or delete folders under Windows Explorer while ThumbsPlus is not running and this option is checked, the ThumbsPlus folder monitor will log the changes and the next time ThumbsPlus is started it will apply the changes to the open database.

Use wizard dialogs for catalogs, contact sheets and batch processing. Causes ThumbsPlus to display "Wizard Style" dialogs for most multi-step functions (Eg.Batch Process, etc.).  If unchecked, ThumbsPlus will display multi-tabbed dialog boxes instead.

Show database activity indicators on the status bar. This option causes ThumbsPlus to display 'LED' indicators on the main status line.  The first indicator blinks 'YELLOW' to signal a SQL command execution is occurring.  The second indicator blinks 'GREEN' when data is being fetched from the database.

Retain original file date/time when quick process turning or converting.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus keep the file's original date and time when performing a Quick Process Turn or Quick Convert.


Main Menu - Options | Preferences - Confirmations
 Main Window - Options | Preferences - Confirmations

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This menu selection allows you to configure which items ThumbsPlus prompts for confirmation. For example, if you want ThumbsPlus to make sure before deleting files, that option should be checked. Each option determines whether or not ThumbsPlus will display a dialog box to confirm the listed operation after it is selected.

File & Folder Confirmations

Deleting files. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before deleting files.

Copying files. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before copying files.

Moving files. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before moving files.

Deleting Zip file folders. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before deleting ZIP files.

Overwriting existing files. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before overwriting files from File | Save As.

Deleting system or hidden files. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before deleting files marked as "system" or "hidden".

Deleting galleries. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation when deleting a gallery.

Changing wallpaper. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before changing the Windows wallpaper setting.

Other Prompts & Confirmations

Prompt to save when closing modified images. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus prompt you when closing a view window with a modified image.

Prompt for file options when quick converting files.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus prompt you for any file options (when saving to types that require format options) when quick converting file types.  If unchecked, ThumbsPlus will use the last used file options as default settings.

Prompt for output settings during quick batch process.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus prompt you output settings when running a quick batch process on a group of selected files.  If unchecked, ThumbsPlus will use the output settings from the selected batch.

Confirm when removing thumbnails from the database. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation when a remove thumbnail operation is about to be processed.

Prompt to save modified batch sets. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt to save batch sets that have been modified.

Prompt when closing ThumbsPlus. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus prompt you to confirm program shutdown.


Main Window - Options | Folder Font
Main Window - Options | Main Font...	Ctrl+Alt+Y

This selection allows you to select a font for display of the folder tree and status line.

Note: The same font is used for all of these user interface elements.

See also:  Setting Fonts.


Main Window - Options | File Loading
Main Window - Options | File Loading	Ctrl+G

JPEG	EXIF	Fonts	WP Graphics

UUdecode	PhotoCD	Raw	GIF	Movie / Sound

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

The File Loading dialog box provides options for loading several of the file types recognized by ThumbsPlus. Each of the links (listed above) provides configuration options for specific file types.


Main Window - Options | File Loading - GIF

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

This tab sets the options for loading GIF files.

Viewing options. Select how ThumbsPlus displays GIF files.

Final appearance. Only the final appearance of an animated GIF file is displayed; intermediate frames are played in memory, but only the final images shows in the view window.

Images only. All graphic images from the GIF file are loaded as pages. See Edit | Next Page., Edit | Previous Page.

Play to window. An animated GIF file plays into the view window so you can see the changes as they would appear in Netscape or any other browser. You can set several playing options (below) to control how the animation progresses.

Thumbnail options. Select the disposition of GIF files to use for making thumbnails.

Final appearance. The thumbnail is generated from the appearance of the GIF file after all frames have played.

First image only. Only the first image is used to generate the thumbnail.

Playing options. Select how ThumbsPlus plays GIF files (options for Play to window).

Disable input waits. GIF files can have blocks which specify that the animation should wait for user input. This option disables those waits.

Disable timed delays. GIF files can have specific timed delays between image or text displays; this option will ignore such delays and play frames as fast as possible.

Ignore text blocks. This option causes ThumbsPlus to ignore any displayable text blocks in the GIF file.

Defer erasures. Do not erase background while playing.

Disable looping. This option causes the GIF file to play once through the animation and stop.


Main Window - Options | File Loading - Raw

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

This tab sets the options for loading raw grayscale or RGB files.

Raw file types. This is a list of all defined raw file formats. You may select an item from this list, then click Edit to modify it or Delete to remove it. You can click New to add a new raw format. Both Edit and New use the Edit Raw Type dialog box to configure the file type.


Edit Raw Type
Main Window - Options | File Loading - Raw - Edit Raw Type

Use this dialog box to add a new raw file type, or to modify an existing raw type.

Name. Select a name for the format.

Width. The width of the image, in pixels.

Height. The height of the image, in pixels.

Replicate scan rows. Some raw types (notably some files generated by ocular cameras) store only every other scan line (i.e., the pixel shape is rectangular). This option will cause ThumbsPlus to write each scan line twice, restoring the proper aspect ratio.

Pixel format. Select the style of pixels in the raw image. ThumbsPlus can handle several pixel formats directly:

8-bit gray. Each pixel of the image is represented by a single byte which represents the level of gray. Pixel values range from 0 (black) to 255 (white).

16-bit gray. Each pixel is represented by two bytes, with the least significant byte first (Intel byte order). Pixel values range from 0 (black) to 65535 (white).

16-bit gray (swap). Each pixel is represented by two bytes, with the most significant byte first (Motorola format). Pixel values range from 0 (black) to 65535 (white).

24-bit RGB. Each pixel is represented by three bytes: one byte each for red, green and blue, in that order.

24-bit BGR. Each pixel is represented by three bytes: one byte each for blue, green and red, in that order.

32-bit RGB. Similar to 24-bit RGB, except that each pixel is represented by four bytes. The fourth byte is usually an alpha channel, which is ignored by ThumbsPlus.

32-bit BGR. Like 24-bit BGR, except that a fourth byte is present (usually an alpha channel) which is ignored by ThumbsPlus.

Note: By default, the alpha channel (ignored by ThumbsPlus) is assumed to be the fourth byte in 32-bit RGB or BGR formats. However, if your files are stored in ARGB or ABGR order, you can set the Bytes to Skip at start to one (1), and the Bytes to Skip at end to minus one (-1). This will cause ThumbsPlus to ignore the first byte in each four-byte pixel, rather than the last.

Bytes to skip. Some raw formats contain extra data at the beginning or end of the file, or both. Use these fields to enter the amount of data to skip at the start or end of the file.

Signed pixels. If the pixels in the raw file are stored as signed numbers, check this box. You can also decide to ignore negative pixels using the option below.

Auto adjust range. If you select this option, ThumbsPlus will first calculate the entire range of used pixel values, then scale each pixel accordingly (for contrast stretching).

Clip negative pixels. Select this item to ignore negative pixels (set to zero).

Separated planes. For RGB, RGBA, BGR, BGRA inputs, selecting this option indicates that the information is stored in separate planes (i.e., all red pixels, then all green pixels, then all blue pixels for RGB).

Expected file size. Using the entries in the other fields, ThumbsPlus computes the expected size on disk of the defined type and displays it here. For ThumbsPlus to recognize the file, its size must match this value.


Main Window - Options | Loading - JPEG
Main Window - Options | File Loading - JPEG

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

This tab sets the options for loading JPEG files.

Color depth

The JPEG library allows you to select how to load JPEG files. JPEG files are always stored as 24-bit (truecolor) images, but the library can automatically dither them to 8-bits for displaying on 256-color devices. This dithering will interfere with editing, however: if you want to edit JPEG files on an 8-bit display, it is best to load them as Truecolor even though they don't look as nice. In other words, on an 8-bit (256 color) display, JPEGs are best loaded for viewing as 8-bit color, but best loaded for conversion or editing as 24-bit (Truecolor). For quick viewing on 8-bit displays, load them as Grayscale.

The Two-Pass Quantization and Dither options apply only if loading as 8-bit color; deselecting either or both will speed the load and conversion to 8-bit, at a sacrifice in appearance. The JPEG load dithering is similar to the Floyd-Steinberg dithering available as an option in the Color Depth dialog box.

The Full, 1/2, 1/4 and 1/8 size options allow you to load a JPEG file at smaller than its actual dimensions. This speeds up loading considerably, and allows you to load files that are too large for your system's memory configuration.

Action to take when rotating or flipping JPEG files with dimensions not divisible by 8.

Ask for each file.  Thumbsplus will prompt for each file

Always trim.  ThumbsPlus will always trim the JPEG to dimensions that are divisible by 8.

Always skip.  ThumbsPlus will skip the file instead trimming the dimensions.

Note:  The preceeding option applies to lossless JPEG rotation done via Main Window - Image | Quick Process | Turn


Main Window - Options | File Loading - WPG
Main Window - Options | File Loading - WP Graphics

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

Use this tab to set options for rendering WordPerfect graphic (WPG) files.

Ignore Shadows. If this box is checked, ThumbsPlus will not render object shadows in WPG files. This may speed processing, and may make files easier to edit in other (non-WP) applications.

Ignore Gradient fills. If this box is checked, ThumbsPlus will not render gradient fills. This will greatly speed processing and reduce the size of resultant metafiles (either copied to the clipboard or saved to disk).

Ignore Text objects. Check this box if you don't want text information in WPG files rendered.

Use TrueType fonts only. Check this box to force ThumbsPlus to select a TrueType font for any text in WPG files. This option is meaningless if Ignore Text Objects is checked.


Main Window - Options |  File Loading - TrueType Fonts
Main Window - Options | File Loading - Fonts

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

Use this tab to control the actions taken when ThumbsPlus thumbnails and views TrueType fonts.

Thumbnail sample text. This text is used to create the thumbnail for the font. By default, this is blank and the font name alone is used to create the thumbnail.

Include font name. Checking this box causes ThumbsPlus to use both the sample text above and the name of the font for the thumbnail.

Window sample text. This text is displayed at the bottom of the font view window to show an example of how the text looks with several characters together.


Main Window - Options | File Loading - UUdecode
Main Window - Options | File Loading | UUdecode

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

This tab sets the options for loading UUEncoded files.

When to uudecode

On demand only. ThumbsPlus will uudecode files only when double-clicked to view. This limits the times that ThumbsPlus processes the files.

When making thumbnails. ThumbsPlus will uudecode when making thumbnails.

Where to uudecode

Temporary file. ThumbsPlus will uudecode into a temporary file, which will be removed after the thumbnail is made or image viewed.

Original folder. ThumbsPlus will uudecode into the original folder (where the UUE file resides), using the file name specified in the UUE file.

Specific folder. ThumbsPlus will uudecode into a specific folder, using the file name specified in the UUE file. You can use the [...] button to select a folder.

Delete original file when decode is successful. ThumbsPlus will remove the .UUE (or .001) and subsequent (.002, etc.) files after successfully decoding the file. Should the decode produce any warnings or errors, the original will not be removed. This option is not available when decoding to temporary files.

Overwrite existing files with the same name. ThumbsPlus will automatically overwrite any file of the same name. This option is not available when decoding to temporary files.


Main Window - Options | File Loading - PhotoCD

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

This tab selects the options for loading PhotoCD images.

The Size to load section allows you to select the desired size of the loaded image. Note that the horizontal and vertical sizes will be reversed for images stored in portrait orientation.

The Color format section allows you to select the color resolution of the loaded image.

Note: You can select the size to load PhotoCD images on-the-fly by holding down the following keys when double-clicking:

Ctrl	Base*4 (1536 x 1024)

Alt	Base / 4 (384 x 256)

Ctrl+Alt	Base (768 x 512)


Main Window - Options | Customize - Toolbar
Main Window - Options | Customize - Toolbar	Ctrl+Q

View Window - View | Customize - Toolbar

Menus     Toolbar     Colors     Info Colors

Click on any of the links above to see other customizable settings.

Use this dialog box to configure the ThumbsPlus toolbar to your liking. Most menu commands are available as toolbar buttons; simply drag the ones you want to the place you want on the toolbar.  You can also move buttons on the toolbar, or drag them completely off to remove them. Buttons may only be on the toolbar once - if you add a button a second time, it will move to the new position.  Also, You can double-click or right-click the toolbar to open this dialog box.

There is no keyboard interface for customizing the toolbar (toolbars are for mice, aren't they?)

Buttons. Shows the buttons available for the toolbar. Drag a button to or from the toolbar to add or remove it.

Large buttons. Selects the larger size of toolbar button (32x32 pixels), versus the small version (20x20 pixels).

Text on buttons. Adds descriptive text (as in Tool Tips) to each button. This makes the buttons quite a bit larger.

Enable tool tips. Enables tool tips, which will describe each button if you leave the cursor over it for about a second.

Truecolor buttons. Uses the truecolor (24-bit) version of the toolbar buttons.

Focus edges only. ThumbsPlus will only draw the button edges for the button with current mouse focus.

Version 3 buttons. Uses "old-style" version 3.x toolbar buttons.

External Program. Click this button to add an external program to the toolbar. This starts the External Program dialog where you can set up how ThumbsPlus launches the program.

Note: This button only adds programs to the toolbar.  To modify any existing program buttons, double-click on  to modify it's options.


Main Window - Options | Customize Toolbar | External Program
Main Window - Options | Customize - Toolbar - External Program

When in toolbar editing mode, you can also double-click any external program icon to modify its behavior.

Either enter the complete path to the Program to Run, or click on the browse [...] button to locate it. You may locate either the program itself or a shortcut to it.

Then, select the Icon to be shown as the toolbar button for the application, and enter Toolbar & Tooltip Text for the application

If the program is capable of opening multiple files simultaneously, click on the Accepts Multiple Files check box. If DDE is also used, then ThumbsPlus will send a separate DDE command for each selected file; otherwise, the selected file names will be passed on the command line, each enclosed in double-quotes, separated by spaces.

If the program is a 16-bit executable, or for some other reason does not accept quoted long file names as parameters, check Use Short File Names.

Some programs can operate on files in a specified folder. If you wish to pass the folder name to the external program when no files are selected, check Pass folder name if no files are selected.

If the program responds to DDE commands for opening files, click on the Use DDE Command check box. In this case, you'll also need to fill in the DDE fields to show information for how ThumbsPlus should conduct a DDE conversation with the application.

Enter any required command line options for starting the program in the DDE Options field. Specify the application's service name in the DDE Service field. The DDE Topic field should contain the topic for the DDE conversation (which is almost always System). In DDE Command, place the command that ThumbsPlus should send for each file. Use the string '%s' to represent where ThumbsPlus should place the file name.

All of these fields are often contained in the Windows registry for many applications; check the file extension for the file type in HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT. If this key has a sub-key called 'shell\Open\ddeexec', then the application is probably capable of opening files using DDE. Sometimes, the default value for the extension key has an entry itself that has the shell\Open\ddexec. For example, if the application 'XYZ Image Editor' uses a default extension of .XYZ, you could find either of these situations in the registry:

HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\.xyz\shell\Open\ddexec
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\.xyz	value: XYZ.Image
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\XYZ.Image\shell\Open\ddeexec

In either case, the information in the shell\Open sub-key can be used to specify the DDE fields:

...\shell\Open\command	Has any DDE Options required for running the program (often -dde, /DDE or /N).
...\shell\Open\ddeexec	Has the DDE Command to run; i.e., [Open("%1")] or [FileOpen("%1")]
...\shell\Open\ddeexec\application	Specifies the DDE Service name to use.
...\shell\Open\ddeexec\topic	Shows the DDE Topic that should be specified (usually System).

Note that ThumbsPlus uses "%s" rather than "%1" to represent the program name.


Main Window - File | Database | Edit Keywords
Main Window - File | Database | Edit Keywords	Ctrl+Shift+D

Use this option to edit the keywords in the database. You may select one or more keywords in the list at the left, then click on the buttons on the right to operate on them.

Delete. Removes the keywords from the database. This also disassociates any thumbnails from the keyword.

Change. You can type a new value for the keyword. It will remain associated with all thumbnails that were associated with the original. This button is only available if a single keyword is selected.

Combine. You may combine multiple keywords to a single database entry. Extra associations (i.e., references to more than one of the selected entries) will be dropped. This button is only available if multiple keywords are selected.


Main Window - File | Database | Export...

Use this function to export a database (or a portion of a database) to a comma-delimited text file. This is useful for transferring data into other database programs, and for combining or splitting existing databases.

Output file. Enter the output file name, or click on the [...] button to browse for one.

What to export

Selected files only. This exports database records for only the selected files.

Current tree. This exports database records for all thumbnails in the currently-selected folder and any child folders.

Entire database. This exports all records in the database.

Fields to include

Keywords. Keywords for each thumbnail are included in the export file, as a single field with keywords separated by semi-colons.

Annotations. The database annotation for each thumbnail is included.

User Fields. Any user field data and user field definitions (from File | Database | User Fields) are included.

Thumbnails. The thumbnail bitmap itself is included. This is generally useful only for importing back into ThumbsPlus.

Galleries.  Any galleries, in which exported thumbnails exist, will be included in the export.

Write field headers. Check this option to make ThumbsPlus write a first record that lists each field name being exported. This is useful when importing the file into another application, such as Microsoft Access.

Append to file. If you select this option and the export file name already exists, ThumbsPlus will add any records to the end of the file (rather than replacing it).

V3.0 compatible format.  The exported database file will be compatible with ThumbsPlus version 3.x.  All thumbnail similarity metrics will be excluded from the export.

See also: File | Database | Import.


Main Window - File | Database | Import...

Use this function to import an exported ThumbsPlus database text file.

Input file. Enter the name of the file to import, or click the [...] button to browse your system for an import file.

Duplicate actions

Always replace. Imported thumbnail records replace any existing database thumbnail records.

Replace if newer. Imported thumbnail records only replace database records if the thumbnail date in the import file is newer than the database.

Never replace. If a database record already exists, the import record is ignored.

Combine keywords. When an import record replaces a database record, the keywords from both the database and the import record are assigned.

Make new thumbnail images. ThumbsPlus will generate new thumbnails for all files on volumes that are currently accessible. When this option is cleared, ThumbsPlus will use the thumbnail from the import file (if available), or use a blank (solid black) thumbnail.

Skip orphans (file no longer exists). ThumbsPlus will check (for volumes currently available) whether the file still exists before importing the thumbnail.

See also: File | Database | Export.


Main Window - Options | Display

You may quickly change the thumbnail display in the thumbnail view using any of these selections (small, large, custom, list, or report). The displayed size for each thumbnail view is customizable and is relative to the size of the thumbnails as created by File | New Database.

These selections are also available from Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View.


Main Window - Options | Sort By

Select the field on which to sort the thumbnail view (Name, Numeric Name, Type, File Size, Date, Width, Height, Orientation, Dimensions, Resolution, Similarity, Path, Unsorted, Random or User Fields.  You may pick a primary and secondary sort item.

To pick a primary sort item from the menu, simply select it from the menu.

To pick a secondary sort item, hold the [Ctrl] key down while you select it from the menu.  You may also sort in Descending order, with Thumbnails first or Thumbnails last in the view.

User fields that are currently displayed on the thumbnail view may also be selected for sorting.

These selections are also available from Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View.


Main Window - Options | Show for Files

Main Window - Options | Which Files | Hidden	Ctrl+Shift+H

Select the items to be shown for each file in the thumbnail view (Thumbnail, Name, Path, File Size, Date/Time, Dimensions, Resolution, Annotation, Keywords and User Fields). You may also select whether to include hidden and system files.

Note: Only 3 user fields may be shown on the thumbnail view.

These selections are also available from Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View.


Main Window - Options | Which Files | All Files
Main Window - Options | Which Files | Selected Types	Ctrl+Shift+S

This option shows all selected file types in the thumbnail view.
You can select which types are shown using Options | Preferences - File Types.

See also: Options | Which Files | By Mask.


Main Window - Options | Which Files | Hidden
Main Window - Options | Which Files | Hidden	Ctrl+Shift+H

This option toggles whether or not ThumbsPlus shows hidden and system files in the thumbnail view. When shown, their captions are shown in red.


Main Window - Options | Which Files | Child Folders
Main Window - Options | Which Files | Child Folders	Ctrl+Shift+N

This option toggles displaying in the thumbnail view all files from the current folder and its sub-folders. Whenever you change folders, this option is turned off (to avoid the extremely long delays when changing to a folder with many sub-folders).  To always show child folders without having to select this option, check the Always show child folders option on the Options | Preferences - Thumbnail Views settings tab.


Main Window - Window Menu

File 	Edit 	Tree 	Image 	Thumbnail 	Options 	Window 	Help

Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Show All Views	F4	Shows all open view windows.
Minimize All Views	Ctrl+Shift+F4	Minimizes all open view windows.
Tile Views	Shift+F12	Tiles all open view windows.
Synch Views	Ctrl+Shift+F12	Sychronizes all open view windows.
Close All Views	Shift+F4	Closes all open view windows.
Toolbar	Ctrl+Shift+B	Toggles the display of the main window toolbar.
Status Line	Ctrl+Shift+L	Toggles the display of the main window status line.
Refresh Thumbnails	F5	Rereads the current folder and refreshes the thumbnail view.
Open New Window	Ctrl+Alt+N	Opens a new instance of ThumbsPlus.


Main Window - Window | Show All Views
Main Window - Window | Show All Views	F4

View Window - View | Show All Views	Ctrl+Shift+F4

Use this menu selection to display all open view windows (in the order they were opened). Minimized (iconized) windows are restored; hidden windows are brought to the front.


Main Window - Window | Close All
Main Window - Window | Close All	Shift+F4

Closes all opened view windows. If you have selected confirmation on closing modified windows from the General Options dialog box, ThumbsPlus will prompt you before closing any modified windows.


Main Window - Window | Minimize All
Main Window - Window | Minimize All Views	Ctrl+Shift+F4

View Window - Window | Minimize All Views

Use this menu selection to minimize (reduce to an icon) all open view windows.

If Create task bar entries for view windows is checked under Options | Viewing - Other, then view window icons will display on the Windows task bar for easy access.


Main Window - Window | Toolbar
Main Window - Window | Toolbar	Ctrl+Shift+B

This menu option toggles the toolbar on or off.


Main Window - Window | Status Line
Main Window - Window | Status Line	Ctrl+Shift+L

This menu option toggles the status line on or off.


Main Window - Window | Refresh Thumbnails
Main Window - Window | Refresh Thumbnails	F5

This option re-reads the current folder and searches for thumbnails for any files there. You should select this option if you delete, move or add to the files in the current folder.


Help Menu
Main Window - Help Menu

File 	Edit 	Tree 	Image 	Thumbnail 	Options 	Window 	Help

Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Contents	F1	Displays the ThumbsPlus Help contents.
What's This		Enables context sensitive help cursor.  Click on a window, menu, field, or icon to find out more.
Search for Help on...	Ctrl+F1	Allows you to search the Help file.
Tip of the Day		Displays the 'Tip of the Day' dialog.
ThumbsPlus Web Site		Launches your browser and connects to www.cerious.com.
Program Updates		Check the Cerious web site for program updates.
Ordering Info		Provides ordering information.
Order on ther Web		Connects to the on-line ordering page at www.cerious.com.
Enter Registration Info...		Enter your registered user name and code.
About ThumbsPlus...		Show the ThumbsPlus About box.
System Information		Displays current system information.


Main Window - Help | System Information...

This option displays the system information dialog box, which show various information about the current system. Cerious Software may ask for some or all of this information for troubleshooting.

Operating System

Platform.  This field displays the current operating name.

Version.  The current operating system version information is listed here.

Build.  This field displays the current version compilation number or build number.

Processors

CPU.  The CPU model information is displayed here.

No.  This field shows the count of processors installed on the computer's motherboard.

Display Information

Monitors.  The current count of monitors installed on the computer.  Note: NT 4.0 systems multi-monitor support is implemented differently than that of Windows 98 and Windows 2000.  For this reason, ThumbsPlus may not be able to use individual monitors for display related operations when running under a multi-monitor NT 4.0 setup.

Size.  This field displays the current desktop screen resolution in width x height.

Depth. This field displays the color depth setting for the current desktop.

Memory Usage

Physical Total (Kb).  The total amount of physical memory (RAM) installed on the computer.  The amount of RAM available is unrelated to hard disk size.

Physical Free (Kb).  The amount of unallocated physical memory (RAM) that is currently available on the computer.

Physical %.  The percentage of physical memory that is currently available (unallocated).

Page File Total (Kb).  The total amount of page file memory available.  This memory is allocated on the computer's hard disk in a special file called a page file (or swap file) and is controlled by Windows.  Note: Windows uses this page file memory when it does not have enough physical RAM to hold all programs that are currently running.  When a program is allowed execution time in the CPU, Windows makes sure that all of the executable needed by the program is 'swapped' back to physical RAM from the page file.  This will cause other programs to be 'swapped' out to the page file to make the necessary room.

Page File Free (Kb).  The amount of unallocated page file memory that is currently available

Page File %.  The percentage of page file memory that is currently available (unallocated).

Process Total (Kb).  The total amount of memory available to the ThumbsPlus process.

Process Free (Kb).  The amount of unallocated process memory available to ThumbsPlus.

Process %.  The percentage of process memory that is currently available (unallocated) by ThumbsPlus.

Overall Load.  Over all memory load in percentage used.

Generate & E-Mail Technical Support Info.  Use this button only when instructed to do so by Cerious Software technical support.  This will generate a detailed technical support profile log about your ThumbsPlus installation and automatically attach it to a new e-mail by invoking your e-mail application (provided that your e-mail application is a windows MAPI client).


ThumbsPlus Volume Matching

Because ThumbsPlus must perform well in many different computing environments (standalone, with removable media, CD-ROMs, on networks, etc.), the volume matching rules are fairly complex. This enables ThumbsPlus to match quickly and easily a physical drive with a database record most of the time. There are sometimes complications and problems; this discussion and a peek at the volume information (File | Volumes | Properties) should help you understand what is happening behind the scenes.

ThumbsPlus matches physical volumes with the information in the database as follows:

The volume types are checked to see if they are compatible. The following chart shows which volume types are compatible with which others:

	Fixed	Removable	CD-ROM	Network
Fixed:	Y	No	Y	Y
Removable:	No	Y	Y	Y
CD-ROM:	Y	Y	Y	Y
Network:	Y	Y	Y	Y
Fixed drives: if the serial numbers match, then the volumes match.

All types: If the labels do not match and are not blank, the volumes do not match.

All types: If the labels do match and either volume is a CD-ROM, the volumes match.

Network drives - if either the physical or database volume (or both) is a network volume, then the setting 'Match Network Drives Using Share Names' is used to determine whether the volumes match:

Match using share names OFF: if the labels matched, the volumes match.

Match using share names ON: if the network (connection) names match, the volumes match.

Other drive types - ThumbsPlus compares the connection name or synthesized CD-ROM label; if they match, then the volumes match.

Suggestions for improving this are always welcome; however, it is quite difficult to take into account all of the circumstances that occur in the real world!


View Window

ThumbsPlus includes an extensive raster and vector viewer with many features, including zoom, synchronization, scale to gray, gamma correction, full screen, window position and size control, and multiple monitor support. You can also move, copy and save images to a different format from a view window.

While ThumbsPlus is not an illustration or painting program, it does include quite a few image editing functions that operate on the entire image or a selected area. These include cropping, color adjustments, color depth, rotation, resize, image and text stamping (overlay), copy and paste, image filtering (sharpen, blur, edge detect, special effects), histogram stretching and equalization, and several specialized image processes. For vector files (metafiles), you can remove the background and convert to raster format.

See also: Keyboard, Menus, Mouse for more information.


Keyboard Commands
View Window - Keyboard Selecting and Scrolling

Some keyboard commands do not have a menu equivalent; they are generally used for scrolling or selecting areas of the image. Some other general-purpose keys are listed here as well.

Key	No Selection	Selection
F11	Brings up the selection rectangle.	Ignored.
Arrow	Scrolls the image by 1/10 its size.	Moves selection by 1/2 the selection rectangle size.
Shift+Arrow	Scrolls the image by 1/3 the image width or height.	Moves the selection by width or height of selection.
Ctrl+Arrow	Scrolls the image by one pixel.	Moves the selection by one pixel.
Alt+Arrow		Increases or decreases the selection size.
Alt+Shift+Arrow		Doubles or halves the selection size horizontally or vertically.
Alt+Ctrl+Arrow		Increases the selection size by one pixel.
Page Up	Scrolls the image upward by a full window height.	Increases the selection size horizontally and vertically.
Page Down	Scrolls the image downward by a full window height.	Decreases the selection rectangle size horizontally and vertically.
Home	Scrolls the image to the upper-left corner.
End	Scrolls the image to the lower-right corner.


View Window - File Menu

File 	Edit 	Image 	Transform	View 	Help
Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Properties	Alt+Enter	Opens the file properties dialog for the current image.
Save	Ctrl+S	Saves any changes made to the image.
Save As...	Shift+S	Saves the image to a new image filename and/or file type.
Save Selection As...	Ctrl+Shift+S	Same as Save As except only the currently selected area is saved.
Save Palette As...		Saves the palette of the current image to a .PAL file.
Make Thumbnail	F3	Makes a thumbnail (displayed in the thumbnail view) for the image file.
Remove Thumbnail	Shift+Del	Removes the image's thumbnail from the ThumbsPlus database.
Annotate...	Ctrl+E	Creates or edits a thumbnail annotation for the image's thumbnail (stored in the database).
Assign Keywords...	Ctrl+K	Assigns a keyword (or multiple keywords) to the selected file.
Assign User Fields...	Ctrl+U	Assigns a set of user field values user field values to the selected file's thumbnail.
Load
Previous file	Backspace	Loads the previous file in the current image's folder.
Next file	Space	Loads the next file in the current image's folder.
Reload file	Ctrl+Shift+R	Reloads the file.
Dispose
Copy file...	Ctrl+F2	Copies the file to another location.
Move file...	Shift+F2	Moves the file to another location.
Rename file...	F2	Renames the file.
Delete file	Ctrl+Del	Deletes the file from disk.
Move to...		Moves the file to one of your configured favorites folders
"Favorites List"		Current list of favorite folders.
Goto Folder	Ctrl+G	Opens the image's folder in the ThumbsPlus folder tree.
Send to...	Ctrl+M	Sends the image to e-mail receipients as a file attachment.
Upload to
Printroom.com		Upload selected images to a Printroom album or shopping cart.
Picturetrail.com		Upload selected images to a Picturetrail account online.
Print...	Ctrl+P	Prints the image.
Save & Close	Ctrl+Alt+S	Saves any changes and closes the image view window.
Close	Alt+F4	Closes the image view window.
Close All	Shift+Alt+F4	Closes all open view windows.


View Window - File | Save
 View Window - File | Save	Ctrl+S

Select this option to save the current view window as its original name. If the file is a format not supported for writing, ThumbsPlus will save it as a native format (BMP or WMF).


View Window - File | Save As
 View Window - File | Save As...	Shift+S

This option saves the current file, allowing you to select a file name from a standard Windows Save As dialog box. It may be used to save a cropped or otherwise modified image. ThumbsPlus currently supports several types to save as: BMP, GIF, JPG, TIF, TGA and PCX for images, and WMF for metafiles.  You can quickly navigate to a favorite folder by selecting the desired favorite folder from the Favorite drop down list on the Save As dialog box..

Some file types also have optional information (such as comments) which can be saved in the file. If there are options available for the type you select, an Options dialog box will appear after you click OK in the Save As dialog box.

The JPEG Save Options dialog box shows a preview of the "lossiness" of the compression.

The TIFF Save Options dialog box allows you to set the compression and resolution of the file, and to add or modify image comments.

The GIF Save Options allows you to specify the GIF level of the output, and to add or modify image comments.

If the current file has an extension representing another format (such as .PCX or .CGM), it is changed to reflect the format being saved.

See also: Main Window - Tree | Add to Favorites


View Window - File | Save As - TIFF Options

Use this dialog to specify output options when saving to a TIFF file format.

Compression

None is the most compatible with other applications, and fastest to load.

LZW is best for 8-bit color and grayscale, and for 24-bit color files.

Packbits is a very simple and popular variant of RLE (run length encoding) and one of the standard forms of compression available in the TIFF format.

Zip is an alternative (comparable to LZW but royalty free) non-proprietary compression scheme based on the ZLIB/Deflation stream algorithm.

JPEG The image data is stored in JPEG format within the TIFF file (see JPEG Quality below).

CCITT Group 3 and CCITT Group 4 are valid only for bi-level images.

Best Fit will cause ThumbsPlus to use CCITT group 4 for any bi-level files, and LZW compression for any others.

Resolution

Enter the desired resolution (Vertical x Horizontal) in units of Dots per inch (DPI) or Dots per centimetre (DPC).

Unchanged.  (Only available when acquiring images via Image | TWAIN Acquire) Check this option to leave the resolution unchanged.  This options tells ThumbsPlus whether or not to change the resolution setting sent back by the TWAIN driver.  Some TWAIN drivers do not always report the actual scanned resolution correctly. If you check the "unchanged" box, the resolution information in the resulting file will be the one reported by the TWAIN driver. If you uncheck this box, the file will be written using the settings entered above.

Note: Setting a resolution here has no influence on the scanning process itself nor on the image data written to the file (actual number of pixels present in the image).

JPEG Quality. For JPEG compressed TIFF (see above), use this field to enter the quality level for compression of the image.

Comments. Allows you to edit the contents of the TIFF Description tag.

Separate color channels. Allows you to store RGB (Truecolor) images in separate red, green and blue channels.

Skim low-order bits. When you select this option for 24-bit images, ThumbsPlus removes two low-order bits from the red and blue channels, and one bit from the green. This often improves the compressibility of the image considerably, while making little if any visual difference.


View Window -File | Save As - GIF Options

GIF files may be saved as the older 87a format, or the newer 89a. Version 89a files can have comments, which you can edit by clicking the Comments button.

You can specify the background color and size, and select a transparent color.

You can click anywhere on the preview image to select a color as transparent.

You can also save GIF files as interlaced, which allows them to display progressively over slow communications links.

If you select Minimize Size, ThumbsPlus will automatically reduce the color palette to the minimum size (by combining duplicate palette entries), and create the smallest size of GIF file that it can.


View Window - File | Save As - JPEG Options

This dialog box will be displayed when saving a file to a JPEG file format.

Quality. Select a quality value, between 20 and 100. Values between 50 and 95 are recommended. Values below 25 are likely to degrade the image far too much, and values above 95 make the file larger without any appreciable quality increase.

Use original quality.  Check this option to use the JPEG quality from the original image.

Smoothing. This option is sometimes useful for storing dithered 256-color images as JPEGs; it attempts to smooth the differences between pixels caused by dithering, but tends to blur the image somewhat.

Sub-sampling.  Use this drop down list to control the amount of color information that will be shared by consecutive pixels.  For more information on JPEG sub-sampling click here.

Preview. Allows you to see the effect of the lossy compression on the image. You may scroll this preview around to different parts of the image to see the effect on specific details. The Delta option shows the differences between pixels, before and after compression. Medium gray is "zero difference."  Note: A truecolor or highcolor (24-bit or 16-bit) display driver is required to utilize the JPEG loss preview.

File size. If checked, ThumbsPlus will display the computed file size using the selected JPEG quality settings.
Note: You may want to uncheck this option when saving very large files to avoid the file size computation.

Progressive JPEG (standard scan sequence).  Check this option to store the JPEG as a Progressive JPEG (not recommended).

Remove file information (EXIF). Check this option to store the JPEG without the original EXIF information.

Suppress JFIF header. Check this option to exclude the JFIF file header.
Note: Some digital cameras will not recognize JPEG files with JFIF headers and therefore cannot display them in the LCD preview display.  If you are storing images back to your digital camera and are having trouble seeing the resultant images, try checking this option.

Comments. Click on this button to edit or add comments to the image file.


View Window - File | Save Selection As
 View Window - File | Save Selection As...	Ctrl+Shift+S

This option operates exactly like File | Save As, except that it only saves the currently selected area.


View Window - File | Save Palette As

This option saves the palette of the current file to a .PAL file, which is really just a PCX file with a different extension. You can use these PAL files (or any bitmap file with a palette) to apply a palette to a given picture using the Color Depth dialog box, or even to apply the same palette to multiple files in Batch Processing.

You can make the .PAL files visible in ThumbsPlus by selecting them in the Options | Preferences - File Types dialog box from the main window.

ThumbsPlus .PAL files are not similar to or interchangeable with .PAL files from other applications.

ThumbsPlus stores a small (generally 64x64) pixel bitmap along with the palette, so that useful thumbnails may be generated from the files.


View Window - Edit | Revert to saved
View Window - Edit | Revert to Saved	Ctrl+Shift+Z

This option reloads the current image from its disk file (the last time it was saved, or the original if you haven't saved it). It effectively undoes all changes since the last time the file was saved.


View Window - File | Close
 View Window - File | Close	Alt+F4, ESC

This option closes the view window and removes it from the screen. If you have modified the image and selected the confirmation for closing modified images (available from the Options | Preferences menu, Confirmations settings tab), ThumbsPlus will ask you if you wish to save the modified image.

Otherwise, if you have modified the image and selected the automatic save option and did not pressed the escape key (ESC), ThumbsPlus will save the file and close the view window.  If the above is true except you did press the escape key, ThumbsPlus will close the view window without saving your changes.

The escape key will also close the image unless it is displayed full screen, in which case it is restored to a window, or if there is a selection, in which case the selection is cancelled.


Main Window - Window | Close All Views
Main Window - Window | Close All Views	Shift+F4

   View Window - File | Close All

This option closes all open view windows. If you opted to confirm closing modified images (from the Confirmations dialog box), ThumbsPlus will prompt you to save each one before closing it.


View Window - File | Load | Next file
View Window - File | Load | Next file	Space

In a view window that was generated by loading an image from disk, this selection will open the next file in the current folder.

Note: If there are no more images, or if the current image was pasted from the clipboard or scanned, this option will be unavailable.


View Window - File | Load | Previous file
View Window - File | Load | Previous file	Backspace

In a view window that was generated by loading an image from disk, this selection will open the previous file in the current folder.

Note: If the current image is the first in the folder, or if the current image was pasted from the clipboard or scanned, this option will be unavailable.


Main Window - File | Move
Main Window - File | Move...	Shift+F2

View Window - File | Dispose | Move File...

This option will allow you to move the selected file(s) to another location.

You will be prompted for the desired folder to which the selected files will be moved.  If the folder is on another disk, this will copy each file, then delete the original.  Alternately, you can use the mouse to drag the selected files to the intended folder.

When dragging files to a different disk, you can force moving rather than copying (the default mode) by holding down the SHIFT key while dragging.

Note: If the file was pasted or scanned (rather than loaded from disk), this option will be unavailable from the View Window menu.


Main Window - File | Rename file...
Main Window - File | Rename...	F2

View Window - File | Dispose | Rename File...

This option will prompt for a new file name for each selected file, and rename it accordingly. You cannot move a file to a different folder with this option; use File | Move instead.

Note: If the file was pasted or scanned (rather than loaded from disk), this option is unavailable.


Main Window - File | Delete
 Main Window - File | Delete	Ctrl+Del

     View Window - File | Dispose | Delete File

This command deletes the currently selected file(s) from your disk.  If confirmation of file deletion is selected from the Options | Preferences - Confirmations dialog box, you will be prompted whether or not to delete each selected file.

Note: If the view window contains an image not loaded from disk (i.e. was pasted or scanned), the option will be disabled.


View Window - Edit Menu

File 	Edit 	Image 	Transform	View 	Help
Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Undo	Ctrl+Z	Undo the last change to the image.
Revert to Saved	Ctrl+Shift+Z	Reloads the file, discarding any changes that were made.
Copy (All / Selection)	Ctrl+C	Copies the image (or its selected area) to the clipboard.
Cut	Ctrl+X	Cuts the selected area into the clipboard
Paste	Ctrl+V	Pastes a clipboard selection into the image.
Delete	Del
Cancel	Esc	Cancels the current selection.
Select All	Ctrl+A	Select the entire image.
Invert Selection	Ctrl+I	Inverts the selection to include anything not selected.
Figure Area		Computes the area in terms of alternate units.
Apply	Enter	Applies a Paste or Trim to Size function.
Set Resolution...	E	Changes the resolution of the current image.
Edit Comments...	N	Edits or adds image comments.
Edit IPTC Info...	Shift+I	Edits or adds IPTC information in the image.
Clone	F8	Opens a new view window with a copy of the current image.
Next Page	Alt+PageDown	Show the next page in a multi-page format files, such as TIF.
Previous Page	Alt+PageUp	Show the previous page in a multi-page format files.
Goto Page...	Num *	Show a specific page in a multi-page format files.
Split Pages...	Num /	Extract all pages in a multi-page format file to seperate files.
Note: This menu provides options that operate on a selected area in the view window. Only image data within a raster image can be selected.  To operate on a portion of a metafile, it must first be converted to a bitmap using the menu selection Image | Convert to Bitmap.


View Window - Edit | Clone
View Window - Edit | Clone	F8

This menu selection copies the current image to a new view window. The file is not re-opened, so any changes made already are reflected in the copy.


View Window - Edit | Copy
View Window - Edit | Copy All / Selection	Ctrl+C

This menu selection copies the currently selected area in the view window (or entire image if no selection) to the clipboard.


View Window - Edit | Cancel Selection
View Window - Edit | Cancel

This option removes the selection rectangle from the window.


View Window - Edit | Undo
View Window - Edit | Undo	Ctrl+Z

This selection restores the image to the state prior to any operation that modifies the image data.  This menu item will show what will be undone beside the "Undo" menu text.  If there is nothing to undo, the menu selection will be disabled.

The number of undo/redo steps allowed is only limited only by the amount of available memory.  You can set a specific memory limit by setting the Maximum memory for image undo buffers option in Options | Preferences | Advanced.  The image Undo/Redo feature can be disabled under the Main Window - Options | Viewing - Other dialog, by checking the Disable undo option.


View Window - Edit | Select All
View Window - Edit | Select All	Ctrl+A

This option selects the entire contents of the view window for processing.  See: Selecting part of an Image for more information on selecting pixels.


View Window - File | Make Thumbnail / Selection
View Window - File | Thumbnail | Make Thumbnail / Selection	F3

This menu selection uses the currently selected area (or the entire image if no selection) in the view window to generate a thumbnail for the image. This is especially useful for clipart files which contain many related images. You can select a representative part of the file and create the thumbnail from that part only.


View Window - Image | Crop | Autocrop
 View Window - Transform | Autocrop	F4

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Transform | Autocrop

This option automatically crops the current image, removing any edges composed entirely of the same color. The pixel in the bottom left corner of the image is used as the reference pixel. Each of the four sides is compared to this pixel; any side entirely of that color is removed. This process is repeated for each side until a pixel of a different color is found.

See also: Options | Preferences - Advanced to change the auto crop tolerance value.


View Window - Edit | Edit Comments
 View Window - Edit | Edit/Add Comments...	N

When this option is available, it indicates that the graphic being viewed has comments embedded in it. Select it to view and/or modify these comments.

If the image does not have comments, the selection reads Edit | Add Comments instead.

Comments can be saved in the following types of files:

GIF	- version 89a comment field

JPEG	- COM marker field(s)

TIFF	- Description tag

PNG	- Text fields

Font. Click this button to set the desired display font for this dialog box.

Save. Click this button to save the comments to en external text file.


View Window - Edit | Set Resolution
View Window - Edit | Set Resolution...	E

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | File Info | Resolution...

You can use this menu selection to change the resolution of the current image.

Horizontal. Enter the horizontal resolution value.

Vertical. Enter the vertical resolution value.

Resulting image print size. The computed physical size when output at the specified resolution is also shown.

Unit of measure.

Dots per inch, Dots per centimetre, or Pels per meter.

Some page layout and word processing programs use this information to determine how to scale the image when printing and displaying.

Only set if not specified in original.  (Only in batch processing) Use this option in batch processing to tell ThumbsPlus not to set the image resolution if the image already has a specified resolution in the file.

Note: Changing this resolution does not affect the quality of the image in any way; it only modifies how some programs display or print the image.


View Window - Edit | Next page
View Window - Edit | Next Page	Alt+PageDown

In a multi-image file (TIFF or DCX), this will display the next image in the file. The title bar shows the current page number and the total number of pages in the file.


View Window - Edit | Previous page
View Window - Edit | Previous Page	Alt+PageUp

In a multi-image file (TIFF or DCX), this will display the previous image in the file. The title bar shows the current page number and the total number of pages in the file.


View Window - Edit | Goto page...
View Window - Edit | Goto Page...	*

In a multi-image file (TIFF or DCX), this option will allow you to select a specific page number to view. Page numbers start at one.

Page number. Select the page number to display. Page numbers start at one.

First page. Display the first page.

Last page. Display the last page.


View Window - Edit | Split pages
View Window - Edit | Split pages...	/

In a multi-image file (TIFF or DCX), this option will allow you to split the images into individual files. You can select the format, folder and file prefix for the operation. The original file is left intact.

Image save format. Select the format for the image. The defaults are TIF for multi-page TIFF files and PCX for multi-page PCX files.

Output path. Select the folder to which to write the individual images. You can use the [...] browse button to find a particular drive and folder.

Filename prefix. Enter the first part of the name of the file. A sequence number is automatically appended, starting at 0001.


View Window - Image Menu

File 	Edit 	Image 	Transform	View 	Help
Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Adjust Colors...	C	Adjusts the image colors.
Color Depth...	D	Sets the image color depth.
Color Balance...	Shift+O	Advanced color balance
Color Profile...	Ctrl+Chift+C	Set, Convert and/or Remove color profiles in images
Replace Colors...	Shift+P	Replaces image colors.
Swap Red & Blue	Y	Swaps the red and blue values of each pixel in the image.
Invert Colors	I	Inverts the colors of the image (negatives from slides).
Histogram...	M	Displays a histogram of the intensity of the image.
Remove Red Eye...	Shift+R	Removes image red eye effects.
Stamp...	A	Stamps the image with text or another image.
Combine...	Shift+B	Combines the image with another image.
Compare...	Shift+M	Compares the image with another image
Embed Watermark	Shift+W	Embed a Digimarc watermark in the current image.
Filter
Select Filter...	F	Selects a digital image filter for processing the current image.
New Filter...	Shift+F	Creates a new linear digital image filter.
Apply Last Filter	Ctrl+F	Repeats the last filter selected.
Category | Filter		Selects filter by category and name from "fly-out" menus.
Process
Auto Color Balance	Shift+A	Automatically "balances" the color of the image.
Improve Video Capture	Shift+V	Increases the color saturation, contrast, sharpness of the image.
Fluorescent Lighting	Shift+L	Attempts to eliminate fluorescent lighting effects in the image.
General Enhancement	Shift+G	Increases image's color saturation and contrast.
Contrast Enhancement	Shift+C	Increases image contrast.
Cleanup Jpeg	Shift+J	Attempts to soften "blocky" artifacts found in JPEG images.
Digital Camera Cleanup	Shift+D	Performs general image cleanup for digital camera images.
Sepia Tone	Shift+E	Performs a sepia tone color filter.
Semi-Sepia Tone	Ctrl+Shift+E	Performs a semi-sepia tone color filter (leaving some original color).
Photo Negative	Shift+N	Converts scanned negatives to positive color images (with orange-base correction).
Equalize Channels	Shift+Q	Similar to Histogram - Equalize, except color channels are equalized individually.
Stretch Channels	Shift+T	Similar to Histogram - Stretch, except color channels are stretched individually.
Convert to Grayscale	Shift+Y	Converts the current image to a grayscale image.
Read Watermark	W	Check the current image for an embedded Digimarc watermark.
Count Unique Colors	U	Counts the number of colors in an image.
Convert to Bitmap	B	Converts the open metafile to a bitmap.
Extract Bitmap	Shift+B	Extracts an embedded bitmap (if present) from the open metafile.
Remove Background	K	Removes any rectangles encompassing the entire metafile.


View Window - Image | Count Unique Colors
View Window - Image | Count Unique Colors...	U

This option counts the number of colors in an image.  For images stored as 8 bits per pixel or fewer, it is very fast; but for 24-bit images, it may take a while (and temporarily use up to 2Mb of memory).  If there is insufficient memory to count the actual colors in an image, ThumbsPlus will ask if you want an estimate instead.


View Window - Image | Filter | Select Filter
View Window - Image | Filter | Select Filter...	F

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Filter...

This dialog box allows you to select a filter for processing the current image (or group of images in batch processing).

Category. Select the type of filter you wish to apply. Some types available are: Sharpen, Blur, Edge Detection, Effects and Noise.

Filter. Select the specific filter from that category. A sample of the results of the filter will be shown in the preview to the right.

Diameter. For statistical and morphological filters, you may select the diameter of the aperture to use for processing. Larger apertures will produce more profound effects.

Apply to. Select the channel(s) to apply the filter to. Intensity applies the effect only to the intensity (brightness) of each pixel -- the hue is maintained. All channels processes all three channels (red, green and blue) separately. And, for some filter types, you may select only a single color channel.

Orientation. For linear filters (those defined by a convolution mask) which are not symmetrical, ThumbsPlus can rotate the mask to several positions. Select the arrow which represents the direction you wish to apply the filter.

Modify. Click this button to modify the currently selected filter. Note that only linear filters can be modified within ThumbsPlus. Statistical and multipass filters may not.

New. Click this button to add a new filter.


View Window - Image | Filter | Category | Filter
View Window - Image | Filter | (Category | Filter)

From the cascading menus, select a category, then a filter within that category to perform that filter on the current image.

To view the filter options for the selected filter, hold down the Shift key while selecting the filter.


View Window - Image | Filter | New Filter
View Window - Image | Filter | New Filter	Shift+F

You use this dialog box to modify an existing linear filter or define a new one. Only linear filters (defined by a convolution mask) may be modified or added in ThumbsPlus.

Category. Select the category in which this filter belongs. Categories help to locate specific filters from the many choices.

Order. ThumbsPlus can apply 3x3, 5x5 or 7x7 filters. This selects the size of the filter. If you reduce the size once you've entered values, some will be lost.

Array. Enter the actual pixel accumulation values here. The central value represents the current pixel being processed. Each pixel is multiplied by the corresponding value in the array and added to a total.

Divisor. The sum of pixel x array values is divided by this value. For most filters, this divisor should be the same as the sum of values in the array; the  button will place this sum in the Divisor field.

Bias. This value is added to the result of (Array x pixels) / Divisor. It is used for some effects, such as embossing and etching. It is especially useful when the sum of values in the array is zero.

L. Click to force the array to be left-right symmetrical. All values on the left of the array will be repeated on the right (and if you change a value on the left, it will automatically change on the right). This button is on by default if you edit a filter that is left-right symmetrical.

T. Click to force the array to be top-bottom symmetrical. All values in the top of the array will be repeated automatically on the bottom (and if you change a value on the top, it will automatically change on the bottom). This button is on by default if you edit a filter that is top-bottom symmetrical.

Remove. Click to remove the current filter from the filter list (THUMBS.FLT).


View Window - Image | Filter | Last Filter
View Window - Image | Filter | (Last Filter)	Ctrl+F

Repeats the last filter selected (using Image | Select Filter) on the current image.


View Window - Image | Histogram
 View Window - Image | Histogram...	M

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Equalize Histogram

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Stretch Histogram

This option displays a histogram of the intensity of the image.

It shows the relative number of pixels at each intensity level. If the values are bunched together, the picture lacks contrast; if they are skewed to the left or right, the picture is most likely too dark or too light.

In some cases, equalizing the histogram (using the Equalize button) will improve the appearance. ThumbsPlus will attempt to modify intensities to come as close to even levels of each as possible.

The Stretch button performs contrast stretching on the image, ensuring that the entire intensity range is utilized. This does not change the overall shape of the histogram, but instead spreads it between the limits.

The histogram is most useful for 256-level grayscale and RGB Truecolor images.


View Window - Image | Invert Colors
View Window - Image | Invert Colors	I

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Invert Colors

This selection inverts an image -- each color becomes the opposite color, creating a negative effect. This is most useful for printing CompuServe stock trend charts (and other dark drawn images), which otherwise use lots of toner or ink. It can also be useful for some incorrectly stored TIFF or PCX images (marked as MIN_IS_BLACK, but stored as MIN_IS_WHITE).


View Window - Image | Swap Red & Blue
 View Window - Image | Swap Red & Blue	Y

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Swap Red & Blue

This option swaps the red and blue values of each pixel or color map entry. It is useful for images (especially Sun Raster) which are saved with these values reversed.


View Window - Image | Turn & Mirror
Main Window - Image | Quick Process | Turn 90° CW, Turn 90° CCW, Turn 180°

View Window - Transform | Turn & Mirror	Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Right, Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Left, Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Down

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Transform | Turn 90° CW, Turn 90° CCW, Turn 180°

These three options (to turn the image by 90 clockwise, 90 counter-clockwise, or 180 degrees) rotate the image quickly.

For JPEG images, data manipulation from the "quick process menu" is lossless. This means that no further information is lost during the process of rotating an image. The modification date of the file will be changed accordingly.

Note: You can achieve these same functions (even in batch mode) by using Rotate with an angle of 90, 180 or 270.


View Window - Image | Turn & Mirror | Flip Vertically
Main Window - Image | Quick Process | Flip Vertically

    View Window - Transform | Turn & Mirror | Flip Vertically	V

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Transform | Flip Vertically

This option flips the image from top to bottom.


View Window - Image | Turn & Mirror | Flip Horizontally
Main Window - Image | Quick Process | Flip Horizontally

    View Window - Transform | Turn & Mirror | Flip Horizontally	H

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Transform | Flip Horizontally

This option reverses the image from left to right.


View Window - Image | Rotate
 View Window - Transform | Rotate...	J

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Transform | Rotate...

This dialog box allows you to rotate an image.

Angle (CW). Angle (clockwise) of rotation, in .01-degree increments.

Background color. When rotating to an angle that results in new image dimensions that do not match the original aspect ratio, a background is added. Use this button to select the background color.

Interpolation. Use this drop-down list to select the type of interpolation (resampling) which ThumbsPlus will do when resizing or rotating:

Nearest Neighbor (fast)	This is the fastest resize method, but the least pleasing because it performs no pixel interpolation. Usually results in significant "jaggies."
Bi-linear (good).	Computes weighted average of four pixels, based on computed position from the original source. This is slower but better than Nearest Neighbor, and considerably faster than bi-cubic.
Clear.  Use this button to reset the rotate angle back to 0.00.

ThumbsPlus remembers the last settings from this dialog box so that you can re-use them for additional images, or for batch processing.

Note: If you rotate or resize a 256 (or fewer) color image and select interpolation, ThumbsPlus will automatically promote it to 24-bit (truecolor) to be able to interpolate intervening pixels. You can then use the Image | Depth... selection from the view window menu to adjust the colors to the number you desire. Likewise, ThumbsPlus will promote any grayscale image less that 256 levels to an 8-bit grayscale image.


View Window - Image | Depth...
 View Window - Image | Color Depth...	D

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Color Depth...

Use this window to modify the color depth of an image. For example, it will convert a color image to grayscale, or a 24-bit image to 8-bit, or just about anything to monochrome (bi-level).

Desired Color Depth. Select the number of colors you desire in the final image.

Bi-level. Selects a two-color (black & white) destination image. Each pixel requires a single bit.

Threshold. When you select bi-level as the desired color depth, you may enter a threshold value for the dividing point between black and white. This number must range between 1 and 764. The sum of red, green and blue values for each pixel is compared to this threshold; if below, the destination pixel becomes black; if above, it becomes white. Note that if dithering is selected, this value may not make as much difference, as any error is propagated through neighboring pixels.

Order. When using an ordered dithering pattern for converting to bi-level, this selects the size of the box used. You can specify 1 through 8.

16 Colors. Selects a sixteen-color destination image; each pixel requires 4 bits.

236 Colors. Selects a 236-color destination image; each pixel requires 8 bits. This selection is useful for 256-color Windows users, as it leaves the 20 colors that Windows requires.

256 Colors. Selects a 256-color destination image; each pixel requires 8 bits.

Truecolor. Selects a 24-bit destination image; each pixel requires 24 bits.

Custom. Select a number between 4 and 256. For color counts between 4 and 16, 4 bits per pixel are required; for a count of greater than 16, 8 bits per pixel are required.

Palette. Unless converting to Truecolor, you must select the palette to use. Several fixed and optimized palette selections are available:

Optimized (5-bit median cut)	Uses the "median cut" algorithm to select a color palette that best matches the colors of the original image. Selects from a total of 32,768 possible colors (5 bits each for red, green and blue).
Optimized (6-bit median cut)	Uses the "median cut" algorithm to select a color palette that best matches the colors of the original image. Selects from a total of 262,144 possible colors (6 bits each for red, green and blue). In some cases, this will mean a better color selection than the 5-bit algorithm, but it runs somewhat slower.
Optimized (8-bit median cut)	Uses the "median cut" algorithm to select a color palette that best matches the colors of the original image. This algorithm selects from a total of 16 million possible colors (8 bits each for red, green and blue). In some cases, especially rasterizing drawing with solid areas or gradient fills, this option produces much better results that 5 or 6-bit quantization. However, it is quite a bit slower, and will use very large amounts of memory if the number of colors in the original image is high. Not suggested for photographic images.
Optimized (popularity)	Selects the n most-used colors in the original image.
Grayscale	Creates a fixed levels-of-gray palette, with n evenly spaced colors.
ThumbsPlus Color	Selects the same colors used in the ThumbsPlus thumbnails; this is also the palette used for the Quick Dithering option (see below).
Web (Netscape/IExplorer)	Selects the palette used by Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer.
Std. Windows Color	Uses the 16 standard Windows colors (yuck - but sometimes you need 'em).
Light Windows Color	Uses 16 standard Windows colors as implemented by some display drivers (the darker colors are lighter than in the standard palette).
Standard VGA	Selects the default 16 VGA palette colors.
6x7x6 Even Distribution	Creates a palette with 6 levels of red, 7 of green and 6 of blue, evenly spaced. (Not very pretty for most images, but okay for some dithering jobs.)
6x6x6 Even Distribution	Creates a palette with six levels each of red, green and blue, evenly spaced. This is similar to the 6x7x6 palette, but more useful for pictures with large amounts of gray.
Indeo	Uses the 236-color Indeo palette recommended for video frames. This is also a very useful general palette, somewhat similar to the ThumbsPlus palette.
Cinepak	Uses the recommended 236-color Cinepak palette recommended for video composition.
Pasted from Clipboard	Pastes a palette from the image on the clipboard. This is useful for adapting several images to a common palette.
Loaded from File	This option allows you to load a palette from an existing graphics file, or from a ThumbsPlus palette file (.PAL), which you may create using the Save Palette As... option on the View window File menu.
Common Optimized	(Batch conversion only) This option creates a common optimized palette of the desired number of colors from all images being batch processed.
Identity palette. Checking this box will cause ThumbsPlus to adjust any 17 to 236 color palette to be a Windows identity palette, placing the 20 Windows system colors in the first 10 and last 10 color map positions.

Dither. When reducing the number of colors in an image, you may select a dithering method from those listed below.

(none)	No dithering. Colors are simply mapped to the closest available color in the selected palette.
Floyd-Steinberg	The most popular error diffusion dithering method. Fairly quick with reasonable results.
Burkes	Another error diffusion dither. Takes slightly longer than Floyd-Steinberg, and sometimes produces nicer results.
Stucki	A fairly complex error diffusion dither. Slower than Floyd-Steinberg or Burkes, but usually the nicest results, especially for truecolor to 256-color conversions.
Jarvis, Judice, Ninke.	Another fairly complex error diffusion dither with a somewhat different appearance from Stucki.
Noise Level. ThumbsPlus can randomize each pixel by a small amount to (sometimes) improve the appearance. Select a value here between 0 (no noise) and 50 (lots of noise). This is particularly useful in getting rid of patterns produced in solid areas by the error diffusion dithers.

ThumbsPlus retains the last selections you made in this window so you can apply the identical changes to subsequent files, or during batch processing.


View Window - Image | Adjust Colors
 View Window - Image | Adjust Colors...	C

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Adjust Colors...

Use this menu selection to alter the contrast, gamma, hue, saturation, lightness and red, green and blue levels in an image.

These controls are available for all tabs:

Save. Click to save the current adjustment settings.  You will be prompted for a name, under which the settings will be saved. All saved settings will appear on the [Load] button flyout menu.

Load. Click to display the saved settings flyout menu and load previously saved settings.

Auto View. Automatically updates the main window when you make changes. This option is not recommended for older (relatively slow) displays.

Clear. Sets all controls to zero.

Last. Restores the last settings used to adjust an image so they can be used on the current image.

View. This button repaints the image with the selected changes.

Note: ThumbsPlus remembers the last values you used to adjust an image, so you can use them to adjust another, or as input to Batch Processing as a batch step.

Hue Tab:

Hue. This controls the overall hue (color) of the image.

Saturation. This controls the amount of color saturation. Lower saturation makes the image grayer.

Lightness. This control changes the overall brightness of an image. Use negative values to darken an image, and positive values to lighten it. Use the arrow keys or the mouse to change the value.

Contrast. This control changes the contrast; that is, the difference between the light and dark areas. Positive values increase the difference between them, while negative values decrease the contrast.

Balance Tab:

Red, Green, Blue. These controls modify the amount of Red, Green and Blue in the image. They work similarly to the Brightness control, but individually on each color channel.

Gamma Tab:

Gamma. This control changes the color values or gray levels in an image to provide for a specific gamma correction. The display itself doesn't change (because ThumbsPlus knows the new assumed gamma value, and adjusts for it!), but the image itself does. This is most useful if you have linear files (gamma = 1.0), and wish to make them "standard" GIF files (gamma = 2.0), so they will display reasonably correctly with viewers which don't provide gamma correction.


View Window - Image | Convert to Bitmap
View Window - Image | Convert to Bitmap...	B

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Metafile | Convert to Bitmap...

This option converts a metafile to a bitmap. You may enter the desired height and width, and whether or not to maintain the original aspect ratio of the metafile.

Width. Enter the desired width of the bitmap. This defaults to the current window width.

Height. Enter the desired height of the bitmap. This defaults to the current window height.

Maintain original aspect ratio. Select this option to force the bitmap to be the same aspect ratio as the original metafile. This defaults to the setting of the Maintain Aspect Ratio option in the View window.

Anti-Aliasing. Selects the amount of anti-aliasing to perform when rasterizing. Anti-aliasing reduces jaggies and makes the resulting image look more accurate.  You can select from four levels; the lowest provides no anti-aliasing, and the highest provides the best (but also the slowest).


View Window - Image | Extract Bitmap
View Window - Image | Extract Bitmap	Shift+B

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Metafile | Extract Bitmap

This selection will cause ThumbsPlus to extract an embedded bitmap (if present) from the currently opened metafile image.


View Window - Image | Remove Background
View Window - Image | Remove Background	K

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Metafile | Remove Background

This selection (available only for metafiles) removes any rectangles encompassing the entire metafile. This usually removes and overall background color from a metafile, making it transparent.

This option is not used for raster images; however, you can save GIF files with transparency.


View Window - Image | Process | Auto Color Balance
View Window - Image | Process | Auto Color Balance	Shift+A

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Auto Color Balance

Attempts to color balance the image, based on an average of all pixels or an average of the pixels in the current selection. If you make a selection, select an area that should appear (on average) gray rather than colored.

Thanks to Jim "Andy" Anderson for the algorithm!


View Window - Image | Process | Improve Video Capture
View Window - Image | Process | Improve Video Capture	Shift+V

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Improve Video Capture

Increases the image saturation and contrast, and lightly sharpens the image.


View Window - Image | Process | Fluorescent Lighting
View Window - Image | Process | Fluorescent Lighting	Shift+F

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Fluorescent Lighting

Attempts to eliminate the color shift caused by fluorescent lighting. Since different cameras and videos have different responses to the shift, and because different lights have different effects, this filter only handles some cases.


View Window - Image | Process | General Enhancement
View Window - Image | Process | General Enhancement	Shift+G

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | General Enhancement

Increases image saturation and contrast, and sharpens the image. The image is only sharpened if it is a 24-bit (truecolor) image.


View Window - Image | Process | Contrast Enhancement
View Window - Image | Process | Contrast Enhancement	Shift+C

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Contrast Enhancement

Increases image contrast and adjusts assumed gamma by 20%.


View Menu
View Window - View Menu

File 	Edit 	Image 	Transform	View 	Help
Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Full Screen	F5	Toggles full screen viewing.
Tile Image	Shift+F5	Toggles tiled viewing mode.
Autosize Window	Ctrl+F6	Autosizes the view window to fit the image.
Assumed Gamma...	G	Assign the assumed gamma value for an image.
Enable Color Mgmt		Enable color management for the image.
Zoom
In	Z	Zooms in on the image.
Out	Shift+Z	Zooms out on the image.
Arbitrary...	Alt+Z	Zooms to an arbitrary zoomed percentage.
Original Size	Shift+Alt+Z	Restores the image zooming to 1X.
To Selection	Ctrl+Alt+Z	Zooms in on the currently selected area.
Fit All	F6	Fits the entire image into the view window (zooming if necessary).
Fit Width	Ctrl+W	Fits the image width to the view window (with vertical scrollbar).
Maintain Aspect Ratio	Shift+F6	Toggles the aspect ratio option (on=keep aspect, off=allow stretching).
Gridlines	L	Displays gridlines on images zoomed to or above 4X.
Wallpaper
Tiled	Shift+F7	Sets the desktop wallpaper to the current image (tiled).
Centered	F7	Sets the desktop wallpaper to the current image (centered/no stretch).
Stretched	Ctrl+Shift+F7	Sets the desktop wallpaper to the current image (stretch to fit screen/maintain aspect).
Fully Stretched	Shift+Alt+F7	Sets the desktop wallpaper to the current image (stretch to fit screen/no aspect).
Remove	Ctrl+F7	Removes the desktop wallpaper.
Loupe
Enable	Q	Enables the loupe window display for view windows
100%	Shift+1	Sets the loupe window zoom factor to 1X,
200%	Shift+2	Sets the loupe window zoom factor to 2X.
400%	Shift+4	Sets the loupe window zoom factor to 4X.
800%	Shift+8	Sets the loupe window zoom factor to 8X
Round		Toggles the loupe window shape option.
Large		Toggles the loupe window size option.
Grid Lines	Ctrl+L	Toggles the loupe window grid line option.
Crosshairs		Toggles the loupe window crosshairs option.
Show All Views	Ctrl+Shift+F4	Shows all open view windows.
Minimize All Views	Ctrl+F4	Minimizes all open view windows.
Align Views	=	Aligns all open view windows.
Tile Views	Ctrl+F3	Tiles all open view windows.
Synch Views	[	Synchronizes all open view windows for pan, scroll and zoom.
Unsynch Views	]	Unsynchronizes all synched view windows.
Toolbar	T	Toggles the display of the view window's toolbar.
Status Line	S	Toggles the display of the view window's status line.
Actions	Shift+F8	View actions applied to image
Preferences...	F9	Opens the view window's viewing options dialog.
Customize...	Ctrl+Q	Opens the view window's menu customization dialog.


View Window - View | Autosize Window
View Window -View | Autosize Window	Ctrl+F6

This option will make the view window the same size as the image displayed in it (if possible).


View Window - View | Assumed Gamma
View Window - View | Assumed Gamma...	G

This menu selection allows you to assign the assumed gamma value for an image, and to set the default for a file type (so that any files loaded with the given type will be assumed to be adjusted for that gamma value.)

Image gamma value. Use the arrows or the mouse to change the assumed gamma value. Select a value of zero (0.0) to turn off gamma correction for this image.

Save for this image. Check this option to store the selected gamma value in the database for this image, so that whenever it is loaded it displays using this gamma.

Set default for type. Check this option to assume the selected value as the default for any loaded images of the current file's file type.

Auto view. Check this option to make the gamma change automatically visible each time you adjust the value. This option is always on if your display driver is set to use palette-based (256-color) color setting

Default. Click this button to restore the previous default gamma value for this file type.

View. Click this button to view the gamma correction if Auto view is unchecked.


View Window - View | Zoom | Maintain Aspect Ratio
View Window - View | Zoom | Maintain Aspect Ratio	Shift+F6

This option causes ThumbsPlus to maintain the original file's aspect ratio when stretching to fill the window. This applies to both metafiles and bitmaps.


View Window - View | Zoom | Fit All
View Window - View | Zoom | Fit All	F6

When this option is checked, the image will be stretched (or shrunk) to fill the size of the window.

Note: You cannot select portions of the image when stretched.


View Window - View | Zoom | Fit Width
View Window - View | Zoom | Fit Width	Ctrl+W

When this option is checked, the image will be stretched (or shrunk) so that the width of the graphic fits the width of the window. This is most useful for portrait-oriented files, such as documents.


View Window - View | Zoom | Gridlines
View Window - View | Zoom | Gridlines	L

This option toggles the display of grid lines between pixels when zoomed in by 4x or more.


View Window - View | Zoom | Out
View Window - View | Zoom Out	Shift+Z

This function zooms back out after zooming in.


View Window - View | Zoom | In
View Window - View | Zoom | In	Z

This selection "zooms in" on the current bitmap or metafile. For bitmaps, each pixel is shown as a square. For metafiles, only a portion of the file is viewed, but at increased magnification.

It is useful for viewing details in an image. It does not modify the image itself -- use Image | Rotate/Resize for changing the size of an image.

You can select Zoom In multiple times to view progressively smaller areas of an image. You may also use the keys 1-9 to zoom from 1x (unzoomed) to approximately 9x.


View Window - View | Full Screen
 View Window - View | Full Screen	F5

This option causes the View Window to use the entire screen, without title bar or menus. If the image is larger than the screen, you will still have scroll bars. While in full screen mode, use the right mouse button or the F10 key to see the View Window menus, which will appear vertically instead of horizontally. You can perform any of the View Window commands while in full screen mode; however, cropping an image will reduce the window to the size of the cropped image. You can select View-Full Screen again or press F5 to exit full screen mode.


View Window - View | Toolbar
View Window - View | Toolbar	T

This selection turns the view window toolbar on or off. If the toolbar is currently on, this option will be checked.

If you want to have a toolbar for each new view window, use Options | Viewing from the main window.

To customize the toolbar, use View | Customize Toolbar.

The toolbar is hidden in full screen mode.

When using a display driver with 256 or fewer colors, the toolbar may appear ugly - its colors must be mapped to the current image colors.


View Window - View | Status Line
View Window - View | Status Line	S

This selection turns the view window status line on or off.

If you want to have a status line for each new view window, use Options | Viewing from the main window.

The status line is hidden in full screen mode.

The fields in the status line are:

Modified flag. The text MOD is darkened if the image has been modified.

Quick-Dither flag. The text Q8 appears when a 24-bit image is dithered to 8 bits for display on a 256-color display driver.

Zoom factor. When using the integral zoom (2x to 9x), this field indicates the current factor.

Image size and depth. This field contains the width, height and color depth (in bits) of the current image.

Selection size. The size of the currently selected area of the image. This field is blank if no selection is active.

Position. When selecting, this field contains the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the selection rectangle. When no selection is active, this field contains the current cursor position in the image.

Pixel color. This field shows the current pixel color (red, green, blue). Each sample ranges from 0 to 255. When selecting, this is the color of the anchor point of the selection (the first point selected).


View Window - View | Align Views
View Window - View | Align Views	=

Use this option to align all view windows with the current window. This can help to see the changes between images when switch between view windows.


View Window - Help Menu

File 	Edit 	Image 	Transform	View 	Help
Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Contents	F1	Displays the ThumbsPlus Help contents
What's This		Enables the mouse click help. Click on a menu item, toolbar or anywhere in the window and the related help link will be displayed.
Search for Help on...	Ctrl+F1	Allows you to search the Help file for information on any available topic.
Cerious Web Site		Will launch your browser and connect to www.cerious.com.
About ThumbsPlus...		Shows the ThumbsPlus About box


AVI: Video for Windows

AVI is the standard Windows video format.

The registered version of ThumbsPlus supports playing, viewing, and thumbnailing (any frame) of Video for Windows files.


BMP, DIB, RLE: Windows Bitmaps

This is the standard bitmap format supported by Microsoft Windows. ThumbsPlus supports all color depths (1, 4, 8, 16, 24 or 32 bit), and the compressed (RLE) formats for 4-bit (RLE4) and 8-bit (RLE8) bitmaps.

BMP files compressed with video codecs or JPEG are not yet supported.

The standard VGA driver does not properly decompress 8-bit compressed BMP files; for best color viewing (and nicest thumbnails), you should load a 256-color or higher Windows video driver, which should eliminate this problem.

ThumbsPlus currently writes only uncompressed BMP files.


CAM: Casio Camera files

The CASIO QV series cameras generate CAM files. They are almost standard JPEG files; however, ThumbsPlus must adjust their aspect ratio (using rotate/resize) when loading.


CDR, PAT, BMF, CMD: CorelDRAW and CorelGALLERY
CDR, PAT, BMF, CMX: CorelDRAW and CorelGALLERY

ThumbsPlus can create thumbnails for CDR, PAT and BMF files; however, it can only extract the preview bitmap from them. There is no internal support for the proprietary Corel format.

If you have Corel, you can set up CDR and PAT files for external OLE support (using the File Type Configuration dialog box), which will allow you to create much nicer thumbnails for them. However, the price is high: Corel is a very slow OLE server, so it takes much longer to create the thumbnails.

Corel files may also be viewed, printed, or copied to the clipboard as metafiles using the OLE support.

CorelGALLERY files (.BMF) can be viewed and thumbnailed via OLE also, as long as the Corel Gallery program itself is installed. As with the CDR files, OLE is considerably slower than the internal bitmap support.


CEL: AutoDesk Animator Cel Files

ThumbsPlus supports both the earlier and newer versions of .CEL files. The later version is a single-frame .FLC file.


CGM: Computer Graphics Metafile

CGM files are vector graphic files useful as clipart. They scale well, and have the distinction of being the only ANSI standard graphic format. There are many flavors of CGM files; ThumbsPlus supports the most popular for PCs (binary encoding), with the following limitations:

•	Embedded cell arrays (bitmaps) are not supported.

•	New (version 3) extensions, such as Bézier curves, are not supported.

•	Font support is improved yet still incomplete.

•	Rotated (non-orthogonal) ellipses and elliptical arcs are not correctly rendered.

•	Hatches are rendered with the closest hatching format available from Windows.


CUR, ANI: Windows Cursor files

ThumbsPlus can create thumbnails for CUR and ANI files, though no viewing support is currently available.


DCS: Kodak Professional DCS Camera files
DCS: Kodak Professional DCS Camera files [P]

Kodak Professional Digital Cameras (DCS-420, DCS-460) use the DCS format. For unknown reasons, Kodak decided to make these files TIFF files; but standard TIFF readers cannot access the actual image information -- only the thumbnail is available.

The registered version of ThumbsPlus will properly recognize and decode DCS images; however, their extension must remain .TIF, as the Kodak library won't handle them otherwise.

DCS-460 cameras have a calibration file (.CAL). ThumbsPlus will assume this file is located in the same folder with THUMBS.EXE. You can specify the actual location in the THUMBS.INI file, as follows:

[DCS]
WorkingDirectory=folder where .CAL file resides

If this file is not available for a DCS-460 image, the error "PDC Library reports error #2" will result.


DCX: Multi-image PCX files

The DCX format is a multi-page format for PCX files, generally generated by fax software. In particular, Intel's fax software produces DCX files.  Using the paging selections on the Edit menu selections, ThumbsPlus can view any of the images in a DCX file, and can split the pages into separate files.


DXF: AutoCADTM Exchange Format ®
DXF: AutoCADTM Exchange Format (R)

The DXF format is defined by AutoDesk, and is the format used for exchanging AutoCAD and other CAD system files. As opposed to the DWG format, which is proprietary and constantly changing, the DXF format is published and relatively stable.


EPS: Encapsulated Postscript

EPS files are Postscript language files, created for Postscript printers. ThumbsPlus can access only the preview image (which can be in either TIFF or Windows Metafile format).

Copying this format to the clipboard or otherwise saving or converting it only accesses this preview; the Postscript contents themselves are not accessed by ThumbsPlus.


FIF: Fractal Image files (Iterated Systems, Inc.)

FIF files are compressed using fractal compression, as patented and implemented by Iterated Systems Inc. ThumbsPlus can decode (read) these files; future support is planned (possibly as an additional cost add-on) for encoding them.


GEM: GEM Metafile

GEM Metafiles are vector graphic files which include drawing commands for rendering pictures. They are similar to, but less complete than, CGM files. GEM files originated on the Amiga, and have gone through several enhancement periods.

ThumbsPlus does not claim to support all GEM files at this time; fonts are not handled very well, and curve support is incomplete. However, the support is sufficient for most clip-art, the most common type of file stored in GEM format.


GIF: CompuServe GIF

CompuServe, an on-line service, developed the GIF format to provide good file compression and relatively fast decompression speed. GIF is a very popular format for online services, but is limited to a maximum of 256 colors.

Two standards have been developed: 87a and 89a. ThumbsPlus fully supports the 87a standard, and supports (for viewing) much of the 89a standard, including multiple images (GIF animations), text blocks and input extensions.

ThumbsPlus can read and write interlaced and transparent GIF files. Transparency (for a specific color) is maintained when the image is saved. Note that if you modify the colors of the image, you'll most likely need to select a new transparency color. The topic GIF Save Options contains more information on saving GIF files.

ThumbsPlus cannot create or modify multiple-image GIF files, or GIF files with text or input extensions; only single-image GIF files can be written.

The LZW compression in GIF files is licensed under a patent from Unisys Corporation.


ICO: Windows Icons

ThumbsPlus supports Microsoft Windows icon files, which are associated with applications for display in Windows Explorer.


IFF, LBM: Amiga and Deluxe Paint

The IFF format is an Amiga image storage format. LBM was created for the Deluxe Paint package, and is essentially the same as IFF. ThumbsPlus supports all known IFF and LBM images, including HAM6, HAM8 and masked images.

ThumbsPlus does not automatically correct the aspect ratio for files with non-square pixels.


IMG: GEM Images
IMG: GEM Raster Images

The IMG format was originally designed for the Atari computers, then migrated to PCs for several GEM-based products, including Ventura Publisher. IMG files may also be embedded in .GEM metafiles.

ThumbsPlus supports reading of all known IMG types, but does not currently correct the aspect ratio for files with non-square pixels.


JPG, JIF, JFI: JPEG (JFIF) Files
J6I: Ricoh camera (JPEG with header)

The JPEG format was developed to provide a high degree of compression for images. It is a "lossy" compression method, meaning that some color information from the original is lost. When saving JPEG files, ThumbsPlus allows you to specify the intended quality of the image. Several other formats, including .J6I (Ricoh camera) and .PMP (Sony camera) are standard JFIF files with a header. ThumbsPlus can usually locate the JFIF header and process these files.

JPEG is generally appropriate for photographed or scanned images, and works best for 24-bit sources. JPEG is generally inappropriate for any type of line-drawn art.

The JFIF specification describes a standard way to incorporate JPEG images in disk files; only JFIF images are supported by ThumbsPlus. Some software (notably GIF2JPG, by Handmade Software), writes non-JFIF files which ThumbsPlus cannot handle.

ThumbsPlus incorporates the Independent JPEG Group's source code (release 6). This includes support for reading and writing progressive JPEG files.

Lossless JPEG is not currently supported. For lossless storage of 24-bit images, use TIFF, Targa, BMP, or PCX.

ThumbsPlus allows several loading options for JPEG files. When using a 256-color display, the JPEG file may be reduced to 256 colors during loading. This is not recommended if the image is going to be edited; too much color information is lost with dithering. See JPEG Load Options.

IPTC/NAA information, stored by Adobe Photoshop and other software, can be extracted from JPEG files and displayed in File | Properties - Info. ThumbsPlus retains the information if the file is written or converted to TIFF format.

For more information on saving in the JFIF format, see JPEG Save Options.


KDC: Kodak DC40, DC50 Native Camera Images
KDC: Kodak DC40, DC50 and DC120 Native Camera Images

KDC files contain the native image format for DC-40, DC-50 and DC-120 Kodak cameras. ThumbsPlus uses libraries provided by Kodak to read these files. ThumbsPlus does not current interface with digital cameras directly (except via TWAIN, where available), though we are considering the possibility in the future.

Image information (exposure time, F-stop, etc.) are available both as comments of the image in the view window (Edit | Edit Comments), and are displayed as file details in the File | Properties dialog. Different DC camera models provide different information.


KIZ: Kodak Postcard files

Kodak postcards (KIZ) files are uuencoded HTML text and JPEG images. ThumbsPlus loads only the JPEG image contained in the file; the HTML and other information is ignored.


KQP: Konica Camera files

Konica camera files (.KQP) are mangled JPEG files. We have very few samples, but ThumbsPlus handles all that we have.


MAC: Macintosh Paint files

MAC files are the original black & white raster graphics that the MacPaint program stored. They are always 720x576 bi-level images.


MIC: Microsoft Image Composer

Microsoft Image Composer files are generated by the Image Composer program. Microsoft will not release specifications for this format, so we had to figure it out ourselves.

ThumbsPlus can read all MIC files that I've encountered; however, I have no way of knowing if my knowledge of their format is complete.

Notes:

•	All IC sprites are flattened into a single image (alpha channels are processed during the flattening).

•	Sprite gamma values (which cause numerous color-matching problems in IC itself) are ignored.

•	For quick identification purposes, the file extension of MIC files must be .MIC.

•	For best viewing and thumbnailing, set your monitor gamma using the main menu selection Options | Viewing & Slide Show - Monitor, and set the default MIC gamma to 1.0 by using the view menu selection View | Assumed Gamma.


MID: Windows MIDI Music files

ThumbsPlus can play .MID files if you double-click them. The playing will cease when the MIDI file completes or you press the [Esc] key.

The thumbnail generated for a .MID file is simply the icon of the application associated with the file in Windows Explorer.


MND, MNI: Mandelbrot for Windows images

Mandelbrot for Windows is another Cerious Software product, which generates Mandelbrot set fractals. The files generated by this program may be thumbnailed and viewed in ThumbsPlus.

MNI files contain information about generating the image only, but may contain a preview bitmap. ThumbsPlus can extract this preview.


MOV: QuickTime for Windows

MOV is the standard Macintosh video format.

The registered version of ThumbsPlus supports playing, viewing and thumbnailing of QuickTime files.

MOV files must be flattened to play on Windows. This means that the Macintosh resource and data file forks must be combined into a single file.


MPG: MPEG compressed video

MPEG video files are compressed video files supported by many newer video cards and display drivers. ThumbsPlus uses the Microsoft DirectShow multimedia interface to play and thumbnail MPEG video files.


PCD: Kodak PhotoCD Images

Kodak PhotoCD files are a proprietary format developed by Kodak for photographic image storage. They are generally located on CD-ROM only, due to their extremely large size. They may be loaded at various resolutions.

ThumbsPlus can load at any of the following resolutions:

•	Base/64 (96x64)

•	Base/16 (192x128)

•	Base/4 (384x256)

•	Base (768x512)

•	Base*4 (1536x1024)

•	Base*16 (3072x2048)

•	Base*64 (6144x4096)

There are some shortcut keys for selecting the display resolution on the fly: hold the following keys while double-clicking to cause the picture to load at specific resolutions:

CTRL:	Base * 4 (1536 x 1024)
ALT:	Base / 4 (384 x 256)
CTRL+ALT:	Base (768 x 512)

ThumbsPlus can load as either Truecolor, 8-bit palette or as grayscale images. Use the main menu selection  Options | File Loading - Photo CD to select the desired size and color depth for loading PhotoCD files.

Encrypted and watermarked images are supported - ThumbsPlus will request the password when such an image is requested at an encrypted or watermarked size.


PCT, PICT: Macintosh PICT format

The PICT format is the Macintosh's native drawing format (similar to WMF on Windows). ThumbsPlus supports version 1, version 2 and version 2 extended formats. Vector (drawing) commands are handled as well as images. When ThumbsPlus recognizes that a PICT file has only raster information, the file is loaded as a bitmap; otherwise, it is loaded as a metafile.

There are some commands in PICT files that are not handled, or not supported completely. We will continue to improve support for PICT over the next few releases.


PCX, PCC: ZSoft Picture

PCX and PCC files are a fairly early PC graphic format, which has been extended over the years to support more and varied color depths.  PCX files may or may not be compressed; ThumbsPlus always writes version 5, compressed PCX files, in the color depth of the current image.  ThumbsPlus does support 24-bit (3-planes x 8-bits per pixel) PCX files.

Note:  The only known PCX format not supported by ThumbsPlus is 2-plane CGM files (4 color). These files may be supported in the future if there is sufficient interest.


PFB: Adobe Type 1 Font
PFB, PSS: Adobe Type 1 Font (R)

PFB files are Adobe Type 1 Font files. ThumbsPlus handles them similarly to TrueType fonts (TTF), and the same settings apply.

Note: Version 3.02 or later of Adobe Type Manager is required.


PNG: PiNG format

PNG files are based a new graphics specification that provides for excellent lossless compression without any patented technology. Unlike GIF, which requires royalties to Unisys Corp., PNG is royalty free.

ThumbsPlus can read and write PiNG files, though transparency and interlacing options are not yet supported.


PSD: Adobe Photoshop
PSD, PDD: Adobe Photoshop

PSD files are the native format used by Adobe Photoshop. There are various "flavors" of PSD files; ThumbsPlus can read most of them (as of Photoshop 4.0), with the following known limitations:

•	Only the first channel of multi-channel PSD files is loaded (as grayscale).

•	Duotone files are loaded as grayscale.

Version 3 and 4 Photoshop files are viewed and thumbnailed as they were last viewed in Photoshop. Version 2.5 compatibility mode must be set in Photoshop when saving the files (Photoshop's menu: File | Preferences | General | More). Setting compatibility mode does not eliminate the availability of any version 3 features, but makes the files somewhat larger (to accommodate the extra image information).

We may provide full Photoshop support at some point in the future (layers, channels, etc.).


RAS: Sun Raster

Sun Raster files are a popular image format for SUN UNIX systems. They can contain either color-mapped (256-color) or truecolor images.

Many packages write the colors reversed (Red for Blue, Blue for Red), without setting the appropriate flag in the header. You can use Image | Colors | Swap Red and Blue from the view window menu to correct such files.


RAW: Raw Grayscale
RAW: Raw Grayscale or RGB
ST4: Santa Barbara Instruments Group
CT scan, Mammography, MRI and Nanoscope

ThumbsPlus can handle a wide variety of raw grayscale or RGB files, including:

•	8-bit grayscale

•	16-bit grayscale (Intel or Motorola byte order)

•	24-bit RGB (RGB or BGR order)

•	32-bit RGBA (RGBA, ARGB, BGRA or ABGR order)

Several types are internally defined and automatically recognized (they need not be defined in the Raw Types); however, you may need to set up file extensions in Options | Preferences - File Types:

CT scan:	256 x 256 x 16-bit gray
MRI scan:	256 x 256 x 16-bit gray
Nanoscope:	512 x 512 x 16-bit gray
Mammography:	512 x 512 x 16-bit gray
SBIG/ST4:	192 x 165 x 8-bit gray

ThumbsPlus can skip areas at the beginning or end of the file, and can replicate image scan lines (some medical imaging programs store only every other scan line). You use the main menu selection Options | File Loading - Raw to configure raw file types.

Note: In order for ThumbsPlus to recognize a file as a defined raw type, the image information must be defined so that the file size matches the "expected file size" as described above.


RGB, SGI: Silicon Graphics Image files

These files are generated by Silicon Graphics workstations. ThumbsPlus handles uncompressed, compressed, color and grayscale SGI files.


SFW: Seattle FilmWorks Mangled JPEG files
SFW: Seattle FilmWorks - Mangled JPEG files

Instead of either (1) using an existing, non-proprietary format, or (2) creating their own proprietary image format, Seattle FilmWorks chose to take an existing, non-proprietary format and mangle it to confuse most software.

Unfortunately, their PhotoWorks software is not useful enough to many of their users, who have begged for SFW file support in ThumbsPlus. With some leads provided by Ed Hamrick (of VuePrint fame) and some additional tinkering and hacking, I was able to add support for the files.


STX, ST5, ST6, ST7, ST8: Santa Barbara Instruments Group

Santa Barbara Instruments Group manufactures and sells digital CCD cameras for astronomy. The camera software produces these formats. ThumbsPlus can load both grayscale and color image; for 16-bit grayscale, ThumbsPlus uses the range of pixels as last viewed or processed by SBIG software.

Note: The older .ST4 format files may be defined as 192 x 165 8-bit grayscale raw files, with a 192 byte skip at the end of the file.


TGA, WIN: Targa Truevision TM
TGA, WIN: Targa Truevision™

ThumbsPlus supports 8-bit, 16-bit and 24-bit Targa files. The more recent Targa extensions (including the "Developer Area") are not yet supported, but planned for a subsequent release.

The alpha channel information not currently retained or processed.

ThumbsPlus saves TGA files at the appropriate color depth for the graphic; 4-bit (16-color) files are promoted to 8-bit Targa files.


TTF, TTR: TrueType fonts

ThumbsPlus can thumbnail, install, and remove TrueType fonts.

The default format of the thumbnail is to show the font name in the font itself. The text in the thumbnail may be changed using the main menu selection Options | File Loading - Fonts.

When removing fonts with ThumbsPlus, the TTF file is removed from the Windows\Fonts system folder (and the Window's registry is updated). If you are browsing the Windows\Fonts folder directly, you may not want to remove fonts unless you know you have a copy elsewhere.

See also: Installing Fonts and Removing Fonts.


TIF: Tagged Image File Format

Several companies developed the Tagged Image Format, including Aldus and Silicon Graphics, to be the be-all and end-all of image file formats. Because of its scope and extensibility, it is an extremely complex format that no single product can support completely.

The known TIFF formats not currently handled by ThumbsPlus are:

•	Images in YCbCr (YUV) or proprietary color formats.

•	Alpha channels (extra samples) are discarded when reading.

The following compression methods and special-interest formats are supported:

•	Multi-image TIFFs (Using the paging selections on the Edit menu selections, ThumbsPlus can view any of the images in a multi-image TIFF file, and can split the pages into separate files.)

•	Tiled TIFFs

•	CCITT RLE, Group 3, and Group 4 Fax compression

•	Packbits, Thunderscan and Next compression

•	LZW compression

•	Motorola (MM) format

•	JPEG compression (post TIFF 6.0 format)

•	ZIP "deflate" mode compression (experimental)

•	CMYK TIFFs

•	CIE L*a*b colorspace TIFF files

•	16-bit grayscale and 48-bit color TIFF files

ThumbsPlus writes uncompressed TIFFs, or compressed via CCITT Group 3 or 4 FAX, Packbits, JPEG, ZIP, or LZW.

IPTC/NAA information, stored by Adobe Photoshop and other software, can be extracted from TIFF files and displayed in File | Properties | Info. ThumbsPlus retains the information if the file is written or converted to JPEG format.


UUE, 001: UUencoded graphics

UUE files are graphics that have been encoded for 7-bit transmission using the 'uuencode' method. These files are very popular on the Internet, especially in the Usenet Newsgroups. ThumbsPlus supports single and multi-part UUE files; multi-part files must have an extension indicating the part number (i.e., File.001, File.002, File.003). Only the .001 (or .UUE) file needs to be in the file list; the other parts will be automatically referenced when needed during decoding.

There are several loading options for UUE files, which include the capability to decode to a specific folder and to remove the original file. See Options | File Loading - UUdecode.


WAV: Windows sound files

WAV files are the standard Windows sound format. ThumbsPlus can play them when they are double-clicked.

The thumbnail generated for WAV files is simply the icon of the application associated with them in Windows Explorer.  To generate thumbnails from rendered audio data, see: Main Window - Options | File Loading - Movie / Sound - Render audio waveforms.


WPG: Word Perfect Graphics

WPG files are a vector (metafile) format that WordPerfect Corporation developed for use with its word processing products. Like other formats, WPG has evolved over the years.

ThumbsPlus supports both the original WPG (WPG1) and new (WPG2) formats for graphics; some charting and textual items aren't supported in WPG1, and the following are not supported in WPG2:

•	Poly B-Splines.

•	Complex polygons (components are rendered and filled separately).

•	Object group rotation, skew, taper and translation.

•	Text items are partially handled.

•	Bitmaps are not rotated, skewed or tapered.

•	Gradient fills are partially supported.


WMF, MF: Windows Metafile

The Windows Metafile format is the standard Windows format for storing vector and metafile graphics. It is quite powerful, as anything that can be drawn on the screen or printed on a printer can be stored in a metafile. It does, however, lack several rather rudimentary graphics primitives, such as Bézier curves and non-orthogonal ellipses.

ThumbsPlus can read and write Windows metafiles; vector graphics are also passed to and from the clipboard in this format.

Also, using OLE to load or thumbnail proprietary formats most often uses Windows Metafiles as the format for transfer of the picture of the file.


FIF End-User License

The license below applies to the files DECO_32.DLL and FIF.TXT.

END USER AND ROYALTY FREE DISTRIBUTION LICENSE AGREEMENT - FRACTAL IMAGE DECODER

REDISTRIBUTION PERMITTED ONLY IF PROGRAM AND FILES ARE NOT MODIFIED AND ALL FILES, INCLUDING THIS FILE, ARE INCLUDED.

GRANT: Iterated Systems, Inc. ("Iterated") hereby grants you a limited, nontransferable, terminable, non-exclusive license subject to the following to use its accompanying computer software product known as the Fractal Image Decoder (including the 16-bit, 32-bit and Macintosh versions "Software") for individual use only on a Personal Computer described below.  You may place the Software on networks and online systems exclusively for the purpose of allowing downloading and copying of the Software for archival, distribution and installation purposes (but not for purposes of execution by the network or online system) provided any such copy must contain all of the original Software and text files including this License Agreement and any proprietary, license and copyright notices on the original.  This License Agreement only applies to the image compression decoder Software described above and does not grant any rights to any other Iterated software, even if related to the Software, including any software that encodes or compresses images in any way.

You may use the Software only on a single user Personal Computer that: (a) has one Intel 386, 486 or Pentium processor, Motorola 68036 or 68040 processor or IBM Power PC processor;  (b) operates only the Microsoft DOS and Windows operating system or the Macintosh operating system; (c) contains at least 4 megabytes of random access memory; (d) contains 80 megabytes of internal hard disk storage; (e) contains a keyboard (not an infrared remote) and monitor (not a television set); (f) is able to produce printed output on a local printer; and (g) does not act as a server on any network (including a local area network, wide area network or Internet) or otherwise allow operation of the Software from a remote or separate computer or terminal ("Personal Computer").  For the avoidance of doubt, and without limitation of the foregoing, "Personal Computer" does not include game players, television set-top boxes or so-called "Internet Appliances".

You may not permit other individuals to use, operate or copy the Software (except as permitted above).  You may not use or allow the use of the Software on any computer or other device that is not a Personal Computer (as defined above).  You may not modify, translate, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, (except to the extent applicable laws prohibit such restriction), or create derivative works based on the Software, copy the Software (except as specified above), rent, lease, transfer, license or otherwise transfer rights to the Software, or remove any proprietary notices, licenses, displays, installation procedures or labels on or in the Software, whether set forth in text files or on media.

 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY: THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED ON AN AS-IS BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND AND ITERATED DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.  The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the Software is borne by you.  Should the Software prove defective, you and not Iterated assume the entire cost of any service and repair.  This Disclaimer of Warranty constitutes an essential part of the License Agreement.  SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, SO THIS DISCLAIMER MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE OR BY JURISDICTION.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT, CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL ITERATED OR ITS SUPPLIERS, LICENSORS OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY TYPE INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, LOSS OF DATA, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES.  IN NO EVENT WILL ITERATED BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF ITERATED'S LIST PRICE LICENSEE FEE FOR THE SOFTWARE, IF ANY, EVEN IF ITERATED SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.  SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

TITLE:    Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the Software shall remain in Iterated and/or its licensors or suppliers.  The Software is protected by copyright laws of the United States and international copyright treaties.  You are permitted to use only one copy of the Software, even if you receive multiple copies, whether via download or on magnetic media.  Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the content accessed through the Software is the property of the applicable content owner, and may be protected by copyright or other applicable law.  This License gives you no rights to such content.

TERMINATION:    This License will terminate automatically if you fail to comply with the limitations described above.  On termination, you must destroy all copies of the Software and documentation.

MISCELLANEOUS:   This Agreement represents the complete agreement concerning this license between the parties and supersedes all prior agreements and representations  between the parties.  This  Agreement may be amended only by a writing executed by both parties.  THE

ACCEPTANCE OF ANY PURCHASE ORDER PLACED BY YOU IS EXPRESSLY MADE CONDITIONAL  ON YOUR ASSENT TO THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN, AND NOT THOSE CONTAINED IN YOUR PURCHASE ORDER.  If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable for any reason, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent  necessary to make it enforceable.  This Agreement shall be governed by and construed under Georgia substantive law as such applies to agreements between Georgia residents entered into and performed within Georgia, except as governed by United States Federal law.  You consent to the jurisdiction of the state and federal courts in the State of Georgia, U.S.A. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded.

U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS: The Software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS.  Use, duplication, or disclosure by or for the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions set forth in DFARS 252.227-7013 (c)(1)(ii), FAR 52.227-19, and Clause 18-52.227-86(d) of NASA Supplement to the FAR, as applicable.  Contractor/manufacturer is Iterated Systems, Inc., 3525 Piedmont Road, Seven Piedmont Center, Suite 600, Atlanta, Georgia, U.S.A. 30305-1530.


FPX: FlashPix Image Files

FlashPix images, developed jointly by Kodak, Hewlett-Packard, Microsoft and Live Picture, are based on the JPEG compression standard and present the typical artifacts common to the DCT compression schemes.  In the FlashPix format, images are split into tiles; every tile is 64x64 pixels. Each tile can be uncompressed, or compressed using the standard JPEG coding. Images are stored in files using the Microsoft structured documents format, or COM/OLE documents. This is the format used for the Microsoft applications like Word, Excel, etc.


Main Window - File | Database | Compact

This menu selection allows you to compact a ThumbsPlus database (local  Microsoft Access databases only).  This will release all disk space occupied by deleted or moved thumbnails so it can be used for other files.  After selecting the compact operation a modal status dialog will be displayed informing you that the compact operation is in progress.

Upon completion, compaction information will be displayed and you can then close the dialog by clicking the OK button.


Main Window - File | Database | Connect
Main Window - File | Database | Connect	Ctrl+Shift+E

ThumbsPlus can connect to an ODBC compliant data source.  For more information on how to setup an ODBC data source click here to run the ODBC Administrator Setup or open Control Panel and then double click on the ODBC icon.

Note: This is a Microsoft Windows configuration option that is separate from ThumbsPlus.


Main Window - Image | Batch Process
 Main Window - Image | Batch Process	F12

Set Information	Input Files	Batch Steps	Output Details

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Batch processing is one of the most useful and powerful capabilities of ThumbsPlus. A "batch" is a group of files, and batch processing performs a set of operations on each file in the batch. Here are some examples of processes that you can do:

•	Convert a group of files from TIFF to JPEG (or PNG, or GIF) for the World Wide Web.

•	Convert a group of various files, rasterizing to 800x800, sharpening a bit, cropping to 800x600, then resampling to 640x480 and saving as JPEG to a different folders.

•	Create a bunch of thumbnail-sized JPG files for the Web (for complete Web page building, you can use the Web Page Wizard as well).

•	Convert a bunch of GIF or LZW-compressed TIFF files to PiNG.

•	Rasterize several PICT or CGM files, with antialiasing, and storing as LZW-compressed TIFF.

•	Convert a bunch of files to a 256-color common optimum palette ("Superpalette") for use in a GIF or other animation.

•	Append to, replace, or remove image comments from TIFF, JPEG or GIF files.

You can save defined batch sets and reuse them later on different sets of files. You can even call a batch set from within another batch set! (This can be useful, for example, to write two files -- say, a GIF and a JPEG -- from each input file.)


Main Window - File | Database | User Fields
Main Window - File | Database | User Fields	Ctrl+Shift+U

Use this option to create and modify user defined fields in the database. You may enter the user field label, field type, and field length (for text fields).

Field Label. The name of the user field.  This label will display on the User Fields property tab and Assign User Fields dialog box.

Field Types. The type of the user field.  This type can be either text, numeric, decimal or date/time.

Field Length. The length of text user fields.  The maximum value is 255.

Add. Adds the user field to the Fields list..

Fields. The list of user fields that will be created after clicking OK.  This list displays the field label, type and length.

Remove. Removes the selected user field from the Fields list. This button is only available if a user field is selected in the Fields list.

Change.  Edits the currently selected field (in the Fields list) for modifications.  The Add button becomes a Replace button.

Up/Down Arrows.  Moves the selected field up or down in the Fields list.

OK. Makes the selected modifications (if any) to the user fields setup stored in the ThumbsPlus database.

Cancel. Cancels any changes to the user fields setup.

Help. Invokes ThumbsPlus help for user fields setup.


User Field Types

The following types are available for user fields:

Text	Character data limited to 255 characters (eg: "Charlotte, NC")
Numeric	Integer numeric data (eg: 35)
Decimal	Floating point numeric data (eg: 3.14159)
Date/Time	Date/Time data (eg: "11/21/1963 11:05 AM")


task_window_popup
	Tasks Tab
The task window displays all active background tasks and those tasks that completed but encountered one or more errors.  You can control tasks (i.e. stop, pause, resume, show and clear error lists) by simply right clicking on a task and selecting the function from the popup task menu.


	Network Neighborhood
The network neighborhood branch of the folder tree displays all available networks [image], along with each network's groups [image], computers [image] and their shared folders [image].  You may make thumbnails directly on a shared network folder or connect a network drive to the share and thumbnail on the newly connected network drive.


offline_cdroms
	Offline CDROMs
An offline CDROM [image] is a CD that has been scanned in ThumbsPlus, but is not currently available.  You may browse the thumbnails under any offline CDROM just as you would any other disk in the folder tree.  If you double click on a thumbnail under an offline CDROM, ThumbsPlus will prompt you (by asking for the CD label) to place the CD in your drive before attempting to open the image file.


offline_floppies
	Offline Disks
An offline disk [image] is a floppy diskette, ZIP disk, or other removable media that was scanned in ThumbsPlus, but is not currently available.  You may browse the thumbnails under any offline disk just as you would any other disk in the folder tree.  If you double click on a thumbnail under one of these disks, ThumbsPlus will prompt you (by asking for the disk label) to place the disk or media the appropriate drive before attempting to open the image file.


found_files
	Found Files
A ThumbsPlus found files list [image] is a group of thumbnails that where located as a result of a Find operation.  All information about a found list is stored under the ThumbsPlus installation folder in special files (with .FFI and .FFL extensions).  Found file lists may reference files across multiple folders, hard disks, and even networked computers.  For more information, see: Edit | Find by Query. and Edit | Find Similar Images.


recycle_bin
	Recycle Bin
The recycle bin is a special desktop folder that serves as a tempory holding area for deleted files.  When a file is deleted with the recycle bin enabled, it is not actually deleted until you empty the recycle bin.  Deleted files can be restored from the recycle bin as well.  ThumbsPlus allows you to choose whether it should use the Windows recycle bin settings when it deletes files.  See: Options | Preferences - General Use Windows recycle bin settings for more information.


Folder Tree Caption

The folder tree caption identifies the window containing the folder tree.  You may move the folder tree (by left-click-dragging of the caption bar) to another corner of the Thumbs Plus main window, providing that it is adjacent to the tasks & preview window.  In turn the task window may also be moved in the same manner.  Almost any combination of docked positions may be achieved by dragging this way.


File|Database|Statistics
Main Window - File | Database | Statistics	Ctrl+T

This dialog box displays real-time database statistics for the currently opened database.

File Name.  This is the actual ThumbsPlus database file name (for local databases - .td4 files).  For any database (remote or local) accessed though an ODBC data source (See: File | Database | Connect...) this field will contain an ODBC data source name (DSN).

Description.  This is the user entered description of this ThumbsPlus database.  For any ODBC data sources this field will contain an ODBC data source name description (entered during the DSN setup).

Thumbnail dimensions.  (These options were specified when the database was created File | Database - New Database OR modified through Options | Preferences - Thumbnails)

Width. The thumbnail width (in pixels) chosen.

Height. The thumbnail height (in pixels) chosen when the database was created.

Thumbnail color format. The color depth for thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.  ThumbsPlus supports the following thumbnail color depths:

Grayscale (32 level)	Back and white thumbnails with 32 different grayscale levels.

236 color palette	236 color thumbnails based on the ThumbsPlus color palette.

Highcolor (15-bit)	32768 color (Blue,Green,Red) thumbnails with 5 bits per color
sample. The 16th bit is unused.

Truecolor (24-bit)	16 million color (Blue, Green, Red) thumbnails with 8 bits per
color sample.

All formats above may also be compressed.

Record Information.  (These fields display all information about disks, folders, images, etc that have been scanned and stored in the database)

Disk volumes defined.  The number of actual volumes that ThumbsPlus has scanned and stored in the database.

Folder paths defined.  The number of folder paths that have been scanned.

Thumbnail records.  The number of thumbnails stored in the database.

Keywords defined.  The number of unique keywords that exist in the database.

Keyword references.  The total number of keyword references that exist for all thumbnails in the database.

User fields defined.  The total number of user fields that have been created in the database.

User field references.  The total number of user field references that exist for all thumbnails in the database.

Total file size (bytes).  The actual database file size.  For any database engine other that MS Access/Jet this field doesn't apply.

Number of users.  The number of users connected to the database.

Note:  All information listed under this section is updated every 2 seconds while the dialog is being displayed.


Main Window - File | Database | Repair

You can repair a corrupted ThumbsPlus database (local  Microsoft Access databases only) by selecting File|Database->Repair from the main ThumbsPlus menu.  This will validate table data and rebuild indexes that may have become damaged as a result of a power disruption.  After selecting the repair operation a modal status dialog will be displayed informing you that the repair operation is in progress.

Upon completion, the following message will be displayed and you can then close the dialog by clicking the OK button.


Main Window - Edit | Copy Thumbnail
Main Window - Edit | Copy Thumbnail	Ctrl+Alt+C

This option copies the first selected file's thumbnail to the clipboard in the appropriate format for the file for raster images or metafile for vector images).  If no files are selected, this menu option is disabled.


Thumbnail View Font Button

You can set the font for the curent thumbnail view by clicking the font button on the thumbnail view window's caption bar.  After clicking the font button a standard windows select font dialog will be displayed.


thumbnail size
Thumbnail Size Percentage

The thumbnail size percentage is a percent of the actual thumbnail size stored in the Thumbs Plus database.


Thumbnail Caption Font

The thumbnail caption font is the font that Thumbs Plus will use to display information on the thumbnail view.  Each thumbnail view has its own font setting which can be set under Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Gallery | Create
Main Window - Thumbnail | Gallery | Create...
Thumbnail Popup Menu - Gallery | Create...
Found List Popup Menu - Create Gallery...

When creating a gallery the following dialog box will be displayed:

You can create a gallery by right-clicking on a group of selected thumbnails in the thumbnail view and selecting Gallery | Create from the displayed popup menu.  You can also create a gallery by simply dragging the selected thumbnails to the Galleries folder tree group icon in the folder tree.

In the Name field, enter the gallery name.  After creating the gallery, this name will be displayed underneath the Galleries folder tree group.

If you wish to modify the default sort order (used when this gallery is displayed), you can select the primary and secondary sort orders in the Order by dropdown lists and optionally reverse the sort order by checking the Descending checkbox.

Note: Gallery thumbnails may be reordered into any sequence desired by dragging them around in the thumbnail view - right-clicking on the gallery in the folder tree and selecting Save Gallery Order.  Galleries will ONLY display using a reordered sequence when Manual Order is checked.  You may change gallery properties at any time by right-clicking on the gallery in the folder tree and selecting Properties from the popup menu.


Folder Tree
Main Window - Folder Tree

	The folder tree is the child window with the Location window caption.  You may drag folders (folders) from one part of the tree to another (as long as the move takes place underneath the My Computer branch). You can display sub-folders for any displayed drive or folder that is preceded by [+] indicator.  To display the sub-folders, expand the desired folder by clicking on the [+] symbol.  This symbol will change to a [-] symbol and any sub-folders will be displayed under the current folder.  To collapse the folder, simply click on the [-] symbol and the folder will collapse. For more information on the folder bar, located at the top of the folder tree, click here.


View Window - Image | Stamp
View Window - Image | Stamp...	A

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Stamp...

The image stamp function allows you to apply either another image or text to the current image.  After selecting this operation from the View WIndows Image menu, the following dialog box is displayed:

Source

Image.  Check this option to select another image file as the stamp image.  Use the [...] button to browse for the desired image file to use.

Text.  Check this option to enter a text string to be used as the stamp image.  The text will be rendered using the selected font and color.  Click the [>>] button to select predefined file information items from the button menu.

Anti-alias.  Check this option (for text stamps) to anti-alias the edges of the selected text font.

Font.  Click this button to pick the desired font style and size for the text stamp.

Preserve Spaces.  Check this option (for text stamps) to keep any leading or trailing spaces in the text.

Default Text Color.  Check this option (for text stamps) to set the text color to the default (black).

Default Backgnd Color.  Check this option (for text stamps) to set the text background color to the default (white).

Text Color.  Click this button to select the color for the text stamps text color.

Backgnd Color.  Select the background color of the stamp image.  This color will be used to fill in areas around text or rotated images to be stamped.

Settings

Placement and Pixels.  Click this button to display the Placement and Pixels dialog box.  This Button is disabled when the Default Placement and Pixel Settings option is checked.

Pixel Settings.  Click this button to display the Pixel Settings dialog box.  This Button is disabled when the Default Pixel Settings option is checked.

View.  Click this button to view the stamp as it will look in the image view window.

Clear.  Click this button to remove the stamp display from the image view window.

Note: In the registered version of ThumbsPlus, you can also stamp images in batch mode. (Image | Batch Process).


View Window - Image | Crop | To Selection
 View Window - Transform | Crop to Selection	Ctrl+R

Cropping to a selection will crop the image down to the currently selected area. This change will only be written to the disk file if you use the File | Save or File | Save As option.


selecting image area
Selecting Part of an Image

To select part of an image, you simply place the cursor at a desired location in the image and drag the mouse while holding the left mouse button down.  While dragging, you will see the selected area delimited by an inverted rectangle.  To finish selecting the area, simply release the left mouse button.

To select an area from the center out, hold the SHIFT key down, press the left mouse button at the place you want to be the center of the selection, and drag the mouse to a corner. Then release the mouse button.

See also: Mouse - View Window for more mouse button information.


View Window - Image | Crop | By Value / Add Background
View Window - Transform | Crop / Add Borders...	P

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Transform | Crop / Add Borders...

You can crop the image with greater precision by cropping by value.

Method.  Select a cropping method, either to (to specify the resulting size) or by (to specify how much to remove).

Amount.  Enter a cropping amount (determined by Units: pixels or % of image).

Units.  Select a unit for the cropping operation (either in pixels or % of image).

Orientation.  Select an orientation for cropping.  This always specifies the direction from which pixels will be removed from the image.  For horizontal cropping, the values are  from left, from right and centered.  For vertical cropping, the values are from top, from bottom, and centered.

Add Border.  Check this option to enable border additions.  Negative values are required in the Amount fields to add borders.

Border fill color.  Use this button to select a color for any added borders.


Main Window - Options | Viewing & Slide Show - Appearance
Main Window - Options | Viewing - Appearance	Ctrl+J

View Window - View | Preferences - Appearance	F9

Appearance     Window     Color Management     Monitor Gamma     Slide Show     Other

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This tab allows you to control the various settings for viewing files.

Cursor

Standard. Check this option to pick one of the standard ThumbsPlus cursors for use in all view windows.

Crosshair (+). Check this option to use the + crosshair cursor.  The cursor point is indicated by vertical and horizontal intersecting lines.

Crosshair (X). Check this option to use the X crosshair cursor.  The cursor point is indicated by diagonally intersecting lines.

Color. Use this button to select the color of the selected crosshair cursor.

Dither 24-bit in highcolor mode. When this option is selected, ThumbsPlus will dither truecolor (24-bit) images for display on high-color devices. This improves the appearance of some 24-bit images, especially those with smooth gradient fills.

Dither metafiles. Windows Metafiles generally include 24-bit color information. On 256-color palette-based displays, these colors will be dithered. ThumbsPlus generates (up to) 236-color palettes for displaying metafiles, resulting in much smoother displays. However, generating the palette and modifying the metafile display to take it into account slows the display process down. Select this option if you are in a hurry. Also select this option if you are using a 16-color or 24-million color display driver, or if you get strange results displaying or thumbnailing metafiles.

Scale bi-level images to Gray. When this option is selected, ThumbsPlus will scale bi-level images to grayscale for display. This improves their appearance considerably, but may be too computationally intensive for slower processors.

Resample images when reduced. Check this option to cause ThumbsPlus to resample the display image when reduced (zoomed out below 100%)..When image dimensions are reduced, rows and columns of pixels are eliminated from the image.  This removal of pixels can cause aberrations in the image known as moire patterns.  The resample operation is used to properly interpolate colors when making an image smaller and thereby prevent the appearance of these moire patterns.

Show selection mask.  Check this option to cause ThumbsPlus to mask the unselected areas of an image in a view window.

Automatically crop. Check this option to automatically crop borders on displayed images.  See Auto Crop.

Show gridlines when zoomed.  Check this option to display pixel grid/dots for images when zoomed to or above 4 times normal.

Show toolbar. When you check this item, ThumbsPlus will display a toolbar on each view window.

Show status line. When you check this item, ThumbsPlus will display a status line on each view window.

Show full path in title bar. Check this option to have the full pathname of the open file display in the view window's title bar (window caption).

Background Colors

View Window. Select a background color for the view window area that is not covered by the open image.

Metafile. Select a background color for transparent metafiles.


Main Window - Options | Viewing & Slide Show - Window
Main Window - Options | Viewing - Window	Ctrl+J

View Window - View | Preferences - Window	F9

Appearance     Window     Color Management     Monitor Gamma     Slide Show     Other

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This tab allows you to control the various settings related to view windows.

Initial Size

Automatic. The size of the view window is based on the size of the image or metafile being displayed.

Full screen. The entire screen is used to display the picture, without menu bar or caption. See View | Full Screen for more information on this mode.

Maximize. The window is maximized.

Remember last. The size of the view window will be opened the last size used.

Exactly. The view windows will be sized to the exact (X,Y) dimensions.

Initial Stretching

Don't stretch images. The image is not initially stretched.

Fit images to window. The image is always stretched or reduced to fill as much of the window as possible (depending on the setting for Maintain aspect ratio).

Reduce images to window. Initially, the image will be set to Stretch to fit mode only if the image is larger than the window ThumbsPlus creates for it. Otherwise, the image will be centered.

Fit images to window width. The width of the image will be stretched to fit the width of the window. This is especially useful for documents in portrait orientation (higher than wide).

Fit images to window height. The height of the image will be stretched to fit the height of the window. This is especially useful for documents in landscape orientation (wider than high).

Maintain aspect ratio. The ratio between the width and height of the image is kept constant, to avoid distorting the image.

Initial Position

Upper left.  The view windows will be positioned in the upper left of the monitor.

Cascaded.  The view windows will be cascaded from the upper left of the monitor.

Centered.  The view windows will be centered on the monitor.

Remember last.  The view windows will be opened at the last position used.

Exactly.  The view windows will be opened at the exact (X,Y) coordinates.

Miscellaneous

Monitor for view windows.  Available in multiple monitor mode ONLY.  Select which monitor(s) you want to use for opening view windows. This option works with Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP only. The available options are: # (specific monitor), (all) image is stretched across all monitors, and (same) the image is stretched across only the monitor in which the main ThumbsPlus is displayed.

Use all monitors for tiled or synched views.  Check this option (for multiple monitors only) to have ThumbsPlus tile or synch views across all available monitors.  If unchecked, ThumbsPlus will use the setting of Monitor for view windows to determine where to open view windows.

Max number of view windows. Use to select the maximum number of View windows which ThumbsPlus can manage at one time. Select a number between 1 and 40. Once this limit is reached (approximately), ThumbsPlus will close the oldest window before opening another.

Button size for audio/video.  Use to select the size of audio/video control buttons that will be displayed for movie and sound file playback.  The available options are small and large buttons.


Main Window - Options | Viewing & Slide Show - Options
Main Window - Options | Viewing - Other	Ctrl+J

View Window - View | Preferences - Other	F9

Appearance     Window     Color Management     Monitor Gamma     Slide Show     Other

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This tab allows control over several miscellaneous view window related settings.

Open windows for all selected files (rather than 1st). This selection determines how many windows ThumbsPlus opens when multiple files are selected any you pick Image | View. If you select this option, then a view window will appear for each selected file; otherwise, only a single view window is created.

Create icons or task bar entries for view windows. If this option is checked, ThumbsPlus will create task bar icons for any opened view windows.

View images while they are loading. This option causes ThumbsPlus to display the view window while loading each image, so you can see the image as it loads. On some displays, this may make the load take a bit longer.

Disable Undo. If you select this option, ThumbsPlus will not save the information necessary to undo image operations. This will speed up edit time and require less memory and temporary disk space.

Automatically adjust for non-square aspect ratios. If checked, images with stored resolutions having different horizontal and vertical values will be automatically scaled to reflect the non-square resolution aspect.

Check for Digimarc® watermarks when viewing. Scan the image files pixel data for a Digimarc ID (assigned by Digimarc) of the creator or owner of the image.

Show image comments when available. If an image has comments stored with it in the file, selecting this option will cause ThumbsPlus to automatically display them. The View | Edit Comments window displays automatically whenever you view an image with comments. ThumbsPlus can read comment fields from GIF, JPEG and TIFF files.

Use mouse wheel to zoom in/out on image. If checked, any mouse wheel movement in a view window will zoom in or out on the image. Unchecked, the mouse wheel will vertically scroll the image in the view window.

Move to next file after deleting or moving a file. If this option is checked and you delete the currently viewed image via File | Dispose | Delete File ThumbsPlus will advance the view window to the next available file in the thumbnail view.

Show file format options when overwriting (File | Save).  Check this option to make ThumbsPlus display the file format options dialog (if applicable) when overwriting an existing file via File | Save from the view window menu.

Use original JPEG quality when overwriting JPEG files (File | Save).  If checked, ThumbsPlus will use the JPEG image's original quality value when saving the new JPEG file.

Synchronize panoramic images horizontally.  Check this option to cause ThumbsPlus to display synched view windows in a horizontal layout when viewing two images having a "width>height" aspect ratio.  Note: When selecting more than 2 images to display in synched viewing mode this option is ignored.

Build list of files for previous/next when viewed from external source.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus initialize the view window's previous/next file list when the view window is opened from Windows Explorer or other external sources.  This allows you to press [Spacebar] or [Backspace] to view the next or previous files in the same folder.

Retain window size and zoom factor when switching images.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus keep your current window size and zoom percentage factor when switching to a new image in the view window.

Delete the file when pressing DELETE with no selected area.  Check this option to delete the file is the delete key is pressed and there is no area selected.

Selection Rectangle Size

The options apply to the Keyboard Selection Rectangle command [F11].

Default. Default selection size - 1/3 image width x 1/3 image height.

Specific Size If checked ThumbsPlus will set the selection rectangle to the specified width and height.


Main Window - Options | Viewing & Slide Show - Slide Show
Main Window - Options | Viewing - Slide Show	Ctrl+J

View Window - View | Preferences - Slide Show	F9

Appearance     Window     Color Management     Monitor Gamma     Slide Show     Other

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This tab allows you to control the options for slide show settings.

Show

Filenames. ThumbsPlus will display the file name of each file as it displays in the slide show.

Sequence numbers. Check this option to display file sequence numbers in the slide show.

File comments. ThumbsPlus will display the internal file comments of each file as it displays in the slide show.

Annotations. ThumbsPlus will display any database annotations of each file as it displays in the slide show.

Top / Bottom. Check either top or bottom placement of all show text items in the slide show.

Font. Select the text display font to be used during slide shows.

Text color. Pick the text color to be used when drawing text.

Background color.  Pick the background fill color for images that do not cover the entire screen.

Appearance

Show full screen. This option will cause ThumbsPlus to display the slide show in full screen. When unchecked, the slide show will run in a window.

Stretch bitmaps to screen. Causes ThumbsPlus to stretch images to fill the screen as much as possible.

Reduce bitmaps to screen. Similar to "Stretch," except that only bitmaps larger than the screen are resized. Bitmaps smaller than the screen size are centered.

Resample when reduced. Check this option to resample (properly interpolates colors) when reducing an images.

Interpolate when stretched. Check this option to perform Bi-linear pixel interpolation when stretching images to fit the screen.  This results in smoother color representation, but slightly slower display times.  See also: View Window - Transform | Resize for more information on pixel interpolation in ThumbsPlus.

Maintain original aspect ratios. When stretching bitmaps, ThumbsPlus will ensure that the width-to-height ratio remains constant, rather than distorting the image.

Enable color management.  Enables Windows color management in the slide show.

Slide show monitor.  Available in multiple monitor mode ONLY.  Select which monitor(s) you want to use for the slide show. This option works with Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP only. The available options are: # (specific monitor), (all) image is stretched across all monitors, and (same) the image is stretched across only the monitor in which the main ThumbsPlus is displayed.

Options

Slide Show Timing Mode:

Mode (Manual, Timed Delay, Audio Wait or Audio Matched).  Use this dropdown list to select the desired method of delay between images displayed during the slide show.  Manual mode will not automatically advance the image files - user intervention via keyboard arrows, space and backspace, or left and right mouse buttons is required.  Timed Delay mode will wait a fixed amount of time (entered in the Seconds box below) and then automatically display the next image.  Audio Wait mode will look for any audio files in the folder or selection preceding any groups of image files and calculate how long each image slide should display based on the playback length of the audio divided by number of images found after it (up to the next audio file in the folder or selection).  Audio Matched mode will play an audio file (.MP3, .WAV, .MID) whose name (excluding extension) matches the currently displayed image file name.  Once the audio file has completed playback the slide show will advance to the next file.  If no audio file exists for the current image file, then the Timed Delay mode timeout is used before slide advancement occurs.

Note: When not running in Manual mode, any mouse button click will exit the slide show and return to ThumbsPlus.

Seconds. Select the amount of time in seconds (decimal values are allowed) that ThumbsPlus will wait between images when running in Timed Delay mode.

Play background audio file. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus play a background audio file named: slide.mid, slide.wav or slide.mp3 during the slide show.  The audio file must be located in the same folder as the image files used for the slide show.

Build bitmaps from metafiles. When this checkbox is selected, ThumbsPlus will build an in-memory bitmap from a metafile before displaying it. This eliminates watching the metafile draw.

Random order. The list of file names will be shuffled before the slide show begins.

Include sub-folders. Causes ThumbsPlus to perform a slide show of all images in the current folder and any of its sub-folders. When this option is checked, the selected files are ignored and all files show.

Loop at end of show.  Causes ThumbsPlus to continue the slide show starting again with the first file in the folder or selection.

Skip files smaller than. When selected, ThumbsPlus will not display raster images smaller than the entered size (width and height).

Reverse mouse buttons. Select this option to reverse the function of the left and right mouse buttons when navigating through a slide show.  When reversed, the left mouse button shows the previous slide and the right mouse button shows the next slide.

Hide cursor. Hides the mouse cursor during the slide show.

Transition

Type. Select the transition effect to use between slides.

Speed. Select a relative speed from 1 (fastest) to 10 (slowest) for the transition display.

Direction. Selection the direction for the desired transition effect.


Pam Perry


	My Computer
The My Computer area of the ThumbsPlus folder tree contains all local hard drives along with any connected network drives.  As with the rest of the folder tree, items underneath the My Computer branch my be expanded or collapsed.  Folder entries (folders), for local and connected network drives may be moved and copied from one branch to another simply by dragging with the mouse.  Color-coded folder entries reflect the presence of thumbnailed image files.


View Window - File | Goto Folder
View Window - File | Go to Folder	Ctrl+G

Thumbnail Popup Menu | Go to Folder

This menu selection will bring the main Thumbs Plus window to the top of the desktop and set the folder tree's selected folder to the folder that contains the current image.


Main Window, File | Send
Main Window - File | Send to...	Ctrl+M

View Window - File | Send to...

Use this menu selection to send files via e-mail.  You can send the currently selected files (from the main ThumbsPlus window) or an open image (from the view window) to another person via any installed, MAPI compliant, e-mail application.

Note: If you haven't selected your preferred e-mail application under Options | Preferences | E-mail, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to select which e-mail application to use for sending the files.

If you have selected more that one file via the thumbnail view, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to prepare the selected files before attaching them to your e-mail.  See the dialog box below for the available e-mail preparation options.

Convert images.  Check this option to convert your images to the selected file format, prior to sending.

JPEG Quality.  For JPEG file conversions, enter the desired quality (25-90).

Maximum size.  Check this option and enter a maximum width and height to restrict the size of converted images.

Combine all files into a single ZIP file.  Check this option to place all files in a ZIP archive file before sending.

Files selected.  This field displays the number of files selected.

Original size.  This field displays the total original size of the selected files before conversion, resizing and ZIP compression.

Attachment size.  This field displays the total size of the resultant attachment file(s).  Click the [Compute] button to calculate this field.

Approx encoded size.  This field displays the approximate total size of the resultant attachment file(s) after being MIME encoded for e-mail transmission.


Small Thumbnail View
Thumbnail Views (Small)

Small	Large	Custom	List *	Report *

* These views require "Show For Files" to include "Thumbnail"

The following is a sample display for the Small Thumbnail View with the preference settings (from the menu selection Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View):.


Large Thumbnail View
Thumbnail Views (Large)

Small	Large	Custom	List *	Report *

* These views require "Show For Files" to include "Thumbnail"

The following is a sample display for the Large Thumbnail View with the preference settings (from the menu selection Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View):.


Custom_Thumbnail_View
Thumbnail Views (Custom)

Small	Large	Custom	List *	Report *

* These views require "Show For Files" to include "Thumbnail"

The following is a sample display for the Custom Thumbnail View with the preference settings (from the menu selection Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View):.


List Thumbnail View
Thumbnail Views (List)

Small	Large	Custom	List*	Report *

* These views require "Show For Files" to include "Thumbnail"

The following is a sample display for the List Thumbnail View with the preference settings (from the menu selection Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View):.


Report Thumbnail View
Thumbnail Views (Report)

Small	Large	Custom	List *	Report*

* These views require "Show For Files" to include "Thumbnail"

The following is a sample display for the Report Thumbnail View with the preference settings (from the menu selection Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View):.


Image Tips

When you move the mouse over a file (thumbnail) in the thumbnail view and popup tips are enabled, the thumbnail (if present) will be displayed as an image tip (similar to a standard windows tool tip).  If you have unchecked thumbnails, under the Thumbnail Display section, in  Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View, the image tips will display immediately on a mouse move.  Otherwise, the standard tool tip delay is used before displaying the image tip.  To configure when and how popup image tips are displayed, click the Setup button under Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View.

Note: You can disable the image tip display altogether by unchecking the Enable popup tips option under Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View.


Sorting By Column Click in the Thumbnail View

When displaying files in a thumbnail view without thumbnails, you can click on most of the column headers to sort the list by that columns information.  Subsequent clicks on the same column header will reverse the sort order (toggles between ascending / descending).


Main Menu - Edit | Auto Clip Save - Setup Button
Main Window - Edit | Auto Clip Save - Setup Button

Prefix. Enter or select text prefix for the file name.

Next #. Enter the next sequence number to use in the generated file names.

Increment. Enter an amount to be used to increment the sequence number during generation.

Suffix. Enter or select text suffix for the file name.

For Duplicate Names

Overwrite existing file. Select to overwrite existing files during file name generation.

Use next available. Select to skip to the next available sequence number if the file exists.

Find highest used. Select to skip all existing file names and begin with the next available sequence number.

Leading Zeros

Enabled. Select to enable zero padding for the sequence number in the file name.

Digits. Enter the number of digits to pad for leading zeros.

Examples

Displays the next two file names that will be generated.


Main Menu - File | Auto Rename
Main Window - File | Auto Rename...	Shift+Alt+F2

Prefix. Enter or select text prefix for the file name.

Next #. Enter the next sequence number to use in the generated file names.

Increment. Enter an amount to be used to increment the sequence number during generation.

Suffix. Enter or select text suffix for the file name.

For Duplicate Names

Overwrite existing file. Select to overwrite existing files during auto file name generation.

Use next available. Select to skip to the next available sequence number if the file exists.

Find highest used. Select to skip all existing file names and begin with the next available sequence number.

Leading Zeros

Enabled. Select to enable zero padding for the sequence number in the file name.

Digits. Enter the number of digits to pad for leading zeros.

Examples

Displays the next two file names that will be generated.


Main Menu - Options | Preferences - Thumbnails
 Main Window - Options | Preferences - Thumbnails

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This option displays a dialog box which allows you to set the options for thumbnail creation and display in ThumbsPlus.

Thumbnail dimensions.  (The following options affect the thumbnail storage size in the ThumbsPlus database)

Width. Enter the desired width for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.

Height. Enter the desired height for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.

Color Depth. Pick the desired color depth for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.  ThumbsPlus supports the following thumbnail color depths:

Grayscale (32 level)	Back and white thumbnails with 32 different grayscale levels.
236 color palette	236 color thumbnails based on the ThumbsPlus color palette.
Highcolor (15-bit)	32768 color (Blue,Green,Red) thumbnails with 5 bits per color sample. The 16th bit is unused.
Truecolor (24-bit)	16 million color (Blue, Green, Red) thumbnails with 8 bits per color sample.
Compression. Pick the desired compression method for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.  ThumbsPlus supports the following thumbnail coompression methods:

None.	Check this option to store uncompressed thumbnails in the database (not recommended).
LZH (lossless).	Check this option to compress the thumbnail data, using LZH compression, prior to being stored in the database.  This option is faster than JPEG compression with NO loss of image quality.
JPEG (lossy).	Check this option to use JPEG compression when storing thumbnails in the database.  A Quality value must be entered in the range of 25-90.  This value affects the amount of compression performed.  JPEG compression with a low quality value can yield higher compression results than LZH, yet the JPEG compressed thumbnail will exhibit a noticeable reduction of image quality with lower quality (higher compression) values.
When making thumbnails.  (The following options affect the creation of thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database)

Autocrop edges. Automatically crop (remove all continuous border of the same color) images when creating thumbnails.  This cropping does NOT alter the original image file, only the resulting thumbnail.

Check for Digimarc® watermark. Detect and mark images containing embedded Digimarc® watermarks when creating thumbnails.  Thumbnails for detected images will display a red copyright symbol in the upper right corner of the thumbnail.

Highest quality thumbnails. When this option is checked, ThumbsPlus resamples each image (using  interpolation) down to the desired thumbnail dimensions prior to making the Thumbnail.

Sharpen after reduction. Check this option to sharpen resampled thumbnails.  This has the effect of running a Sharpen Less filter applied to intensity only.

Enhance contrast. Check this option to enhance the contrast of resampled thumbnails.  This has the effect of performing a Histogram - Stretch function.

Create persistent .tp_jptn files for thumbnails made from clipboard.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus store a backup copy of a thumbnail (when made using Thumbnail | Make from Clipboard) as a JPEG file in the same folder as the selected file.
Note: The file name for this persistent thumbnail file will be the file name of the selected file with a .tp_jptn file extension.  For subsequent thumbnailing, the persistent thumbnail file will ONLY be used if the selected file cannot be read for image data (i.e. damaged file or unrecognized format).

Automatically copy image comments to database annotations

Never.  Check this option to ignore image comments when making thumbnails (existing thumbnails' annotations will remain untouched).

For new thumbnails only.  Check this option to make database annotations from image comments for new thumbnails only (existing thumbnails' annotations will remain untouched).

Always.  Check this option to take file comments (if present) and store them in the database as annotations every time you make thumbnails.  This will replace any existing database annotations.

When displaying thumbnails.

Show orphaned thumbnails. Show orphaned thumbnails in the thumbnail view. This option tends to slow down the thumbnail view display as ThumbsPlus scans the database for any entries which do not have corresponding files on disk.

Show decorations. Display thumbnail decorations on the corners of thumbnails.

Automatically remove orphans. Remove any orphaned thumbnails each time a new folder (see folder tree) is displayed.  This removes orphaned thumbnails from the currently displayed folder ONLY.  You may also remove orphans manually using the Orphans option on the Remove  submenu on the Thumbnail menu.

Show font names. When this is selected, ThumbsPlus will scan TrueType font files and load the font names. It will display these instead of the file names. Additionally, the font names will be green if the font is installed.

Make thumbnails automatically. Scan for thumbnails each time a new folder is displayed (see folder tree again).

Contribution of thumbnail color in similarity testing. Use this field to tell ThumbsPlus how much (in percent) you want color (versus shape) to contribute to image similarity matching functions (Sort by Similarity, Find Similar Images).


 Main Window - Options | Preferences - Schemes & Sets

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This option allows specification of output folders for various multi-step function settings files (schemes & sets) used by ThumbsPlus.

Scheme Folder Locations

Print Catalog Schemes. Use this field to specify the folder that will contain saved Print Catalog Schemes.

Contact Sheet Schemes. Use this field to specify the folder that will contain saved Contact Sheet Schemes.

Web Wizard Scheme & Styles. Use this field to specify the folder that will contain saved Web Page Wizard Schemes & Styles.

Sets Folder Locations

Batch Processing Sets. Use this field to specify the folder that will contain saved batch Processing Sets.

Example: Print Catalog schemes that are saved will be saved in the "D:\Thumbs32\Catalogs" folder.


 Main Window - Options | Preferences - Startup

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This option displays a dialog box which allows you to set the ThumbsPlus startup parameters.

Initial Folder

Last Opened Folder.  Select this option to show the last opened folder when starting ThumbsPlus.

Specific Folder.  Select this option to always show a specific folder when starting ThumbsPlus.

Initial Database

Last opened database.  Select this option to open the last opened database when starting ThumbsPlus.

Specific Database.  Select this option to always open a specific database when starting ThumbsPlus.

Remember window size and position. Select this option to show the main ThumbsPlus window in the same place and size every time.

Remember folder free size and position. Select this option to show the ThumbsPlus folder tree window in the same place and size every time.

Store separate color customization for each database.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus save all customizable colors in the database options (.TDO) file.  See Options | Customize | Colors for information on customizing colors.

Note: If you have set up ThumbsPlus for a specific folder, database, or have selected not to remember the size or tree information, you can store the current values by using Options | Save Startup Options.


Main Window - Options | Preferences | Thumbnail View - Font
... Options | Preferences |Thumbnail View - Font

Use this dialog to configure the font characteristics for the current thumbnail view.


Phillip Crews


Main Menu - Edit | Find By Query - Keyword
 Main Window - Edit | Find by Query - Keyword

Filename	Keyword	User Fields	Advanced	Image Similarity

Click on the links above to see extended information on each tab.

Use this selection to search for thumbnailed pictures based on file name masks, keywords, user fields, advanced SQL, and optionally image similarity.  This produces a list of thumbnails for files that match the query  criteria you enter. You may also restrict the search to the current folder or the current tree if desired.

Build list.  Click this button to retrieve a list of all available keywords currently in the database.

Available Keywords.  Select the keywords that you wish to search on.  You can add them to the Search Keywords list by double clicking on them OR by selecting them and then clicking the [>] button.

Search Keywords.  Select the keywords that you wish to remove from the search.  You can remove them from the Search Keywords list by double clicking on them OR by selecting them and then clicking the [<] button.

Match

All.  Select this option to search for thumbnails that have ALL of the selected keywords.

Any.  Select this option to search for thumbnails that have ANY of the selected keywords.

And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.

Clear.  Click this button to clear (and reset) the current tab from the search criteria.

Clear All.  Click this button to clear the criteria for all tabs.

Count.  Click this button to count the number of thumbnails that match the current criteria.  The resulting count displays below this button.

Selected Criteria.  This display field gives a textual representation of all criteria chosen so far.


Main Menu - Edit | Find By Query - User Fields
 Main Window - Edit | Find by Query - User Fields

Filename	Keyword	User Fields	Advanced	Image Similarity

Click on the links above to see extended information on each tab.

Use this selection to search for thumbnailed pictures based on file name masks, keywords, user fields, advanced SQL, and optionally image similarity.  This produces a list of thumbnails for files that match the query  criteria you enter. You may also restrict the search to the current folder or the current tree if desired.

Available Fields.  Select from this combo box a user field to use in the query.  The available user fields must have been configured previously using the menu selection File | Database | User Fields.

Operator.  Select from this combo box an expression operator for the field and its value.

Value.  Enter a value for the field expression.

Search Fields.  This list box displays any user fields that have been entered so far.

Add.  Click this button to add a completed field expression to the Search List.

Remove.  Click this button to remove a selected field expression from the Search List.

And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.

Clear.  Click this button to clear (and reset) the current tab from the search criteria.

Clear All.  Click this button to clear the criteria for all tabs.

Count.  Click this button to count the number of thumbnails that match the current criteria.  The resulting count displays below this button.

Selected Criteria.  This display field gives a textual representation of all criteria chosen so far.


Main Menu - Edit | Find By Query - Advanced
 Main Window - Edit | Find by Query - Advanced

Filename	Keyword	User Fields	Advanced	Image Similarity

Click on the links above to see extended information on each tab.

Use this selection to search for thumbnailed pictures based on file name masks, keywords, user fields, advanced SQL, and optionally image similarity.  This produces a list of thumbnails for files that match the query criteria you enter. You may also restrict the search to the current folder or the current tree if desired.

Field.  Pick an available thumbnail record field name to be used in the query text.

Operator.  Pick an operator to be used in the query expression with the currently selected Field.

SQL Statement.  Displays selected Field and Operator.  Once the operator has been selected, complete the expression by placing the cursor after the operator and typing in the desired query value.  You may also enter free form text here as a SQL string to be added to the query criteria from other tabs.  This text must consist of valid SQL (ANSI SQL-92 Standard) WHERE CLAUSE syntax.  The user must have knowledge of the ThumbsPlus relational database model in order to use this option.  For more information on SQL syntax see: http://www.sql.org.

And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.

Clear.  Click this button to clear (and reset) the current tab from the search criteria.

Clear All.  Click this button to clear the criteria for all tabs.

Count.  Click this button to count the number of thumbnails that match the current criteria.  The resulting count displays below this button.

Selected Criteria.  This display field gives a textual representation of all criteria chosen so far.


 Main Window - Edit | Find by Query - Image Similarity

Filename	Keyword	User Fields	Advanced	Image Similarity

Click on the links above to see extended information on each tab.

Use this selection to search for thumbnailed pictures based on file name masks, keywords, user fields, advanced SQL, and optionally image similarity.  This produces a list of thumbnails for files that match the query  criteria you enter. You may also restrict the search to the current folder or the current tree if desired.

Find images similar to.  Check this option to enable the Image Similarity tab.

Color Metric.  Select this option to search by color similarity only.

Shape Metric.  Select this option to search by shape similarity only.

Both.  Select this option to use a combination of both color and shape metrics in the search.

% Color Contribution.  Enter the percentage of color contribution for the similarity search.  The difference between this value and 100 will be the shape contribution percentage.

Slider Control.  Adjust this slider to tell ThumbsPlus how similar you want the images to be.  The far left position indicates the closest 400.  The far right position indicates duplicate images.

And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.

Clear.  Click this button to clear (and reset) the current tab from the search criteria.

Clear All.  Click this button to clear the criteria for all tabs.

Count.  Click this button to count the number of thumbnails that match the current criteria.  The resulting count displays below this button.

Selected Criteria.  This display field gives a textual representation of all criteria chosen so far.

Note:  This tab will NOT be displayed if you have not selected a thumbnail in the thumbnail view prior to running the query.  Also, to find all similar images (not just those matching a single thumbnail), you can use the menu selection Edit | Find Similar Images from the main ThumbsPlus menu.


Phyllis Auer


Setting Fonts

Use the standard Window dialog to select and configure a font.


Orphan Thumbnails

An orphan thumbnail is a thumbnail whose original image file is no longer available. This occurs when the original image file is moved or deleted by an external program (outside of ThumbsPlus). It is recommended that you do all of your image file reorganization with ThumbsPlus.  See also:  Offline Thumbnails


Offline Thumbnails

An offline thumbnail is a thumbnail that exists in the ThumbsPlus database while the volume (disk) that contains the original file is not available.  Volumes may not be available for several reasons:

•	Floppy diskettes and CD-ROMs that aren't currently in the drive.

•	Hard disks that have been removed or damaged.

•	Network connected drives that have been disconnected.


Main Menu - Options | Customize - Menus
Main Window - Options | Customize - Menus	Ctrl+Q

View Window - View | Customize - Menus

Menus     Toolbar     Colors     Info Colors

Click on any of the links above to see other customizable settings.

Use this dialog tab to enable or disable most of the menu items on the main window menu, view window menu, and on any popup menus found in ThumbsPlus.

Menu to customize. Use this drop down list to select which ThumbsPlus menu you wish to customize.  The available menus are:

Main Menu	The main ThumbsPlus menu.
View Menu	The view window menu
File Context	Popup menu (right click on a thumbnail).
Multi-File Context	Popup menu (right click on a thumbnail - multiple selected).
Thumbnail View Context	Popup menu (right click on the thumbnail view caption bar).
Folder Context	Popup menu (right click on a folder in the folder tree).
Volume Context	Popup menu (right click on a volume in the folder tree).
Items. Use this list box to select which menu items to enable or disable. To toggle the enabled state of a selected item, left double click or right single click the item. Enabled items appear with a green indicator, disabled with a red indicator.

Enable All. Use this button to enable all menu items for the currently selected menu.

Disable All. Use this button to disable all menu items for the currently selected menu.


Main Menu - Image | Batch Process - Set Information
 Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Set Information

Set Information	Input Files	Batch Steps	Output Details

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this settings tab to select and save batch set information.

Select set name. When creating a new set, you can enter the set name here. To select an existing set, use the drop-down arrow to select an existing set name.

New. Click this button to clear the last used batch settings and start a new batch.

Description. You can enter a description of what the batch set does.


Main Menu - Image | Batch Process - Input Files
 Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Input Files

Set Information	Input Files	Batch Steps	Output Details

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this settings tab to select which files to process.

Files to process

Selected files.  Select this option to process only the currently selected files in the thumbnail view.

Current folder.  Select this option to process the files located in the currently selected folder in the folder tree.

Current tree.  Select this option to process the files in the currently selected folder and all of its sub-folders.

File name mask.  Check this option to further restrict processing to a specific set of files, using a mask (entered in the next field). If this option is not selected, ThumbsPlus will process all selected types


Main Menu - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps
 Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps

Set Information	Input Files	Batch Steps	Output Details

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this settings tab to select which batch steps to perform.

Steps.  Displays the list of batch steps to be performed.

Up/Down.  Use these buttons to reorder batch steps.

Add.  Use this button to add a new step to the list.

Edit.  Use this button to modify parameters for the selected step.  If the step has no parameters this button has no effect.

Delete.  Use this button to remove the selected step from the list

Here is a list of steps that are currently available. Most of them correspond to menu selections available in the View Window, and the "More Information" link will take you to the description of the function and dialog box for entering parameters (if any).

Icon	Step name	More information	Parameters?
	Resolution	File Info | Set Resolution...	Yes
	Edit Comments	File Info | Edit Comments...	Yes
	Set File Date	File Info | Set File Date...	Yes
	Adjust Colors	Image | Adjust Colors...	Yes
	Color Depth	Image | Color Depth...	Yes
	Color Balance	Image | Color Balance...	Yes
	Color Profile	Image | Color Profile...	Yes
	Replace Colors	Image | Replace Colors...	Yes
	Swap Red & Blue	Image | Swap Red & Blue	No
	Invert Colors	Image | Invert Colors	No
	Equalize Histogram	Image | Equalize Histogram	No
	Stretch Histogram	Image | Stretch Histogram	No
	Image Stamp	Image | Stamp...	Yes
	Combine	Image | Combine...	Yes
	Embed Watermark	Image | Embed Watermark...	Yes
	Filter	Image | Filter...	Yes
	Resize	Transform | Resize...	Yes
	Rotate	Transform | Rotate...	Yes
	Turn 90° CW	Transform | Turn 90 CW	No
	Turn 90° CCW	Transform | Turn 90 CCW	No
	Turn 180°	Transform | Turn 180	No
	Flip horizontally	Transform | Flip Horizontally	No
	Flip vertically	Transform | Flip Vertically	No
	Autocrop	Transform | Autocrop	No
	Crop / Add Borders	Transform | Crop / Add Borders...	Yes
	Process	Process | (process name)	No
	Convert to Bitmap	Metafile | Convert to Bitmap...	Yes
	Extract Bitmap	Metafile | Extract Bitmap	No
	Remove Background	Metafile | Remove Background	No
	Do Set	Do Set...	Yes


Main Menu - Image | Batch Process - Output Details
 Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Output Details

Set Information	Input Files	Batch Steps	Output Details

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this settings tab to select a destination file type and location.

Output format. Select an output type. If the type you select requires options, these will display automatically

Options.  Use this button to modify any output format options.

Extension. Select the file extension to append to file names (if desired).  If not entered, the default file extension for the selected output format will be used.

Name Prefix. Select a prefix for output file names.

Suffix. Select a suffix for output file names.

Overwrite files with the same name. Unless this option is checked, ThumbsPlus will not replace any existing file with the same name as a name generated for an output file.

Copy annotations and keywords from originals.  Check this option to copy database annotations and keywords (if present) to the thumbnail record created for the output file.

Output to

Original location. Created files will be placed in the same folders as the original files.

Specific folder. Enter a complete folder path for the output files or browse for the folder using the [...] button.

Make equivalent sub-folders. If you select a specific folder, you can also elect to reproduce any folder structure from the original location by checking this option.

Select set name. When creating a new set, you can enter the set name here. To select an existing set, use the drop-down arrow to select an existing set name.

Save. Click to save the batch set for future use.


View Window - Edit | Read Watermark
View Window - Image | Read Watermark...	W

When ThumbsPlus detects that an image contains a Digimarc® watermark, a copyright symbol "©" appears in the title bar with the image. Selecting Edit | Read Watermark will show the watermark information. You can enable this detection in Options | Viewing | Other. You can also configure ThumbsPlus to check for watermarks when making thumbnails (and a © decoration will display on the thumbnails) using Options | Preferences | Thumbnails.

Digimarc ID. The Digimarc ID (assigned by Digimarc) of the creator or owner of the image.

Image ID. An identification code assigned by the creator or owner of the image.

Transaction ID. An identification code assigned by the creator or owner of the image.

Copyright years. The year (or years) stated by the owner of the image as its copyright date.

Restricted Use, Adult Content, Do Not Copy. The image owner may set any of these attributes when the watermarking the image.

Web Lookup. Each Digimarc user registers with Digimarc. The Web Lookup button will launch your browser and obtain information about the owner or creator of the image.

URL. The URL used in Web Lookup displays here.

Watermark Durability. If you are the registered owner of the image, the durability (strength) of the watermark shows here.

See also:

View Window - Image | Embed Watermark

Options | Preferences | Thumbnail (Check for Digimarc watermark)

Options | Viewing | Other (Check for Digimarc watermarks when viewing)


View Window - Edit | Embed Watermark
View Window - Image | Embed Watermark...	Shift+W

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Embed Watermark...

You can use ThumbsPlus to embed Digimarc® digital watermarks in images. A watermark modifies the image data to include information about the ownership of the image. Watermarks of this type are usually not visible; however, the image itself is modified. High-intensity watermarks (which are more likely to survive image editing and compression) are sometimes visible, especially in images with solid areas. You have to select the level of protection you desire, which in turn affects the visibility of changes to the image.

Because watermarks modify the image data and cannot be removed without damaging the image, you should always retain an original without the watermark.

In the registered version of ThumbsPlus, you can embed watermarks in batch mode. (Image | Batch Process).

Digimarc ID. Your Digimarc I.D. The first time you embed a watermark, ThumbsPlus will prompt you for this information. You can also change the creator I.D. by clicking the Change button. Digimarc assigns these numbers at no charge. You can obtain one at their web site, http://www.digimarc.com.

Watermark type. You can select the type of watermark to embed:

•	A Basic watermark includes only your Digimarc ID and selected attributes.

•	A Copyright watermark includes up to two copyright years in addition to your Digimarc ID and attributes.

•	An Image ID watermark includes an image identifier along with your ID and attributes.

•	A Transaction ID watermark includes a transaction identifier along with your ID and attributes.

Restricted Use, Adult Content, Do Not Copy. You may select any or all of these options. A user of your image will see these options checked when they read the watermark.

Other Information. Here you enter the Transaction ID, Image ID, or Copyright Years, based on the Watermark Type selected.

Autoincrement. For Image ID and Transaction ID watermark types, you can choose to have ThumbsPlus automatically increment the Image ID or Transaction ID each time you embed a watermark.

Output Target Type. Select the type of image you're working with. The Target Type and Intensity both affect how Digimarc encodes the watermark in the image.

•	Default - Default (unspecified) image use

•	Screen - For display on the screen

•	Web - For use on the World Wide Web

•	Compressed - For images that will be JPEG compressed

•	Print - For images designed for printing (300 or more dpi)

Watermark Intensity. Select the intensity of the watermark. Higher intensities are more likely to be detectable after image modification, but are also more likely to be visible. After embedding the watermark, you can use Edit | Read Watermark to verify the watermark and obtain an approximate indication of its strength.

See also:

View Window -Image | Read Watermark

View -Image | Embed Watermark - Enter Digimarc ID

Image | Batch Process

Options | Preferences | Thumbnail (Check for Digimarc watermark)

Options | Viewing | Other (Check for Digimarc watermarks when viewing)


View Window - Edit | Embed Watermark - Enter Digimarc ID
View Menu - Image | Embed Watermark - Enter Digimarc ID

The first time you embed a watermark, ThumbsPlus will automatically prompt you for your Digimarc ID. You can also change the ID at any time from the Embed Watermark dialog.

Digimarc assigns your ID and maintains your information so users of your image can look you up from their web site. You can obtain a Digimarc ID at <http://www.digimarc.com>.

Digimarc ID. Enter your Digimarc PIN in the first box. Enter your ID in the second box. If your PIN is not correct, you will not be able to embed a watermark.

Register. Click on this button to visit the Digimarc web site and obtain a Digimarc ID.

See also:

View Window - Image | Read Watermark

View Window - Image | Embed Watermark

Image | Batch Process

Options | Preferences | Thumbnail (Check for Digimarc watermark)

Options | Viewing | Other (Check for Digimarc watermarks when viewing)


Task Window
Main Window - Tasks Tab

	The tasks window displays all active background tasks and those tasks that completed but encountered one or more errors. You can control tasks (i.e. stop, pause, resume, show and clear error lists) by simply right clicking on a task and selecting the function from the popup task menu.


Main Menu - Image | Wallpaper | Stretched
 Main Window - Image | Wallpaper | Stretched	Ctrl+Shift+F7

     View Window - View | Wallpaper | Stretched

This option installs the first selected file in the thumbnail view as the Windows wallpaper on the desktop. If the file is not a Windows bitmap file, or if it is not on a local hard drive, it is converted to a bitmap and copied to a temporary file, which is installed.

This option resizes the bitmap to fit the current screen resolution, while maintaining aspect ratio.  To stretch the image without maintaining the aspect ratio use Wallpaper | Fully Stretched.


View Window - Image | Stamp - Placement
View Window - Image | Stamp - Placement and Pixels

Use this dialog to select where the image stamp will be placed on the current image.

Position

By Matrix.  Places the stamp image in one of the nine areas (displayed on the left) of the current image.

By Offset.  Places the stamp image at a given offset (specified by % Left and % Top values in percentages of the current image size) from the top left corner of the current image.

By Tiled.  Tiles the stamp image across the current image.  The number of rows and colums depends on Rows and Cols values.

By dragging.  This option allows you to drag (and resize) the stamp image with the mouse before the stamp is applied.

Use Selection.  This option will cause the image stamp to be placed (and sized) into the currently selected area of the current image.

Size

Auto Size.  This option will automatically resize the stamp image to fit in the available area of the current image.  The available area depends on the which position setting was used.  If Auto Size is not selected the width and height of the stamp image is specified by % Width and % Height values in percentages of the current image size.

Keep aspect ratio.  Select this option to preserve the stamp image aspect ratio when resizing.

Rotation

Angle.  Enter an angle to be used for rotation of the stamp image before stamping.

Fit Bounding Rect.  Select this option to fit a rotated stamp image into the bounding rectangle.  This will prevent the corners of the original stamp image from being cropped during rotation.

Text Justify (Horz)

Justify (Horz).  Select the desired horizontal justification for text stamps.  The available options are: Left, Center, Right.

Pixel Settings

Combination Method.  Pick the way you would like the image stamp to be combined with the current image. The available options are Transparent, Blended, Exclusive and Solid.

Use Alpha Channel.  Check this option to use the stamp image's alpha channel (if present) for pixel blending.  This option is disabled for stamp images that do not have an alpha channel

Opacity.  Check this option to specify the opacity of the stamp image.

Transparency. Check this option to specify a transparent color in the image stamp.  This color will be excluded when combining the image stamps pixels with the current image.

Transparent Color.  Use this button to pick the transparent (excluded) color.

Threshold.  Use this edit field to enter the threshold for background color exclusion.  Any RGB values found in the stamp image whose values are within the range of (background color)-(threshold) to (background color)+(threshold) will be excluded when applying the stamp to the current image.

Default.  Reset pixel settings back to default settings.

View.  Click this button to view the stamp as it will look in the image view window.


Alpha Channel

An additional 8-bit grayscale channel of image data used to convey transparency information for the other color channels (e.g. RGB color channels) in the image.  It works like a stencil placed over the image to mask areas for selective display.  The black and white areas in an alpha-channel mask represent fully opaque and fully transparent areas, respectively.  The different levels of gray represent varying degrees of translucency.


View Window - Image | Process | Digital Camera Cleanup
View Window - Image | Process | Digital Camera Cleanup	Shift+D

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Digital Camera Cleanup

This selection improves the appearance of many images acquired from digital cameras.  It consists of a Cleanup JPEG filter with a Median filter (green channel only) and a contrast  and saturation increase of 10% and 15% respectively.


View Window - Image | Process | Cleanup Jpeg
View Window - Image | Process | Cleanup Jpeg	Shift+J

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Cleanup Jpeg

This option "cleans up" some JPEG images by softening the block transitions (8x8 DCT blocks). This is especially useful for images which have been compressed a bit too much.


Image Processes
Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | (process name)

Several digital image processes are available in batch processing.  See View Window - Image | Process for a complete list of these processes and their functions.


Batch Comments
 View Window -Edit | Edit/Add Comments	N

     Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | File Info | Edit Comments...

Comments.  Use this edit box to enter the desired comment text.

Existing image comments

Replace.  Check this option to replace any existing image comments with the comment text entered.

Append.  Check this option to append the entered comment to the end of any existing image comments.

Leave unchanged.  Check this option to leave any existing image comments unchanged.


dde_convert
Convert (DDE Command)

Syntax:	Convert(format;extension;retain-comments;reset-date;format-options;output-path)

Abbreviation:	N(format;extension;retain-comments;reset-date;format-options;output-path)

This command converts any selected files to the specified format. For GIF, TIFF and JPEG formats, you may specify various options. Files with the same name are overwritten.

You can also specify whether comments should be retained or dropped, and set the converted files' creation time to that of the original.

Convert command parameters

Parameter	Valid values	Description
format	jpg gif tif bmp pcx tga wmf	The format for the converted files.
extension		The extension to use (generally the same as the format).
retain-comments	0, 1	Specify zero (0) to remove image comments, or one (1) to retain them.
Reset-date	0, 1	When 1, the converted file will receive the same date and time as the original file.
Format-options	See below	Options required for some file types (GIF, JPG, TIF).
Output-path		The complete folder path where ThumbsPlus will place the converted files.
Format Options for JPEG files

Parameter	Valid values	Description
Quality	1-100	The quality level for JPEG compression. 75 is a good default; values below 50 usually generate unacceptable artifacts, and values above 90 usually cause larger files without appreciable visible improvement, so I recommend a number between 50 and 90.
Smoothing	0-50	The amount of smoothing to apply before compression. This is useful for converting dithered (i.e., GIF) images to JPEG. For photographic originals, you should specify zero (0).
Progressive	0, 1	Set this option to one (1) to enable progressive JPEG generations. Note that many programs do not yet support progressive JPEG files.
Format Options for GIF files

Parameter	Valid values	Description
Interlaced	0, 1	Set to one (1) to generate an interlaced GIF file
Minimize Size	0, 1	Set to one (1) to optimize the color table and remove duplicate colors, thus minimizing the file size.
Transparent	0, 1	Set to one (1) to generate a transparent GIF. Use the Transparent Color parameter to specify the transparent color
Transparent Color	0,0,0 - 255,255,255	Specify the transparent color when generating transparent GIF files. This is an RGB value (red, green, blue), and should match one of the pixel values of the GIF file.
Format Options for TIFF files

Parameter	Valid values	Description
Compression	lzw jpeg fax3 fax4 pack zip none	Specifies the compression method for the resulting TIFF file.
Quality	1-100	When using JPEG compression in TIFF files, specifies the quality level. See the notes above about JPEG files for further information
Separate	0, 1	When set to one (1), specifies that image color planes should be stored separately. This often increases compressibility of 24-bit image files.
Examples:

Convert(jpg;jpg;0;1;75;0;0;c:\temp)

Converts the currently selected files to JPG with a quality level of 75, no smoothing, non-progressive, while removing comments and setting the file date to that of the original file:

Convert(gif;gif;1;0;1;1;0;0,0,0;c:\temp)

Converts the currently selected files to interlaced, non-transparent GIF files. Retains image comments and sets the date to when the file was converted.

Convert(bmp;bmp;0;0;c:\temp)

Converts the currently selected files to Windows Bitmaps. Removes comments and leaves the date as the converted date.

Convert(tif;abc;1;1;lzw;0;1;c:\temp)

Converts the currently selected files to TIFF with LZW compression and separated image channels. Retains comments and sets the TIFF files to the original files' dates.

LocateFile(c:\camera\pictures\kdc\*)
Convert(jpg;jpg;0;1;75;0;0;c:\camera\pictures\jpg)
UpdateDir(c:\camera\pictures\jpg)

Selects all files in the folder c:\camera\pictures\kdc, converts them to JPEG with a quality level of 75, eliminating comments and setting the file dates to the original KDC file dates, and outputs the JPEG files in c:\camera\pictures\jpg. Then, uses the UpdateDir command to create thumbnails for the converted files.


Replace if Newer. Replace the existing file if the incoming file is newer.  Incoming files older than the existing files will be skipped.  An informational message will appear in the progress box for any skipped files.


Replace. Replace the existing file with the incoming file.


Use same options for other conflicts. Check this option to apply the current action to any other conflicts that may occur in subsequent move or copies.


Delete incoming if identical. Check this option to delete the file being moved.  This option is disabled for files that are being copied.


Leave Alone. Don't replace the existing file with the incoming file.  Abort the operation for this file.


Rename. Move or copy (depending on operation) the incoming file after allowing the user to specify a new name for the file.  The rename dialog is displayed for any conflicts that occur.  Note: After specifying a new name for the incoming file the same existence checking is performed again with the new incoming file name.


Auto Rename. Rename the incoming file by appending the next highest number (not found in the existing files folder) to its file name.


Auto Renumber. Rename the incoming file by first searching the incoming file name for a numeric string and incrementing that number by 1.  If no numeric string is found then Auto Renumber behaves like Auto Rename.


Compare Files. Open both files (in View Synched mode) for comparison. Once the file to keep is determined, close both view windows and either cancel the replacement or choose one of the above options.


Thumbnail Decorations

The following symbols (when displayed on a corner of a thumbnail) indicate the existence of various additional information about the original image file.

	Digimarc watermark indicator.
	Multi-page file indicator.
	IPTC information indicator.
	Thumbnail out-of-date indicator.
	Installed font indicator.
	Orphan/off-line  thumbnail indicator.
	Shortcut indicator.
	Read-only file indicator.
	Tagged file indicator.
To disable the display of decorations on thumbnails, uncheck the Show decorations option in Options | Preferences - Thumbnails


New. Opens the File Type Configuration dialog box to define a new file type for ThumbsPlus to handle.


Edit. Opens the File Type Configuration dialog box to change the configuration of a specific file type.


Remove. Removes the file type configuration from ThumbsPlus.


Associate Selected Types with ThumbsPlus. Check this option to associate the selected (types with a "check" beside them) file types with ThumbsPlus.  This will cause ThumbsPlus to be the default viewer for the selected file types.  File types may be individually associated with ThumbsPlus by using the Associate with ThumbsPlus option on the File Type Configuration dialog box.


Select All. Select this option to show all configured file types in ThumbsPlus. Files that are not recognized will not have thumbnails, but you can move, copy, delete and rename these files.


Clear All. Select this option clear all selected file types, so you can start selecting from scratch.


Monitor Gamma Scroll Bar. Use this scroll bar to adjust the monitor gamma value.  Adjust the gamma value by using either the arrows at the ends or by dragging the central box, until the central gray square is as close as possible to the color of the surrounding pattern.


Monitor Gamma Value. Use this edit box to enter the monitor gamma value directly.  A gamma value of zero (0.0) means that ThumbsPlus will not gamma correct any image.


Monitor Gamma View. This control displays the current monitor gamma value (in the center area) along with the target test pattern (surrounding area).  To achieve the most accurate monitor gamma setting, match the gamma value area to the test pattern as closely as possible.


Order Form - France
Ordering in France

Please contact:

The Thompson Partnership France

51, Grand Rue

54380 Rogeville

France

Telephone Orders:	+33 (0) 3 83 24 80 88
Fax Orders:	+33 (0) 3 83 24 80 88
Internet Orders:	ventes@ttpfr.com
Internet Support:	support@ttpfr.com

Web site:	http://www.ttpfr.com


Convert Version 3.x Database
Main Window - File | Database | Import v3 Database...

Converting a ThumbsPlus Version 3.xx database (.tdb file) can be accomplished by simply importing it into your current ThumbsPlus Version 4 database.  After selecting this command from the menu, you will be prompted for the import (.tdb) database file in the following dialog box:

Find the folder with your existing version 3.xx database file, select the file and then click [Open]. After doing this, ThumbsPlus will begin the import process.  A progress dialog box will be displayed showing the import status.

Once the import process completes, the [Cancel] button will change to a [Close] button and any error messages displayed will remain in the 'Errors Encountered' list until you close the dialog.

Special Note: After this process completes, your version 3.xx database will remain unharmed and will still be accessible from ThumbsPlus 3.xx.


menu_main_file_moveto
Main Window - File | Move to | (Favorite Folder)

View Window - File | Move to | (Favorite Folder)

Use this menu option to move selected files to one of your configured favorites folders.  A favorite is simply a commonly used folder path.

Configured favorites will show on a secondary 'fly out' menu beside the File | Move to menu choice.

See also: Tree | Add to Favorites... and Tree | Edit Favorites....


Main Window, Edit | Invert Selection
Main Window - Edit | Invert Selection	Ctrl+Shift+V

Use this menu selection to invert the selected thumbnails in the thumbnail view.  This function will deselect any selected thumbnails and select any unselected thumbnails.


View Window - Edit | Paste
View Window - Edit | Paste	Ctrl+V

Use this menu selection to paste the clipboard contents into the current view window's image.  You can move and resize this pasted image using the mouse and then click Edit | Apply from the view window menu or simply press the [Enter] key to complete the paste operation.


View Window - View | Zoom | To Selection
View Window - View | Zoom | To Selection	Ctrl+Alt+Z

Use this menu selection to zoom the view window's image to the current selection area.

Note: If there is no area selected in the view windowthis option will be disabled.


View Window - View | Zoom | Original Size
View Window - View | Zoom | Original Size	Shift+Alt+Z

Use this menu selection to restore the image to its original size after zooming in or out.


View Window - View | Zoom | Arbitrary...
View Window - View | Zoom | Arbitrary...	Alt+Z

Use this menu selection to zoom the current view windows image to an arbitrary zoom factor.  In the tiny dialog that is displayed, either pick one of the preset zoom factors from the drop down list, or enter you own zoom factor in the edit portion of the drop down and then hit ENTER.


Main Window - Window | Synch Views
Main Window - Window | Synch Views	Ctrl+Shift+F12
    View Window - View | Synch Views	[

Tiles all open view windows in View Synched mode.  This option will be grayed if only one file is opened in a view window.

View Synched mode allows you to more easily visually inspect multiple copies of the same file for differences.  While in View Synched mode, any scroll, pan or zoom functions applied to one of the synched images will affect the other images.

See also: Main Window -File | View Synched


View Window - View | Unsynch Views
View Window - View | Unsynch Views	]

Ends 'Synched' mode for all open synched view windows.  This option will be grayed if no opened files are synched.

See: Main Window -File | View Synched


All Windows, Tile Views
Main Window - Window | Tile Views	Shift+F12

    View Window - View | Tile Views	Ctrl+F12

This menu selection will cause ThumbsPlus to tile all open view windows on the desktop.


Main WIndow, Tree | Add to Favorites
Main Window - Tree | Add to Favorites	Ctrl+R

Main Window - Tree | Edit Favorites	Ctrl+Shift+R

Use these menu selections to add and edit your favorite folders.  These favorites are available under both the Main Window and View Window File | Move to menus.  You can use these File menu favorites to go to folders and move files more quickly.

Path.  Enter the folder path name for the desired favorite.

Description.  Enter a description for the favorite.  This description will show under the Move to and Go to favorites menus.

Add.  Click this button to add a new favorite.

Change.  Click this button to modify an existing favorite.

Remove.  Click this button to remove a favorite.

Up/Down.  Use these buttons to modify the favorites order of appearance on the menus.

Favorites.  Displays the list of currently defined favorite folders.


Favorites

The favorites list allows you to designate special folders that are frequently used.


Main Window, Tree | Watch Folders
Main Window - Tree | Watch Folders...	Ctrl+Shift+G

Use this menu selection to configure a set of folders that ThumbsPlus should watch for file changes.  ThumbsPlus will monitor these watched folders and make and remove thumbnails as files come and go.

Folder.  Use this edit field to enter a folder path name to watch or click the [...] button to browse for the desired folder.

Watch for changes in the folder tree.  Check this option to include the folder's sub-folders in the watch.

Add.  Click this button to add a watched folder to the list.

Currently watched folders.  Displays the list of folders to be watched for changes.

Remove.  Click this button to remove (stop watching) a watched folder.

Remove All.  Click this button to remove all watched folders from the list.

Local folder frequency.  Enter the time in seconds that ThumbsPlus should wait between each check of a local watched folder.  Note: This option is the same as the Options | Preferences - Advanced - Watch folder frequency option.

Network folder frequency.  Enter the time in seconds that ThumbsPlus should wait between each check of a network watched folder.  Note: ThumbsPlus watches network folders differently than local folders.  Microsoft Windows provides an operating system function that notifies applications when local files or folders have changed.  This function does not work for network files or folders.  Therefore, in order for ThumbsPlus to watch a network folder, it must manually scan the network folder periodically for changes.  The number of files and sub-folders in the watched network folder will affect how long a scan will take.  It is recommended to set the network folder frequency to a higher interval for folders with larger numbers of files and sub-folders.


Main Window, Options | Which Files | By Mask
Main Window - Options | Which Files | By Mask	Ctrl+Shift+K

This option shows only the files whose name matches the entered file name mask.  The entered mask may consist of multiple file masks seperated by semi-colons.

You can also specify to use by mask by checking the Name mask option and entering the file name mask on the Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View settings tab.

Example: *.jpg;dog*.bmp;*_doc.tif   This would show all .jpg files, any .bmp files starting with 'dog', and any .tif files ending with '_doc'.

See also: Options | Which Files | Selected Types.


What's New - Galleries

A ThumbsPlus gallery is a logical container for a group of thumbnails stored in the database.  All information about a gallery is stored internally in the database as well.  Galleries may reference files across multiple folders, hard disks, and even networked computers.

See also: Main Window - Thumbnail | Gallery | Create, Main Window - Thumbnail | Add to Gallery...


Main Window, Assign User Fields...
Main Window - Thumbnail | Assign User Fields...	Ctrl+U

Use this menu selection to assign a set of user field values to the selected thumbnail(s).

Any value modified will automatically mark the field to be updated (indicated by the check box to the left of the field label). To clear a particular field's value click on the field's checkbox and clear the field value.  Also, you can access previously entered values by clicking on the down arrow of dropdown list.

Note: This assignment will affect all selected thumbnails' user field records.


Watched Folders
What's New - Watched Folders

ThumbsPlus can now watch specific folders for any changes and keep your thumbnail database updated automatically.  All you need to do is pick  Tree | Watch Folders from the main menu and either enter or browse for the folder to watch.  To specify how often ThumbsPlus should check the watched folders for changes, set the Watch folder frequency option.on the dialog tab from Option | Preferences - Advanced


Order by. Selects the primary and secondary sort orders in which files are displayed in the thumbnail view. You can sort by Name, Numeric name, Type, File Size, Date, Width, Height, Orientation, Image size, Similarity, Path or None (unsorted). You can also change the sort method using the Options | Sort by menu selection.  You may also sort in descending order Descending, with Thumbnails first or Thumbnails last.


Primary Order. The primary sort order in which files are displayed in the thumbnail view. You can sort by Name, Numeric name, Type, File Size, Date, Width, Height, Orientation, Image size, Similarity, Path or None (unsorted).


Secondary Order. The secondary sort order in which files are displayed in the thumbnail view. You can sort by Name, Numeric name, Type, File Size, Date, Width, Height, Orientation, Image size, Similarity, Path or None (unsorted).


Descending Order
Descending. Sets descending order for thumbnails displayed in the thumbnail view.


Thumbnails First
Thumbnails first. This option forces ThumbsPlus to place all thumbnails at the beginning of the thumbnail view list. The specified sort order is still maintained.


Thumbnails Last
Thumbnails last. This option forces ThumbsPlus to place all thumbnails at the end of the thumbnail view list. The specified sort order is still maintained.


Use Name Mask
Name mask. Use this option to make ThumbsPlus display files based on a file name mask rather than on the types selected in the File Types dialog box.  This option may also be selected using the Options | Which files menu selection.


Name Mask
Name mask value. Enter the desired file name mask that ThumbsPlus should use when showing files in the thumbnail view. This mask may also be entered using the Options | Which files menu selection


Watch Changes in Folders
Watch changes in folder. Uncheck this option to disable ThumbsPlus watching for updated, new or deleted files in the current folder. This may improve performance in folders with many files.


Confirm Replace Existing File Information.  This field displays information about the existing file's dimensions, color depth, file size and last modified date.


Confirm Replace Incoming File Information.  This field displays information about the incoming file's dimensions, color depth, file size and last modified date.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes that have been made.


Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.

For Help on an item, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.


User Fields
Main Window - File | Properties - User Fields	Alt+Enter

    View Window - File | Properties - User Fields

Physical	 Details	Info	Database	Keywords	User Fields	Galleries
Click on any of the links above to display help for the different property tabs

Use this tab in the File Properties dialog box to assign a set of user field values to the selected file's thumbnail.


Font. Click this button to set the desired display font for this dialog box.


Save. Click this button to save the comments to an external text file.


Comments. This field displays existing image comments and accepts user entered text for new comments.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes that have been made.


Main Window, Thumbnail | Remove | In Folder
Main Window - Thumbnail | Remove | In Folder

This option removes all thumbnails for the current folder (only - sub-folders are not affected) selected in the folder tree. The corresponding files are not deleted.


Main Window, Thumbnail | Remove | On Disk
Main Window - Thumbnail | Remove | On Disk

This option removes all thumbnails for the current disk selected in the folder tree. The corresponding files are not deleted.


Main Window, Thumbnail | Gallery | Remove
Main Window - Thumbnail | Gallery | Remove

Gallery Popup Menu - Remove Gallery

This option removes all gallery references (indirect links stored in the ThumbsPlus database) to thumbnails for the current gallery selected in the folder tree. The gallery itself is also deleted from the database.

Note: The corresponding files and their thumbnails are not deleted.


Main Window, Thumbnail | Gallery | Remove From
Main Window - Thumbnail | Gallery | Remove from

Thumbnail Popup Menu - Gallery | Remove from...
Gallery Popup Menu -  Remove from Gallery

This option removes all gallery references (indirect links stored in the ThumbsPlus database) to the selected thumbnails for the current gallery selected in the folder tree.

Note: The gallery is not deleted from the ThumbsPlus database. Also, the corresponding files and their thumbnails are not deleted.


Main Window, Thumbnail | Gallery | Save Order
Main Window - Thumbnail | Gallery | Save Order

Gallery Popup Menu - Save Gallery Order

This option saves the gallery thumbnail order for the current gallery selected in the folder tree.


Change. You can type a new value for the keyword. It will remain associated with all thumbnails that were associated with the original. This button is only available if a single keyword is selected.


Delete. Removes the keywords from the database. This also disassociates any thumbnails from the keyword.


Combine. You may combine multiple keywords to a single database entry. Extra associations (i.e., references to more than one of the selected entries) will be dropped. This button is only available if multiple keywords are selected.


Keyword List. The list of available keywords stored in the ThumbsPlus database.


Field Label. The name of the user field.  This label will display on the User Fields property tab and Assign User Fields dialog box.


Field Types.

The following types are available for user fields:

Text	Character data limited to 255 characters (Eg: "Charlotte, NC")
Numeric	Integer numeric data (Eg: 35)
Decimal	Floating point numeric data (Eg: 3.14159)
Date/Time	Date/Time data (Eg: "11/21/1963 11:05 AM")


Field Length. The length of text user fields.  The maximum value is 255.


Fields List. The list of user fields that will be created after clicking OK.  This list displays the field label, type and length.


Add. Adds the user field to the Fields list.


Remove. Removes the selected user field from the Fields list. This button is only available if a user field is selected.


File Name.  This is the actual ThumbsPlus database file name (for local databases - .td4 files).  For any database (remote or local) accessed though an ODBC data source this field will contain an ODBC data source name (DSN).


Description.  This is the user entered description of this ThumbsPlus database.  For any ODBC data sources this field will contain an ODBC data source name description (entered during the DSN setup).


Width. The thumbnail width (in pixels) chosen when the database was created.


Height. The thumbnail height (in pixels) chosen when the database was created.


Thumbnail color format. The desired color depth for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.  ThumbsPlus supports the following thumbnail color depths:

Grayscale (32 level)	Back and white thumbnails with 32 diferent grayscale levels.
236 color palette	236 color thumbnails based on the ThumbsPlus color palette.
Highcolor (15-bit)	32768 color (Blue,Green,Red) thumbnails with 5 bits per color sample. The 16th bit is unused.
Truecolor (24-bit)	16 million color (Blue, Green, Red) thumbnails with 8 bits per color sample.


Disk volumes defined.  The number of actual volumes that ThumbsPlus has scanned and stored in the database.


Folder paths defined.  The number of folder paths that have been scanned.


Thumbnail records.  The number of thumbnails stored in the database.


Keywords defined.  The number of unique keywords that exist in the database.


Keyword references.  The total number of keyword references that exist for all thumbnails in the database.


User fields defined.  The total number of user fields that have been created in the database.


User field references.  The total number of user field references that exist for all thumbnails in the database.


Total file size (bytes).  The actual database file size.  For any database engine other that MS Access/Jet this field doesn't apply.


Number of users.  The number of users connected to the database.


 Main Window - Options | Preferences - Disks & Folders

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

This option displays a dialog box from which you can control the way ThumbsPlus matches physical disks on your system with scanned volumes stored in the database.  You can also set several options that will affect how your folders will be displayed in the folder tree.

Volume identification and matching

Match network volumes using share names. When ThumbsPlus searches for a match between network volumes stored in the database and those accessible from the system, it can use two methods for determining whether volumes match:

Volume labels. In this case, if the volume label in the database matches the drive, ThumbsPlus assumes a match. This is the default.

Network share name. In this case, the labels must still match, but the share name is checked also. This prevents problems that occur when multiple shared volumes are mounted with the same volume label (for example, when two different folders are shared separately from the same drive).

Please see Volume Matching for more detailed information about how ThumbsPlus matches physical volumes with database entries.

Ignore CD-ROM serial numbers. If the volume types match between a physical CD-ROM and a volume stored in the database and the serial numbers do NOT match, then the volumes are considered by ThumbsPlus to be different   Check this option to disregard serial numbers for CD-ROM matching and force the match.

Check for network CD-ROM drives. Select this option to have ThumbsPlus treat any scanned network CD-ROM drives as CD-ROM drives instead of network drives.

Do not show Network Neighborhood. Check this option to disable network support in ThumbsPlus.  The Network Neighborhood folder tree group will not be displayed.

Exclude these drive letters.  Enter a list of drive letters that you would like ThumbsPlus to ignore.  These drives will not be displayed in the folder tree. Eg. "AEF" would exclude drives A, E, and F.

Show folder that are

Marked as "Hidden".  Check this option to show hidden folders

Marked as "System".  Check this option to show system folders.

Marked as both "Hidden" and "System".  Check this option to show folder marked as both hidden and system.

Folder tree options

Indicate expandable.  Checking this menu item causes ThumbsPlus to only display a '+' beside folder entries which contain sub-folders and may be expanded, or '-' in folder entries which are already expanded.  Otherwise, '+' is displayed for all folder entries, until the are actually opened.  Then the '+' is updated to reflect the true existence of sub-folders. NOTE: Indicate Expandable is only used for folders residing on local disks.  Network folders are never scanned ahead of time to indicate expandable folders.

ZIP files as folders.  This option, available only in the registered release, causes ThumbsPlus to treat ZIP (PKZIP-compatible) files as folders (folders). You can thumbnail, view, print, catalog and process files within ZIP files just as if they were in normal folders.

Remember ZIP passwords.  Check this option to remember ZIP file passwords enter in ThumbsPlus.

Indicate thumbnails.  Checking this option causes ThumbsPlus to use differently colored folders to indicate "interesting" folders. Folders which contain thumbnails are colored green; folders which do not themselves have thumbnails, but whose sub-folders do, are colored blue. This option is useful only after drive(s) have been scanned for images.

Just thumb folders.  Select this option to only show folders which contain files that have been thumbnailed. This is only useful once graphics files have been located (usually by Scan Drive).

Automatically expand and collapse items when dragging files or folders.  When checked, this option causes ThumbsPlus to expand and collapse folder tree entries when mouse dragging over a [+] or [-] folder tree branch icon.

Include the following special folders

Desktop. Check this option to display the Windows "Desktop" shell folder in the folder tree.

My Documents. Check this option to display  the Windows "My Documents" shell folder in the folder tree.

Fonts. Check this option to display the Windows "Fonts" folder in the folder tree.

Recent Documents. Check this option to display the Windows "Recent Documents" folder in the folder tree.


Output file. Enter the output file name for the export file.


[...] Use this button to browse for the output folder and file name for the export output file.


Selected files only. Check this option to export thumbnail records for only those files that have been selected in the thumbnail view.


Current tree. Select this option to export thumbnail records for all thumbnails in the currently-selected folder and any of its child folders.


Entire database. Select this option to export all thumbnail records in the ThumbsPlus database.


Keywords. Check this option to export keywords for each thumbnail included in the export file. The exported keywords will appear as a single field with each keyword separated by a semi-colon.


Annotations. Check this option to include the database annotation for each thumbnail in the export file.


Thumbnails. Check this option to include the thumbnail bitmap itself. This is generally useful only for importing back into ThumbsPlus.


Write field headers. Check this option to make ThumbsPlus write a first record that lists each field name being exported. This is useful when importing the file into another application, such as Microsoft Access.


Append to file. Check this option to make ThumbsPlus add any exported records to the end of the export file if it already exists on disk.


Input file. Enter the name of the file to import.


[...] Use this button to browse for the folder path and file name of a file to import.


Always replace. Imported thumbnail records replace any existing database thumbnail records.


Replace if newer. Imported thumbnail records only replace database records if the thumbnail date in the import file is newer than the database.


Never replace. If a database record already exists, the import record is ignored.


Combine keywords. When an import record replaces a database record, the keywords from both the database and the import record are assigned.


Make new thumbnail images. ThumbsPlus will generate new thumbnails for all files on volumes that are currently accessible. When this option is cleared, ThumbsPlus will use the thumbnail from the import file (if available), or use a blank (solid black) thumbnail.


Skip orphans (file no longer exists). ThumbsPlus will check (for volumes currently available) if the file still exists before importing the thumbnail.


Prefix. Enter text prefix for the file name.


Next #. Enter the next sequence number to use in the generated file names.


Increment. Enter an amount to be used to increment the sequence number during file name generation.


Suffix. Enter text suffix for the file name.


Overwrite existing file. Select to overwrite existing files during file name generation.


Use next available. Select to skip to the next available sequence number if the file exists.


Find highest used. Select to skip all existing file names and begin with the next available sequence number.


Enabled. Select to enable zero padding for the sequence number in the file name.


Digits. Enter the number of digits to pad for leading zeros.


Example. Displays the first of the next two file names that will be generated.


Example. Displays the second of the next two file names that will be generated.


Top. Enter the top of page margin (in inches).


Left. Enter the left of page margin (in inches).


Right. Enter the right of page margin (in inches).


Bottom. Enter the bottom of page margin (in inches).


Stretch to fit.  Select this option to stretch the images to fill the printed page (within the margins).


Use image resolution (DPI).  Select this option to size each image using the resolution defined within the image.


Printer resolution (1:1).  Select this option to print the image at 1:1 (based on the printer resolution).


Maintain aspect ratio.  Select this option to ensure that the width and height maintain the ratio in the original image, to avoid distortion.


Borders.  Check this to print a border around the image.


File name.  Check this to print the image file name under the image.


With path.  Check this to include the image's complete folder path when printing the file name under the image.


With Extension.  Check this to include the image file's extension when printing the file name under the image.


File size.  Check this to print the image file's size under the image.


File date/time.  Check this to print the image file's date and time under the image.


Dimensions.  Check this to print the image's dimensions under the image.


Resolution.  Check this to print the image's resolution (DPI) under the image.


	Galleries
A ThumbsPlus gallery [image] is a logical container for a group of thumbnails stored in the database.  All information about a gallery is stored internally in the database as well.  Galleries may reference files across multiple folders, hard disks, and even networked computers.  For more information, See also: Main Window - Thumbnail | Gallery | Create.


Keywords.  Check this to print the image's thumbnail keywords (if present) under the image.


Annotation.  Check this to print the image's thumbnail annotation (if present) under the image.


IPTC info.  Check this to print the image's IPTC information (if present) under the image.


Font.  Click this button to set the font for any textual items that will be printed.


Font.  Click this button to set the font for any textual items that will be printed.


Enable. When checked, automatic clipboard saving is enabled. The Auto Clip Save menu selection is also checked when enabled.


Convert metafiles. When checked, metafiles on the clipboard will be rasterized and saved; otherwise, they will be saved as Windows metafiles (.WMF).


Image File save format. Select the desired file type to save.


Output Folder. Select the folder where you want the auto-saved files to be stored.


[...]  Use this button to find an output folder for the auto-saved files.


Next file name. Displays an example of the next auto-generated file name.


Setup. Use this button to setup automatic file name generation.


Next file name settings. Displays auto-generated file name settings.


Found List.  Enter the name for this found list that will display in the folder tree under the Found Files group.  The default list name is "Found Files".


File name mask.  Enter one or more file name masks (semi-colon separated) to include in the search.  These file name masks may contain any combination of valid file name characters and wildcard characters '*'.


Current Tree.  Select this option to search in the current folder and all of its sub-folders.


Entire Database.  Select this option to search the complete ThumbsPlus database.


Current folder.  Select this option to search only in the current folder.


Current Folder.  This display field shows the current folder selected at the time of the first execution of this query.


And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.


Selected Criteria.  This display field gives a textual representation of all criteria chosen so far.


And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.


Available Keywords.  Select the keywords that you wish to search on.  You can add them to the Search Keywords list by double clicking on them OR by selecting them and then clicking the [>] button.


[>]  Use this button to add the selected keywords to the Search Keywords list.


Search Keywords.  Select the keywords that you wish to remove from the search.  You can remove them from the Search Keywords list by double clicking on them OR by selecting them and then clicking the [<] button.


[<]  Use this button to remove keywords from the Search Keywords list.


All.  Select this option to search for thumbnails that have ALL of the selected keywords.


Any.  Select this option to search for thumbnails that have ANY of the selected keywords.


Available Fields.  Select from this combo box a user field to use in the query.  The available user fields must have been configured previously using the menu selection File | Database | User Fields.


Operator.  Select from this combo box an expression operator for the field and its value.


Value.  Enter a value for the field expression.


Search Fields.  This list box displays any user fields that have been entered so far


Add.  Click this button to add a completed field expression to the Search List.


Remove.  Click this button to remove a selected field expression from the Search List.


And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.


And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.


And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.


And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.


Field.  Pick an available thumbnail record field name to be used in the query text.


Operator.  Pick an operator to be used in the query expression with the currently selected Field.


SQL Statement.  Displays selected Field and Operator.  Once the operator has been selected, complete the expression by placing the cursor after the operator and typing in the desired query value.  You may also enter free form text here as a SQL string to be added to the query criteria from other tabs.  This text must consist of valid SQL (ANSI SQL-92 Standard) WHERE CLAUSE syntax.  The user must have knowledge of the ThumbsPlus relational database model in order to use this option.


And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.


And / Or.  Select one of the two connectors.  These connectors determine how any other criteria (if entered) will be combined.


Find images similar to.  Check this option to enable the Image Similarity tab.


Image file name.  This field displays the selected image file name to be used for similarity matching.


Color Metric.  Select this option to search by color similarity only.


Shape Metric.  Select this option to search by shape similarity only.


Both.  Select this option to use a combination of both color and shape metrics in the search.


% Color Contribution.  Enter the percentage of color contribution for the similarity search.  The difference between this value and 100 will be the shape contribution percentage.


Slider Control.  Adjust this slider to tell ThumbsPlus how similar you want the images to be.  The far left position indicates the closest 400.  The far right position indicates duplicate images.


Match Description.  Displays the selected similarity level from the slider control.  The far left position indicates the closest 400.  The far right position indicates duplicate images.


Preview.  This image displays the currently selected image file's thumbnail.


Threshold.  Adjust this slider from top to bottom to indicate the level of similarity desired (from 0 to 100).


Threshold value.  Use this field to enter directly the threshold amount (from 0-100).


Current thumbnail list.  Select this option to search for similar images within the list of thumbnails currently displayed in the thumbnail view.


Current tree.  Select this option to search for similar images in the currently selected folder (and its sub-folders) displayed in the folder tree.


Entire database.  Select this option to search for images in the entire ThumbsPlus database.


Folders.  Displays the list of folders to be watched for changes.


Add.  Click this button to add a watched folder to the list.


Remove.  Click this button to remove (stop watching) the currently selected watched folder.


Remove All.  Click this button to remove all watched folders from the list.


Path.  Enter the folder path name for the desired favorite.


Description.  Enter a description for the favorite.  This description will show under the File | Move to and Tree | Go to favorites menus.


Add.  Click this button to add a new favorite.


Change.  Click this button to modify an existing favorite.


Remove.  Click this button to remove a favorite.


Up/Down.  Use these buttons to modify the favorites order of appearance on the menus.


Up/Down.  Use these buttons to modify the favorites order of appearance on the menus.


Favorites.  Displays the list of currently defined favorite folders.


Select set name. When creating a new set, you can enter the set name here. To select an existing set, use the drop-down arrow to select an existing set name.


Save. Click to save the batch set for future use.


Description. Enter a description for the batch set.


Selected files.  Select this option to process only the currently selected files in the thumbnail view.


Current folder.  Select this option to process the files located in the currently selected folder in the folder tree.


Current tree.  Select this option to process the files in the currently selected folder and all of its sub-folders.


File name mask.  Check this option to further restrict processing to a specific set of files, using a mask (entered in the next field). If this option is not selected, ThumbsPlus will process all selected types


File name mask (value).  Enter a file name mask to specify which files to be processed.  Eg. Entering a mask of *.jpg will force ThumbsPlus to process only .jpg files.


Steps.  Displays the list of batch steps to be performed.


Up/Down.  Use these buttons to reorder batch steps.


Add.  Use this button to add a new step to the list.  Here is a list of steps that are currently available. Most of them correspond to menu selections available in the View Window.  If parameters are required, ThumbsPlus will display the steps associated dialog box when adding it to the list.

Icon	Step name	More information	Parameters?
	Resolution	File Info | Set Resolution...	Yes
	Edit Comments	File Info | Edit Comments...	Yes
	Set File Date	File Info | Set File Date...	Yes
	Adjust Colors	Image | Adjust Colors...	Yes
	Color Depth	Image | Color Depth...	Yes
	Color Balance	Image | Color Balance...	Yes
	Color Profile	Image | Color Profile...	Yes
	Replace Colors	Image | Replace Colors...	Yes
	Swap Red & Blue	Image | Swap Red & Blue	No
	Invert Colors	Image | Invert Colors	No
	Equalize Histogram	Image | Equalize Histogram	No
	Stretch Histogram	Image | Stretch Histogram	No
	Image Stamp	Image | Stamp...	Yes
	Combine	Image | Combine...	Yes
	Embed Watermark	Image | Embed Watermark...	Yes
	Filter	Image | Filter...	Yes
	Resize	Transform | Resize...	Yes
	Rotate	Transform | Rotate...	Yes
	Turn 90° CW	Transform | Turn 90 CW	No
	Turn 90° CCW	Transform | Turn 90 CCW	No
	Turn 180°	Transform | Turn 180	No
	Flip horizontally	Transform | Flip Horizontally	No
	Flip vertically	Transform | Flip Vertically	No
	Autocrop	Transform | Autocrop	No
	Crop / Add Borders	Transform | Crop / Add Borders...	Yes
	Process	Process | (process name)	No
	Convert to Bitmap	Metafile | Convert to Bitmap...	Yes
	Extract Bitmap	Metafile | Extract Bitmap	No
	Remove Background	Metafile | Remove Background	No
	Do Set	Do Set...	Yes


Edit.  Use this button to modify parameters for the selected step.  If the step has no parameters this button has no effect.


Delete.  Use this button to remove the selected step from the list


Output format. Select an output type. If the type you select requires options, these will display automatically


Options.  Use this button to modify any output format options.


Extension. Enter the file extension to append to file names (if desired).  If not entered, the default file extension for the selected output format will be used.


Name Prefix. Enter a prefix for output file names.


Suffix. Enter a suffix for output file names.


Overwrite files with the same name. Unless this option is checked, ThumbsPlus will not replace any existing file with the same name as a name generated for an output file.


Copy annotations and keywords from originals.  Check this option to copy database annotations and keywords (if present) to the thumbnail record created for the output file.


Original location. Created files will be placed in the same folders as the original files.


Specific folder. Enter a complete folder path for the output files.


[...] Use this button to browse for the desired output folder.


Make equivalent sub-folders. If you select a specific folder, you can also elect to reproduce any folder structure from the original location by checking this option.


Width. Enter the desired width for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.


Height. Enter the desired height for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.


Color Depth. Pick the desired color depth for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.  ThumbsPlus supports the following thumbnail color depths:

Grayscale (32 level)	Back and white thumbnails with 32 different grayscale levels.
236 color palette	236 color thumbnails based on the ThumbsPlus color palette.
Highcolor (15-bit)	32768 color (Blue,Green,Red) thumbnails with 5 bits per color sample. The 16th bit is unused.
Truecolor (24-bit)	16 million color (Blue, Green, Red) thumbnails with 8 bits per color sample.


Compressed pixel data. Check this option to compress the thumbnail data before being stored in the database.


Database Description. Enter the description for this ThumbsPlus database.


DOS name. This field displays the old style 8.3 MS-DOS file name.


File size. This field displays the size of the physical file on disk.  This does not represent the amount of memory need to load the file as many file formats support pixel data compression.  For the amount of memory this file will occupy when loaded see the Details tab.


Modified. This field displays the last modified date of the file.


Created. This field displays the creation date of the file.


Accessed. This field displays the last accessed date of the file.


Attributes These check boxes display the current file attributes (they will be disabled if the file is stored in a ZIP file or on Read only media).


Read-only. Use this option to set or clear the "Read only" file attribute.


Hidden. Use this option to set or clear the "Hidden" file attribute.


Archive. Use this option to set or clear the "Archive" file attribute.


System. Use this option to set or clear the "System" file attribute.


In ZIP file. This field displays the full pathname of the ZIP file that contains the file, if applicable.


Full Pathname. This field displays the full pathname of the file.


Compressed size.  This field displays the compressed size and precentage compression for the file.


Compression method. This field displays the ZIP compression method used when the file was added to the ZIP file.


CRC-32. This field displays the cyclical redundancy checksum (CRC) value for the compressed file.


User Fields. Check this option to include any user field data and user field definitions (from File | Database | User Fields) in the export.


Seconds. Enter the number of seconds that ThumbsPlus will wait between slides for timed slide shows.


Control manually. Check this option to manually switch slides (using the mouse buttons or space bar, backspace and pause keys).


Filenames. Use this option to make ThumbsPlus display the file name at the bottom of the screen when displaying each file in the slide show.


File Comments. Use this option to make ThumbsPlus display the internal file comments at the bottom of the screen for each file as it displays in the slide show.


Font. Select the text display font to be used during slide shows.


Font Description. The full description of the currently selected slide show font.


Text. Use this option to select the text color to be used when drawing text in the slide show.


Background Color. Use this option to select the background color to be used for images that do not cover the entire screen.


Show full screen. This option will cause ThumbsPlus to display the slide show in full screen. When unchecked, the slide show will run in a window.


Stretch bitmaps to screen. Use this option to make ThumbsPlus stretch images to fill the screen as much as possible.


Reduce bitmaps to screen. Similar to "Stretch," except that only bitmaps larger than the screen are resized. Bitmaps smaller than the screen size are centered.


Maintain original aspect ratios. When stretching bitmaps, ThumbsPlus will ensure that the width-to-height ratio remains constant, rather than distorting the image.


Hide cursor. Hides the mouse cursor during the slide show.


Slide show monitor.  Available in multiple monitor mode ONLY.  Select which monitor(s) you want to use for the slide show. This option works with Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP.


Build bitmaps from metafiles. When this option is selected, ThumbsPlus will build an in-memory bitmap from a metafile before displaying it. This eliminates watching the metafile draw.


Random order. Select this option to shuffle the list of file names before beginning the slide show.


Include child folders. Select this option to make ThumbsPlus perform a slide show of all images in the current folder and any of its sub-folders. When this option is checked, the selected files are ignored and all files show.


Skip files smaller than. When selected, ThumbsPlus will not display raster images smaller than the entered size (width and height).


Minimum Width.  The minimum width (in pixels) of images to display in the slide show if Skip files smaller than is checked.


Minimum Height.  The minimum height (in pixels) of images to display in the slide show if Skip files smaller than is checked.


Reverse mouse buttons. Select this option to reverse the function of the left and right mouse buttons when navigating through a slide show.  When reversed, the left mouse button shows the previous slide and the right mouse button shows the next slide.


View images while they are loading. This option causes ThumbsPlus to display the view window while loading each image, so you can see the image as it loads. On some displays, this may make the load take a bit longer.


Disable Undo. If you select this option, ThumbsPlus will not save the information necessary to undo image operations. This will speed up edit time and require less memory and temporary disk space.


Show image comments when available. If an image has comments stored with it in the file, selecting this option will cause ThumbsPlus to automatically display them. The View | Edit Comments window displays automatically whenever you view an image with comments. ThumbsPlus can read comment fields from GIF, JPEG and TIFF files.


Move to next file after deleting or moving a file. If this option is checked and you delete the currently viewed image via File | Dispose | Delete File ThumbsPlus will advance the view window to the next available file in the thumbnail view.


Create icons or task bar entries for view windows. If this option is checked, ThumbsPlus will create task bar icons for any opened view windows.


Open windows for all selected files (rather than 1st). This selection determines how many windows ThumbsPlus opens when multiple files are selected any you pick Image | View. If you select this option, then a view window will appear for each selected file; otherwise, only a single view window is created.


Check for Digimarc® watermarks when viewing. Scan the image file pixel data for a Digimarc ID (assigned by Digimarc) of the creator or owner of the image.


Automatically adjust for non-square aspect ratios. If checked, images with stored resolutions having different horizontal and vertical values will be automatically scaled to reflect the non-square resolution aspect.


Use mouse wheel to zoom. If checked, any mouse wheel movement in a view window will zoom in or out on the image. Unchecked, the mouse wheel will vertically scroll the image in the view window.


Default. Select this option to set the keyboard selection rectangle size to the default - 1/3 image width x 1/3 image height. The keyboard selection rectangle is accessed by pressing F11.


Specific Size If checked ThumbsPlus will set the keyboard selection rectangle (accessed by pressing F11) to the specified width and height.


Selection Rectangle Width. Enter the desired width (in pixels) of the keyboard selection rectangle.


Selection Rectangle Height. Enter the desired height (in pixels) of the keyboard selection rectangle.


Standard. Check this option to pick one of the standard ThumbsPlus cursors for use in all view windows.


Standard Cursors. The list of available standard view window cursors.


Crosshair (+). Check this option to use the + crosshair cursor.  The cursor point is indicated by vertical and horizontal intersecting lines.


Crosshair (X). Check this option to use the X crosshair cursor.  The cursor point is indicated by diagonally intersecting lines.


Dither 24-bit images in highcolor mode. When this option is selected, ThumbsPlus will dither truecolor images for display on high-color devices. This improves the appearance of some 24-bit images, especially those with smooth gradient fills.


Color. Use this button to select the color of the selected crosshair cursor.


Dither Metafiles. Windows Metafiles generally include 24-bit color information. On 256-color palette-based displays, these colors will be dithered. ThumbsPlus generates (up to) 236-color palettes for displaying metafiles, resulting in much smoother displays. However, generating the palette and modifying the metafile display to take it into account slows the display process down. Select this option if you are in a hurry. Also select this option if you are using a 16-color or 24-million color display driver, or if you get strange results displaying or thumbnailing metafiles.


Scale bi-level images to Gray. When this option is selected, ThumbsPlus will scale bi-level images to grayscale for display. This improves their appearance considerably, but may be too computationally intensive for slower processors.


Resample images when reduced. Check this option to cause ThumbsPlus to resample the display image when reduced (zoomed out below 100%).  When image dimensions are reduced, rows and columns of pixels are eliminated from the image.  This removal of pixels can cause aberations in the image known as moire patterns.  The resample operation is used to properly interpolate colors when making an image smaller and thereby prevent the appearance of these moire patterns.


Automatically crop. Check this option to automatically crop borders on displayed images. See Auto Crop.


Show gridlines for zoomed images.  Check this option to display pixel grid/dots for images when zoomed to or above 4 times normal.


Show Toolbar. When you check this item, ThumbsPlus will display a toolbar on each view window.


Show Status line. When you check this item, ThumbsPlus will display a status line on each view window.


View Window Background. Select a background color for the sides or top and bottom if the window is larger than the image.


Metafile Background. Select a background color for transparent metafiles.


Automatic. The size of the view window is based on the size of the image or metafile being displayed.


Full Screen. The entire screen is used to display the picture, without menu bar or caption. See View | Full Screen for more information on this mode.


Maximize. Use this option to make ThumbsPlus maximize the window when opening.


Remember Last. When this option is checked the size of the view window will be set to the last size used.


Exactly. When checked the view windows will be sized to the exact (X,Y) dimensions.


Width. Used to specify the exact width of the view window.


Height. Used to specify the exact height of the view window.


Don't stretch. The image is not initially stretched.


Fit to window. The image is always stretched or reduced to fill as much of the window as possible (depending on the setting for Maintain aspect ratio).


Reduce to window. Initially, the image will be set to Stretch to fit mode only if the image is larger than the window ThumbsPlus creates for it. Otherwise, the image will be centered.


Fit to width. The width of the image will be stretched to fit the width of the window. This is especially useful for documents in portrait orientation (higher than wide).


Maintain aspect ratio. The ratio between the width and height of the image is kept constant, to avoid distorting the image.


Upper left.  The view windows will be positioned in the upper left of the monitor.


Cascaded.  The view windows will be cascaded from the upper left of the monitor.


Centered.  The view windows will be centered on the monitor.


Remember last.  The view windows will be opened at the last position used.


Exactly.  The view windows will be opened at the exact (X,Y) coordinates.


Horizontal position. Used to specify the exact horizontal position of the view window.


Vertical position. Used to specify the exact vertical position of the view window.


Monitor for view windows.  Available in multiple monitor mode ONLY.  Select which monitor(s) you want to use for opening view windows. This option works with Windows 98/ME and Windows 2000 (Windows NT 5.0) only.


Max number of view windows. Use to select the maximum number of View windows which ThumbsPlus can manage at one time. Select a number between 1 and 40. Once this limit is reached (approximately), ThumbsPlus will close the oldest window before opening another.


Video button size for movies.  Use to select the size of video buttons that will be displayed for movie and sound file playback.  The available options are small and large buttons.


Main Window - Options | File Loading - Movie / Sound

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

This tab sets the options for loading and playing movie and sound files.

Viewing/Playing options

Start on open. Select this option to cause ThumbsPlus to start playing the movie or sound file immediately after opening.

Auto repeat. When checked, ThumbsPlus will repeat the movie or sound file indefinately.

Disable audio. Select this option to mute the movie audio on playback.

Initial size. Use this dropdown list to select the initial size of the movie window.  The available sizes are 50%, 100%, 200%, 400% and Full Screen.

Time display. Use this dropdown list to select the desired units of playback progress indication.  The available units are Time and Seconds.  Time will display in the format HH:MM:SS.  Seconds will merely display the total number of seconds elapsed.  A new unit of playback, Frames, is planned for a future release.

Render audio waveforms. Select this option to have ThumbsPlus render audio data using the selected style.  Available styles are Wave, Radial, Diagram, Tunnel , and Frequency.

Channel colors

Randomize.  Check this option to use random colors for the rendered audio channels.

Left.  Select the desired color for rendered audio data on the left channel for stereo files.  Note: if the audio data contains only one channel (mono) the left channel color will be used..

Right. Select the desired color for rendered audio data on the right channel for stereo files.

Use Direct Sound output device.  Uncheck this option to use the default WAVE output device instead of the Direct Sound output device.  On some systems, using the WAVE output device may inprove audio rendering and playback performance.

Thumbnail options (Movie only)

First frame. Select this option to cause ThumbsPlus to make the thumbnail from the first frame of the movie.

First non-blank frame. Select this option to cause ThumbsPlus to make the thumbnail from the first non-blank frame of the movie.

Last frame. Select this option to cause ThumbsPlus to make the thumbnail from the last frame of the movie.

Last non-blank frame. Select this option to cause ThumbsPlus to make the thumbnail from the last non-blank frame of the movie.

Percentage of movie. Select this option and enter a percentage from 1 to 100 to make ThumbsPlus advance to the desired percentage of the movie before making the thumbnail.

Make waveform thumbnails. Select this option to have ThumbsPlus create thumbnails by rendering audio data using the selected style.  Available styles are Wave, Radial, Diagram, Tunnel , and Frequency.


View Window - Image | Fix Aspect
View Window - Transform | Turn & Mirror | Fix Aspect	X

This function will adjust the image dimensions to reflect the non-square image resolution.  The image resolution is then adjusted accordingly to a square resolution (i.e. resolution width = resolution height ).


View Window - Edit | Invert Selection

This function inverts the current view window selection.


View Window - File | Save & Close
View Window - File | Save & Close	Ctrl+Alt+S

Use this command to save any changes and close the view window.


  This decoration indicates the file contains an embedded Digimarc copyright.


  This decoration indicates the file consists of multiple pages.  TIFF and PCX files that have more than one page as well as animated GIF files will be displayed with this decoration.


  This decoration indicates the file contains IPTC information.  This IPTC information is displayed on the "Info" tab of the file properties dialog box.


  This decoration indicates the file is an installed font file. The font will be available from the standard windows font selection dialog box.


  This decoration indicates that the files last modified date does not match the last modified date stored in the ThumbsPlus database.  This usually means that the file was editted outside of ThumbsPlus and therefore may not look like the original (now out-of-date) thumbnail.  To correct this condition simply remake the thumbnail.


  This decoration indicates that the file is no longer accessible.  The file may have been deleted or moved outside of ThumbsPlus OR the file may exist on a non-accessible disk (eg. removable drives: CDROM, Floppy Disks, Zip Disks; network mapped drives).


  This decoration indicates that the file is actually a windows shortcut (.LNK file).


Preview.  This is the preview of a sample printed catalog page or rendered contact sheet image.


Scheme.  Use this dropdown list to pick an existing print catalog or contact sheet scheme.  To create a new scheme, after completing all print catalog or contact sheet options, simply enter a scheme name in this field and click the Save button.


Save.  Use this button to save the current print catalog or contact sheet options as a scheme.


Name.  Use this field to select the printer you want to be used for printing the catalog.


Properties.  Click this button to edit the properties specific to the printer (i.e., page orientation, page size, color and dithering options).


Print to File.  Check this option, if you wish to print to a file that can be copied to the printer later.  To copy the file to the printer, open a DOS command prompt, change folders to the folder that contains this file and type in the following command:  COPY {file name} {printer name} where {file name} is the name of this printed catalog file and {printer name} is one of the printers connected to your system (e.g. LPT1: - local printer on port LPT1, \\Server1\Epson700 - network printer Epson700 shared from the networked PC named Server1).


Color.  Select this option to print color thumbnails.


Black & White.  Select this option to print grayscale thumbnails.


Default.  Select this option to use the printer default color settings.


Simple. Select this option to have a simple (flat) border drawn around each contact sheet thumbnail.


Left. Use this field to enter the value (in units) for the left margin.


Right. Use this field to enter the value (in units) for the right margin.


Top. Use this field to enter the value (in units) for the top margin.


type_PDS
PDS: NASA Planetary Data Systems

PDS files are a proprietary format developed by NASA for planetary image data storage.


ThumbsPlus Other Messages
 Other ThumbsPlus Messages

Code	Message	Description
Warning Messages

6001	Sorry, but ThumbsPlus requires at least a 256-color display to run. We highly recommend highcolor (15-16 bit) or truecolor (24 or 32 bit) displays.	For the best viewing (especially of images), we highly recommend that you run ThumbsPlus with a 256 color (8-bit), Hicolor (15-16 bit) or Truecolor (32 bit) display driver. ThumbsPlus will run best on machines with highcolor or truecolor displays, and performs well on machines with 256 colors (palette-based). 16-color and monochrome display systems are not recommended unless you'll be working only with low-resolution images. See the section on Windows Video Drivers for general information about Windows display drivers.
6002	This operation will cause the image to be promoted to 24 bit, so that proper color information can be interpolated.	ThumbsPlus can only do some color operations on truecolor (24-bit) or grayscale images. If you plan to use the image on 256-color displays (or if you're running a 256-color display), you may want to reduce the color depth before saving the file.
6003	This operation will cause the image to be promoted to 8-bit grayscale, so that proper grayscale levels can be interpolated.	ThumbsPlus can only do some grayscale or monochrome image operations on 256-level grayscale images. The current image has fewer than 256 levels, so it must be converted to 256-level (8-bit) grayscale before processing.
6004	JPEG-compressed TIFF files are not widely supported. For compatibility with other applications, you may wish to choose a different compression method.	For compatibility with other applications, you may wish to choose a different compression method. This is just a warning that the file type you have chosen may not be recognized by other programs. You may want to test other programs before deciding to use this type for many files.
6005	ZIP-compressed TIFF files are experimental and not widely supported. For compatibility with other applications, you may wish to choose a different compression method.	See Warning: 6004
6006	Progressive JPEG files are not supported by many other applications.	See Warning: 6004
6007	This command really, REALLY deletes the file or files from your hard disk or digital media! To remove only the thumbnail, use Shift+Delete, or Thumbnail | Remove.	Thumbnail images displayed in ThumbsPlus are stored in the ThumbsPlus database (.td4 extension) and are used to represent actual files on your hard drive.  This operation deletes the actual image files from disk, media cards, etc.  To remove the thumbnails from the database, use one of the Thumbnail | Remove options from the main menu.
6008	You have choosen to perform a database operation while background tasks are still active!  If you continue, the background tasks will be terminated. Do you wish to terminate the background tasks?
6009	Because of use well past the expiration date, the following functions have been disabled: - Storing new thumbnails in the database - Building web pages - Batch processing, contacts, and catalogs of more than 100 files - Several batch operations To register this evaluation version, click Help | Register on the main menu.
6010	Your current display is limited to 256 colors. For accurate viewing of images, we recommend you run ThumbsPlus in Highccolor (15-16 bit) or Truecolor (24 or 32 bit) mode.
6011	Do you wish to remove this file type (%s) from the list of ThumbsPlus configured file types?
6012	This command really, REALLY deletes the selected file(s) from your zip file!. To remove only the thumbnail, use Shift+Delete, or Thumbnail | Remove | Selected.	See Warning: 6007
6013	There are background tasks running. Are you sure you want to cancel these tasks and exit?
6014	Folder operations (delete, rename, move and copy) are disabled. To enable them, select the General tab in the Preferences dialog and check "Allow folder operations."
6016	The image <image_name> may be too small to embed a persistent watermark. The minimum recommended size is 256 x 256 pixels. Do you want to try it anyway?
6017	This image has too many colors to save as a GIF file. It is being reduced to 256 colors using an optimized palette (6 bit median cut) and Stucki dithering.
6018	The current gallery order has changed. Do you wish to save changes?
6019	No files were found that matched your selection criteria.
6020	ThumbsPlus is currently updating your open database with folder changes that occurred in Windows Explorer while ThumbsPlus was not running.  If you exit this process before it completes, some folder paths in the ThumbsPlus database may not be accurate.  Any folders not updated will appear as off-line "grayed out" folder paths. Do you wish to save the remaining unprocessed folder updates for processing the next time you start ThumbsPlus?	The ThumbsPlus folder monitoring extension records folder changes that occur on your hard drives when ThumbsPlus is not running.  The changes are then "played back" during ThumbsPlus startup.  This is done so that your physical hard drive's folders and the current ThumbsPlus database's thumbnail path information stay synchronized and thereby prevent orphan thumbnails. To disable folder monitoring in ThumbsPlus, uncheck Enable shell folder monitoring under Options | Preferences - General.
6021	This file will require at least <memory_size> of memory to load, which may not be available on your system. Do you want to try to load it anyway?	Feeling lucky! - Try to load the file anyway, but be prepared to wait while Windows pages out applications to your swap file in an attempt to free enough physical memory to load the image. The worst that could happen is you wait for a while and ThumbsPlus then tells you that it could not load the file.  Try closing other applications and restart ThumbsPlus.
7011	You are currently running the most recent version of ThumbsPlus.  Thank you for your patronage and enjoy your software.	ThumbsPlus has connected to the Cerious Software web site, checked for a newer version of ThumbsPlus and determined that you are running the latest release of ThumbsPlus. For more information: See: Main Window - Help | Program Updates...

Prompts

7200	Do you wish to save changes to <filename>?	When closing a modified file, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to save the file. You can change this behavior by unchecking "Prompt to save when closing modified images" under Options | Preferences - Confirmations.
7201	The file you are <moving/copying> has the same name as an existing file. What do you want to do?	See Confirm File Replacement.
7202	The destination zip folder <zipfile> already exists. Do you really want to <move/copy> this zip folder?	Depending upon the operation (move or copy) and the confirmation settings for moving and copying files, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to confirm this operation. See action prompts 7205 and 7206 for more information on disabling move and copy confirmations.
7203	Folder <foldername> does not exist; do you wish to create it?	ThumbsPlus detected that the folder specified does not exist. Select Yes to create it, or No to skip the folder creation and pick a new folder.
7204	The file <filename> already exists; do you want to overwrite it?	If the 'Overwriting existing files' option is checked from the Options | Preferences - Confirmations menu selection, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to confirm overwriting an existing file.
7205	Do you really want to move the selected files to <foldername>?	If the 'Moving files' option is checked from the Options | Preferences - Confirmations menu selection, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to confirm moving files.
7206	Do you really want to copy the selected files to <foldername>?	If the 'Copying files' option is checked from the Options | Preferences - Confirmations menu selection, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to confirm copying files.
7207	Do you really want to delete the file: <filename>?	If the 'Deleting files' option is checked from the Options | Preferences - Confirmations menu selection, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to confirm removing this file (using either the File | Delete option, or the trash can on the tool bar) from your disk.
7208	The file <filename> is currently locked. Do you want to retry?	The file is in use by another application or another system on the network. Select Yes for ThumbsPlus to try to open it again; or select No to skip the operation.
7209	The file: <filename> is a program, system, read-only or hidden file. Do you really wish to delete this file?	You should verify that the file is not needed before deleting.
7210	This will remove the folder and all files within it from your hard disk! The folder <foldername> is not empty. Do you really wish to delete this folder and all its files and sub-folders?	Selecting Yes will cause ThumbsPlus to remove the folder and all of the sub-folders and files within it. Selecting No will skip the operation.
7211	The folder: <foldername> is a system, read-only or hidden folder. Do you really wish to delete this folder?	You should verify that the folder is not needed before deleting it. Selecting Yes will cause ThumbsPlus to remove the folder and all of the sub-folders and files within it. Selecting No will skip the operation.
7212	Do you really want to delete the selected file(s) from the zip file <zipfile>?	If you select Yes, ThumbsPlus will remove the selected files from the specified zip file. Selecting No will skip the operation.
7213	Are you sure you want to remove gallery <galleryname> from the database?	If you select Yes, ThumbsPlus will delete the gallery and its thumbnail references from the database.  No files will be deleted from your system and no thumbnails will be removed from the ThumbsPlus database. Selecting No will skip the operation.
7214	Are you sure you want to remove filter <filtername>?	ThumbsPlus will prompt you when deleting image filter. Select Yes to delete the filter, or No to skip the operation.
7225	Do you want to remove the thumbnail for <filename> (including its associated keywords, annotations and user fields) from the database?	If the 'Confirm when removing thumbnails from the database' option is checked from the Options | Preferences - Confirmations menu selection, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to confirm removing any thumbnails (and their associated information) from the database. Select Yes to confirm, or No to skip the operation.
7226	This operation will remove the thumbnails in the selected folder from the database. Are you sure you wish to remove these thumbnails?	See action prompt 7225.
7227	This operation will remove the thumbnails in the selected folder (and its sub-folders) from the database. Are you sure you wish to remove these thumbnails?	See action prompt 7225.
7228	This operation will remove the thumbnails on the selected disk from the database. Are you sure you wish to remove these thumbnails?	See action prompt 7225.
7229	This operation will remove the selected thumbnails from the database. Are you sure you wish to remove these thumbnails?	See action prompt 7225.
7230	This operation will remove any orphan thumbnails in the selected folder from the database. Are you sure you wish to remove these thumbnails?	For more information about this confirmation see action prompt 7225. See also, Orphan Thumbnails.
7235	Microsoft Windows ODBC tracing is ON. This will slow down considerably any ODBC program, including ThumbsPlus. Do you wish to turn ODBC tracing OFF?	Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) tracing allows developers to debug their database applications by logging all SQL activity to a trace log.  This additional trace log file I/O will slow down database access considerably. Select Yes to disable ODBC tracing, or No to skip leave tracing enabled.
7236	ThumbsPlus could not open or connect to the database: <database_name> What do you want to do?	When ThumbsPlus fails to open a database, you will be prompted on how to proceed. See Database Not Found for more information.
7237	There may not be enough available disk space to compact the database -- <count> bytes may be needed. Do you want to try to compact anyway, using the <count> bytes available on drive <drive_letter>:?	When a database compact operation is attempted, ThumbsPlus will check your system for available disk space to determine if there is enough to successfully perform the operation. The order for disk space checking is the following: • TEMP environment folder. • Any RAMDISKs that have been created. • All local FIXED drives (beginning with C:) • All local REMOVABLE drives. • All mapped NETWORK drives. If there is not enough free disk space in any of these areas, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to attempt the compact anyway. Select Yes to confirm, or No to skip the operation.
7240	The 8-bit median cut quantization is slow and may require as much as <megabytes>Mb of memory for the current image. Do you want to continue?	ThumbsPlus will prompt you to continue 8-bit median cut quantizations (see Image | Depth) that will require more that 5MB of additional memory to process. Select Yes to confirm, or No to skip the operation.
7241	You need to determine your monitor's gamma before adjusting image gamma. Do you wish to determine your monitor gamma now?	Select Yes to determine the monitor gamma value to be used for your monitor. This will display the Monitor Gamma viewing options tab from Options | Viewing - Monitor. Select No to cancel the operation. See View | Assumed Gamma for more information about monitor gamma adjustment.
7242	There is not enough memory to count all of the 24-bit colors in this image. Would you like a count of the number of 15-bit colors instead?	ThumbsPlus cannot allocate a buffer large enough to quickly count the actual number of distinct colors in the image (the buffer requires 2Mb, one bit for each possible color). You may count the number of distinct 15-bit colors instead (the buffer only requires 4K).
7243	ThumbsPlus requires unique, non-blank volume labels on disks to differentiate drives. Unpredictable results may occur if you don't label your disks. Do you want to try to run anyway?	As this message indicates, ThumbsPlus relies on the existence of unique volume labels to create (and match against) unique database volume records when making thumbnails of your image files.  It is not recommended that you run ThumbsPlus on a system that does not have unique volume labels, however, you may do so by selecting Yes. Selecting No will cause ThumbsPlus to enumerate any unlabeled or non-uniquely labled drives and prompt you to enter a unique volume label for each.
7244	You have not entered a valid Digimarc ID. Would you like to do so now?	See Digimarc ID for more information.
7245	This image has too many colors to save as a GIF file. Do you want ThumbsPlus to reduce it automatically?	GIF files can only contain 256 colors, and the current image has more. Select Yes for ThumbsPlus to automatically reduce the color depth of the image before saving. ThumbsPlus will use a 256-color optimized palette and Stucki dithering.
7246	<filename> is a multi-page file containing <number> images; saving with the same name will save only the current image -- other images will be lost. Do you want to select a new name to save the image?	Although it can read them, ThumbsPlus does not currently save multi-page files. If you select File | Save while viewing such a file, this dialog box gives you the opportunity to select a different name so the other pages (images) are not lost. You can also use the Edit | Split Pages menu selection to split a TIFF or DCX file into separate files for each page. Note: This message is currently only active for .TIF files; DCX files automatically cause the Save As dialog to be generated, since ThumbsPlus cannot save in the DCX format.
7247	Do you want to discard changes to set <batchset_name>?	When entering information for a batch process, if you pick a set name from the list without first saving your changes you will be prompted by ThumbsPlus to discard the changes before loading the selected batch process settings.   Select Yes to discard or No to continue with the current settings.
7248	You have attempted to assign user fields without first creating the user fields in the ThumbsPlus database (File | Database | User Fields...). Do you want to create the user fields now, and then continue with the user fields assignment?	If you attempt to assign user field values in a database that does not yet have configured user fields, ThumbsPlus will prompt you to configure the user fields before continuing. Select Yes to create the user fields and continue with the assignment or No to cancel the user field assignment operation. See File | Database | User Fields... for information on creating user fields.
7250	Really Exit ThumbsPlus?	This question verifies that you want to exit ThumbsPlus. It is only active if the option "Closing ThumbsPlus" is enabled under the Options | Preferences - Confirmations dialog tab.


Database Not Found

This dialog box is displayed when ThumbsPlus fails to open a database.

The referenced database file may have been deleted or moved or the drive may no longer be available.

Create a new database.  Select this option to have ThumbsPlus create a new empty database.  You will be prompted for the drive and folder path on which the database will be created.

Open an existing database.  Select this option to open another database.  You will be prompted with a file open dialog which will allow you to browse your system for the desired database file.

Connect to an ODBC data source.  Select this option to connect to a preconfigured ODBC data source.  See File | Database | Connect... for more information on connecting to an ODBC data source.

Exit ThumbsPlus.  Select this option to simply exit without trying to open another database.


View Image. Select this option to make ThumbsPlus open the image in a view window when its thumbnail is double-clicked.


Edit Image. Select this option to make ThumbsPlus call the associated application to open the file when its thumbnail is double-clicked.


Copy to Clipboard. Select this option to make ThumbsPlus copy the file to the Windows clipboard when its thumbnail is double-clicked.


When viewing. Select this option to have ThumbsPlus minimize its main window (for less screen clutter) when opening an image in the view window.


On copy to clipboard. Select this option to have ThumbsPlus minimize its main window (for less screen clutter) when copying an image to the Windows clipboard.


When editing an image. Select this option to have ThumbsPlus minimize its main window (for less screen clutter) when calling an associated application to edit the file.


Current folder. Select this option to use the current path (in the ThumbsPlus folder tree) as the default output location for any "Save as" operation from a view window.


Last saved location. Select this option to remember each time you save a file, and use that location as the default output location for subsequent "Save as" operations from a view window.


Allow folder operations (rename, delete, copy, move). Allow file and folder operations from within ThumbsPlus.  The allowed operations include: rename, delete, copy and move.


Use Windows recycle bin settings for deleted files. Causes ThumbsPlus to use the Windows settings for deleting files (or moving them to the recycle bin).  If checked (and the recycle bin is enabled in Windows), ThumbsPlus will move files to the Recycle Bin, rather than directly deleting them from the disk. This option is available only on Windows 95/98/2000 and NT 4.0 or higher.


Automatically crop on copy to clipboard. Automatically crop (remove all continuous border of the same color) images when copying them to the Windows clipboard.  This cropping does NOT alter the original image file, only the resulting clipboard image.


Use wizard dialogs. Causes ThumbsPlus to display "Wizard Style" dialogs for most multi-step functions (eg. Webpage Wizard, Batch Process, etc.).  If unchecked, ThumbsPlus will display a multi-tabbed dialog boxes instead.


Show database activity indicators on status line. This option causes ThumbsPlus to display 'LED' indicators on the main status line.  The first indicator blinks 'YELLOW' to signal a SQL command execution is occuring.  The second indicator blinks 'GREEN' when data is being fetched from the database.


Show exact file sizes.  Selecting this option will display the actual file size, rather than a rounded file size based on a scale of Kb, Mb, and Gb.  This affects file size display on the thumbnail view, printed catalogs, contact sheets and generated web pages.


Formatted numbers.  Check this option to format file sizes with commas.  This option is disabled if Show exact file sizes is unchecked.


Enable shell extension context menus. Enables ThumbsPlus menu items (for making and removing thumbnails, viewing files, etc.) on Windows Explorer's file and folder context menus.


Enable shell folder operation monitoring. Enables folder monitoring while ThumbsPlus is not running. If you rename, move or delete folders under Windows Explorer while ThumbsPlus is not running and this option is checked, the ThumbsPlus folder monitor will log the changes and the next time ThumbsPlus is started it will apply the changes to the open database.


Immediate mode. This option modifies that way the folder monitor communicates with ThumbsPlus.  When a folder change is detected and this option is enabled it will start ThumbsPlus (if not already running) and send the folder change information to ThumbsPlus via a DDE command. This option is disabled when Enable shell folder operation monitoring is unchecked.


Last opened folder. Select this option to show the last opened folder when starting ThumbsPlus.


Specific folder. Select this option to always show a specific folder when starting ThumbsPlus.


Specific folder name. Use this field to enter the specific startup folder name. You may also use the [...] button to browse for the desired folder.


Last opened database.  Select this option to open the last opened database when starting ThumbsPlus.


Specific database. Select this option to always open a specific database when starting ThumbsPlus.


Specific database name. Use this field to enter a specific database to open at startup. You may also use the [...] button to browse for the desired database file.


Remember window size and position. Select this option to show the main ThumbsPlus window in the same place and size every time.


Remember folder free size and position. Select this option to show the ThumbsPlus folder tree window in the same place and size every time.


[...]. Use this button to browse for the desired startup folder.


[...]. Use this button to browse for the desired startup database file.


Width. Enter the desired width for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.


Height. Enter the desired height for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.


Color Depth. Pick the desired color depth for image thumbnails stored in the ThumbsPlus database.  ThumbsPlus supports the following thumbnail color depths:
Grayscale (32 level)	Back and white thumbnails
with 32 different grayscale
levels.
236 color palette	236 color thumbnails based
on the ThumbsPlus color
palette.
Highcolor (15-bit)	32768 color (Blue, Green,
Red) thumbnails with 5 bits
per color sample. The 16th

bit is unused.
Truecolor (24-bit)	16 million color (Blue, Green,

Red) thumbnails with 8 bits

per color sample.


Compressed pixel data. Check this option to compress the thumbnail data before being stored in the database.


Autocrop edges. Automatically crop (remove all continuous border of the same color) images when creating thumbnails.  This cropping does NOT alter the original image file, only the resulting thumbnail.


Check for Digimarc® watermarks. Detect and mark images containing embedded Digimarc® watermarks when creating thumbnails.  Thumbnails for detected images will display a red copyright symbol in the upper right corner of the thumbnail.


Never. Check this option to ignore image comments when making thumbnails (existing thumbnails' annotations will remain untouched).


For new thumbnails only. Check this option to make database annotations from image comments for new thumbnails only (existing thumbnails' annotations will remain untouched).


Always. Check this option to take file comments (if present) and store them in the database as annotations every time you make thumbnails.  This will replace any existing database annotations.


Show orphaned thumbnails. Show orphaned thumbnails in the thumbnail view. This option tends to slow down the thumbnail view display as ThumbsPlus scans the database for any entries which do not have corresponding files on disk.


Show decorations. Display thumbnail decorations on the corners of thumbnails.


Automatically remove orphans. Remove any orphaned thumbnails each time a new folder (see folder tree) is displayed.  This removes orphaned thumbnails from the currently displayed folder ONLY.  You may also remove orphans manually using the Orphans option on the Remove  sub-menu on the Thumbnail menu.


Show font names. When this is selected, ThumbsPlus will scan TrueType font files and load the font names. It will display these instead of the file names. Additionally, the font names will be green if the font is installed.


Make thumbnails automatically. Scan for thumbnails each time a new folder is displayed.


Contribution of thumbnail color in similarity testing. Use this field to tell ThumbsPlus how much (in percent) you want color to contribute to image similarity matching functions (sort by similarity, find duplicates).


File types to show in thumbnail view. This list shows all configured file types (by category)  that can be shown in ThumbsPlus. The check box be side the type indicates whether or not the type will be shown in the thumbnail view. You can quickly check all types within a particular category by checking the box beside the category name.  If the category's checkbox is checked and has a gray background, only some of its file types have been selected for display.


Match network volumes using share names. When ThumbsPlus searches for a match between network volumes stored in the database and those accessible from the system, it can use two methods for determining whether volumes match:

•	Volume labels. 	In this case, if the volume label in the database matches the drive, ThumbsPlus assumes a match. This is the default.

•	Network share name. 	In this case, the labels must still match, but the share name is checked also. This prevents problems that occur when multiple shared volumes are mounted with the same volume label (for example, when two different folders are shared separately from the same drive).


Ignore CD-ROM serial numbers. If the volume types match between a physical CD-ROM and a volume stored in the database and the serial numbers do NOT match, then the volumes are considered by ThumbsPlus to be different   Check this option to disregard serial numbers for CD-ROM matching and force the match.


Check for network CD-ROM drives.  Select this option to have ThumbsPlus treat any scanned network CD-ROM drives as CD-ROM drives instead of network drives.


Do not show Network Neighborhood. Check this option to disable network support in ThumbsPlus.  The Network Neighborhood folder tree group will not be displayed.


Exclude these drive letters.  Enter a list of drive letters that you would like ThumbsPlus to ignore.  These drives will not be displayed in the folder tree. Eg. "AEF" would exclude drives A, E, and F.


Marked as "Hidden". Check this option to show hidden folders.


Marked as "System". Check this option to show system folders.


Marked as both "Hidden" and "System". Check this option to show folder marked as both hidden and system.


Indicate expandable. Checking this menu item causes ThumbsPlus to only display a '+' beside folder entries which contain sub-folders and may be expanded, or '-' in folder entries which are already expanded.  Otherwise, '+' is displayed for all folder entries, until the are actually opened.  Then the '+' is updated to reflect the true existence of sub-folders.


Indicate thumbnails. Checking this option causes ThumbsPlus to use differently colored folders to indicate "interesting" folders. Folders which contain thumbnails are colored green; folders which do not themselves have thumbnails, but whose sub-folders do, are colored blue. This option is useful only after drive(s) have been scanned for images.


ZIP files as folders. This option, available only in the registered release, causes ThumbsPlus to treat ZIP (PKZIP-compatible) files as folders (folders). You can thumbnail, view, print, catalog and process files within ZIP files just as if they were in normal folders.


Just thumb folders. Select this option to only show folders which contain files that have been thumbnailed. This is only useful once graphics files have been located (usually by Scan Drive).


Thumbnail. Check this option to display the thumbnail on the selected thumbnail display.


Name. Check this option to display the filename on the selected thumbnail display.


Path. Check this option to display the folder path on the selected thumbnail display.


File Size. Check this option to display the file size on the selected thumbnail display.


Date/Time. Check this option to display the file date and time on the selected thumbnail display.


Dimensions. Check this option to display the image dimensions (width x height x depth) on the selected thumbnail display.


Resolution. Check this option to display the image resolution (DPI) on the selected thumbnail display.


Annotation. Check this option to display the thumbnail annotation on the selected thumbnail display.


Keywords. Check this option to display the thumbnail keywords on the selected thumbnail display.


PRF_FLS_SHOW_HIDDEN
Include hidden files. Causes ThumbsPlus to display system and hidden files in addition to normal files.


Always show child folders. This option turns "Child folder" viewing on for ALL folders and drives -- too slow for general use, but added by request.  To display the current folder only with files from its child folders, use Options | Which Files | Child Folders, or right-click the folder and pick Child Folders from the context menu.


Font. Use this button to specify a custom font for each of the five available thumbnail views.


PRF_FLS_SHOW_GRID
Show grid. Select this option to display a grid around the thumbnail area in the thumbnail view.


Size %. You can also enlarge or reduce the thumbnails on the fly.  This is especially useful for very high resolution displays (1240x1024 and higher), or if you want to see a lot of thumbnails simultaneously. The stretching operation makes the thumbnail view display slightly slower.  The size percentage ranges from 10% to 400%. The font selection and thumbnail size percentage selections may also be made from the thumbnail view caption bar.


Layout. Select the desired layout for the thumbnail view.  Available layouts are either Vertical or Horizontal.


PRF_FLS_SHOW_STRETCH
Expanded. Select this option to enlarge (when displaying) thumbnails that are smaller than the currently stored thumbnail dimensions.


PRF_FLS_SHOW_3DFRAME
3D thumbnail frame.  Select this option to display a three dimensional border around the edges of thumbnails.


PRF_FLS_SHOW_IMAGETIPS
Enable image tips.  Select this option to enable the display of popup image tips in the thumbnail view.


Thumbnail display. Use this dropdown list to select one of the five available thumbnail views to configure. The available views are: Small, Large, Custom, List and Report.


Deleting files. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before deleting files.


Copying files. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before copying files.


Moving files. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before moving files.


Deleting galleries. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation when deleting a gallery.


Overwriting existing files. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before overwriting files from File | Save As.


Deleting system or hidden files. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation before deleting files marked as "system" or "hidden".


Prompt to save when closing modified images. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus prompt you when closing a view window with a modified image.


Closing ThumbsPlus. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus prompt you to confirm program shutdown.


Confirm when removing thumbnails from the database. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt for confirmation when a remove thumbnail operation is about to be processed.


Print Catalog Schemes. Use this field to specify the folder that will contain saved Print Catalog Schemes.


Contact Sheet Schemes. Use this field to specify the folder that will contain saved Contact Sheet Schemes.


Web Wizard Scheme & Styles. Use this field to specify the folder that will contain saved Web Page Wizard Schemes & Styles.


Batch Processing Sets. Use this field to specify the folder that will contain saved batch Processing Sets.


[...]. Use this button to browse for the desired folder that will contain saved Print Catalog Schemes.


[...]. Use this button to browse for the desired folder that will contain saved Contact Sheet Schemes.


[...]. Use this button to browse for the desired folder that will contain saved Web Page Wizard Schemes & Styles.


[...]. Use this button to browse for the desired folder that will contain saved Batch Processing Sets.


Complete file name. Assigns a keyword based on the file name of each image.


File type. Assigns a keyword based on the file type of each file (i.e., .JPG).


Words in file name (ignore numbers). Assigns a keyword based on each word in the file name (ignoring any embedded numeric characters) of each image.


Words in file name. Assigns a keyword based on each word in the file name of each image.


Folder names in path. Assigns a keyword based on each folder name in the path name of each image.


Attributes (color, etc.). Assigns a keyword for color and encoding attributes of the file; for example: raster, vector, palette, RGB, grayscale.


IPTC keywords. JPEG and TIFF images can have IPTC/NAA keywords already in them. Selecting this option will cause those keywords to be automatically copied to the ThumbsPlus database.


Image Comment. Assigns keywords based on each word in the comments residing in each image (for GIF, JPEG and TIFF file types).


Create drop-down lists for keywords. You can elect whether or not ThumbsPlus generates drop-down lists of available keywords when finding or assigning keywords. It's especially useful to turn this option off if you have thousands of keywords -- this speeds up both the assigning and lookup operations.


Maximum image bitmap cache size. For images that require less than this much memory to load, ThumbsPlus maintains an image bitmap to speed up repainting when the image must be displayed. This size is based on the in-memory size of the image, not the disk size of the image file.


Bitmap window size for larger images. For images larger than the maximum bitmap cache size, ThumbsPlus uses a bitmap "window" to display the image a piece at a time. This parameter selects the size, in Kbytes, of that window.


Maximum memory for scale-to-gray and view resampling. If either "Scale bi-level images to gray" or "Resample images when reduced" is checked under Options | Viewing | Appearance, this setting is used to determine how much memory is allocated for the resample or scale-to-gray buffer.


Maximum local database buffer cache. For local (MS Access) databases, this number will affect how much physical RAM is used by the Access database engine (Jet). Setting it to low can starve the database engine and cause poor database retrieval speed.  Setting it to high can cause overall system performance to degrade as well.  The default setting for this option is zero.  This disables the buffer size override and allows the Access database engine to calculate and set its own buffer size based on the amount of physical RAM installed on the system.


Thumbnail cache count. ThumbsPlus maintains a cache of thumbnails in memory. This field specifies the maximum number of thumbnails to cache. If you specify a larger count, the thumbnail view will display more quickly. The approximate amount of memory needed to cache a given number of thumbnails is shown beside the count.
Setting this field to 1 works around problems with some display adapters and drivers.


Yield frequency. The frequency (in milliseconds) that ThumbsPlus will yield to other desktop applications.


Watch folders frequency. If "Watch changes in folder" is checked under Options | Preferences | Thumbnail View, this setting will control the frequency (in milliseconds) that ThumbsPlus checks watched folders for any file changes.


Using actual size. Some applications do not handle proportional metafiles from the clipboard well. If you find metafiles pasted into other applications upside down or at really unusual sizes, select this option.


Proportionally. This option works for most applications. If metafiles are pasted very large when actual size is set, try proportional instead.


Use Multithreaded Mode. Select this option to allow ThumbsPlus to run certain functions as background tasks instead of running them in the foreground.  Background tasks do NOT display a modal progress dialog box and therefore do not stop you from continuing to use other ThumbsPlus functions.


Show library warnings when loading files. Check this box to receive more detailed warning when ThumbsPlus encounters unusual files. The types for which this "warning" feature works are: TIFF, JPEG, CGM, PICT and WPG.


Autocrop tolerance.  Enter a value between 0 and 250 for RGB color range matching while autocropping


Thumbnail cache memory. The approximate amount of memory needed to cache the specified number of thumbnails.


Font Description. The full description of the currently selected font for this thumbnail view.


24-bit (Truecolor). Select this option to tell the JPEG library to load JPEG files as 24-bit Truecolor images. JPEG files are always stored as 24-bit (truecolor) images.


8-bit color. Select this option to tell the JPEG library to load JPEG files as 8-bit palette based images. JPEG files are always stored as 24-bit (truecolor) images, but the library can automatically dither them to 8-bits for displaying on 256-color devices. This dithering will interfere with editing, however: if you want to edit JPEG files on an 8-bit display, it is best to load them as 24-bit Truecolor even though they don't look as nice.


Grayscale. Select this option for quick viewing on 8-bit displays.


Number or colors/levels.  Enter the number of colors or grayscale levels for 8-bit color or grayscale loading color depths.


Two-Pass Quantization. This option applies only if loading as 8-bit color; deselecting it will speed the load and conversion to 8-bit, at a sacrifice in appearance.


Dither. This option applies only if loading as 8-bit color; deselecting it will speed the load and conversion to 8-bit, at a sacrifice in appearance. The JPEG load dithering is similar to the Floyd-Steinberg dithering available as an option in the Color Depth dialog box.


Full. Select this option to load JPEG files at their actual stored dimensions.


1/2. Select this load size option to load JPEG files at 1/2 of their actual dimensions. This speeds up loading considerably, and can allow you to load files that are too large for your system's memory configuration.


1/4. Select this load size option to load JPEG files at 1/4 of their actual dimensions. This speeds up loading considerably, and can allow you to load files that are too large for your system's memory configuration.


1/8. Select this load size option to load JPEG files at 1/8 of their actual dimensions. This speeds up loading considerably, and can allow you to load files that are too large for your system's memory configuration.


Window sample text. This text is displayed at the bottom of the font view window to show an example of how the text looks with several characters together.


Thumbnail sample text. This text is used to create the thumbnail for the font. By default, this is blank and the font name alone is used to create the thumbnail.


Include font name. Checking this box causes ThumbsPlus to use both the sample text above and the name of the font for the thumbnail.


Final appearance. This option causes only the final appearance of an animated GIF file to be displayed; intermediate frames are played in memory, but only the final resultant image shows in the view window.


Images only. This option causes all graphic images from the GIF file to be loaded as pages. See Edit | Next Page., Edit | Previous Page.


Play to window. This option causes animated GIF files to play in the view window so you can see the changes as they would appear in Netscape or any other browser.


Final appearance. This option causes the thumbnail to be generated from the appearance of the GIF file after all frames have played.


First image only. This option causes only the first image to be used to generate the thumbnail.


Disable input waits. GIF files can have blocks which specify that the animation should wait for user input. This option disables those waits.


Disable timed delays. GIF files can have specific timed delays between image or text displays. This option will ignore such delays and play frames as fast as possible.


Ignore text blocks. This option causes ThumbsPlus to ignore any displayable text blocks in the GIF file.


Defer erasures. This option disables erasing the GIF background when playing.


Disable looping. This option causes the GIF file to play once through the animation and stop.


Start on open. Select this option to cause ThumbsPlus to start playing the movie or sound file immediately after opening.


Auto repeat. When checked, ThumbsPlus will repeat the movie or sound file indefinitely.


Disable audio. Select this option to mute the movie audio on playback.


Initial size. Use this dropdown list to select the initial size of the movie window.  The available sizes are 50%, 100%, 200%, 400% and Full Screen.


Time display. Use this dropdown list to select the desired units of playback progress indication.  The available units are Time and Seconds.  Time will display in the format HH:MM:SS.  Seconds will merely display the total number of seconds elapsed.  A new unit of playback, Frames, is planned for a future release.


First frame. Select this option to cause ThumbsPlus to make the thumbnail from the first frame of the movie.


First non-blank frame. Select this option to cause ThumbsPlus to make the thumbnail from the first non-blank frame of the movie.


Percentage of movie. Select this option and enter a percentage from 1 to 100 to make ThumbsPlus advance to the desired percentage of the movie before making the thumbnail.


Last frame. Select this option to cause ThumbsPlus to make the thumbnail from the last frame of the movie.


Last non-blank frame. Select this option to cause ThumbsPlus to make the thumbnail from the last non-blank frame of the movie.


Ignore Shadows. If this box is checked, ThumbsPlus will not render object shadows in WPG files. This may speed processing, and may make files easier to edit in other (non-WP) applications.


Ignore Gradient fills. If this box is checked, ThumbsPlus will not render gradient fills. This will greatly speed processing and reduce the size of resultant metafiles (either copied to the clipboard or saved to disk).


Ignore Text objects. Check this box if you don't want text information in WPG files rendered.


Use TrueType fonts only. Check this box to force ThumbsPlus to select a TrueType font for any text in WPG files. This option is meaningless if Ignore Text Objects is checked.


On demand only. ThumbsPlus will uudecode files only when double-clicked to view. This limits the times that ThumbsPlus processes the files.


When making thumbnails. ThumbsPlus will uudecode when making thumbnails.


Temporary file. ThumbsPlus will uudecode into a temporary file, which will be removed after the thumbnail is made or image viewed.


Original folder. ThumbsPlus will uudecode into the original folder (where the UUE file resides), using the file name specified in the UUE file.


Specific folder. This option will cause ThumbsPlus to uudecode into a specific folder (entered in the field below), using the file name specified in the UUE file.


[...]. Use this button to browse and select a folder for the uudecode output file.


Delete original file when decode is successful. This option causes ThumbsPlus to remove the .UUE (or .001) and subsequent (.002, etc.) files after successfully decoding the file. Should the decode produce any warnings or errors, the original will not be removed. This option is not available when decoding to temporary files.


Overwrite existing files with the same name. This option will cause ThumbsPlus to automatically overwrite any file of the same name. This option is not available when decoding to temporary files.


Size to load. This section allows you to select the desired size of the loaded image. Note that the horizontal and vertical sizes will be reversed for images stored in portrait orientation.


RGB (24-bit). This option causes the PCD file to be loaded as a 24-bit truecolor image.


Palettized (8-bit). This option causes the PCD file to be loaded as palettized (8-bit) image.


Grayscale. This option causes the PCD file to be loaded as a black and white grayscale image.


Raw file types. This is a list of all defined raw file formats. You may select an item from this list, then click Edit to modify it or Delete to remove it. You can click New to add a new raw format.


New. Click this button to define a new RAW format.


Edit. You may select a defined RAW format from this list, then click this button to modify it.


Delete. You may select an defined RAW format from this list, then click this button to remove it.


Name. Use this field to select a name for the RAW format.


Width. Use this field to enter the width of the image in pixels.


Height. Use this field to enter the height of the image in pixels.


Replicate scan rows. Some raw types (notably some files generated by ocular cameras) store only every other scan line (i.e., the pixel shape is rectangular). This option will cause ThumbsPlus to write each scan line twice, restoring the proper aspect ratio.


Pixel format. Select the style of pixels in the raw image. ThumbsPlus can handle several pixel formats directly:

•	8-bit gray. Each pixel of the image is represented by a single byte which represents the level of gray. Pixel values range from 0 (black) to 255 (white).

•	16-bit gray. Each pixel is represented by two bytes, with the least significant byte first (Intel byte order). Pixel values range from 0 (black) to 65535 (white).

•	16-bit gray (swap). Each pixel is represented by two bytes, with the most significant byte first (Motorola format). Pixel values range from 0 (black) to 65535 (white).

•	24-bit RGB. Each pixel is represented by three bytes: one byte each for red, green and blue, in that order.

•	24-bit BGR. Each pixel is represented by three bytes: one byte each for blue, green and red, in that order.

•	32-bit RGB. Similar to 24-bit RGB, except that each pixel is represented by four bytes. The fourth byte is usually an alpha channel, which is ignored by ThumbsPlus.

•	32-bit BGR. Like 24-bit BGR, except that a fourth byte is present (usually an alpha channel) which is ignored by ThumbsPlus.

Note: By default, the alpha channel (ignored by ThumbsPlus) is assumed to be the fourth byte in 32-bit RGB or BGR formats. However, if your files are stored in ARGB or ABGR order, you can set the Bytes to Skip at start to one (1), and the Bytes to Skip at end to minus one (-1). This will cause ThumbsPlus to ignore the first byte in each four-byte pixel, rather than the last.


Signed pixels. If the pixels in the raw file are stored as signed numbers, check this box. You can also decide to ignore negative pixels using the option below.


Auto adjust range. If you select this option, ThumbsPlus will first calculate the entire range of used pixel values, then scale each pixel accordingly (for contrast stretching).


Clip negative pixels. Select this item to ignore negative pixels (set to zero).


Separated planes. For RGB, RGBA, BGR, BGRA inputs, selecting this option indicates that the information is stored in separate planes (i.e., all red pixels, then all green pixels, then all blue pixels for RGB).


At start of file. Some raw formats contain extra data at the beginning or end of the file, or both. Use this field to enter the amount of data to skip at the start of the file.


At end of file. Some raw formats contain extra data at the beginning or end of the file, or both. Use this field to enter the amount of data to skip at the end of the file.


Expected file size. Using the entries in the other fields, ThumbsPlus computes the expected size on disk of the defined type and displays it here. For ThumbsPlus to recognize the file, its size must match this value.


Menu to customize. Use this dropdown list to select which ThumbsPlus menu you wish to customize.  The available menus are:
Main Menu	The main ThumbsPlus menu.
View Menu	The view window menu
File Context	Popup menu (right click on a thumbnail).
Multi-File Context	Popup menu (right click on a thumbnail - multiple selected).
Thumbnail View Context	Popup menu (right click on the thumbnail view caption bar).
Folder Context	Popup menu (right click on a folder in the folder tree).
Volume Context	Popup menu (right click on a volume in the folder tree).


Items. Use this list box to select which menu items to enable or disable. To toggle the enabled state of a selected item, left double click or right single click the item. Enabled items appear with a green indicator, disabled with a red indicator.


Function description. This area displays a brief description of the selected menu item's function.


Enable All. Use this button to enable all menu items for the currently selected menu.


Disable All. Use this button to disable all menu items for the currently selected menu.


Buttons. Shows the buttons available for the toolbar. Drag a button to or from the toolbar to add or remove it.


Large buttons. Selects the larger size of toolbar button (32x32 pixels), versus the small version (20x20 pixels).


Text on buttons. Adds descriptive text (as in Tool Tips) to each button. This makes the buttons quite a bit larger.


Enable tool tips. Enables tool tips, which will describe each button if you leave the cursor over it for about a second.


Truecolor buttons. Uses the truecolor (24-bit) version of the toolbar buttons.


Focus edges only. ThumbsPlus will only draw the button edges for the button with current mouse focus.


Version 3 buttons. Uses "old-style" version 3.x toolbar buttons.


Selected Button Action. This area displays a brief description of the selected button's action.


External Program. Click this button to add an external program to the toolbar. This starts the External Program dialog where you can set up how ThumbsPlus launches the program.
Note: This button only adds programs to the toolbar; to modify an existing button, double-click it.


HCTX_MAINTABS
Main Window - Tasks, Preview & Info Tabs

	The tasks, preview and info tabs show you what tasks are running, a preview of the currently selected thumbnail's image file and file information items, respectively. Click on the tabs to the left to see more information about the particular tabs.


Solid fill color. Select this option to fill the contact sheet background with a solid color.


Solid fill color button. Select a color for filling the background of the contact sheet.


Load from file Select this option to specify a graphics file as the contact sheet background. If the file is smaller than half the dimensions of the contact sheet, it will be tiled. Otherwise, it will be stretched to fill the sheet.


[...] You can use this button to browse for the desired graphics file to use as the contact sheet background.


None. Select this option to have NO border drawn around each contact sheet thumbnail.


Print thumbnail borders.  Check this option to print a border around the thumbnails.


Sunken. Select this option to have a sunken (3D) border drawn around each contact sheet thumbnail.


Line color. Select the color for the borders (simple style only).


Interior fill color button. Select a color for filling the interior of the thumbnail boxes on the contact sheet.


Don't fill. Select this option to place the border around the thumbnail itself, rather than around the area reserved for it.


Output folder. Select the destination folder for the contact sheets. Use the [...] button to browse for the desired folder.


[...]. Use this button to browse for the desired output folder.


File name or prefix. When a single sheet is selected, this field is used as the complete file name. When multiple sheets are created, this field is used as the file prefix, and a sequence number (001, 002, etc.) is appended.


Output dimensions. Select a size (in pixels) for the contact sheets. Several standard choices are provided.


Custom. Select this option to specify a custom size (width & height) for the contact sheet.


Width. Use this field to enter the custom width of the contact sheet.


Height. Use this field to enter the custom height of the contact sheet.


Output file type. Select the output file format for the contact sheet files


Make a single sheet. This option will cause ThumbsPlus to create a single contact sheet.


Overwrite existing file(s). If this option is selected and the file already exists, it will be overwritten.


Header (page title). Use this field to enter the desired text that will appear on the top of each page or sheet.  This field may contain multiple lines and may consist of free-form text combined with the following special tokens:

\p	Page number.

\d	Date

\t	Time

\f	Current Folder

\jl	Left justify text

\jc	Center justiy text

\jr	Right justify text

\b	Current database name


Footer. Use this field to enter the desired text that will appear on the bottom of each page or sheet.  This field may contain multiple lines and may consist of free-form text combined with the following special tokens:

\p	Page number.

\d	Date

\t	Time

\f	Current Folder

\jl	Left justify text

\jc	Center justiy text

\jr	Right justify text

\b	Current database name


Bottom. Use this field to enter the value (in units) for the bottom margin.


Pixels. Select this option to set the measurement unit to pixels.


Inches. Select this option to set the measurement unit to inches.


Centimeters. Select this option to set the measurement unit to centimeters.


Width. Enter the desired width for each thumbnail that will appear on the page or sheet (based on Units).


Height. Enter the desired height for each thumbnail that will appear on the page or sheet (based on Units).


Columns.  Enter the number of columns of thumbnails to make for each page or sheet.


Line Spacing. Enter the spacing (based on Units) between lines of thumbnails or text.


Under. (Text Position) This option has not yet been implemented.


Beside. (Text Position) This option has not yet been implemented.


Filename. Select this option to include the image filename for each thumbnail.


Path. Select this option to include the full folder path of the image filename.


Extension. Select this option to include the extension of the image filename.


File size. Select this option to include the file size of the image.


File time. Select this option to include the file date and time of the image.


Dimensions. Select this option to include the width and height of the image.


Resolution. Select this option to include the resolution of the image.


Keywords. Select this option to include any keywords assigned to the image thumbnail.


Selected files only. Select this option to process only the currently selected files in the thumbnail view.


Annotations. Select this option to include any annotation text stored in the database for the image thumbnail.


Current folder. Select this option to process the files located in the currently selected folder in the folder tree.


Current tree. Select this option to process the files in the currently selected folder and all of its sub-folders.


Entire database.  Select this option to process all files that have been previously thumbnailed (scanned) with ThumbsPlus.


Offline and orphan thumbnails.  Select this option to include any offline or orphan thumbnails.


Print heading for each folder. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus print a heading for each folder included on the contact sheets. This heading will contain the volume and folder names.


Rebuild thumbnails at printer resolution. Check this option for high-resolution thumbnails, which take longer to generate (the disk files must be read and reduced to the proper size), but are much higher quality.  When this option is checked, Entire Database and Offline and orphan thumbnails options under Files to process will be disabled.


New page for each folder. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus to start a new sheet for each folder or sub-folder.


Automatically crop images. Causes ThumbsPlus to automatically crop images before making the thumbnails. This removes excess single-color borders from images.  This option will be disabled when Rebuild thumbnails at printer resolution is not checked.


Header/Footer Font Description. This field displays a description of the name, style, and size of the font selected for the header and footer areas.


Header font. Use this button to select the font to be used for text in the header and footer areas.


1 Color. Use this button to select the color to be used for text in the header and footer areas.


2 Color. Use this button to select the color to be used for text in the folder name area (only applicable if Print heading for each folder was selected on the Options tab).


3 Color. Use this button to select the color to be used for text in the thumbnail caption text area (only applicable if one of the options under Include with thumbnails was selected on the Options tab).


Folder font. Use this button to select the font to be used for text in the folder name area (only applicable if Print heading for each folder was selected on the Options tab).


Caption font. Use this button to select the font to be used for text in the thumbnail caption area (only applicable if one of the options under Include with thumbnails was selected on the Options tab).


Folder Font Description. This field displays a description of the name, style, and size of the font selected for the folder name area (only applicable if Print heading for each folder was selected on the Options tab).


Caption Font Description. This field displays a description of the name, style, and size of the font selected for the thumbnail caption text area (only applicable if one of the options under Include with thumbnails was selected on the Options tab).


Maximum file size to load for preview. This setting controls which images will be loaded for display in the preview window when a thumbnail is selected.  Images with file size larger than the specified number of kilobytes will not be loaded for preview.


Background threads at normal priority. This option causes ThumbsPlus to execute background threads (tasks) at normal system priority.  By default, background threads in ThumbsPlus are started at below normal priority so as not to steal CPU time from other applications.


Program to run. Use this field to enter the complete folder path to the external program you wish to call.


[...] Click this button to browse for the desired program filename. You may locate either the program itself or a Windows shortcut to it.


Toolbar & tooltip text. Use this field to enter the text to be shown as the toolbar button text and tooltip text for the application.


Icon Select the icon from the list to be shown as the toolbar button for the application


Accepts multiple files. Check this option if the program is capable of opening multiple files simultaneously.  If the Use DDE command option is also checked, then ThumbsPlus will send a separate DDE command for each selected file; otherwise, the selected filenames will be passed to the application on the command line, each enclosed in double-quotes, separated by spaces.


Use short filenames. Check this option if the program is a 16-bit program (from Windows 3.1 days), or for some other reason does not accept quoted long file names as parameters.


Use DDE Command. Check this option if the program responds to DDE commands for opening files. In this case, you'll also need to fill in the DDE fields to show information for how ThumbsPlus should conduct a DDE conversation with the application.


DDE Options. Use this field to enter any required command line options for starting the program in DDE mode.


DDE Service. Use this field to specify the application's DDE service name.  This will usually be some derivative of the application name, but may vary.  Refer to the external application's user documentation for the proper value.


DDE Topic. Use this field to enter the topic for the DDE conversation (which is almost always System).  Refer to the application's user documentation for the correct topic value.


DDE Command, Use this field to enter the command that ThumbsPlus should send to the application for each file. Use the string '%s' to represent where ThumbsPlus should place the file name.


Select scheme.  Select a previously saved Web Page Wizard scheme.


Web page style.  The style (template) to use to generate the web pages.


Page name prefix.  Enter the HTML file name prefix you want to use. ThumbsPlus will automatically append the page number to this. Eg. If you specify "Page" here, ThumbsPlus will generate "Page0001.html," "Page0002.html," etc.


Thumbnail table only.  ThumbsPlus will not use a template, and will build HTML files that contain only the tables. Such files are intended for inclusion in other pages, and are not designed to be published (they don't include HTML header information or tags).


Columns.  Number of columns in the thumbnail tables.


Rows.  The number of rows in the thumbnail table. If more files are specified than fit in the table (rows x columns), ThumbsPlus will generate multiple pages.


Border.  The width and height of the table border. To disable table borders, set this field to zero.


Color.  Check this option and click the color.button to pick a color for the thumbnail table.


Spacing.  Enter the amount (in pixels) for spacing around the outside of the thumbnail border.


Padding.  Enter the amount (in pixels) for spacing between the inside of the thumbnail border and the thumbnail itself.


Centered.  Check this option to center thumbnail cell text. If unchecked, the cell text will be left justified.


Thumbnail Width.  The width, in pixels, of each thumbnail. Larger thumbnails require more disk space for you and more download time for users. The default is 96 pixels, which is the same as the default ThumbsPlus thumbnail size.


Thumbnail Height.  The height, in pixels, of each thumbnail. Larger thumbnails require more disk space for you and more download time for users. The default is 72 pixels, which is the same as the default ThumbsPlus thumbnail size.


GIF/Jpeg.  Select the format for the thumbnails. Generally, JPEG works best for photographic images, and GIF for line-drawn. You may wish to experiment with your particular graphics.


Jpeg Quality.  The quality level for JPEG thumbnails. This option is available only if you select JPEG thumbnails. Because thumbnails are small, you can usually get away with a fairly low quality of 60 or so.


GIF Netscape palette.  Select this option to use the default Netscape palette for GIF thumbnails.


Include Low-res (Netscape).  When you select JPEG thumbnails, ThumbsPlus can also generate low-resolution black and white GIF images. Some browsers will load these first, giving the overall appearance of the page, then load the full-resolution JPEG images.


Use originals if smaller than thumbnail size.  When the original file is smaller than the thumbnail size (above), ThumbsPlus will use the original rather than make a separate file for the thumbnail.  However, if you choose 'Custom URLs/Folders' below, ThumbsPlus will still make a copy of the file in the thumbnail folder.


All files in the current folder.  Select this option to generate thumbnails for all files in the current folder. The files will be ordered just as in the current thumbnail list.


Selected files only.  Select this option to generate thumbnails only for the selected files. If no files are selected, this option will be disabled.


Copy files to destination folder.  Check this box if you want ThumbsPlus to automatically copy the original graphic files to the destination folder.


Lower case file names.  Forces the file names to lower case.


Netscape compatible names.  Removes spaces and special characters from the file names.


File name.  Select to show the original file name beneath each thumbnail.


With extension.  Includes the file extension (only used when File name is enabled).


File size.  Select to show the original file size (in bytes, Kb or Mb) beneath each thumbnail. This can be useful to give users an idea how long it will take to view the original.


Image dimensions.  Select to show the width and height of the original image beneath each thumbnail.


File date.  Select to show the original file's date and time beneath each thumbnail.


Keywords.  Shows the keywords associated with each file in the ThumbsPlus database.


Annotation.  Shows the thumbnail annotation (from the database) for each file.


Extension for HTML files.  Enter the desired extension for all HTML files that will be generated.  Eg. .htm, .html, etc.


Browser target window name.  Enter the HTML target name that identifies which browser window (or frame) that the linked image will be opened in.  If left blank, the image will open in the same browser window.  Please refer to your HTML documentation for reserved HTML target names.


Thumbnail.  Check this option to have HTML HREF links made for the area (on the page) occupied by the thumbnails. When a thumbnail is clicked the browser will follow the link to the actual image file.


File name.  Check this option to have HTML HREF links made for the area (on the page) occupied by the filename. When a filename is clicked the browser will follow the link to the actual image file.


All Text.  Check this option to have HTML HREF links made for any text areas (on the page) in the thumbnail cell. When part of this text is clicked the browser will follow the link to the actual image file.


Equalize cell widths.  Check this option to have all thumbnail cells display at the same width, regardless of the actual thumbnail widths.


Text on right.  Check this option to have thumbnail text appear on the right of each thumbnail. If unchecked, the text will appear below each thumbail.


No alternate text.  If checked, this will prevent the 'ALT=' parameters from being generated for each thumbnail HREF link.  If unchecked, the alt text will be generated from the image filename.  When the mouse is position over a thumbnail the alt text will be displayed under the mouse cursor.


Format annotations.  When checked, HTML breaks '<br>' will be inserted for any carriage-return linefeeds found in the annotation text.  Without this option checked, the text will wrap with carriage-return linefeed pairs being ignored.


Heading.  Use this field to enter the title of the web pages.  You may include HTML tags for formatting.


Comment.  Enter any additional text to go on each web page. In the templates supplied with ThumbsPlus, this information goes between the heading and the thumbnail table.  You may include HTML tags for formatting.


Home Page URL.  Enter a "Return to" URL. Each page contains a "previous page", "next page" and "home" link; this URL will be used for the "home" link.


Same URL/Folder for Everything.  Select this option to place all files (HTML, supporting graphics, original images, and thumbnail images) in the same folder on your system. This is definitely the simpler option, and especially recommended for new users.


Custom URLs/Folders.  For advanced users, this option provides the opportunity to place the HTML pages, original images, and thumbnail images in different folders (and URLs).


Base Disk Folder for HTML / Output Folder.  Enter or browse for the folder in which you want ThumbsPlus to place the generated HTML pages.  If you have chosen Same URL/Folder for everything, then the generated thumbnail files and image files will be placed in this folder as well.


[...].  Use this button to browse for the output folder to be used for generated HTML files.


Image Folder.  Enter or browse [...] for the folder in which you want ThumbsPlus to place the images. The image files are only copied here if you selected Copy files to destination folder on the Input Files dialog tab.


Thumb Folder.  Enter or browse [...] for the folder in which you want ThumbsPlus to place the thumbnails.


Image URL.  Enter the URL (relative or absolute) that corresponds to the Images folder. Assuming that your HTML pages are in c:\myweb\catalog and your images are in c:\myweb\catalog\images, the proper URL would generally be 'images/'.


Thumbnail URL.  As for the Images URL above, enter the URL (relative or absolute) that corresponds to the Thumbnails folder.


No prefix.  Use this option to generate thumbnail files without the file name prefix "tn_".


Launch browser when finished.  Select this option for ThumbsPlus to launch the first page when the thumbnails and pages have been created. The local file name will be passed to your current browser, so if you specified custom folders or URLs, they should match appropriately. If you specified absolute URLs, or different URL paths than the physical sub-folder names, you'll need to copy your pages and graphics to your Web server before testing.


Save.  If you wish to save these settings to a Web Page Wizard scheme for repeated use later, then enter the scheme name in the Scheme Name field and click this button.


[...].  Use this button to browse for the output folder.


Main Window - Folder Popup Menu - Open in Explorer

Use this menu selection to open the currently selected folder (in the folder tree) using Windows Explorer.


Main Window - File | Database | Open in MS Access

Use this menu selection to open the current ThumbsPlus database using Microsoft Access.  This option will be disabled if Access is not installed on your computer.


Platform.  This field displays the current operating name.


Version.  The current operating system version information is listed here.


Build.  This field displays the current version compilation number or build number.


CPU.  The CPU model information is displayed here.


No.  This field shows the count of processors installed on the computer's motherboard.


Monitors.  The current count of monitors installed on the computer.  Note: NT 4.0 systems multi-monitor support is implemented differently than that of Windows 98 and Windows 2000.  For this reason, ThumbsPlus may not be able to use individual monitors for display related operations when running under a multi-monitor NT 4.0 setup.


Size.  This field displays the current desktop screen resolution in width x height.


Depth. This field displays the color depth setting for the current desktop.


Physical Total (Kb).  The total amount of physical memory (RAM) installed on the computer.  The amount of RAM available is unrelated to hard disk size.


Physical Free (Kb).  The amount of unallocated physical memory (RAM) that is currently available on the computer.


Physical %.  The percentage of physical memory that is currently available (unallocated).


Page File Total (Kb).  The total amount of page file memory available.  This memory is allocated on the computer's hard disk in a special file called a page file (or swap file) and is controlled by Windows.  Note: Windows uses this page file memory when it does not have enough physical RAM to hold all programs that are currently running.  When a program is allowed execution time in the CPU, Windows makes sure that all of the executable needed by the program is 'swapped' back to physical RAM from the page file.  This will cause other programs to be 'swapped' out to the page file to make the necessary room.


Page File Free (Kb).  The amount of unallocated page file memory that is currently available


Page File %.  The percentage of page file memory that is currently available (unallocated).


Process Total (Kb).  The total amount of memory available to the ThumbsPlus process.


Process Free (Kb).  The amount of unallocated process memory available to ThumbsPlus.


Process %.  The percentage of process memory that is currently available (unallocated) by ThumbsPlus.


Overall Load.  Over all memory load in percentage used.


Generate & E-mail Technical Support Info.  Use this button only when instructed to do so by Cerious Software support.  This will generate a detailed technical support profile log about your ThumbsPlus installation and automatically attach it to a new e-mail by invoking your e-mail application (provided that your e-mail application is a windows MAPI client).


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Web Page Style
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Web Page Style

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Select scheme.  Select a previously saved Web Page Wizard scheme.

Web page style.  The style template to use to generate the web pages.

Page name prefix.  Enter the HTML file name prefix you want to use. ThumbsPlus will automatically append the page number to this. Eg. If you specify "Page" here, ThumbsPlus will generate "Page.html", "Page0002.html", "Page0003.html", etc.

Thumbnail table only.  ThumbsPlus will not use a template, and will build HTML files that contain only the tables. Such files are intended for inclusion in other pages, and are not designed to be published (they don't include HTML header information or tags).


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Table Format
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Table Format

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Table

Columns.  Number of columns in the thumbnail tables.

Rows.  The number of rows in the thumbnail table. If more files are specified than fit in the table (rows x columns), ThumbsPlus will generate multiple pages.

Border.  The width and height of the table border. To disable table borders, set this field to zero.

Color.  Check this option and click then color button.to pick a color for the thumbnail table.

Cells

Spacing.  Enter the amount (in pixels) for spacing around the outside of the thumbnail border.

Padding.  Enter the amount (in pixels) for spacing between the inside of the thumbnail border and the thumbnail itself.

Centered.  Check this option to center thumbnail cell text. If unchecked, the cell text will be left justified.


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Thumbnail Format
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Thumbnail Format

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Thumbnail dimensions

Width. The width, in pixels, of each thumbnail. Larger thumbnails require more disk space for you and more download time for users. The default is 96 pixels, which is the same as the default ThumbsPlus thumbnail size.

Height. The height, in pixels, of each thumbnail. Larger thumbnails require more disk space for you and more download time for users. The default is 72 pixels, which is the same as the default ThumbsPlus thumbnail size.

Format

GIF/JPEG. Select the format for the thumbnails. Generally, JPEG works best for photographic images, and GIF for line-drawn. You may wish to experiment with your particular graphics.

Jpeg Quality. The quality level for JPEG thumbnails. This option is available only if you select JPEG thumbnails. Because thumbnails are small, you can usually get away with a fairly low quality of 60 or so.

Include Low-res GIFs. When you select JPEG thumbnails, ThumbsPlus can also generate low-resolution black and white GIF images. Some browsers will load these first, giving the overall appearance of the page, then load the full-resolution JPEG images.

GIF Netscape palette. This option causes Thumbsplus to save the GIF thumbnails with a netscape compatible palette.  This option is available only if you select GIF thumbnails.

Photo borders. Adds a white border (like the edge of photographs) around the thumbnails.

Use original files if smaller than thumbnail size. When the original file is smaller than the thumbnail size (above), ThumbsPlus will use the original rather than make a separate file for the thumbnail.  However, if you choose 'Custom URLs/Folders' below, ThumbsPlus will still make a copy of the file in the thumbnail folder.


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Input Files
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Input Files

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Selected files only.  Select this option to generate thumbnails only for the selected files. If no files are selected, this option will be disabled.

Current folder.  Select this option to generate thumbnails for all files in the current folder. The files will be ordered just as in the current thumbnail list.

Copy files to destination folder.  Check this box if you want ThumbsPlus to automatically copy the original graphic files to the destination folder.

Lower case file names.  Forces the file names to lower case.

Netscape compatible file names.  Removes spaces and special characters from the file names.

Ensure unique file names.  Check this option to append a unique sequence number to the original file name.  This is done to guarantee that output file names created from gallery or found list files are always unique.

Prefix file names with gallery name or found list name.  Check to add the gallery or found list name to the beginning of each output file name.


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - File Information
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - File Information

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Select Items.  Click this button to select which items to display beneath each thumbnail.  See also: Selecting Items for more information.


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Miscellaneous Options
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Miscellaneous Options

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Extension for HTML files.  Enter the desired extension for all HTML files that will be generated.  Eg. .htm, .html, etc.

Generate Links from

Thumbnail.  Check this option to have HTML HREF links made for the area (on the page) occupied by the thumbnails. When a thumbnail is clicked the browser will follow the link to the actual image file.

Filename.  Check this option to have HTML HREF links made for the area (on the page) occupied by the filename. When a filename is clicked the browser will follow the link to the actual image file.

All Text.  Check this option to have HTML HREF links made for any text areas (on the page) in the thumbnail cell. When part of this text is clicked the browser will follow the link to the actual image file.

Equalize cell widths.  Check this option to have all thumbnail cells display at the same width, regardless of the actual thumbnail widths.

Text on right.  Check this option to have thumbnail text appear on the right of each thumbnail. If unchecked, the text will appear below each thumbail.

No alternate text.  If checked, this will prevent the 'ALT=' parameters from being generated for each thumbnail HREF link.  If unchecked, the alt text will be generated from the image filename.  When the mouse is position over a thumbnail the alt text will be displayed under the mouse cursor.

Format annotations.  When checked, HTML breaks '<br>' will be inserted for any carriage-return linefeeds found in the annotation text.  Without this option checked, the text will wrap with carriage-return linefeed pairs being ignored.

Create database thumbnails for output files.  Check this option to make thumbnails for all generated output image files (including their thumbnail files).


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Web Page Text
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Web Page Text

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Page title. Use this field to enter the title text for the page.  This text is included in the <TITLE> html tag and is displayed on the browser title bar.

Heading. Use this field to enter the title of the web pages.  You may include HTML tags for formatting.

Comment. Use this field to enter any additional text to go on each web page. In the templates supplied with ThumbsPlus, this information goes between the heading and the thumbnail table.

Home Page URL. Use this field to enter a "Return to" URL. Each page contains a "previous page", "next page" and "home" link; this URL will be used for the "home" link.


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - File Locations
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - File Locations

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Same URL/Folder for Everything.  Select this option to place all files (HTML, supporting graphics, original images, and thumbnail images) in the same folder on your system. This is definitely the simpler option, and especially recommended for new users.

Custom URLs/Folders.  For advanced users, this option provides the opportunity to place the HTML pages, original images, and thumbnail images in different folders (and URLs).


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Output Location
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Output Location

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Note: This dialog only displays when Same URL/Folder for everything is selected on the File Locations dialog.

Output Folder.  This is the folder on your system where you want to place  generated HTML files, thumbnails, and image files.


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Custom Locations
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Custom Locations

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Note: This dialog only displays when Custom URLs/Folders is selected on the File Locations dialog.

Base Disk Folder for HTML.  Enter or browse for the folder in which you want ThumbsPlus to place the generated HTML pages.

Images

Folder.  Enter or browse for the folder in which you want ThumbsPlus to place the images. The image files are only copied here if you selected Copy files to destination folder on the Input Files dialog tab.

URL.  Enter the URL (relative or absolute) that corresponds to the Images folder. Assuming that your HTML pages are in c:\myweb\catalog and your images are in c:\myweb\catalog\images, the proper URL would generally be 'images/'.

Thumbnails

Folder.  Enter or browse for the folder in which you want ThumbsPlus to place the thumbnails.

URL.  As for the Images URL above, enter the URL (relative or absolute) that corresponds to the Thumbnails folder.

Do not prefix thumbnail file names with 'tn_'.  ThumbsPlus does not prefix the thumbnail file name with "tn_".
Note: File name prefixing helps to prevent image and thumbnail file name conflicts when both sets of files are stored in the same folder location.


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Ready to Build
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Ready to Build

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Launch browser when finished.  Select this option for ThumbsPlus to launch the first page when the thumbnails and pages have been created. The local file name will be passed to your current browser, so if you specified custom folders or URLs, they should match appropriately. If you specified absolute URLs, or different URL paths than the physical sub-folder names, you'll need to copy your pages and graphics to your Web server before testing.

Scheme Name.  If you wish to save these settings to a scheme for repeated use later, then Enter the scheme name in this field and click the Save button.


Main Window - Tree | Go to | [Favorites List]

Use this menu option to position the folder tree and thumbnail view to the selected favorite folder.  A favorite is simply a commonly used folder path.

See also: Tree | Add to Favorites... and Tree | Edit Favorites....


Extension. Enter the one, two or three character extension (without the period) for the file type to define.


Description. Enter a description of the file type. If the file type is equivalent to another (see below) you can leave the description blank --ThumbsPlus will automatically use the description of the base file type.


Equivalent to type. If the file type is equivalent to a type already known to ThumbsPlus, select that type here. This will disable most of the other entries in the dialog box, since the access to the type is defined through its base type.


Category. Select the category for this file type. This category is used in grouping the types on the Options | Preferences - File Types tab.


Class. Select the type of file. For most purposes, Vector and Raster are appropriate. Several of the types give more information about the type of file and may be useful for categorizing OLE-based files. OLE-based types not classed as Raster are loaded as Vector.


Load file using. Select the method that ThumbsPlus should use to load the file:

Internal	ThumbsPlus should use its internal loading routines to load the file. The file must be recognizable by ThumbsPlus.
Filter	Use a Aldus Rev. 1 filter to load the file. The next field (>>) should be used to select the filter; if the list is blank, use the Hunt for filters button to search for filters on your system.
OLE	ThumbsPlus should attempt to attach to an OLE server for the file type to render it as a metafile or bitmap. Select the appropriate server from the next (>>) field.
None	ThumbsPlus should not attempt to load the file. It can still be shown in the thumbnail view, with an appropriate icon, if Edit Using is set to Association.


Edit file using. Select the method that ThumbsPlus should use to edit the file. Note: Raster images may be edited to some degree from within a ThumbsPlus view window.

Association	Use the Windows file association to launch the program to edit the file. If you don't select a specific item from the next list (>>), ThumbsPlus will use the file extension to attempt to locate an association.
Command	Enter a specific command to edit the file. You can use '%F' in the string as a token to be replaced by the file name.
None	ThumbsPlus should not attempt to launch an editor for this file type.


Print file using. Select a method for printing the file type. If it can be loaded into ThumbsPlus, the Internal method usually works best. Otherwise, you may select Command or Association, as described under Edit File Using.


Associate with ThumbsPlus. Check this option to associate the file type with ThumbsPlus. File types that have been associated with ThumbsPlus will be opened using the view utility tpview.exe when they are double-clicked on in Windows Explorer.


Hunt for filters. Click on this button to search for Aldus Rev. 1 filters on your system (used when Load file using is set to: Filter).


	Folder
A folder or folder is an area (on a formatted disk) within the filesystem which may contain files and other folders.  ThumbsPlus scans folders on disk looking for files that it recognizes.  When it finds and thumbnails a file, the folder that the file exists in will be color coded to indicate the thumbnail's existence.  See Options | Customize | Colors for the current folder color options.


	Network Provider
The network provider branch of the folder tree displays all network groups [image] available under a particular networking protocol.  Examples of network providers are: Microsoft Windows Network, Netware Network, etc.  See Settings | Control Panel | Network under the Windows Start menu to configure client services for network providers.


	Network Group
The network group branch of the folder tree displays all available networked computers [image] in that group.  For Microsoft Windows Networks, see Settings | Control Panel | Network - Identification to change the computer's Workgroup or Domain.  For other network providers, refer to your network client documentation.


	Network Computer
The network computer branch of the folder tree displays all available network shares offered on that computer.  For Microsoft Windows Networks, right click on a folder or disk and click the Sharing menu option to change the folder or disk's share settings.  For other network providers, refer to your network client documentation.


	Local Fixed Drive
A local fixed drive is a physical hard disk installed on your computer.  It contains the filesystem on which your folders [image] and files are stored.  ThumbsPlus scans local drives looking for files that it recognizes.  Once it locates a file, it reads it's image data and stores a representative thumbnail in the ThumbsPlus database.


	Removable Media Drive
A removable media drive is a physical drive installed on your computer that accepts removable media such as 3.5" diskettes, ZIP disks, etc.  ThumbsPlus can scan these drives in much the same way as it scans local fixed drives.


	Offline Local Fixed Drive
An unavailable or offline local fixed drive is a physical hard disk that was installed on your computer, previously scanned by ThumbsPlus and is now inaccessible.  Some reasons for this are hard drive crashes and upgraded drives.

If the drive has been physically removed from your system and its data (folders and files) moved to a new local drive that is available, you can simply drag the unavailable drive icon and drop it on to the new local fixed drive icon.  This will realign the thumbnail information, that was previously stored in the ThumbsPlus database, to point to the new drive.

Note: Care must be taken to insure that the original folder path structure from the unavailable drive has been preserved on the new local drive.


	Network Drive
A network drive is a locally accessible drive that is connected to a folder (called a network share) on a physical hard disk that is installed in another computer on the network.

The network share that the network drive is connected to may or may not be the root folder of the physical drive in the network computer.  For example: NETPC1 shares a folder on its C drive (C:\Data\Images\) as the network share N1_Images.  NETPC2 has a network drive N: connected to \\NETPC1\N1_Images.  On NETPC1, a file may exist as C:\Data\Images\Picture.jpg.  On NETPC2, this same file is accessible as N:\Picture.jpg.


	Offline Network Drive
An unavailable or offline network drive is locally accessible drive that is connected to a folder (called a network share) on a physical hard disk that is installed in another computer on the network.  Some reasons that the drive may not be available are: The network computer hosting the share is no longer connected to the network or is not powered on, the network computer has stopped sharing the folder, or the local computer has lost its network connection.


	ZIP File Folder
A ZIP file folder is simply a ZIP archive file that ThumbsPlus treats as a regular folder.  ThumbsPlus can copy and move files to and from a ZIP file folder, as well as, delete and rename files existing in a ZIP file folder.  One limitation of ThumbsPlus, with regard to ZIP files, is that the files stored in the ZIP must not have folder paths included.  Any files existing in the ZIP archive that include folder paths will be ignored by ThumbsPlus.


Width. Enter the desired width of the bitmap. This defaults to the current window width.


Height. Enter the desired height of the bitmap. This defaults to the current window height.


Maintain original aspect ratio. Select this option to force the bitmap to be the same aspect ratio as the original metafile. This defaults to the setting of the Maintain Aspect Ratio option in the View window.


Anti-Aliasing. Selects the amount of anti-aliasing to perform when rasterizing. Anti-aliasing reduces jaggies and makes the resulting image look more accurate.  You can select from four levels; the lowest provides no anti-aliasing, and the highest provides the best (but also the slowest).


Method.  Select a cropping method, either to (to specify the resulting size) or by (to specify how much to remove).


Amount.  Enter a cropping amount (determined by Units: pixels or % of image).


Units.  Select a unit for the cropping operation (either in pixels or % of image).


Orientation.  Select an orientation for cropping.  This always specifies the direction from which pixels will be removed from the image.  For horizontal cropping, the values are  from left, from right and centered.  For vertical cropping, the values are from top, from bottom, and centered.


Add Border.  Check this option to enable border additions.  Negative values are required in the Amount fields to add borders.


Border fill color.  Use this button to select a color for any added borders.


Crop Preview.  This area displays a preview of the resulting crop operation.


Dots per inch, Dots per centimetre, or Pels per meter. Some page layout and word processing programs use this information to determine how to scale the bitmap when printing and displaying.


Only set if not specified in original.  Use this option in batch processing to tell ThumbsPlus not to set the image resolution if the image already has a specified resolution in the file.


Horizontal. Enter the horizontal resolution value.


Vertical. Enter the vertical resolution value.


Resulting image print size.  The computed physical size when output at the specified DPI is also shown in the dialog box.
Note: Changing this resolution does not affect the quality of the image in any way; it only modifies how some programs display or print the image.


Current size.  The current image size displayed as Width X Height.


Aspect Fit. This selection sets how ThumbsPlus treats an original whose dimensions are of a different ratio than the destination. In other words, it controls the size of the destination file.

Fit Both	The final image fits in the specified rectangle as closely as possible.
Fit Height	The final image must be the same height as the specified height.
Fit Width	The final image will be the same width as the specified width.
Bounding Box	Most useful for rotations: the final image size is calculated as the size necessary to include the entire image after rotation.  This avoids cutting of corners or edges.
None	The aspect ratio of the original is ignored.


New Size. Various options for the new size of the image, include specific percentages and specific sizes. You can also select Window to size the image to the current window size, or Custom to enter specific values.


Interpolation. Use this drop-down list to select the type of interpolation (resampling) which ThumbsPlus will do when resizing or rotating:

Nearest Neighbor (fast)	This is the fastest resize method, but the least pleasing because it performs no pixel interpolation. Usually results in significant "jaggies."
Bi-Linear (good).	Computes weighted average of four pixels, based on computed position from the original source. This is slower but better than Nearest Neighbor, and considerably faster than bi-cubic.
Resample (better).	Use resample to properly interpolate colors when making an image smaller.
Bi-Cubic (better).	Computes cubic convolution of sixteen pixels, based on computed position from the original source. This produces the most accurate results, but is significantly slower than bi-linear interpolation.
Best fit for sizing.	Automatically selects bi-cubic when making an image larger and resample when making it smaller.


Width, Height. When New Size is set to Custom, these values may be entered either as exact pixel measurements, or as percentages of the original.


Rotate angle*. Angle (counter-clockwise) of rotation, in .01-degree increments.


Zoom %. Zooms in or out. This is most useful for controlling what happens to the corners of the image during rotation. Use the arrow keys or mouse to slide the control box left or right to decrease or increase the zoom amount. This option is not available when fitting to the bounding box (see below).


Background color. Sets the background color to be used when rotating or resizing to a size that does not match the original aspect ratio.


Autocrop after resizing.  Select this option to have the image automatically cropped after the rotate/resize operations.  See: View Window Menu, Image | Autocrop.


Current disk.  This selection will remove any orphaned thumbnails (thumbnails made for files that have been deleted or moved by another program) on the currently selected drive.


Current tree.  This selection will remove any orphaned thumbnails in the currently selected folder and it's sub-folders.


Current disk.  This selection will remove any orphaned thumbnails on the local fixed drives.


Brightness. This control changes the overall brightness of an image. Use negative values to darken an image, and positive values to lighten it. Use the arrow keys or the mouse to change the value.


Last.  Restores the last settings used to adjust an image so they can be used on the current image.


Auto view.  Automatically updates the main window when you make changes. This option is not recommended for older (relatively slow) displays.


View. This button repaints the image with the selected changes.


Preview.  This is the preview image with the resulting color adjustments.


Contrast. This control changes the contrast; that is, the difference between the light and dark areas. Positive values increase the difference between them, while negative values decrease the contrast.


Red, Green, Blue. These controls modify the amount of Red, Green and Blue in the image. They work similarly to the Brightness control, but individually on each color channel.


Clear. Sets all controls to zero and clears the adjustments from the preview image.


Original. The original image gamma, based on monitor gamma setting under Options | Viewing Monitor Gamma.


Adjustment.  The amount +/- to adjust the present gamma value.


New.  The new adjust gamma value.


Save adjusted.  This option causes ThumbsPlus to save the adjusted gamma difference to the database as the assumed gamma for this image.


Disable monitor correction.  This option causes ThumbsPlus to skip monitor adjustment before displaying the gamma adjustment.


Hue. This controls the overall hue (color) of the image.


Saturation. This controls the amount of color saturation. Lower saturation makes the image grayer.


Lightness. This is the same as Brightness.


Find Color.  Use this button to select the color that you wish to replace.  You may also click anywhere inside the image window area to select a color under the mouse position.


Hue.  Use the hue range selection control to adjust how much hue variance (both above and below the current color value) will be allowed when matching pixel colors for replacement.  If the hue range selection control's check box is unchecked, the control will be disabled and only the exact hue value will be used for the find color.


Sat.  Use the saturation range control to adjust how much saturation variance (both above and below the current color value) will be allowed when matching pixel colors for replacement.  If the saturation range selection control's checkbox is unchecked, the control will be disabled and only the exact saturation value will be used for the find color.


Lum.  Use the luminance range control to adjust how much luminance (brightness) variance (both above and below the current color value) will be allowed when matching pixel colors for replacement.  If the luminance range selection control's checkbox is unchecked, the control will be disabled and only the exact luminance value will be used for the find color.


Replace Color.  Use this button to select the color that you wish to use as the new replacing color.


Enable replacement range scaling. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus scale the replace color with respect to the hue, saturation and luminance ranges that where selected for the find color.  If this option is unchecked then the exact replace color is used for all colors matching falling within the find color ranges.


Preview Tab
Main Window - Preview Tab

	The preview tab displays a preview image of the currently selected thumbnail's image file.  If the file is not a graphics file or the file is corrupted the "Preview Not Available" message will be displayed in the preview tab.  Also, files larger than the specified "Maximun file size to load for preview" setting (located under Options | Preferences | Advanced) will not be loaded.  In this case the thumbnail itself (if available) will be displayed. If no thumbnail is available for the unloaded image preview, the message "Preview Not Available" will be displayed.


	Preview Tab
The preview tab displays a preview image of the currently selected thumbnail's image file.  If the file is not a graphics file or the file is corrupted the "Preview Not Available" message will be displayed in the preview tab.

Also, files larger than the specified "Maximun file size to load for preview" setting (located under Options | Preferences | Advanced) will not be loaded.  In this case the thumbnail itself (if available) will be displayed. If no thumbnail is available for the unloaded image preview, the message "Preview Not Available" will be displayed.


Clear.  Use this button to set the Rotate & Resize values back to the initial settings.


Preview.  This image displays the currently selected image file's thumbnail.


Histogram Graph. This graph shows the relative number of pixels at each intensity level. If the values are bunched together, the picture lacks contrast; if they are skewed to the left or right, the picture is most likely too dark or too light.


Equalize. Use this button to equalize the histogram.  ThumbsPlus will attempt to modify intensities to come as close to even levels of each as possible.


Stretch. Use this button to perform contrast stretching on the image, ensuring that the entire intensity range is utilized. This does not change the overall shape of the histogram, but instead spreads it between the limits.


Image.  Check this option (and pick an image filename from the associated drop down list) to select another image file as the stamp image.


[...] Use this button to browse for the desired image file to use as the source stamp image.


Text.  Check this option to enter a text string to be used as the stamp image.  The text will be rendered using the selected font and color.


Anti-alias.  Check this option (for text stamps) to anti-alias the edges of the selected text font.  This option is not yet implemented.


Font Description.  This field displays information about the currently selected text font for text stamps.


Font.  Click this button to pick the desired font style and size for the text stamp.


Text Color.  Click this button to select the color for the text stamp's text color.


Backgnd Color.  Select the background color of the stamp image.  This color will be used to fill in areas around text or rotated images to be stamped.


Default Placement.  Check this option to use the default stamp placement options.  They are: position by dragging source, auto size, keep aspect ratio, zero rotation with fit bounding rect.


Placement.  Click this button to display the Placement dialog box.  This Button is disabled when the Default Placement option is checked.


Default Pixel Settings. Check this option to use the default pixel settings for the image stamp.  They are: Combine blended, opacity 100%, do not use transparency.


Pixel Settings.  Click this button to display the Pixel Settings dialog box.  This Button is disabled when the Default Pixel Settings option is checked.


Stamp Combination Method.  Pick the way you would like the image stamp to be combined with the current image. The available options are Transparent, Blended, Exclusive and Solid.


Use Alpha Channel.  Check this option to use the stamp image's alpha channel (if present) for pixel blending.  This option is disabled for stamp images that do not have an alpha channel


Opacity.  Check this option to specify the opacity of the stamp image.  This option is disabled when Use Alpha Channel is checked.


Use Transparency. Check this option to specify a transparent color in the image stamp.  This color will be excluded when combining the image stamps pixels with the current image.


Transparent Color.  Use this button to pick the transparent (excluded) color.


Color Threshold.  Use this edit field to enter the threshold for background color exclusion.  Any RGB values found in the stamp image whose values are within the range of (background color)-(threshold) to (background color)+(threshold) will be excluded when applying the stamp to the current image.


Default.  Reset pixel settings back to default settings.


View.  Click this button to view the stamp as it will look in the image view window.


By Matrix.  Places the stamp image in one of the nine areas (displayed on the left) of the current image.


By Offset.  Places the stamp image at a given offset (specified by % Left and % Top values in percentages of the current image size) from the top left corner of the current image.


By Tiled.  Tiles the stamp image across the current image.  The number of rows and columns depends on Rows and Cols values.


By dragging source image.  This option allows you to drag (and resize) the stamp image with the mouse before the stamp is applied.


Auto Size.  This option will automatically resize the stamp image to fit in the available area of the current image.  The available area depends on the which position setting was used.  If Auto Size is not selected the width and height of the stamp image is specified by % Width and % Height values in percentages of the current image size.


Keep aspect ratio.  Select this option to preserve the stamp image aspect ratio when resizing.


Fit Bounding Rect.  Select this option to fit a rotated stamp image into the bounding rectangle.  This will prevent the corners of the original stamp image from being cropped during rotation.


Justify (Horz).  Select the desired horizontal justification for text stamps.  The available options are: Left, Center, Right.


Justify (Vert).  Select the desired vertical justification for text stamps.  The available options are: Top, Center, Bottom.


Default.  Reset placement settings back to default settings.


Category. Select the type of filter you wish to apply. Some types available are: Sharpen, Blur, Edge Detection, Effects and Noise.


Filter. Select the specific filter from the chosen category. A sample of the results of the filter will be shown in the preview to the right.


Diameter. For statistical and morphological filters, you may select the diameter of the aperture to use for processing. Larger apertures will produce more profound effects.


Apply to. Select the channel(s) to apply the filter to. Intensity applies the effect only to the intensity (brightness) of each pixel -- the hue is maintained. All channels processes all three channels (red, green and blue) separately. And, for some filter types, you may select only a single color (red, green, or blue) channel.


Orientation. For linear filters (those defined by a convolution mask) which are not symmetrical, ThumbsPlus can rotate the mask to several positions. Select the arrow which represents the direction you wish to apply the filter.


Modify. Click this button to modify the currently selected filter.
Note: Only linear filters can be modified within ThumbsPlus. Statistical and multipass filters may not.


New. Click this button to add a new filter.


Original. This preview shows the image file as it looks without the filter application.


Filtered. This preview shows the image file as it will look after the filter application.


Filter Name.  This field displays the name of the filter currently being edited or (new) for a new filter.


Category. Select the category in which this filter belongs or enter a new category name. Categories help to locate specific filters from the many choices.


Order. ThumbsPlus can apply 3x3, 5x5 or 7x7 filters. This selects the size of the filter. If you reduce the size once you've entered values, some will be lost.


Array. Enter the actual pixel accumulation values here. The central value represents the current pixel being processed. Each pixel is multiplied by the corresponding value in the array and added to a total.


Divisor. The sum of pixel x array values is divided by this value. For most filters, this divisor should be the same as the sum of values in the array; the  button will place this sum in the Divisor field.


Use Sum.  Click this button to sum all entries and make this total the divisor.


Bias. This value is added to the result of (Array x pixels) / Divisor. It is used for some effects, such as embossing and etching. It is especially useful when the sum of values in the array is zero.


L. Click to force the array to be left-right symmetrical. All values on the left of the array will be repeated on the right (and if you change a value on the left, it will automatically change on the right). This button is on by default if you edit a filter that is left-right symmetrical.


T. Click to force the array to be top-bottom symmetrical. All values in the top of the array will be repeated automatically on the bottom (and if you change a value on the top, it will automatically change on the bottom). This button is on by default if you edit a filter that is top-bottom symmetrical.


Remove. Click to remove the current filter from the filter list (THUMBS.FLT).


Save As.  Click this button once you are finished editing the new filter as want to save it to a new filter name.


Main Window - Tree | Rename Folder
Main Window - Tree | Rename Folder	Shift+F5

This selection renames the current folder.

Note: You must have enabled Allow folder operations under Options | Preferences | General in order to use this function.


Main Window - Tree | Copy Folder
Main Window - Tree | Copy Folder...	Ctrl+Shift+F5

This selection copies the current folder to another folder path.  You will be prompted for the new folder path under which this folder will be copied.

Note: You must have enabled Allow folder operations under Options | Preferences | General in order to use this function.


Main Window - Tree | Move Folder
Main Window - Tree | Move Folder...	Shift+Alt+F5

This selection copies the current folder to another folder path.  You will be prompted for the new folder path under which this folder will be copied.

Note: You must have enabled Allow folder operations under Options | Preferences | General in order to use this function.


Input Prompt.  This message prompt describes the type of input requested by ThumbsPlus.


Input Field.  Enter the requested input text into this field.  If the field is a drop down list, you may also picked previously entered text from the drop down list by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the input box.


Browse [...].  Use this button to browse for the desired folder path.


Annotation.  Use this edit field to enter the desired annotation text.


Leave unchanged.  Select this option to skip thumbnails that already have an annotation.


Replace.  Select this option to completely replace any existing thumbnail annotations.


Append.  Select this option to append the annotation text to any existing thumbnail annotations.


Current Depth.  This area displays the current image's color depth.
Note: No current depth information will be displayed while in batch processing.


Bi-level. Selects a two-color (black & white) destination image. Each pixel requires a single bit.


Threshold. When you select bi-level as the desired color depth, you may enter a threshold value for the dividing point between black and white. This number must range between 1 and 764. The sum of red, green and blue values for each pixel is compared to this threshold; if below, the destination pixel becomes black; if above, it becomes white. Note that if dithering is selected, this value may not make as much difference, as any error is propagated through neighboring pixels.


Order. When using an ordered dithering pattern for converting to bi-level, this selects the size of the box used. You can specify 1 through 8.


16 Colors. Selects a sixteen-color destination image; each pixel requires 4 bits.


64 Colors. Selects a 64-color destination image; each pixel requires 6 bits.


236 Colors. Selects a 236-color destination image; each pixel requires 8 bits. This selection is useful for 256-color Windows users, as it leaves the 20 colors that Windows requires.


256 Colors. Selects a 256-color destination image; each pixel requires 8 bits.


Truecolor. Selects a 24-bit destination image; each pixel requires 24 bits.


Custom. Select a number between 4 and 256. For color counts between 4 and 16, 4 bits per pixel are required; for a count of greater than 16, 8 bits per pixel are required.


Palette. Unless converting to Truecolor, you must select the palette to use. Several fixed and optimized palette selections are available:

Optimized (5-bit median cut)	Uses the "median cut" algorithm to select a color palette that best matches the colors of the original image. Selects from a total of 32,768 possible colors (5 bits each for red, green and blue).
Optimized (6-bit median cut)	Uses the "median cut" algorithm to select a color palette that best matches the colors of the original image. Selects from a total of 262,144 possible colors (6 bits each for red, green and blue). In some cases, this will mean a better color selection than the 5-bit algorithm, but it runs somewhat slower.
Optimized (8-bit median cut)	Uses the "median cut" algorithm to select a color palette that best matches the colors of the original image. This algorithm selects from a total of 16 million possible colors (8 bits each for red, green and blue). In some cases, especially rasterizing drawing with solid areas or gradient fills, this option produces much better results that 5 or 6-bit quantization. However, it is quite a bit slower, and will use very large amounts of memory if the number of colors in the original image is high. Not suggested for photographic images.
Optimized (popularity)	Selects the n most-used colors in the original image.
Grayscale	Creates a fixed levels-of-gray palette, with n evenly spaced colors.
ThumbsPlus Color	Selects the same colors used in the ThumbsPlus thumbnails; this is also the palette used for the Quick Dithering option (see below).
Web (Netscape/IExplorer)	Selects the palette used by Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer.
Std. Windows Color	Uses the 16 standard Windows colors (yuck - but sometimes you need 'em).
Light Windows Color	Uses 16 standard Windows colors as implemented by some display drivers (the darker colors are lighter than in the standard palette).
Standard VGA	Selects the default 16 VGA palette colors.
6x7x6 Even Distribution	Creates a palette with 6 levels of red, 7 of green and 6 of blue, evenly spaced. (Not very pretty for most images, but okay for some dithering jobs.)
6x6x6 Even Distribution	Creates a palette with six levels each of red, green and blue, evenly spaced. This is similar to the 6x7x6 palette, but more useful for pictures with large amounts of gray.
Indeo	Uses the 236-color Indeo palette recommended for video frames. This is also a very useful general palette, somewhat similar to the ThumbsPlus palette.
Cinepak	Uses the recommended 236-color Cinepak palette recommended for video composition.
Pasted from Clipboard	Pastes a palette from the image on the clipboard. This is useful for adapting several images to a common palette.
Loaded from File	This option allows you to load a palette from an existing graphics file, or from a ThumbsPlus palette file (.PAL), which you may create using the Save Palette As... option on the View window File menu.
Common Optimized	(Batch conversion only) This option creates a common optimized palette of the desired number of colors from all images being batch processed.


Identity palette. Checking this box will cause ThumbsPlus to adjust any 17 to 236 color palette to be a Windows identity palette, placing the 20 Windows system colors in the first 10 and last 10 color map positions.


Web target.  This option causes the palette to be scaled to a web target palette compatible with web browsers like Internet Explorer and Netscape.


Dither. When reducing the number of colors in an image, you may select a dithering method from those listed below.

(none)	No dithering. Colors are simply mapped to the closest available color in the selected palette.
Floyd-Steinberg	The most popular error diffusion dithering method. Fairly quick with reasonable results.
Burkes	Another error diffusion dither. Takes slightly longer than Floyd-Steinberg, and sometimes produces nicer results.
Stucki	A fairly complex error diffusion dither. Slower than Floyd-Steinberg or Burkes, but usually the nicest results, especially for truecolor to 256-color conversions.
Jarvis, Judice, Ninke.	Another fairly complex error diffusion dither with a somewhat different appearance from Stucki.


Noise Level. ThumbsPlus can randomize each pixel by a small amount to (sometimes) improve the appearance. Select a value here between 0 (no noise) and 50 (lots of noise). This is particularly useful in getting rid of patterns produced in solid areas by the error diffusion dithers.

ThumbsPlus retains the last selections you made in this window so you can apply the identical changes to subsequent files, or during batch processing.


Reduce error propagation.  Checking this option causes ThumbsPlus to adjust mapped pixel values within a fixed error tolerance.


Preview.  This displays the currently selected color depth operation's effect on the image file.


Comments.  Use this edit box to enter the desired comment text.


Replace.  Check this option to replace any existing image comments with the comment text entered.


Append.  Check this option to append the entered comment to the end of any existing image comments.


Leave unchanged.  Check this option to leave any existing image comments unchanged.


View Window - Image | Remove Red Eye
View Window - Image | Remove Red Eye...	Shift+R

Use this function to eliminate any 'Red Eye' effects caused by camera flash.

Circle.  Drag this circle over your image window and drop it on the area you want to select for 'Red Eye' reduction.  You may place up to 12 'Red Eye' circles at a time.  Also, you may resize the circle to more closely fit the 'Red Eye' area.

Sensitivity.  Enter a number between 0 and 100, or use the slider to pick the sensitivity level.  This will affect the strength of 'Red Eye' desaturation.  Higher settings will perform move aggressive reduction; lower settings will perform more subtle reduction.

Apply Now.  Use this button to apply the desired 'Red Eye' reduction without closing the dialog.  You may then select other areas for additional 'Red Eye' removal and continue.


 Main Window - Options | Preferences - E-mail

Confirmations          Schemes & Sets          Keywords           E-mail           Advanced

General    Startup    Thumbnails    File Types    Disks & Folders    Thumbnail View

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this dialog tab to select the preferred e-mail application for ThumbsPlus to use when sending files.  All available MAPI compliant applications registered under Windows will be available in the dropdown list.


Menu Main, File | Print - Text and Options
Main Window - File | Print	Ctrl+P

    View Window - File | Print | Current page

Layout	Text & Options

Click on the links above to see help for the individual tabs.

This menu selection prints all selected graphics files.

Select Items.  Click this button to select items that you would like to print beneath the images. See Selecting Items for more information.

Print borders around images.  Check this option to print a thin border around each image

Font.  Click this button to set the font for any textual items that will be printed.


Main Window, Image | Quick Convert to ...
Main Window - Image | Quick Convert to | [file type]

Use this menu selection to quickly convert the selected file(s) to another supported output file type.  This function is equivalent to opening a file and selecting File | Save as from the view window menu.  Any file type needing options during saving (like TIF, JPG, GIF, etc) will cause ThumbsPlus to prompt for it's output options prior to creating the new file(s).

To disable this option prompting and force ThumbsPlus to use the default (or last used) output options, go to Options | Preferences - Confirmations and uncheck the Prompt for file options when quick converting files option.


EXIF information
EXIF Information.

Exchangeable Image File is a standardized information format that allows digital cameras to store, along with the actual digital image, additional information such as shutter speed, f-stop, focus distance, focal length, photo date/time, camera make and model, etc.  The EXIF file format is actually a standard JPEG format with an additional EXIF data block embedded.


DDE, Batch Process
BatchProcess (DDE Command)

Syntax:
BatchProcess(set-name;output-path;input-path;selection-option;file-mask;output-type;overwrite-flag;subdir-flag)

Abbreviation:

Z(set-name;output-path;input-path;selection-option;file-mask;output-type;overwrite-flag;subdir-flag)

Executes a defined batch process.

Parameters:

set-name	This value can be any batch set name defined

in ThumbsPlus.  This name is case-sensitive.

output-path	The complete folder path where ThumbsPlus will

create the converted files.

Optional Parameters (If omitted, ThumbsPlus will use the settings from the specified batch set):

input-path	The complete folder path where ThumbsPlus will

look for the input files.

selection-option

0 - Selected files

1 - Current folder

2 - Current folder and sub-folders

file-mask	Any valid file mask string.  Eg. *.tif;*.gif

output-type	Any valid file extension for file types that

ThumbsPlus can write.  Eg. bmp, jpg, png, etc.

overwrite-flag	0 - Don't overwrite files existing in the output-path

1 - Do overwrite existing files

subdirs-flag	0 - Don't recreate the input-path sub-folder structure.

     Puts all output files directly under output-path,

     regardless of their input-path sub-folder.

1 - Do create the same input-path sub-folder structure

     under the output-path.


View Window - Image | Trim to Size | Photo Proportion
View Window - Transform | Trim to Photo Proportion (In) | 11 x 14, 8 x 10, ...

Use these menu selections to trim the open image to a printable photo size in inches.

A masked selection rectangle will display, indicating the area to be trimmed.  You can move and resize this area using the mouse and then click Edit | Apply from the view window menu or simply press the [Enter] key to trim the image to you selected area.


View Window - Image | Trim to Size | Paper Proportion
View Window - Transform | Trim to Paper Proportion | 5.5 x 8.5", 8.5 x 11"...

Use these menu selections to trim the open image to a proportional paper size.

A masked selection rectangle will display, indicating the area to be trimmed.  You can move and resize this area using the mouse and then click Edit | Apply from the view window menu or simply press the [Enter] key to trim the image to you selected area.


View Window - Edit | Apply
View Window - Edit | Apply	Enter

Use this menu selection to apply any two-part edit function like Paste, or Trim to Size.


View Window - Image | Trim to Size | Proportion
View Window - Transform | Trim to Proportion | 1:1 (Square), 3:2...

Use these menu selections to trim the open image to a specific proportional size.

A masked selection rectangle will display, indicating the area to be trimmed.  You can move and resize this area using the mouse and then click Edit | Apply from the view window menu or simply press the [Enter] key to trim the image to you selected area.


View Window - Image | Trim to Size | Exactly
View Window - Transform | Trim to Exacty | 160 x 120, 160 x 160, 320 x 240 ...

Use these menu selections to trim the open image to a specific size in pixels.

A masked selection rectangle will display, indicating the area to be trimmed.  You can move and resize this area using the mouse and then click Edit | Apply from the view window menu or simply press the [Enter] key to trim the image to you selected area.


View Window - Image | Trim to Size | Proportion | Other
View Window - Image | Trim to Size | Proportion | Other...

Use this menu selection to trim the open image to a specific user entered proportional size.

You will be prompted to enter the desired horizontal and vertical ratio values.

Horizontal.  Enter the horizontal ratio value.

Vertical.  Enter the vertical ratio value.


View Window - Image | Trim to Size | Exactly | Other...

Use this menu selection to trim the open image to a specific user size in pixels.

You will be prompted to enter the desired horizontal and vertical size in pizels.

Horizontal.  Enter the horizontal size in pixels.

Vertical.  Enter the vertical size in pixels.


Main Menu | Image | Build Slide Show...
Main Window - Image | Build Slide Show...

Build Settings          Startup Information

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this menu selection to create a self executable slide show of images.  You will be prompted for several options prior to the creation of the slide show executable.  Once you have created the slide show, you will be able to send it others via e-mail.  Recipients of a ThumbsPlus executable slide show do not need ThumbsPlus to view the slide show images.  However, they will need to be running a Windows operating system.  This slide show will not run on other operating systems.

Output slide show filename.  Enter the full path name for the slide show executable file. you may use the [...] browse button to select an output path name.

Image format

PNG.  Select this option to create the slide show with embedded PNG image format files.

JPEG.  Select this option to create the slide show with embedded JPEG image format files.

Quality (25-90).  Enter the quality setting to be used for the JPEG image format.

Reduce images to fit

Original size.  Use this option to keep the original file dimensions for the embedded slide show files.

640 x 480 - 1024 x 768.  Select one of these options to choose specific resize dimensions to be used for embedded slide show images.

Custom.  Enter a custom width and height for the embedded slide show images.

Playback options (used on slide show startup)

Full screen.  Causes the slide show to run in Full Screen mode.

Stretch to fit screen.  Slide show images will ALWAYS be stretched to fit the slide show window.

Reduce to fit screen.  Slide show images will ONLY be stretched to fit the slide show window if they are larger than the window's slide area.

Show file names.  The slide show image file names will be displayed.

Show comments.  Image comments stored in the slide show images will be displayed with the images.

Centered.  Check this option to center the image comments when displayed.

Control manually. Select this option to not automatically advance the image files - user intervention via keyboard arrows, space and backspace, or left and right mouse buttons is required. If unchecked, the Slide delay value will determine how long the slide show will wait until automatically displaying the next image.

Font.  Select the font that will be used to display any images comments and file names.

Note: If the font doesn't exist on the computer running the slide show, the default system font will be used at the point size selected.

Text color.  Select the text color for the font that will be used to display any images comments and file names.

Background color.  Select the background color used to fill the area of the slide show window not covered by the slide image.


View Window - Image | Replace Colors...
View Window - Image | Replace Colors...	Shift+P

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Replace Colors...

Use this menu selection selectively replace color ranges in an image.

Find

Find Color.  Use this button to select the color that you wish to replace.  You may also click anywhere inside the image area to select a color under the mouse position.

Use color component ranges.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus use the find color component ranges for hue, saturation and luminace when matching pixel colors for replacement.  If this option is unchecked then the find and replace color ranges are not used when performing the color replacement and only the exact find color is replaced with the exact replace color.

Hue.  Use the hue range selection control to adjust how much hue variance (both above and below the current color value) will be allowed when matching pixel colors for replacement.

Sat.  Use the saturation range control to adjust how much saturation variance (both above and below the current color value) will be allowed when matching pixel colors for replacement.

Lum.  Use the luminance range control to adjust how much luminance (brightness) variance (both above and below the current color value) will be allowed when matching pixel colors for replacement.

Replace

Replace Color.  Use this button to select the color that you wish to use as the replacement color.

Enable replacement range scaling.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus scale the replace color with respect to the hue, saturation and luminace variances that where selected on the find color.  If this option is unchecked then the exact replace color is used for all colors matching the find color information.

Hue.  Use the hue range control to adjust how much hue variance (both above and below the current color value) will be used when mapping found pixel hue values to the replacement hue range.

Sat.  Use the saturation range control to adjust how much saturation variance (both above and below the current color value) will be used when mapping found pixel saturation values to the replacement saturation range.

Lum.  Use the luminance range control to adjust how much luminance (brightness) variance (both above and below the current color value) will be used when mapping found pixel luminance values to the replacement luminance range.

View.  Click this button to manually preview the color replacement on the current image.

Clear.  Click this button to clear the color replacement preview and display the original image colors.

Auto view.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus automatically preview the color replacement on the current image when an option change is made.

Note: For very large images, you may experience sluggish behavior with Auto View on.  If so, uncheck this option and click the View button to preview the color replacement.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Add to Gallery
Main Window - Thumbnail | Add to Gallery | [Gallery]
Thumbnail Popup Menu - Gallery | Add to
Found List Popup Menu - Add to Gallery...

Use this menu selection to add the selected thumbnail(s) to an existing gallery in the folder tree.  Any existing galleries (in the open database) will appear on the 'fly out' menu.  If no galleries exist, this menu item will not display.

See also: Main Window - Thumbnail | Gallery | Create, Main Window - Thumbnail | Move to Gallery.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Move to Gallery
Main Window - Thumbnail | Move to Gallery | [Gallery]
Gallery Popup Menu - Gallery | Move to...

Use this menu selection to move the selected thumbnail(s) from the current gallery to an existing gallery in the folder tree.  Any other existing galleries (in the open database) will appear on the 'fly out' menu.  If no other galleries exist, this menu item will not display.

See also: Main Window - Thumbnail | Gallery | Create, Main Window - Thumbnail | Add to Gallery.


View Window - Image | Rotate to Line
View Window - Image | Rotate to Line	O

Use this menu selection to rotate an image to a selected reference line.  After selecting this option, left click and drag the mouse cursor  to draw the intended rotation reference line on the view window.  After placing the rotation line on the view window, simply press the [Enter] key to rotate the image.

When rotating to a line less than or equal to 45°, the rotation line will be translated to a horizontal line.

When rotating to a line greater than 45°, the rotation line will be translated to a vertictal line.

After rotating the image, you may want to crop off the rotated image's corners by selecting the crop area and the using Image | Crop to Selection from the view window menu.


Color Picker Dialog

The following tabs are available on the color picker dialog:

	Palette Tab. Use this tab to pick a palette based color.  If the color selection is based on a 256 color (or less) image, then the list of palette colors will be the colors found in the images palette.  Otherwise, the palette color list will be the ThumbsPlus color palette. To select a palette entry, simply click the entry with the mouse and then click the Pick button. You may also use the arrow keys to position to the desired palette entry and then press the [Enter] key.
	Custom RGB Tab. Use this tab to pick a custom RGB (Red, Green, Blue) valued color. To select an RGB color value, click anywhere in the Hue x Saturation color square, then click anywhere on the Luminance bar, and then click the Pick button. You may also use the Red, Green, Blue, Lum, Hue, and Sat edit boxes to manually specify the color components.  Also, you can enter an HTML color string in the Web edit box. The format here is #RRGGBB, where RR, GG and BB are hexadecimal values for the Red, Green and Blue color components. One other way to select a color is to click on the color selector [image] button.  After doing this you may click anywhere on the screen to select the color under the mouse cursor.


View Window - File | Upload to | Printroom.com
Main Window - File | Online Photos | Printroom.com | Upload selected...

View Window - File | Upload to | Printroom.com...

Use this function to upload selected images (in the thumbnail view or view window) to a Printroom album or shopping cart.

\

Default album.  Select this option to send the selected files to your default Printroom album.

Shopping Cart.  Select this option to send the selected files directly to your Printroom shopping cart.  Once you images are in the shopping cart, you can order printed copies.

Album.  Select this option to pick a specific album at Printroom.  If the album does not exist, it will be created for you automatically.

Album name.  After picking the Album option, you can use this field to either enter a new album name or pick an existing one from the dropdown list.

After upload, go to Printroom.com.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus open your web browser to visit your album page on the Printroom web site.

After selecting the album option and clicking OK, you will be presented with an upload dialog, indicating your upload progress.

The file name being transferred, along with it's local temporary name, kilobytes sent and total file size, are displayed for each file being sent.  Also an estimate of time remaining and total percent complete are given.  If an error is encountered during transfer, a message will be displayed in the Errors encountered list.  You can double click on the error message to see more information about the error and possible solutions.

Cancel. Click this button to stop the upload in progress.

Background.  Click this button to minimize ThumbsPlus while the upload continues.

Save Errors.  If you encounter any errors, you can click this button to save the error messages to a file for printing or to send to technical support.


View Window - Image | Combine...
View Window - Image | Combine...	Shift+B

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Combine

Use this menu selection to modify the open image by combining it with another image.

Operation.  Select the method for combining the two images.  The available combination methods are:
Add, Subtract (x - y), Subtract (y - x),
Multiply, Divide (x / y), Subtract (y - x),
Maximum, Minimum, Average, Subtract Scaled,
Or, And and Xor.

Opacity.  Select the opacity level for the selected operation.
Note: At this time only the Fade operation requires the opacity level setting.

Combine with

Browse.  Use this button to browse for the desired image file to combine with the current image.

Clipboard.  Click this button to select the image currently on the windows clipboard to be combined with the current image.  If nothing has been pasted to the clipboard, this button will be disabled.

Open Views.  Click this menu button to select any image currently open in another view window.  If you have not opened any other images with ThumbsPlus, this button will be disabled.

File name.  Displays the full path name of the selected combine file.


View Window - View | Tile Image
View Window - View | Tile Image	Shift+F5

This menu selection toggles tiled viewing in a view window.  When checked, ThumbsPlus will fill the view window's client area with as many copies of the open image as will fit.


View Window - View | Wallpaper | Fully Stretched
 Main Window - Image | Wallpaper | Fully Stretched	Shift+Alt+F7

     View Window - View | Wallpaper | Fully Stretched

This option installs the first selected file in the thumbnail view as the Windows wallpaper (like Wallpaper | Stretched) without maintaining aspect ratio.


Main Window - Options | Display | Arrange Horizontal
Main Window - Options | Display | Arrange Horizontal	Ctrl+Alt+H

Use this menu selection to arrange thumbnails in the thumbnail view horizontally.  If there are more thumbnails than can be displayed in a single page in the thumbnail view, a scroll bar will appear at the bottom of the thumbnail view for scrolling horizontally.


Main Window - Options | Display | Arrange Vertical
Main Window - Options | Display | Arrange Vertical	Ctrl+Alt+V

Use this menu selection to arrange thumbnails in the thumbnail view vertically.  If there are more thumbnails than can be displayed in a single page in the thumbnail view, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge of the thumbnail view for scrolling vertically.


Main Window - Options | Save Startup Options
Main Window - Options | Save Startup Options	Ctrl+Shift+Y

Use this menu selection to force ThumbsPlus to save your program settings immediately instead of waiting until normal program shutdown.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Assign Keywords | [Recently Used Keywords]
 Main Window - Thumbnail | Assign Keywords | [Recent Keywords]

Use this menu selection to assign recently used keywords (from the Assign Keywords 'fly-out' menu).  The last 20 assigned keyword strings will appear on this menu.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Gallery | Properties

Gallery Popup Menu - Properties

Use this menu selection to display (and modify) the properties for the currently selected gallery.

Name.  Enter the new gallery name to be shown under the Galleries folder tree group.

Manual order.  Check this option to manually order the thumbnails contained in the gallery.

If you wish to modify the default sort order (used when this gallery is displayed), you can select the primary and secondary sort orders in the Order by dropdown lists and optionally reverse the sort order by checking the Descending checkbox.

Note: Gallery thumbnails may be reordered into any sequence desired by dragging them around in the thumbnail view - right-clicking on the gallery in the folder tree and selecting Save Gallery Order.  Galleries will ONLY display using a reordered sequence when Manual Order is checked.


       ThumbsPlus Bestelformulier voor Nederland en België
 Klik hier om het formulier af te drukken!

	CopyCats SOFTWARE & SERVICES	ThumbsPlus v6.x bestelformulier voor Nederland en België
	(geldig tot 31-12-2003)
ThumbsPlus wordt in de Benelux vertegenwoordigd door CopyCats S&S. Particulieren en bedrijven kunnen een volledige versie aanschaffen door dit formulier in te vullen, en het gelijktijdig met hun betaling (of inkooporder - z. onder) op te sturen, faxen of mailen aan:

CopyCats Software & Services       Tel: +31 (0)72-5745993

Postbus 1088                       Fax: +31 (0)72-5726559

1700 BB  Heerhugowaard             E-mail: copycats@compuserve.com

Nederland                          BTW-Nr: NL-185.152.119.B01

U ontvangt dan binnen enkele dagen de nieuwste CDROM-versie met gedrukte manual per post. Als geregistreerd gebruiker kunt u gebruikmaken van telefonische ondersteuning, en wordt u via e-mail op de hoogte gehouden van het verschijnen van belangrijke upgrades.  Let op: onderstaande prijzen zijn alle inclusief BTW en verzending!

s.v.p. duidelijk en volledig invullen

Bedrijf : _________________________________________________

Naam    : ___________________________________________ M / V

Adres   : _________________________________________________

Postcode: ____________  Woonplaats: _______________________

Land    : ___________ E-mail: _____________________________

Telefoon: _____________________ fax: ______________________

BTW-nummer (Belgische bedrijven): |B|E|-|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|

JA!  ThumbsPlus bevalt mij. Ik bestel hierbij:

Stuks: Product:                                    Prijs EURO: Totaal:

... x ThumbsPlus v6.x Professional                    €  98,00 .......

... x ThumbsPlus v6.x Standard (*)                    €  64,00 .......

... x ThumbsPlus v6.x Pro Home Network (max 5 PC's**) € 158,00 .......

... x ThumbsPlus v6.x Pro Concurrent Network  (**)    € 107,00 .......

                                                               -------

                                              Totaalbedrag***: _______

Betaalwijze:

[_]   (NL) Is reeds per bank overgemaakt aan ING 68.59.35.701 t.n.v. CopyCats te Heerhugowaard

[_]   (NL) Is reeds per giro overgemaakt aan Postbank 43.28.577 t.n.v. CopyCats te Heerhugowaard

[_]   (NL) Betaling aan postbode (rembourskosten: € 9,00 extra. Alleen mogelijk binnen Nederland)

[_]   (B) Is reeds overgemaakt aan Postrekening 000-1656064-80 t.n.v. CopyCats te Heerhugowaard (NL)

[_]   (NL+B) Op rekening/Op factuur (Uitsluitend aan overheid / grootbedrijf. Stuur eigen inkooporder of officieel briefhoofd mee)

Datum: ....-....-2003     Handtekening: .........................

*: De Standard-versie ondersteunt geen netwerk,  geen MRW, ORF, DCS, DCR, NEF en DXF bestanden, noch andere databases dan Access.

**: Netwerk-licenties: Minimumlicentie is voor twee PC's (seats) of gelijktijdige gebruikers (concurrent users). Seat-licenties kunnen ook stand-alone gebruikt worden. De Home Network Edition werkt op maximaal 5 PC's en is uitsluitend voor particulieren beschikbaar.

***: Belgische zakelijke afnemers: als u uw BTW-nummer vermeld hebt, betaalt u geen BTW. Deel uw totaalbedrag in dat geval door 1,19!

CopyCats S&S is sinds 1992 actief als Nederlands vertegenwoordiger van diverse onafhankelijke software-producenten. Wij leveren en ondersteunen o.a. ook: Boxer, CAD5, Cool Edit, Full Control, SmartDraw, Total Commander, WinU en WinZip. Prijzen en specificaties onder voorbehoud. CopyCats S&S behoudt zich het recht voor, bepaalde verzoeken om levering op rekening te weigeren.


Main Window - Tree | Back
 Main Window - Tree | Back	Alt+Left Arrow

ThumbsPlus records a history of which folders you visit in the folder tree.  You can use this menu selection to navigate back to the prior folder tree path. in this path history, selecting it in the folder tree.


Main Window - Tree | Forward
 Main Window - Tree | Forward	Alt+Right Arrow

ThumbsPlus records a history of which folders you visit in the folder tree.  You can use this menu selection to navigate forward to the next folder tree path in this path history, selecting it in the folder tree


Main Window - Edit | Copy File Name
Main Window - Edit | Copy File Name	Shift+Alt+C

Use this menu selection to copy the currently selected file name(s) to the clipboard.  If no files are selected, this menu option is disabled.


Main Window - File | Database | JPEG Compress
Main Window - File | Database | JPEG Compress...

Use this menu selection to convert thumbnails, stored in the current ThumbsPlus database, into JPEG compressed thumbnails.  The internal thumbnail data is stored as complete JPEG file stream.

ThumbsPlus will prompt you with the following dialog box, before converting the database thumbnails.

JPEG Quality.  Enter a quality value, between 25 and 90.  Values below 25 are likely to degrade the image far too much, and values above 90 make the thumbnail storage size larger without any appreciable quality increase.

Compact database after conversion.  Check this option to compact the actual database file (MS Access ONLY) after converting the thumbnails.  This will release all disk space occupied by deleted or moved thumbnails so it can be used for other files.

See also: File | Database | Compact.


Main Window - Image | Tasks | Pause Task

This menu contains menu selections to control the execution of any background tasks running in the task window.  You can pause, resume or quit an individual task by clicking on the task and selecting the respective menu choice from the File | Tasks menu.  You can pause, resume or quit all tasks by selecting one of the respective "All Tasks" menu choices.

A "green light" icon will be displayed beside any running tasks.

A "red light" icon will be displayed beside any paused tasks.

A "red circle with horizontal bar" icon will be displayed beside any task that completed, but encountered one or more errors.

See also: Task Errors.


Main Window - Image | Tasks | Resume Task

This menu contains menu selections to control the execution of any background tasks running in the task window.  You can pause, resume or quit an individual task by clicking on the task and selecting the respective menu choice from the File | Tasks menu.  You can pause, resume or quit all tasks by selecting one of the respective "All Tasks" menu choices.

A "green light" icon will be displayed beside any running tasks.

A "red light" icon will be displayed beside any paused tasks.

A "red circle with horizontal bar" icon will be displayed beside any task that completed, but encountered one or more errors.

See also: Task Errors.


Main Window - Image | Tasks | Quit Task

This menu contains menu selections to control the execution of any background tasks running in the task window.  You can pause, resume or quit an individual task by clicking on the task and selecting the respective menu choice from the File | Tasks menu.  You can pause, resume or quit all tasks by selecting one of the respective "All Tasks" menu choices.

A "green light" icon will be displayed beside any running tasks.

A "red light" icon will be displayed beside any paused tasks.

A "red circle with horizontal bar" icon will be displayed beside any task that completed, but encountered one or more errors.

See also: Task Errors.


Main Window - Image | Tasks | Pause All Tasks

This menu contains menu selections to control the execution of any background tasks running in the task window.  You can pause, resume or quit an individual task by clicking on the task and selecting the respective menu choice from the File | Tasks menu.  You can pause, resume or quit all tasks by selecting one of the respective "All Tasks" menu choices.

A "green light" icon will be displayed beside any running tasks.

A "red light" icon will be displayed beside any paused tasks.

A "red circle with horizontal bar" icon will be displayed beside any task that completed, but encountered one or more errors.

See also: Task Errors.


Main Window - Image | Tasks | Resume All Tasks

This menu contains menu selections to control the execution of any background tasks running in the task window.  You can pause, resume or quit an individual task by clicking on the task and selecting the respective menu choice from the File | Tasks menu.  You can pause, resume or quit all tasks by selecting one of the respective "All Tasks" menu choices.

A "green light" icon will be displayed beside any running tasks.

A "red light" icon will be displayed beside any paused tasks.

A "red circle with horizontal bar" icon will be displayed beside any task that completed, but encountered one or more errors.

See also: Task Errors.


Main Window - Image | Tasks | Quit All Tasks

This menu contains menu selections to control the execution of any background tasks running in the task window.  You can pause, resume or quit an individual task by clicking on the task and selecting the respective menu choice from the File | Tasks menu.  You can pause, resume or quit all tasks by selecting one of the respective "All Tasks" menu choices.

A "green light" icon will be displayed beside any running tasks.

A "red light" icon will be displayed beside any paused tasks.

A "red circle with horizontal bar" icon will be displayed beside any task that completed, but encountered one or more errors.

See also: Task Errors.


Main Window - Image | Tasks | Show Errors
Main Window - Image | Tasks | Show Errors, Clear Errors, Clear All Errors

These menu choices allow you to view and clear error lists that were produced by tasks that encountered any errors during execution.  To show the error list for a task select the task by clicking on it and the select the Show Errors menu choice from the File | Tasks menu.  Once the error list is closed, the error list will be automatically cleared and the task entry removed from the tasks window.  To clear errors for one or all tasks (without having to view the error list) simply select the task (if clearing a single error list) and select the Clear Errors or Clear All Errors menu choice.


Main Window - File | Online Photos | Printroom.com | Account Settings...

Use this dialog to create a new Printroom account or to modify the account settings for an existing account.

New User

Create a new Printroom account.  Use this button to go to Printroom's new account setup page on the web.  While in your internet browser, fill out the new account registration form and click the Register button.  Enter the account ID and password from the registration form in this dialog and click the OK button.

Existing User

Account ID.  The Printroom account id from your online registration.

Password.  The Printroom account password from your online registration.

Remember password between sessions.  Click this option if you would like ThumbsPlus to remember the account password between sessions.

Connect to Printroom now to verify account.  If this box is checked, ThumbsPlus will connect to Printroom.com, validate your account ID and password, and download the list of albums you have created there.


Main Window - File | Photos at Printroom | Visit Printroom.com
Main Window - File | Online Photos | Printroom.com | Visit Printroom.com

Use this menu selection to open your internet browser and visit the Printroom web site.  Once there, you can view your shopping cart contents, order prints, find and manage albums and  check order statuses.


Main Window - Found List Popup Menu - Remove Found List

Use this menu selection to remove the currently selected found list from the folder tree.


View Window - File | Load | Reload file
View Window - File | Load | Reload file	Ctrl+Shift+R

This option reloads the current image from its disk file (the last time it was saved, or the original if you haven't saved it). It effectively undoes all changes since the last time the file was saved.


Main Window - File | Properties - Galleries
Main Window - File | Properties - Galleries	Alt+Enter

    View Window - File | Properties - Galleries

Physical	 Details	Info	Database	Keywords	User Fields	Galleries
Click on any of the links above to display help for the different property tabs

Use this tab in the File Properties dialog box to display a list of galleries that contain the file's thumbnail.


View Window - Image | Process | Sepia Tone
View Window - Image | Process | Sepia Tone	Shift+E

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Sepia Tone

Use this menu selection to apply a sepia tone filter to the open image.  The resulting image will have a  brownish, "old-timey" black & white look.


View Window - Image | Process | Semi-Sepia Tone
View Window - Image | Process | Semi-Sepia Tone	Ctrl+Shift+E

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Semi-Sepia Tone

Use this menu selection to apply a semi-sepia tone filter to the open image.  The resulting image will have a  brownish, "old-timey" black & white look with some original color saturation preserved.


View Window - Image | Process | Photo Negative
View Window - Image | Process | Photo Negative	Shift+N

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Photo Negative

Use this menu selection to convert scanned negatives to color images.  The resulting image will have positive color channels.  This process is better than Image | Invert Colors because it compensates for the orange tint of the negative, while also boosting contrast.

Note: This process should produce a usable image from most scanned color negatives; however, film scanners will almost always produce better results because they have more data to work with and can tell where blank areas of the negative are (for removing the color mask).


View Window - Image | Process | Equalize Channels
View Window - Image | Process | Equalize Channels	Shift+Q

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Equalize Channels

Use this menu selection to equalize each color channel in the open image individually.  In some cases, equalizing the color channels will improve the appearance. ThumbsPlus will attempt to modify levels of each color channel to come as close to even levels of each as possible.


View Window - Image | Process | Stretch Channels
View Window - Image | Process | Stretch Channels	Shift+T

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Stretch Channels

Use this menu selection to stretch each color channel in the open image individually.  Color channel values will be mapped, from the current range found in the image, to values in the range of 0 to 255.


Main Window - Image | Quick Batch
 Main Window -  Image | Quick Batch | [Batch Name]

     View Window - Transform | Quick Batch | [Batch Name]

See: Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Output Details for information on these settings.

To disable prompting on these settings and force ThumbsPlus to use the output settings, go to Options | Preferences - Confirmations and uncheck the Prompt for output settings during quick batch process option.

Note: To override this confirmation option (and force ThumbsPlus to prompt for output settings) when selecting a quick batch from the menu, hold down the shift key while clicking on the desired batch name from the Quick Batch menu.


View Window - File | Upload to | Picturetrail.com
Main Window - File | Online Photos | Picturetrail.com | Upload selected...

View Window - File | Upload to | Picturetrail.com...

After selecting this menu option, you will be presented with an upload dialog, indicating your upload progress.

The file name being transferred, along with it's local temporary name, kilobytes sent and total file size, are displayed for each file being sent.  Also an estimate of time remaining and total percent complete are given.  If an error is encountered during transfer, a message will be displayed in the Errors encountered list.  You can double click on the error message to see more information about the error and possible solutions.

Cancel. Click this button to stop the upload in progress.

Background.  Click this button to minimize ThumbsPlus while the upload continues.

Save Errors.  If you encounter any errors, you can click this button to save the error messages to a file for printing or to send to tec


Main Window - File | Online Photos | Picturetrail.com | Visit Picturetrail.com

Use this menu selection to open your internet browser and visit the Picturetrail web site.  Once there, you can view your pictures online, find and manage albums and more.


Main Window - File | Online Photos | Picturetrail.com | Account Settings...

Use this dialog to create a new Picturetrail account or to modify the account settings for an existing account.

New User

Create a new Picturetrail account.  Use this button to go to Picturetrail's new account setup page on the web.  While in your internet browser, fill out the new account registration form and click the Register button.  Enter the account ID and password from the registration form in this dialog and click the OK button.

Existing User

Account ID.  The Picturetrail account id from your online registration.

Password.  The Picturetrail account password from your online registration.

Remember password between sessions.  Click this option if you would like ThumbsPlus to remember the account password between sessions.


Main Window - Options | File Plug-Ins
Main Window - Options | File Plug-Ins | (plug-in name)

Select any available plug-in from this menu to configure loading options.

See also: Main Window - Options | Preferences - File Types to set the loading method for individual file types.

Click here for more information on how to write your own ThumbsPlus Plug-in.

Note: File loading plug-ins do not always have options and therefore may not appear under this menu. This menu is for ThumbsPlus (Cerious) Plug-Ins only


Startup Information
Main Window - Image | Build Slide Show...

Build Settings          Startup Information

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this menu selection to create a self executable slide show of images.  You will be prompted for several options prior to the creation of the slide show executable.  Once you have created the slide show, you will be able to send it others via e-mail.  Receipients of a ThumbsPlus executable slide show do not need ThumbsPlus to view the slide show images.  However, they will need to be running a Windows operating system.  This slide show will not run on other operating systems.

Message

Message.  Enter the message to be displayed either at startup or when the slide show user selects File | Display Creator Information from the main slide show menu.

Font.  Select the font that will be used to display the message text.

Note: If the font doesn't exist on the computer running the slide show, the default system font will be used at the point size selected.

Text color.  Select the text color for the font that will be used to display the message text.

Background

Use solid color.  Select the background color used to fill the area of the message text window.

Use image.  Select an image file to be used as the background for the message text window.

[...].  Use this button to browse for a background image file.

Display this message on slide show startup.  Check this option to have the message text window display when starting the slide show.


Mode (Manual, Timed Delay, Audio Wait or Audio Matched).  Use this dropdown list to select the desired method of delay between images displayed during the slide show.  Manual mode will not automatically advance the image files - user intervention via keyboard arrows, space and backspace, or left and right mouse buttons is required.  Timed Delay mode will wait a fixed amount of time (entered in the Seconds box below) and the automatically display the next image.  Audio Wait mode will look for any audio files in the folder or selection preceeding any groups of image files and calculate how long each image slide should display based on the playback length of the audio divided by number of images found after it (up to the next audio file in the folder or selection).  Audio Matched mode will play an audio file (.MP3, .WAV, .MID) whose name (excluding extension) matches the currently displayed image file name.  Once the audio file has completed playback the slide show will advance to the next file.  If no audio file exists for the current image file, then the Timed Delay mode timeout is used before slide advancement occurs.


Play background audio file. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus play a background audio file named: slide.mid, slide.wav or slide.mp3 during the slide show.  The audio file must be located in the same folder as the image files used for the slide show.


Show transition effects.  Check this option to enable a transition effect between slides.


Transition effect.  Select the desired effect for transition between slides.  Available effects are: Fade and Dissolve.


Show selection mask.  Check this option to cause ThumbsPlus to mask the unselected areas of an image in a view window.


Automatic. The size of the view window is based on the size of the image or metafile being displayed.


Show file format options when overwriting (File | Save).  Check this option to make ThumbsPlus display the file format options dialog (if applicable) when overwriting an existing file via File | Save from the view window menu.


Use original JPEG quality when overwriting (File | Save) JPEG images.  If checked, ThumbsPlus will use the JPEG image's original quality value when saving the new JPEG file.


Use Twain Native mode.  Sets the TWAIN acquisition mode to native rather than memory.


Disable banded printing.  Sends printed output to printer in a single device output, instead of breaking images into bands or sections before sending to the printer.


Preferred e-mail application. Select the preferred e-mail application for ThumbsPlus to use when sending files.  All available MAPI compliant applications registered under Windows 95/98/ME and Windows NT4/2000 will be available in this drop down list.


Prompt for file options when quick converting files.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus prompt you for any file options (when saving to types that require format options) when quick converting file types.  If unchecked, ThumbsPlus will use the last used file options as default settings.


Prompt for output settings during quick batch process.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus prompt you output settings when running a quick batch process on a group of selected files.  If unchecked, ThumbsPlus will use the output settings from the selected batch.


Main Window - ThumbsPlus License Checking
Main Window - ThumbsPlus License Validation

ThumbsPlus displays this dialog box while it is waiting to connect to a network database that already has the maximum users connected.


Ordering in Australia
Ordering in Australia, New Zealand

Please contact:

ThumbsPlus Pty Ltd

PO Box 612

Belgrave, Victoria 3160

Phone:	+61 3 9752 5850

Fax:	+61 3 9752 5849

E-mail:	Sales 	sales@thumbsplus.com.au

Support 	support@thumbsplus.com.au

Web:	http://www.thumbsplus.com.au

Pricing:	http://www.thumbsplus.com.au/pricelistpr.htm


ERROR_TEMP
8001	Error adding volume (serial=%08x, label=%s, net=%s)
8002	Error adding record for path '%s' on volume #%d
8003	Unable to update thumbnail record
8004	Unable to add thumbnail record
8005	Unable to retrieve volume information for drive %s
8006	Unable to initialize database
8007	Unable to open database table (%s)
8008	Unable to allocate memory
8009	Invalid parameter in database function call
8010	Unable to create file
8011	Output of table file number entries
8012	Unable to initialize resources in thumbnail database
8013	Invalid dbinfo parameter in call
8014	Unable to open file '%s'
8015	Unable to create database table (%s)
8016	Invalid database handle
8017	Unable to update thumbnail record
8018	Unable to add thumbnail record
8019	Internal error: Invalid parameter passed to routine '%s'
8020	Unable to read thumbnail record
8021	Unable to initialize %s for rebuilding (must be able to open the database exclusively)
8022	Unable to rebuild table '%s'
8023	Unable to add record for keyword '%s'
8024	Unable to add keyword reference (%d, %d)
8025	Unable to delete keyword reference (%d,%d)
8026	Unable to delete keyword (%d,%d)
8027	Unable to convert volume table from old format to new
8028	Database is opened read-only
8029	Database version is incompatible
8030	Timeout occurred while waiting for database update access
8031	SQL Error (BindParameter)
8032	SQL Error (BindCol)
8033	SQL Error
8034	SQL Error (Commit)
8035	SQL Error (Rollback)
8036	SQL Connect Error
8037	Error setting database info
8038	The selected database is not a +T+ database. If you are connecting to a client/server +T+ database, check with the database administrator to ensure your login has appropriate privileges.
8039	Error copying database template (.ttd) to new database file (.td4).
8040	The maximum number of licensed users (%d) are already accessing the database.\n\nWould you like to wait for someone to exit?
8041	This computer is not properly registered for license validation. The database may be damaged.


JPEG Sub-sampling

Unlike must color image formats, JPEG does not store images as Red, Green, Blue (RGB), but instead as YUV (aka YCbCr), which is based on broadcast television color definitions. What sub-sampling does is spread color data across multiple pixels, either horizontally or vertically. This reduces the amount of data that has to be stored (or transmitted).

For example, a normal RGB file requires 3 bytes for each pixel, stored generally as:

RGB RGB RGB RGB

However, in JPEG files, the RGB is converted to YCbCr/YUV

- Y  encodes the luminance (brightness) of the pixel

- U and V encode the color of the pixel.

The sub-sampling tells how many pixels will share color information.

1:1 sub-sampling doesn't really sub-sample; three bytes are stored for each pixel

YUV YUV YUV YUV (3 bytes per pixel, just like RGB)

For 2:1 (Horizontal/Vertical) sub-sampling, the colors of each two adjacent pixels are averaged (but the *brightness* is still stored for each pixel). Thus, the data required is less, and stored as (for four pixels)

YYUV YYUV

So, only four bytes are required to store 2 pixels.

2:2 means sub-sampling by two pixels in each direction, so only 6 bytes are required to encode 4 pixels

YY
YYUV

The extreme case, 4:4, which ThumbsPlus doesn't write because it is more often visible, requires only 18 bytes to store 16 pixels

YYYY
YYYY
YYYY
YYYYUV

Sub-sampling occurs before the actual JPEG compression, thus making the file even smaller. Sub-sampling obviously affects the color accuracy of the image; however, the effect on photographs is usually not visible to the naked eye.

The following image (zoomed) demonstrate the 8 levels of sub-sampling available in ThumbsPlus. This image is a line-drawing of only two colors. These types of files are not good candidates for JPEG compression; TIFF, GIF or PNG are much more appropriate. However, this one definitely illustrates what is going on with sub-sampling!

For photographic images (more suited for the JPEG format), there is almost no apparent quality difference between the different sub-sampling methods.

So, 1:1 does provide the most accurate color, but whether you really need to use the extra disk space or download time depends on the planned use of the JPEG file itself. For digital camera pictures, it is best to store the originals as 1:1 (the way they come in from the camera), but using 2:2 for the web or e-mail is acceptable. If you plan to do a lot of editing (especially over a period of time), try converting your images to TIFF to retain color accuracy and minimize the lossiness (JPEG artifacts) that occur with repeated edits and saves.

Overall, 2:2 (which is the default, and most common for other programs as well) should be acceptable for most cases.


Use color component ranges.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus use the find color component ranges for hue, saturation and luminance when matching pixel colors for replacement.  If this option is unchecked then the find and replace color ranges are not used when performing the color replacement and only the exact find color is replaced with the exact replace color.


Hue.  Use the hue range control to adjust how much hue variance (both above and below the current color value) will be used when mapping found pixel hue values to the replacement hue range.  If the hue range selection control's checkbox is unchecked, the control will be disabled and only the exact hue value will be used for the replace color.


Sat.  Use the saturation range control to adjust how much saturation variance (both above and below the current color value) will be used when mapping found pixel saturation values to the replacement saturation range.  If the saturation range selection control's checkbox is unchecked, the control will be disabled and only the exact saturation value will be used for the replace color.


Lum.  Use the luminance range control to adjust how much luminance (brightness) variance (both above and below the current color value) will be used when mapping found pixel luminance values to the replacement luminance range.  If the luminance range selection control's checkbox is unchecked, the control will be disabled and only the exact luminance value will be used for the replace color.


Auto view.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus automatically preview the color replacement on the current image when an option change is made.
Note: For very large images, you may experience sluggish behavior with Auto View on.  If so, uncheck this option and click the View button to preview the color replacement.


Clear.  Click this button to clear the color replacement preview and display the original image colors.


View.  Click this button to manually preview the color replacement on the current image.


Operation.  Select the method for combining the two images.  The available combination methods are:
Add, Subtract (x - y), Subtract (y - x),
Multiply, Divide (x / y), Subtract (y - x),
Maximum, Minimum, Average, Subtract Scaled,
Or, And and Xor.


Browse.  Use this button to browse for the desired image file to combine with the current image.


Clipboard.  Click this button to select the image currently on the windows clipboard to be combined with the current image.  If nothing has been pasted to the clipboard, this button will be disabled.


Open Views.  Click this menu button to select any image currently open in another view window.  If you have not opened any other images with ThumbsPlus, this button will be disabled.


File name.  Displays the full path name of the selected file to combine or "(clipboard)" if selected from the windows clipboard.


Edit IPTC Info...
Main Window - File | Edit IPTC Info ...	Ctrl+I

View Window - Edit | Edit IPTC Info ...	Shift+I

Use the above dialog box to enter IPTC/NAA data elements that can be saved along with the image when saving to file formats that support this extra data (e.g. TIF or JPEG).  This information can then be read by other programs that read IPTC information.  ThumbsPlus will display this information on the File | Properties - Info tab as well as in the Info tab on the main window.


Information Tab
Main Window - Info Tab

	The info tab displays file information related to the currently selected thumbnail's image file. The various groups of file information are User Fields, IPTC/NAA, EXIF and Image. You can configure what information items display on this tab by right-clicking in the information area and clicking "Select Items" on the popup menu.  To display only those items with actual information, uncheck "Show Blank Items" on the popup menu.


Selecting Items for Display

Use this dialog box to select which items will appear in generated output files created by Web Page Wizard, Print Catalog, Contact Sheets and standard image printing.  You can also select which items display on the "Info Tab" in the main ThumbPlus window.

Item set name.  Use this dropdown to pick previously configured item sets or to enter a new name for the current item set to be saved by clicking the [Save] button.

Available Items.  Use the buttons on the left to select with information group and then click on the items within that group. Once you are through, click the [>] button to copy them to the Selected list.  To copy all items within a particular information group click the [>>] button.

Image.  Click this group button to display the available items pertaining to image files (file name, size, date, dimensions, etc).

EXIF.  Click this button to display all available EXIF fields.

IPTC.  Click this button to display all IPTC/NAA items available.

Fields.  Click this button to display any previously defined User Fields.

Other.  Click this button to display system items such as current date and time and database name.  Note: These items are not available for display on the Info Tab.

Selected.  This list displays the currently selected information items that will be displayed on the Info Tab.  To remove items from this list, click on the items to select and then click the [<] button.  To remove all selected items, click the [<<] button.

Show field names.  Check this option (default) to display the item names in the Info Tab.  If unchecked on the information item values will display.


	Info Tab
The info tab displays file information related to the currently selected thumbnail's image file. The various groups of file information are User Fields, IPTC/NAA, EXIF and Image.

You can configure what information items display on this tab by right-clicking in the information area and clicking "Select Items" on the popup menu.  To display only those items with actual information, uncheck "Show Blank Items" on the popup menu.


Color Profile...
View Window - Image | Color Profile...	Ctrl+Shift+C

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Color Profile...

Use this function to set, convert or remove the color profile information for the currently opened image file.

Current color profile. The current color profile within the image, if one exists.  Image file types that support color profile storage are: TIFF, JPEG, and PiNG.

Action

Set color profile. Select this option to set the color profile information in the image.

Convert to profile. Select this option to convert an existing image color profile to another profile.

Remove profile. Select this option to remove the current color profile from the image.

Preview. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus automatically preview any changes to the images color profile prior to clicking the [OK] button.

New color profile. Select a color profile to be added or converted to above.


View Window - Image | Color Balance...
View Window - Image | Color Balance...	Shift+O

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Image | Color Balance...

Use this dialog box to selectively balance the colors in an image.

Red, Green, Blue.  Use these entry fields (or spin controls) to change how much red, green, and blue contribute to the color balance.

Save. Click this button to save the Red, Green & Blue balance settings.

Load >. Click this button to load color balance settings.  This button is disabled if there are no saved color balance settings.

Compute from selection.  Click this button to have ThumbsPlus average the RGB values within the current selection rectangle.  The average RGB values will be used to compute the above red, green and blue balance values.


Plug-in Support
ThumbsPlus - Plug-in Support

Traditionally, ThumbsPlus has supported numerous image and multimedia file types internally.  This being the case, it takes considerable time and development effort to add additional file type support to the base product. This methodology also requires a full release cycle.

For new file type inclusion, we have implemented a new plug-in architecture within ThumbsPlus that will allow us to more quickly code and release file type plug-ins without the necessity of a full product release.  This architecture allows for thrid party custom plug-in development as well.  In other words, don't have time for us to include your special .ABC file type support?... Grab the ThumbsPlus Plug-in API and do it yourself!

Click here for more information on how to write your own ThumbsPlus Plug-in.


ThumbsPlus - Plug-in API

A ThumbsPlus Plug-in is a DLL designed to expose a common interface for ThumbsPlus to use to load image file.data for file types that are not supported internally.  It is a standard DLL (named with a .TPP file extension) with only two exported functions.  These functions are defined as follows:

BOOL __declspec(dllexport) WINAPI DllMain(HINSTANCE hinst, DWORD reason, LPVOID resrvd)
BOOL __declspec(dllexport) WINAPI PI_PluginInfo(PPI_CONFIG ppc, PPI_PLUGINFO pinfo)

DllMain is the standard Windows DLL entry point function called when LoadLibrary and FreeLibrary .platform SDK calls are made.

PI_PluginInfo is the plug-in initialization function that ThumbsPlus calls to connect to the plug-in.  The two parameters passed are: PPI_CONFIG(a pointer to structure containing function pointers into ThumbsPlus) and PPI_PLUGINGO (a pointer to a structure containing the plug-in's information, loading and option function pointers as well as other necessary information about the file type and the plug-in version).  These structures are defined in plugin.h.

Your Plug-in should save the PI_CONFIG structure pointer for use by it's loading and information routines.  The PI_PLUGINFO structure should be filled in by assigning appropriate values to the pi_version, multipage, name, extensions and version attributes and by assigining the relevant routine addresses (in your plug-in) to the function pointers pGetInfo, pGetImage and pGetOptions. The pSaveImage, pSaveOptions function pointers and savetype attribute are reserved for future use.

Example 1:

BOOL __declspec(dllexport) WINAPI PI_PluginInfo(PPI_CONFIG ppc, PPI_PLUGINFO pinfo)

{

pi_config = *ppc;

pinfo->pi_version = PI_VERSION;

pinfo->name = "My Custom File Type";

pinfo->extensions = ".abc.xyz.";

pinfo->version = "1.0.0.0";

pinfo->multipage = FALSE;

pinfo->pGetImage = MyGetImage;	// Plug-in's rountine to load the image and any other file info

pinfo->pGetInfo = MyGetInfo;	// Plug-in's routine to report image info (type,dimensions, etc)

pinfo->pGetOptions = MyOptions;	// Plug-in's routine to open a loading options dialog.

MyReadOptions();	// Read any saved loading options

return TRUE;

}

Your Plug-in's loading routine should use the malloc_image and malloc_comment function pointers to call ThumbsPlus functions to allocate image and other file information related data memory.  During file loading, your plug-in should use the progress and abort function pointers to periodically report progress back to ThumbsPlus and to allow the ThumbsPlus user to abort the file load by pressing Escape, respectively.  If an error is encountered, your plug-in should use the free_image and free_comment function pointers to free any allocated memory and return FALSE.

Click here to see the full sample source code for loading a windows bitmap file format.


ThumbsPlus - Plug-in API - plugin.h

#include <windows.h>

#define PI_MAX_DESCR	120

typedef enum
{
PI_TYPE_RASTER,
PI_TYPE_METAFILE,
PI_TYPE_ENHMETA
} PI_ITYPE;

typedef enum
{
PI_CLR_UNKNOWN,
PI_CLR_GRAY,
PI_CLR_PALETTE,
PI_CLR_RGB,
PI_CLR_BGR,
PI_CLR_RGBA,
PI_CLR_BGRA,
PI_CLR_CMYK,
PI_CLR_PALETTE1,
PI_CLR_PALETTE4
} PI_CTYPE;

typedef enum
{
PI_ORIENT_TOPLEFT,
PI_ORIENT_BOTLEFT
} PI_ORIENT;

#define PI_LOAD_THUMBNAILING	1	/* Loading for thumbnail purposes */
#define PI_LOAD_VIEWING	4	/* To be viewed (may view while loading */
#define PI_LOAD_CATALOG	16	/* Load for catalog or contact sheet */
#define PI_LOAD_SLIDESHOW	32	/* Load for slide show */
#define PI_LOAD_PREVIEW	64	/* for preview (may view while loading */
#define PI_LOAD_VIEWWHILELOAD	128	/* View while loading (not used for plug-ins) */

#define PI_POSTPROC_PREVIEWSTRIP	1	/* Strip SetViewpoint from metafile */
#define PI_POSTPROC_AUTOCROP	4	/* Auto-crop image */
#define PI_POSTPROC_LOADFILE	8	/* Load a different file */
#define PI_POSTPROC_LOADEXIF	16	/* Load EXIF info from a jpeg (usually thumbnail) file */

typedef PBYTE (WINAPI *PI_MALLOC)(int size);
typedef void (WINAPI *PI_FREE)(PBYTE pb);
typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PI_PROGRESS)(int done, int todo);
typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PI_ABORT)(void);
typedef LPCTSTR (WINAPI *PI_OPTFILE)(void);

typedef struct tagPI_CONFIG
{
PI_MALLOC	malloc_image;
PI_FREE	free_image;
PI_MALLOC	malloc_comment;
PI_FREE	free_comment;
PI_PROGRESS	progress;
PI_ABORT	abort;
TCHAR	inifile[MAX_PATH];
LPTSTR	basedir;
} PI_CONFIG, *PPI_CONFIG;

typedef struct tagPI_GETINFO
{
PI_ITYPE	image_type;
PI_CTYPE	color_type;
PI_ORIENT	orient;
DWORD	postproc;
int	pages;
int	width;
int	height;
int	xppm;
int	yppm;
int	bps;
TCHAR	descr[PI_MAX_DESCR];
TCHAR	filename[_MAX_PATH];
PBYTE	exif;
DWORD	exiflen;
} PI_GETINFO, *PPI_GETINFO;

typedef struct tagPI_COLOR
{
BYTE	r;
BYTE	g;
BYTE	b;
BYTE	a;
} PI_COLOR, *PPI_COLOR;

typedef struct tagPI_GETIMAGE
{
PI_ITYPE	image_type;
PI_CTYPE	color_type;
PI_ORIENT	orient;	//Raster only
DWORD	flags;	//Flags
DWORD	postproc;	//Post-processing requirements
int	width;
int	height;
int	scan_width;	//Raster only
int	xppm;	//Raster only
int	yppm;	//Raster only
int	bps;	//Raster only
int	page;	//Multi-page only
int	pages;	//Multi-page only
PI_COLOR	color_table[256];	//Raster, palette only
PBYTE	image;	//Raster only
LPTSTR	comment;
RECT	mfbox;	//Metafile only
HMETAFILE	hmf;	//Metafile only
HENHMETAFILE	hemf;	//Enh metafile only
COLORREF	bkgdcolor;	//Metafile only
TCHAR	errmessage[256];
TCHAR	filename[_MAX_PATH];	//File name for POSTPROC options
PBYTE	exif;	//Buffer with EXIF info
DWORD	exiflen;	//Length of buffer
int	rotation;	// Rotation (90, 180, 270)
PBYTE	icc;	//ICC color profile (future use)
} PI_GETIMAGE, *PPI_GETIMAGE;

typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PI_PFNGETINFO)(LPCTSTR filename, PPI_GETINFO pinfo);

typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PI_PFNGETIMAGE)(LPCTSTR filename, int pageno, PPI_GETIMAGE pimage);

typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PI_PFNSAVEIMAGE)(LPCTSTR filename, PPI_GETIMAGE pimage, PVOID popt);

typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PI_PFNOPTIONS)(HWND parent);

typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PI_PFNSAVEOPT)(HWND parent, PVOID popt);

#define PI_SAVE_BILEVEL	1
#define PI_SAVE_4PAL	2
#define PI_SAVE_8PAL	4
#define PI_SAVE_8GRAY	8
#define PI_SAVE_16GRAY	16	/* Future */
#define PI_SAVE_24RGB	32
#define PI_SAVE_48RGB	64	/* Future */
#define PI_SAVE_ICC	128	/* Future */

typedef struct tagPI_SAVETYPE
{
LPCTSTR	ext;
LPCTSTR	descr;
DWORD	savetypes;
} PI_SAVETYPE, *PPI_SAVETYPE;

typedef struct tagPI_PLUGINFO
{
DWORD	pi_version;
BOOL	multipage;
LPCTSTR	name;
LPCTSTR	extensions;
LPCTSTR	version;
PI_PFNGETINFO	pGetInfo;
PI_PFNGETIMAGE	pGetImage;
PI_PFNOPTIONS	pGetOptions;
PI_PFNSAVEIMAGE	pSaveImage;
PI_PFNSAVEOPT	pSaveOptions;
PPI_SAVETYPE	savetypes;
} PI_PLUGINFO, *PPI_PLUGINFO;

typedef int (WINAPI *PI_PFNPLUGININIT)(PPI_CONFIG ppc, PPI_PLUGINFO ppi);

#define PI_MallocImage(n)	(pi_config.malloc_image(n))
#define PI_FreeImage(n)	(pi_config.free_image(n))
#define PI_MallocComment(n)	(pi_config.malloc_text(n))
#define PI_FreeComment(n)	(pi_config.free_comment(n))
#define PI_MallocExif(n)	(pi_config.malloc_text(n))
#define PI_FreeExif(n)	(pi_config.free_comment(n))
#define PI_Progress(x,y)	(pi_config.progress(x,y))
#define PI_Abort()	(pi_config.abort())

#define PI_VERSION 	0x00010003


typedef PBYTE (WINAPI *PI_MALLOC)(int size);


typedef void (WINAPI *PI_FREE)(PBYTE pb);


typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PI_PROGRESS)(int done, int todo);


typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PI_ABORT)(void);


ThumbsPlus - Plug-in API - Bitmap Plug-in Sample
ThumbsPlus - Plug-in API - Bitmap Sample Plug-in

#include <windows.h>

#include <stdio.h>

#include "plugin.h"

#include "resource.h"

static HINSTANCE hinstDll;	// For resource loading (i.e., option dialog)

static PI_CONFIG pi_config;	// For config & callback info, from caller

BOOL __declspec(dllexport) WINAPI DllMain(HINSTANCE hinst, DWORD reason, LPVOID resrvd)

{

switch (reason)

{

case DLL_PROCESS_ATTACH:

hinstDll = hinst;

break;

case DLL_PROCESS_DETACH:

break;

}

return 1;

}

static BOOL BmpGetHeaders(FILE *fp, LPBITMAPFILEHEADER pbf, LPBITMAPINFOHEADER pbi)

{

if (fread(pbf, 1, sizeof(*pbf), fp) != sizeof(*pbf) )

return FALSE;

if (pbf->bfType != 'B' + ('M'<<8) )

return FALSE;

if (fread(pbi, 1, sizeof(*pbi), fp) != sizeof(*pbi))

return FALSE;

if (pbi->biBitCount != 1 && pbi->biBitCount != 4 && pbi->biBitCount != 8 && pbi->biBitCount != 24)

return FALSE;

if (pbi->biSize != sizeof(*pbi) || pbi->biPlanes != 1 || pbi->biCompression != BI_RGB)

return FALSE;

return TRUE;

}

static BOOL WINAPI BmpGetInfo(LPCTSTR filename, PPI_GETINFO pinfo)

{

BITMAPFILEHEADER bf;

BITMAPINFOHEADER bi;

FILE *fp = fopen(filename, "rb");

if (!fp || !BmpGetHeaders(fp, &bf, &bi)) {

if (fp) fclose(fp);

return FALSE;

}

pinfo->image_type = PI_TYPE_RASTER;

pinfo->pages = 1;

pinfo->bps = bi.biBitCount < 8 ? bi.biBitCount : 8;

pinfo->width = bi.biWidth;

pinfo->height = bi.biHeight;

pinfo->xppm = bi.biXPelsPerMeter;

pinfo->yppm = bi.biYPelsPerMeter;

pinfo->color_type = bi.biBitCount == 8 ? PI_CLR_PALETTE : PI_CLR_BGR;

strcpy(pinfo->descr, "Plug-in Windows Bitmap\r\n© 2002 Another Inc.");

pinfo->orient = PI_ORIENT_BOTLEFT;

fclose(fp);

return TRUE;

}

static BOOL LoadFail(FILE *fp)

{

if (fp)

fclose(fp);

return FALSE;

}

static BOOL WINAPI BmpGetImage(LPCTSTR filename, int pageno, PPI_GETIMAGE pimage)

{

BOOL do_flip = FALSE;

BITMAPFILEHEADER bf;

BITMAPINFOHEADER bi;

RGBQUAD colors[256] = { {0} };

FILE *fp = fopen(filename, "rb");

int clrtbl_len, image_len;

if (!fp || !BmpGetHeaders(fp, &bf, &bi))

return LoadFail(fp);

pimage->image_type = PI_TYPE_RASTER;

pimage->orient = PI_ORIENT_BOTLEFT;

pimage->bps = bi.biBitCount < 8 ? bi.biBitCount : 8;

pimage->width = bi.biWidth;

pimage->height = bi.biHeight;

pimage->xppm = bi.biXPelsPerMeter;

pimage->yppm = bi.biYPelsPerMeter;

pimage->color_type = bi.biBitCount == 8 ? PI_CLR_PALETTE : PI_CLR_BGR;

pimage->scan_width = ( (bi.biWidth * bi.biBitCount + 7) / 8 + 3) & (~3);

clrtbl_len = bf.bfOffBits - ftell(fp);

if (clrtbl_len > 0 && bi.biBitCount <= 8) {

int i;

clrtbl_len = min(clrtbl_len, 1024);

if (fread(colors, 1, clrtbl_len, fp) != (DWORD)clrtbl_len)

return LoadFail(fp);

for (i=0; i<256; i++) {

pimage->color_table[i].r = colors[i].rgbRed;

pimage->color_table[i].g = colors[i].rgbGreen;

pimage->color_table[i].b = colors[i].rgbBlue;

}

}

fseek(fp, 0, SEEK_END);

image_len = ftell(fp) - bf.bfOffBits;

if ( (pimage->image = PI_MallocImage(image_len)) == NULL)

return LoadFail(fp);

fseek(fp, bf.bfOffBits, SEEK_SET);

PI_Progress(10, 100);

if (fread(pimage->image, 1, image_len, fp) != (DWORD)image_len)

return LoadFail(fp);

fclose(fp);

PI_Progress(100, 100);

return TRUE;

}

#define INI_SEC "CustomBMP"

static BOOL fSampleOpt1 = FALSE;

static void WriteOptions(void)

{

TCHAR temp[20];

sprintf(temp, "%d", fSampleOpt1);

WritePrivateProfileString(INI_SEC, "BMPSampleOpt1", temp, pi_config.inifile);

}

static void ReadOptions(void)

{

fSampleOpt1 = GetPrivateProfileInt(INI_SEC, "BMPSampleOpt1", fSampleOpt1, pi_config.inifile);

}

static BOOL CALLBACK OptionsDlg(HWND hdlg, UINT msg, WPARAM wparam, LPARAM lparam)

{

switch (msg)

{

case WM_INITDIALOG:

CheckDlgButton(hdlg, BPI_SAMPLEOPT, fSampleOpt1);

break;

case WM_COMMAND:

switch (LOWORD(wparam))

{

case IDOK:

fSampleOpt1 = IsDlgButtonChecked(hdlg, BPI_SAMPLEOPT);

WriteOptions();

EndDialog(hdlg, TRUE);

break;

case IDCANCEL:

EndDialog(hdlg, FALSE);

break;

default:

return FALSE;

}

break;

default:

return FALSE;

}

return TRUE;

}

static BOOL WINAPI BmpOptions(HWND hwnd)

{

return DialogBox(hinstDll, MAKEINTRESOURCE(DLG_OPTIONS), hwnd, OptionsDlg);

}

BOOL __declspec(dllexport) WINAPI PI_PluginInfo(PPI_CONFIG ppc, PPI_PLUGINFO pinfo)

{

pi_config = *ppc;

pinfo->pi_version = PI_VERSION;

pinfo->name = "Windows BMP";

pinfo->extensions = ".bmp.dib.";

pinfo->version = "1.0.0.0";

pinfo->multipage = FALSE;

pinfo->pGetImage = BmpGetImage;

pinfo->pGetInfo = BmpGetInfo;

pinfo->pGetOptions = BmpOptions; // NULL;

ReadOptions();

return TRUE;

}


Popup Image Tips Setup
 Main Window - Options | Preferences - Thumbnail View - Popup Tips Setup

Use this dialog to configure when and how ThumbsPlus will display popup image tips in the thumbnail view.

Show thumbnail. Check this option to display a thumbnail image on the popup image tip.

Only when tip is larger than thumbnails. Check this option to display the thumbnail on the tip only when it is larger than the currently displayed thumbnail size.

Display size %. Enter the desired percentage size for the thumbnail displayed on the popup image tip.

Display full path name on tip window.

Always. Check this option to always show the full path name of the current thumbnail's image on the image tip.

Never. Check this option to never show the full path name on the image tip.

Only when showing galleries, found lists or child folders. Check this option to only show the full path name on the image tip if the current thumbnail view is displaying a gallery, found list or child folders.


Prompt to save modified batch sets. This option causes ThumbsPlus to prompt to save batch sets that have been modified.


View Window - Transform
View Window - Transform Menu

File 	Edit 	Image 	Transform	View 	Help
Click on the links above to see extended information on each menu.

Resize	R	Resizes the current image.
Rotate	J	Rotates the current image.
Rotate to Line	O	Rotates the image to a reference line.
Turn & Mirror
Turn 90° CW	Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Right	Turns the image 90 degrees clockwise.
Turn 90° CCW	Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Left	Turns the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
Turn 180°	Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Down	Turns the image 180 degrees clockwise.
Flip Horizontally	H	Flips the images from left to right.
Flip Vertically	V	Flips the image from top to bottom.
Fix Aspect	X	Adjusts aspect ratios in images with non-square pixels.
Trim to Photo Proportion (inches)		Trims the image to a proportional photo size (in inches).
Trim to Photo Proportion (cm)		Trims the image to a proportional photo size (in centimeters).
Trim to Paper Proportion		Trims the image to a proportional paper size.
Trim to Proportion		Trims the image to a proportional size.
Trim to Exactly		Trims the image to a specific size in pixels.
Autocrop	F4	Automatically crops off image borders with similar color values.
Crop to Selection	Ctrl+R	Crops the image to the selected area.
Crop / Add Borders...	P	Crops (or adds borders to) the image by user entered values.
Quick Batch		Performs a batch process on the open image.


View Window - Transform | Resize
View Window - Transform | Resize...	R

    Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Transform | Resize...

Use this dialog box to resize an image.

New Size. Various options for the new size of the image, include specific percentages and specific sizes. You can also select Window to size the image to the current window size, or Custom to enter specific values.

Pixels. When New Size is set to Custom, these values may be entered either as exact pixel measurements, or as percentages of the original.

Resolution. Shows the current resolution settings.  Click the [Set] button to select the resolution settings.  See: Edit | Set Resolution for more information on image resolution settings.

Printed size. Enter the desired width and height in inches (or millimeters) and the Pixels entries will be automatically calculated based on the Resolution settings above.

Aspect Fit. This selection sets how ThumbsPlus treats an original whose dimensions are of a different ratio than the destination. In other words, it controls the size of the destination file.

Both	The final image fits in the specified rectangle as closely as possible.
Height	The final image must be the same height as the specified height.
Width	The final image will be the same width as the specified width.
Ignore	The aspect ratio of the original is ignored.
Background color. When rotating or zooming, or resizing to a size that does not match the original aspect ratio, a background is added. Here you may select the color of that background.

Interpolation. Use this drop-down list to select the type of interpolation (resampling) which ThumbsPlus will do when resizing or rotating:

Nearest neighbor (fast)	This is the fastest resize method, but the least pleasing because it performs no pixel interpolation. Usually results in significant "jaggies."
Bi-linear (good).	Computes weighted average of four pixels, based on computed position from the original source. This is slower but better than Nearest Neighbor, and considerably faster than bi-cubic.
Resample (better).	Use resample to properly interpolate colors when making an image smaller.
Bi-cubic (better).	Computes cubic convolution of sixteen pixels, based on computed position from the original source. This produces the most accurate results, but is significantly slower than bi-linear interpolation.
Best fit for sizing.	Automatically selects bi-cubic when making an image larger and resample when making it smaller.
Autocrop after resizing.  Select this option to have the image automatically cropped after the rotate/resize operations.  See: View Window Menu, Image | Autocrop.

Reduce only. (Only in batch processing). Select this option to resize only those images that are larger than the specified size.

ThumbsPlus remembers the last settings from this dialog box so that you can re-use them for additional images, or for batch processing.

Note: If you rotate or resize a 256 (or fewer) color image and select interpolation, ThumbsPlus will automatically promote it to 24-bit (truecolor) to be able to interpolate intervening pixels. You can then use the Image | Depth... selection from the view window menu to adjust the colors to the number you desire. Likewise, ThumbsPlus will promote any grayscale image less that 256 levels to an 8-bit grayscale image.


View Window - Transform | Trim to Photo Proportion (cm) | 50 x 74, ...

Use these menu selections to trim the open image to a printable photo size in inches.

A masked selection rectangle will display, indicating the area to be trimmed.  You can move and resize this area using the mouse and then click Edit | Apply from the view window menu or simply press the [Enter] key to trim the image to you selected area.


View Window - Image | Process | Convert to Grayscale
View Window - Image | Process | Convert to Grayscale	Shift+Y

Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Process | Convert to Grayscale

Use this menu selection to desaturate the colors in the open image.  The resulting image will be black & white (8 bit grayscale) with original contrast preserved.


View Window - Edit | Figure Area
View Window - Edit | Figure Area...

Use this function to compute selected areas in terms of other specified units.

Area (pixels). Displays the total number of pixels in the selected area of the image.

Use image resolution. Check this option to use the image resolution when converting pixels to output units.

Measured unit. Select the desired unit of measure for pixels in the image.

Dots per unit / Units per dot. Select Dots per unit if a pixel's size is less than one full unit. Select Units per dot if a pixel's size is greater than one unit.

Output unit. Select the output unit of measure.  This measured unit above will be converted to this measure.

Area. Displays the area in converted units.


View Window - View | Actions...
View Window - View | Actions...	Shift+F8

Use this menu selection to view any editting operations that have been applied to the open image.

Click the [Create batch] button to create a new batch process containing steps from the current list of actions.


Reduce only. (Only in batch processing). Select this option to resize only those images that are larger than the specified size.


Main Window - Help | Program Updates...

Use the above dialog box to configure when and how ThumbsPlus will check for program updates online at the Cerious Software web site.

Automatically check for updates.

Never.  Check this option if you do not want ThumbsPlus to automatically check for program updates.

Update interval list. Select the update interval from the drop down list.  The available options are:

Every time you start ThumbsPlus.  	Update checks at each program startup.

Once per day.  	Daily update checks.

Once per week.  	Weekly update checks.

Once per month.  	Monthly update checks.

Connect using

FTP.  Download any program updates via FTP (File Transfer Protocol).

HTTP.  Download any program updates via HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol).

Bypass Internet proxy settings. Check this option to attempt to connect directly to a specified internet host (bypassing the Windows Internet proxy settings) when performing functions such as File | Online Photos | (Site) | Upload selected... and Help | Program Updates....

Send anonymous usage information. Check this option to send Cerious Software usage accounting information.  The data sent to Cerious Software contains NO personal information whatsoever and is ONLY sent whenever a scheduled program update check occurs.  The only information collected and transmitted is usage accounting data for many of the functions in ThumbsPlus.  By collecting this information, we at Cerious, hope to better serve the overall needs of our ThumbsPlus users by determining how often the surveyed functions are being used.  To help us continue quality improvements to ThumbsPlus, we request that you leave this option enabled.

Check now!  Click this button to check online for program updates immediately.

Note: Automatic checking for updates is done only when starting ThumbsPlus.  At startup, the last checked date is compared with the current date when deciding to check for updates.


Main Window - Edit | Copy Keywords
Main Window - Edit | Copy Keywords	Ctrl+Alt+K

Use this menu selection to copy the currently selected thumbnails keywords to the clipboard.  If no files are selected, this menu option is disabled.


Main Window - Image | Quick Process | Modify File Info
Main Window - Image | Quick Process | Modify File Info	Ctrl+Shift+Q

Use this dialog box to set the image resolution, file comment and/or file modification date and time.

Resolution

Change. Check this option to enable setting the image resolution.

Horizontal. Enter the horizontal resolution value.

Vertical. Enter the vertical resolution value.

Dots per inch, Dots per centimetre. Unit of measurement.

Comment

Leave alone. Check to leave any existing image comments unchanged.

Replace. Check to replace any existing image comments with the comment text entered.

Append. Check to append the entered comment to the end of any existing image comments.

Copy from annotation. Check to copy the database annotation of this file's thumbnail to the image comments.

Comments. Use this edit box to enter the desired file comments.

File modification date & time

Leave alone. Check this option to leave the file date & time unchanged.

Set to EXIF date/time. Check to set the file date and time to EXIF date/time stored in the file.

Set to current date/time. Check to set the file date and time to the current system date/time.

Set to specific date/time. Check to set the file date and time to a user selected date and time.  Click the [Select] button to pick the desired date and time.

Color Profile

Leave alone. Check this option to leave the image color profile information unchanged.

Remove. Check this option to remove any existing color profile information from the image.

Replace. Check this option to replace the image color profile information with a color profile selected from those available in the dropdown list.


Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | File Info | Set File Date...

Use this dialog box to select how ThumbsPlus should set  the output file's date & time for all files processsed in a batch process.

File modification date & time

Set to EXIF date/time. Check to set the file date and time to EXIF date/time stored in the file.

Set to current date/time. Check to set the file date and time to the current system date/time.

Set to specific date/time. Check to set the file date and time to user selected date/time.  Click the [Select] button to pick the desired date and time.


Main Window - Image | Batch Process - Batch Steps - Add | Do Set...

Use this dialog box to select the batch process set to call from within another batch process.

Set to call. Select the desired batch set from this drop down list.  All previously defined sets will display here.

Generate output files.  Check this box to have ThumbsPlus create the output files specified in the called batch set's Output Details.  This setting is unchecked, by default, to avoid the creation of unnecessary output files for a called batch.


Main Window - Image | Twain Setup - Setup Button

Prefix. Enter or select text prefix for the file name.

Next #. Enter the next sequence number to use in the generated file names.

Increment. Enter an amount to be used to increment the sequence number during generation.

Suffix. Enter or select text suffix for the file name.

For Duplicate Names

Overwrite existing file. Select to overwrite existing files during file name generation.

Use next available. Select to skip to the next available sequence number if the file exists.

Find highest used. Select to skip all existing file names and begin with the next available sequence number.

Leading Zeros

Enabled. Select to enable zero padding for the sequence number in the file name.

Digits. Enter the number of digits to pad for leading zeros.

Examples

Displays the next two file names that will be generated.


Tree - Expand Branch (keyboard only)
Main Window - Tree - Expand Branch (keyboard only)	*

This option expands the currently selected folder entry in the folder tree  and all of its sub-folders

If Indicate Expandable is checked, the folders which have sub-folders are marked with a '+'.  If Indicate Thumbnails is checked, folders are color-coded to indicate the presence of thumbnails.


Edit | Tag Selected
Main Window - Edit | Tag Selected	Alt +,

View Window - File | Thumbnail | Tag Thumbnail	,  or  Alt+,

ThumbsPlus can tag selected files by placing associated thumbnails in a special gallery named (Tagged Images).  Files can be added to the tagged images gallery by selecting a group of files in the thumbnail view.and pressing Alt+,.  Open images are tagged by selecting File | Thumbnail | Tag Thumbnail from the view window menu or by pressing  , or Alt+,.


Main Window - Options | Customize - Colors - Select Window Skin

Use this dialog to configure ThumbsPlus dialog box skinning.

Use default skin. Check this option to make ThumbsPlus use its internal image skin.  Uncheck to enter you own image file to be used as the window skin.

Skin file. Enter the full path name of the image file to be used as the window skin.  Any recognized ThumbsPlus file type may be used. You can also click the [...] button to browse for the desired image file.

Skin system dialogs. Check this option to skin all dialogs opened by ThumbsPlus, including any standard Windows system dialogs.

Tint skin to desktop colors. Check this option to replace the window skin colors with the current Windows color selection for 3D Objects.  This color setting is located on the Windows Display Properties dialog, Appearance tab.

Tile skins with dimensions less than. Check this option to tile skin images accross dialog boxes when the skin image file dimensions are less than those entered in the width x height entry fields.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Assign Keywords | Regenerate
Main Window - Thumbnail | Assign Keywords | Regenerate	Shift+Alt+K

Use this menu selection to remove and regenerate all keywords from the selected thumbnails in the thumbnail view.  The keywords will be regenerated based on the current keyword settings under Options | Preferences - Keywords.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Rescan | In Folder

This option completely recreates thumbnails for all recognized files in the current folder.

See: Thumbnail | Scan Folder for more information on scanning folders.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Rescan | In Tree

This option completely recreates thumbnails for all recognized files in the current folder and any of it's sub-folders.

See: Thumbnail | Scan Tree for more information on scanning folders and sub-folders.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Rescan | On Disk

This option completely recreates thumbnails for all recognized files on the currently select disk.

See: Thumbnail | Scan Disk for more information on scanning disks.


Main Window - Window | Open New Window
Main Window - Window | Open New Window	Ctrl+Alt+N

Use this menu selection to run launch another instance of ThumbsPlus.

The start up settings in Options | Preferences - Startup will be used by the launched copy.


Main Window - Edit | Go to End of Selection
Main Window - Edit | Go to End of Selection	Alt+End

Use this menu selection to scroll the thumbnail view to display the last selected file.


Main Window - Edit | Go to Start of Selection
Main Window - Edit | Go to Start of Selection	Alt+Home

Use this menu selection to scroll the thumbnail view to display the first selected file.


Main Window - File | Open with
Main Window - File | Open with | [External Program]

View Window - File | Open with | [External Program]

Use this menu selection to open the currently selected image(s) (from the Main Window) or currently opened image (in a View Window) using the selected external program

To configure external programs for the Main Window, see: Options | Customize - Toolbar - External Program.

For the View Window external programs, see: View | Customize - Toolbar - External Program.


Keyboard - View Window

See also: Keyboard selecting and scrolling for more information on the keyboard interface for manipulating image files.

Menu accelerator keystrokes:

F1	Help | Contents

F2	File | Dispose | Rename File...

F3	File | Thumbnail | Make Thumbnail / Selection

F4	Transform | Autocrop

F5	View | Full Screen

F6	View | Zoom | Fit All

F7	View | Wallpaper | Centered

F8	Edit | Clone

F9	View | Preferences

F10	When in full-screen mode, this brings up the view window menu.

Tab, Shift+Tab	Tabs and backtabs between any other open view windows.

Enter	Edit | Apply

Space	File | Load | Next file

Backspace	File | Load | Previous file

Delete	File | Dispose | Delete File

Pause	Pauses & continues a slide show

Esc	- If a selection is made: cancels the selection.
- If processing is in progress: cancels the process.
- Otherwise: closes the image.File | Close

*	Edit | Goto Page...

,	File | Thumbnail | Tag Thumbnail

.	File | Move to | (Favorite Folder)

/	Edit | Split pages...

=	View | Align Views

[	View | Synch Views

]	View | Unsynch Views

0, 1	Set zoom level to 1x (1:1).

2 - 9	Set zoom level to 2-9x.

A	Image | Stamp...

B	Image | Convert to Bitmap...

C	Image | Adjust Colors...

D	Image | Color Depth...

E	Edit | Set Resolution...

F	Image | Filter | Select Filter...

G	View | Assumed Gamma...

H	Transform | Turn & Mirror | Flip Horizontally

I	Image | Invert Colors

J	Transform | Rotate...

K	Image | Remove Background

L	View | Zoom | Gridlines

M	Image | Histogram...

N	Edit | Edit/Add Comments...

O	Image | Rotate to Line

P	Transform | Crop / Add Borders...

R	Transform | Resize...

S	View | Status Line

T	View | Toolbar

U	Image | Count Unique Colors...

V	Transform | Turn & Mirror | Flip Vertically

W	Image | Read Watermark...

X	Transform | Turn & Mirror | Fix Aspect

Y	Image | Swap Red & Blue

Z	View | Zoom | In

Alt+,	File | Thumbnail | Tag Thumbnail

Alt+Z	View | Zoom | Arbitrary...

Alt+F4	File | Close

Alt+Page Down	Edit | Next Page

Alt+Page Up	Edit | Previous Page

Alt+Enter	File | Properties...

Ctrl+Num 2	Transform | Turn & Mirror | Turn 180°

Ctrl+Num 4	Transform | Turn & Mirror | Turn 90° CCW

Ctrl+Num 6	Transform | Turn & Mirror | Turn 90°

Ctrl+1 - Ctrl+5	File | Open with | (External Program)

Ctrl+A	Edit | Select All

Ctrl+C	Edit | Copy All / Selection

Ctrl+E	File | Thumbnail | Annotate...

Ctrl+F	Image | Filter | (Last Filter)

Ctrl+G	File | Go to Folder

Ctrl+I	Edit | Invert Selection

Ctrl+K	File | Thumbnail | Assign Keywords | Other...

Ctrl+M	File | Send to...

Ctrl+P	File | Print | Current page...

Ctrl+Q	View | Customize...

Ctrl+R	Transform | Crop to Selection

Ctrl+S	File | Save

Ctrl+U	File | Thumbnail | Assign User Fields

Ctrl+V	Edit | Paste

Ctrl+W	View | Zoom | Fit Width

Ctrl+Z	Edit | Undo

Ctrl+F1	Help | Search for Help On...

Ctrl+F2	File | Dispose | Copy File...

Ctrl+F4	Window | Minimize All Views

Ctrl+F6	View | Autosize Window

Ctrl+F7	View | Wallpaper | Remove

Ctrl+F12	View | Tile Views

Ctrl+Alt+Down Arrow	Transform | Turn & Mirror | Turn 180°

Ctrl+Alt+Left Arrow	Transform | Turn & Mirror | Turn 90° CCW

Ctrl+Alt+Right Arrow	Transform | Turn & Mirror | Turn 90°

Ctrl+Alt+S	File | Save & Close

Ctrl+Alt+Z	View | Zoom | To Selection

Ctrl+Shift+C	Image | Color Profile...

Ctrl+Shift+E	Image | Process | Semi-Sepia Tone

Ctrl+Shift+R	File | Load | Reload file

Ctrl+Shift+S	File | Save Selection As...

Ctrl+Shift+Z	Edit | Revert to Saved

Ctrl+Shift+F4	View | Show All Views

Ctrl+Shift+F7	View | Wallpaper | Stretched

Ctrl+Shift+F12	View | Synch Views

Shift+Delete	File | Thumbnail | Remove Thumbnail

Shift+A	Image | Process | Auto Color Balance

Shift+B	Image | Combine...

Shift+C	Image | Process | Contrast Enhancement

Shift+D	Image | Process | Digital Camera Cleanup

Shift+E	Image | Process | Sepia Tone

Shift+G	Image | Process | General Enhancement

Shift+I	Edit | Edit IPTC Info ...

Shift+J	Image | Process | Cleanup Jpeg

Shift+L	Image | Process | Fluorescent Lighting

Shift+N	Image | Process | Photo Negative

Shift+O	Image | Color Balance...

Shift+P	Image | Replace Colors...

Shift+Q	Image | Process | Equalize Channels

Shift+R	Image | Remove Red Eye...

Shift+S	File | Save As...

Shift+T	Image | Process | Stretch Channels

Shift+V	Image | Process | Improve Video Capture

Shift+W	Image | Embed Watermark...

Shift+Y	Image | Process | Convert to Grayscale

Shift+Z	View | Zoom Out

Shift+F2	File | Dispose | Move File...

Shift+F4	File | Close All

Shift+F5	View | Tile Image

Shift+F6	View | Zoom | Maintain Aspect Ratio

Shift+F7	View | Wallpaper | Tiled

Shift+F8	View | Actions...

Shift+Alt+Z	View | Zoom | Original Size

Shift+Alt+F7	View | Wallpaper | Fully Stretched


View Window - File Save As | JPEG 2000 Options

This dialog box will be displayed when saving a file to a JPEG 2000 file format.

Lossless.  Check this options to save in JPEG 2000 format without compression.

Compression slider. Select a compression value, between 2 and 100. Lower values yield less compression (with higher quality) and higher values yield more compression (with reduced quality).

Convert to YUV colorspace. Check this option to wite the JPEG as a YUV color space image JPEG.  The YUV colorspace is better suited for the wavelet compression algorithm used by JPEG 2000.

Use derived quantization. Check this option to.use derived quantization.

Resolution levels.  Enter the number of resolution levels here. The recommended minimum level is 5.


View Window - File Save As | Icon Options

This dialog box will be displayed when saving a file to a Windows ICON file format.

Formats

Monochrome. Stores a bi-level image within the icon file at the specified dimensions of  Width & Height.

16 Colors. Stores a 16 color palette image within the icon file.

256 Colors. Stores a 256 color palette image within the icon file.

Width & Height. Selects the desired dimension of the specified formats to be stored in the icon file.  The supported dimensions are 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 and 64x64.


type_JP2K
J2K, JP2: JPEG 2000 Files

JPEG 200 is a standard file format for image compression produced by the ISO which defines a set of lossless (bit-preserving) and lossy compression methods for coding continous-tone, bi-level, gray scale, or color digital still images.  Why another image format?  JPEG 2000 delivers a high degree of control of quality while yielding excellent compression results.


Main Window - Options | File Loading - EXIF

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

This tab sets the options for loading EXIF information for supporting file types.

Convert enumerated fields to text. Check this option to convert any enumerated EXIF field values to their respective text descriptions.

Copy User Comment to image comment.  Check this option to copy the EXIF User Comment field contents into the image comments (JPEG only).  Note: The User Comment is appended to the end of any existing image comments.

Display all EXIF fields. If Checked all EXIF fields found in an open image (not just those explicitly recognized by ThumbsPlus) will display on the File | Properties - Info tab and in the Select Items dialog.

Convert dates to Windows format. Check this option to format EXIF dates to display using the current Windows date format.

Show shutter speed as. Select the desired display format for EXIF shutter speed and exposure time value formatting.  The available options are: Fraction, Milliseconds and Seconds.


Main Window - Found List Popup Menu - Requery Now
Found List Popup Menu - Requery Now

Use this menu selection to refresh the selected found list by reexecuting the original query constructed using Edit | Find by Query.  To view the found list query properties, simply double click on the found list OR right click on it and then select Properties from the popup menu.


Synchronize panoramic images horizontally.  This option causes ThumbsPlus to display synched view windows in a horizontal layout when viewing two images having a "width>height" aspect ratio.  Note: When selecting more than 2 images to display in synched viewing mode this option is ignored.


DDE, Web Pages
WebPages (DDE Command)

Syntax:
WebPages(scheme-name;output-path;input-path;selection-option;wait-flag)

Abbreviation:

WP(scheme-name;output-path;input-path;selection-option;wait-flag)

Executes a defined Web Page Wizard scheme.

Parameters:

scheme-name	This value can be any web page wizard scheme name defined

in ThumbsPlus.

Optional Parameters (If omitted, ThumbsPlus will use the settings from the specified scheme):

output-path     The complete folder path where ThumbsPlus will

create the generated HTML and graphics files.

input-path	The complete folder path where ThumbsPlus will

look for the input files.

selection-option

0 - Selected files

1 - Current folder

wait-flag	WAIT - Wait for web page task to complete before returning.

(empty) - Do not wait for task completion - return immediately.

Examples:

WebPages(ALASKA)	- Calls the WebPage Wizard scheme named ALASKA, using all scheme settings.

WebPages(VACATION;C:\WebPages\Vacation;D:\Images\Vacation;1;WAIT)	- Calls the scheme VACATION with the specified overrides.


Show full path in title bar. Check this option to have the full pathname of the open file display in the view window's title bar.


Loop at end of show.  Causes ThumbsPlus to continue the slide show starting again with the first file in the folder or selection.


Resample when reduced. Check this option to resample (properly interpolates colors) when reducing an images.


Interpolate when stretched. Check this option to perform Bi-linear pixel interpolation when stretching images to fit the screen.  This results in smoother color representation, but slightly slower display times.  See also: View Window - Transform | Resize for more information on pixel interpolation in ThumbsPlus.


Enable color management.  Enables Windows color management in the slide show.


Type. Select the transition effect to use between slides.


Speed. Select a relative speed from 1 (fastest) to 10 (slowest) for the transition display.


Direction. Selection the direction for the desired transition effect.


Build list of files for previous/next when viewed from external source.  Check this option to have ThumbsPlus initialize the view window's previous/next file list when the view window is opened from Windows Explorer or other external sources.  This allows you to press [Spacebar] or [Backspace] to view the next or previous files in the same folder.


Enable Windows color management (ICM). Check this option and then click the [Setup...] button to configure Windows Color Management in ThumbsPlus.


Thumbnail | Make from Clipboard
Main Window - Thumbnail | Make from Clipboard	Ctrl+Alt+F3

Use this menu selection to make thumbnail(s) for the selected file(s) using the contents of the windows clipboard.

If you have Create persistent .tp_jptn files for thumbnails made from clipboard enabled under Options | Preferences | Thumbnails, Thumbsplus will keep a copy of the thumbnail image (named with the .tp_jptn file extension)  in the same folder as the selected file.  This allows ThumbsPlus to remake the thumbnail later.


Change. Check this option to enable setting the image resolution.


Horizontal. Enter the horizontal resolution value.


Vertical. Enter the vertical resolution value.


Leave alone. Check to leave any existing image comments unchanged.


Dots per inch, Dots per centimetre. Unit of measurement.


Replace. Check to replace any existing image comments with the comment text entered.


Append. Check to append the entered comment to the end of any existing image comments.


Copy from annotation. Check to copy the database annotation of this file's thumbnail to the image comments.


Comments. Use this edit box to enter the desired file comments.


Leave alone. Check this option to leave the file date & time unchanged.


Set to EXIF date/time. Check to set the file date and time to EXIF date/time stored in the file.


Set to current date/time. Check to set the file date and time to the current system date/time.


Set to specific date/time. Check to set the file date and time to a user selected date and time.


[Select]. Click this button to pick the desired date and time.


Leave alone. Check this option to leave the image color profile information unchanged.


Remove. Check this option to remove any existing color profile information from the image.


Replace. Check this option to replace the image color profile information with a color profile selected from those available in the dropdown list.


Never.  Check this option if you do not want ThumbsPlus to automatically check for program updates.


Update interval list. Select the update interval from the drop down list.  The available options are:
Every time you 	Update checks at each
   start ThumbsPlus.	     program startup.
Once per day.  	Daily update checks.
Once per week.  	Weekly update checks.
Once per month.  	Monthly update checks.


FTP.  Download any program updates via FTP (File Transfer Protocol).


HTTP.  Download any program updates via HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol).


Bypass Internet proxy settings.  Check this option to attempt to connect directly to a specified internet host (bypassing the Windows Internet proxy settings) when checking for program updates.


Check now!  Click this button to check online for program updates immediately.


  This decoration indicates the file has been tagged in ThumbsPlus.  Tagged files display under the special gallery named (Tagged).


  This decoration indicates the file is a read-only file.  File attributes are displayed under File | Properties, on the Physical dialog tab.


	Desktop
The desktop branch of the folder tree displays all files and folders located in the Windows "Desktop" special folder.


	Up Folder.
This button causes ThumbsPlus to select the current folder's parent folder and display it's contents in the thumbnail view.


Main Window - Edit | Select by | Tagged
Main Window - Edit | Select by | Tagged	Ctrl+Alt+T

This option selects all files matching in the thumbnail view which have been tagged.


Main Window - Edit | Select by | File Attributes
Main Window - Edit | Select by | File Attributes	Ctrl+Alt+A

This option prompts for the desired file attributes (i.e., Read-only, Hidden, etc) and selects all files having those attributes.

Attributes These check boxes control which file attributes will be used for file selection.

Not. Use this option to select files without the checked attributes.

Read-only. Use this option to set or clear the "Read only" file attribute.

Hidden. Use this option to set or clear the "Hidden" file attribute.

System. Use this option to set or clear the "System" file attribute.

Append to existing selection. Check this option to have ThumbsPlus retain the exisitng selection and add any attribute selected files.


order_scandinavian
Ordering in Norway, Sweden & Denmark

Please contact:

Multiplan AS
Karl Johans gate 20
0156 Oslo

Phone: 	+47 22424335

Fax:	+47 22422136

E-mail:	sales@multiplan.no

Web:	http//www.multiplan.no


Main WIndow - Help | Enter Registration Info...

Use this menu selection to enter your registration information, user name, license code and number of users.

Name. Enter your registered user name in this field.

Code. Enter your registered license code.

Users. Enter the number of licensed users for you license.

License.  This field displays the current license type description for the information entered.

Note: This function enabled the registered release functions, including network support, ODBC database connectivity and professional camera formats.


Balance. This slider controls the audio balance between the left and right channels.


DDE, ShowWindow
ShowWindow (DDE Command)

Syntax:	ShowWindow(flag)

Abbreviation:	SW(flag)

This function showss or hides the main ThumbsPlus window.  If flag is '1' the window is shown; '0' the window is minimized.


DDE, ShowFiles
ShowFiles (DDE Command)

Syntax:	ShowFiles(mask)

Abbreviation:	SF(mask)

This function locates a file. The thumbnail view is positioned at the file's folder, and the file itself is selected. You can use a file mask to specify a set of files to select; for example:

LocateFile(C:\Temp\*.*)


DDE, Acquire
Acquire (DDE Command)

Syntax:	Acquire(source)

Abbreviation:	A(source)

Locates the specified TWAIN source and then performs a TWAIN Acquire operation.


Mute. This button toggles the volume muting state.


Play.  This button starts playback of the current media file


Pause.  This button pauses playback of the current media file   If the file is currently paused, subsequent clicks of this button will advance the media by 1/10th of a second.


Stop.  This button stops playback of the current media file.  The playback position is reset to the start of the file.


Position.  This slider controls the playback position in the current media file.  You may drag the slider left to rewind frames and right to advance frames.


Rewind.  This button resets the playback position to the start of the current media file.  The playback state (play, pause, stop) is unaffected.


Forward.  This button advances the playback position at faster than normal rate.  The playback state (play, pause, stop) is unaffected.


Unwind.  This button sets the playback position to the end of the current media file.  The playback state (play, pause, stop) is unaffected.


Reverse.  This button rewinds the playback position at faster than normal rate.  The playback state (play, pause, stop) is unaffected.


Repeat.  This button toggles the playback looping state.  The looped playback state is initially set to the Auto repeat setting under Options | File Loading - Movies/Sounds.


Thumbnail.  This button creates a thumbnail for the media file at the current playback position.  Playback is paused while the thumbnail is being made and resumed after the thumbnail is completed.


Options.  This button opens the Movie / Sound loading options dialog, also available from Options | File Loading.


Display Size.  This field displays the current displayed zoom percentage of the current video media file.  The initial zoom percentage is controled by the Initial Size setting under under Options | File Loading - Movies/Sounds.


Percent Complete.  This field displays the current playback position as a percentage of the total media file duration.


Length.  This field displays the total playback length of the current media file.  The units for this field are set in the Time display setting under Options | File Loading - Movies/Sounds.


Elapsed Time.  This field displays the current playback position of the media file as elapsed time.  The units for this field are set in the Time display setting under Options | File Loading - Movies/Sounds.


Playback Rate.  This slider controls the playback speed of the current media file.  You may drag the slider left to decrease the rate and right to increase.  The minimum rate is 1/100th normal speed and the maximum is 2X normal speed.


Volume. This slider controls the audio volume level.  The maximum audio level is 100% of the Windows audio level setting.


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Linking to Images
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Linking to Images

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Link directly to the original images. Select this option to have ThumbsPlus generate links directly to the image file itself.  The image will be loaded into the browser without an outer HTML document.

Link to a Javascript pop-up window. Select this option to link to Javascript code that will create a pop-up window containing the image file.

Link to separate html pages built for each image. Select this option to generate HTML documents for each image file.  See: Image Page Details for more information.

Convert images. Check this option and select an image file type (.JPG, .GIF, or .PNG) to have ThumbsPlus convert the selected images to the desired web format before processing.  If you select .JPG as your image file type, you can sel the desired Jpeg Quality as well.  See: JPEG Save Options for more information about the quality setting.

Maximum size (Width x Height). Check this option and enter the widht and height values to specify the maximum dimensions for converted images.

Target window name.  Enter the HTML target name that identifies which browser window (or frame) in which linked image will be opened.  If blank, the image will opened in the same browser window.  Please refer to your HTML documentation for reserved HTML target names.


Main Window - Images | Web Page Wizard - Image Page
 Main Window - Image | Web Page Wizard - Image Page

Web Page Style	Table Format	Thumbnail Format	Input Files	File Information

Miscellaneous Options	Web Page Text	Linking to Images	Image Page Details

File Locations	Output Location	Custom Locations	Ready to Build

Click on the Links above or the Back and Next buttons below to see other Web Wizard dialog help topics.

Note: This dialog only displays when Link to separate html pages built for each image is selected on the Linking to Images dialog.

Select an image page template to use. Use this list to select the desired image page template to use when generating the image page HTML files.

Page title. Use this field to select the title text for the image page.  This text is included in the <TITLE> html tag and is displayed on the browser title bar.

Select Items.  Click this button to select which items to display beneath each image.  See also: Selecting Items for more information.


Web Page Wizard Style Templates
Web Page Wizard - Style Templates

The following is a sample web page wizard style template.  Style templates are simply HTML text files (named with a .TPT extension) which also include special tokens for the Web Page Wizard.  The tokens below appear in boldface text.

<html>

<head>

<title>{{Title}}</title>

</head>

<body bgcolor="#000000">

<font color="#DDDDDD" face="arial">

<center>

<h2>{{Heading}}</h2><br>

{{Comments}}<br>

<p>

<hr width="25%" color="#FFFFFF">

<p>

{{Thumbnails}}<br>

<p>

<hr width="50%" color="#FFFFFF">

  <p>

  <table bordercolor="#FFFFFF" border="1">

    <tr>

      <td><font color="#FFFFFF"> {{Prev}Previous{/Prev}} </font></td>

      <td><font color="#FFFFFF"> {{Home}Home{/Home}} </font></td>

      <td><font color="#FFFFFF"> {{Next}Next{/Next}}<br>

        </font></td>

      <td><font color="#FFFFFF"> {{Page}} of {{Pages}} </font></td>

    </tr>

    <tr>

      <td colspan="4">

        <div align="center"><font color="#DDDDDD">{{Index}}</font></div>

      </td>

    </tr>

  </table>

</center></font>

</body>

</html>


Web Page Wizard - Image Page Templates

The following is a sample web page wizard image page template.  Image page templates are simply HTML text files (named with a .TPTP extension) that are used when generating image pages.  These templates also include special tokens for the Web Page Wizard.  The tokens below appear in boldface text.

<html>

<head>

<title>{{Title}}</title>

</head>

<body bgcolor="#000000" text="#ffffff" link="#9999FF" vlink="#CC99FF">

<table width="100%" border="0">

  <tr align="center">

    <td><font face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">{{Info}} </font> </td>

  </tr>

  <tr align="center">

    <td>

      <table width="100%" border="0">

        <tr>

          <td align="right"><font face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" size="-1">{{Prev}{{PrevThumb}}<br>

            Previous{/Prev}}</font></td>

          <td align="center">{{Image}}</td>

          <td align="left"><font face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" size="-1">{{Next}{{NextThumb}}<br>

            Next{/Next}}</font></td>

        </tr>

      </table>

    </td>

  </tr>

  <tr align="center">

    <td><font face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" size="-1">{{Home}Index{/Home}}</font></td>

  </tr>

</table>

</body>

</html>

See also:	Main Window - Image | Web Page WIzard - Linking to Images.
and:	Main Window - Image | Web Page WIzard - Image Page Detais.


Main Window - Edit | Untag Selected
Main Window - Edit | Untag Selected	Alt +;

View Window - File | Thumbnail | Untag Thumbnail	;  or  Alt+;

ThumbsPlus can tag selected files by placing associated thumbnails in a special gallery named (Tagged Images).  To untag a group of files in the thumbnail view, select the desired thumbnails and press Alt+;.  Open images are untagged by selecting File | Thumbnail | Untag Thumbnail from the view window menu or by pressing  ; or Alt+;.


Main Window - File | View Recent | (Recent Files)
Main Window - File | View Recent | [Recent Files]

Use this menu option to view one of the recently opened files.  A menu with up to 32 of the most recently viewed files is display.  After selecting a file from the menu, the file is opened in a view window, the folder tree is set to the file's folder and the thumbnail view is scrolled to display the selected file.


Main Window - Volumes | Eject

Use this menu option to eject the disk in the currently selected removable drive.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Remove Keywords | All keywords

Use this menu select to remove all database keywords from the selected thumbnails.

See:	Main Window - Thumbnail | Assign keywords | Other for more information regarding keyword assignment.
Main Window - File | Database | Edit Keywords for information on how to delete, change or combine keywords accross the entire database.


Main Window - Thumbnail | Remove Keywords | Selected keywords

Use this menu select to remove selected database keywords from the selected thumbnail(s).  You may either select an entry from the drop-down list or type keyword(s) in the edit field.

Note: You can remove multiple keywords from the selected thumbnail(s) by separating each with a semi-colon (;).

See:	Main Window - Thumbnail | Assign keywords | Other for more information regarding keyword assignment.
Main Window - File | Database | Edit Keywords for information on how to delete, change or combine keywords accross the entire database.


DCR: Kodak Professional 3, 5, & ProBack
DCR: Kodak Professional 3, 5, & ProBack [P]

Kodak Professional 3, 4 & ProBack cameras use the DCR format.

The ThumbsPlus Professional edition version will recognize and decode DCR images.


ASF, WMV: Windows Media files

ASF (Advanced Streaming Format) is a file format that stores audio and video information and is specially designed to run over networks like the Internet. It is a highly flexible and compressed format that contains streaming audio, video, slide shows, and synchronized events. ASF enables content to be delivered to you as a continuous flow of data with little wait time before playback begins.

WMV - Audio/Video Windows Media. Requires version 8+ of the Windows Media Player. Note: This file is also found as a video/audio file on the Xbox


MRW: Minolta Raw format
MRW: Minolta Raw format [P]

The Minolta Raw format is simply pixel data as it comes directly off the CCD, no in-camera processing is performed. Typically this data is 8, 10 or 12 bits per pixel. The advantage being that file sizes are considerably smaller than an equivalent TIFF file. The image has not been processed or white balanced which means you can correct the image, and it's a better representation of the "digital negative" captured.


ORF: Olympus Raw Format
ORF: Olympus Raw Format [P]

The Olympus Raw format is pixel data as it comes directly off the CCD with no in-camera processing is performed. Typically this data is 8, 10 or 12 bits per pixel. The advantage being that file sizes are considerably smaller than an equivalent TIFF file. The image has not been processed or white balanced which means you can correct the image, and it's a better representation of the "digital negative" captured.


NEF: Nikon Raw Format
NEF: Nikon D1 Raw Format [P]

NEF is a raw file format produced by the Nikon D1 digital camera.  Instead of containing a fully processed image like a TIFF or JPG file, NEF files store data directly sampled from its CCD.  This format, like other raw formats, requires post-processing to be made viewable.  The advantage of the NEF format is that it retains all 12 bits of brightness data from the camera CCD.


MDC: Minolta RD 175 format
MDC: Minolta RD 175 files [P]

Raw format of the Minolta RD-175 digital cameras.  The Minolta Raw format is simply pixel data as it comes directly off the CCD, no in-camera processing is performed. Typically this data is 8, 10 or 12 bits per pixel. The advantage being that file sizes are considerably smaller than an equivalent TIFF file. The image has not been processed or white balanced which means you can correct the image, and it's a better representation of the "digital negative" captured.


SMP: Xionics Packbits Raster format
SMP: Xionics Raster files

The SMP file contains a 1-bit raster bitmap. It may be uncompressed, compressed using CCITT Group 3 (1D or 2D) or compressed using CCITT Group 4. This format was created by Xionics.


XBM: Xwindow Bitmap files

XBM is a monochrome bitmap format in which data is stored as a C language data array, primarily used for the storage of cursor and icon bitmaps for use in the X graphical user interface.


XPM: Xwindow Pixelmap files

XPM is a popular X Window image file format for storing color icons.


WBM, WBMP: Wireless Bitmap files

The Wireless Application Forum introduced a wireless image standard known as the Wireless BitMap (WBM), a format that is optimized for use by handheld devices. WBMs use a TypeField value, which describes encoding information like pixel and palette organization, animation and compression and also determines image characteristics.  Such values are represented by an ImageType Identifier. The Image Type Identifier label for supported WBM files is 0, currently the only type that a WAP device supports.  Type 0 WBM files are uncompressed monochrome (1 bit per pixel) files.


WFX: WinFax Data files

WinFax fax document data format files.


Ordering in India

Please contact:

Select Softwares (I) Pvt. Ltd

2710,1st Diagonal Road , 7th Main, LIC Colony

Jeevanbheemanagar, Bangalore-560075, India

Phone:	091–080–5203918

Fax:	091–080–5285337

E-mail:	select@vsnl.com

Web:	http://www.selectindia.com


View Window - Loupe | Enable
View Window - View | Loupe | Enable	Q

Use this menu selection to enable the loupe window display in any open view window.  The loupe window acts like a photographer's loupe by displaying enlarged pixel data from the image area under the current cursor position.

You may select the size, shape and zoom factor of the loupe window from the View Window - View | Loupe flyout menu.


View Window - Image | Compare
View Window - Image | Compare	Shift+M

Use this menu selection to compare the current image with another.

Compare with

Browse.  Use this button to browse for the desired image file to compare with the current image.

Clipboard.  Click this button to select the image currently on the windows clipboard to be compared with the current image.  If nothing has been pasted to the clipboard, this button will be disabled.

Open Views.  Click this menu button to select any image currently open in another view window.  If you have not opened any other images with ThumbsPlus, this button will be disabled.

File name.  Displays the full path name of the selected compare file.


View Window - View | Loupe | Zoom %
View Window - View | Loupe | 100 % - 800%	Shift+1, Shift+2, Shift+4, Shift+8

Use these menu selections to set the current zoom percentage to be used by the loupe window.  The default setting is 200% zoom.

See: View Window - View | Loupe | Enable for more information on the loupe window.


View Window - View | Loupe | Round

Use this menu selection to set the loupe window shape to round.  If unchecked, the loupe window will have a square shape.  The default setting for this option is checked.

See: View Window - View | Loupe | Enable for more information on the loupe window.


View Window - View | Loupe | Large

Use this menu selection to set the loupe window size to large (320 x 320 pixels + border).  The default size is small (160 x 160 pixels + border).

See: View Window - View | Loupe | Enable for more information on the loupe window.


View Window - View | Loupe | Grid Lines

Use this menu selection to display grid lines in the loupe window.  The default option for this setting is unchecked.

See: View Window - View | Loupe | Enable for more information on the loupe window.


View Window - View | Loupe | Crosshairs

Use this menu selection to display crosshairs in the loupe window.  The default setting for this option is checked.

See: View Window - View | Loupe | Enable for more information on the loupe window.


View Window - View | Enable Color Management

Use this menu selection to toggle the use of color management for the open view window.

See: Main Window - Options | Preferences - Color Mgmt for more information on image color management.


View Window - View | Preferences - Color Mgmt
Main Window - Options | Viewing - Color Mangement	Ctrl+J

View Window - View | Preferences - Color Management	F9

Appearance     Window     Color Management     Monitor Gamma     Slide Show     Other

Click on the links above to view extended information on each dialog tab.

Use this dialog to configure how ThumbsPlus will use color matching profiles to best represent image colors on monitors and printers.  For more information on color management and color profiles click here.  To read information at Microsoft regarding color management click here.

Profiles folder.  This field displays the current windows folder that contains installed color profile ICM files.

Device profile associations.  Lists all the color profiles currently installed.  Double click a device OR click the [Change] button to set its active profile.

Rendering Intent. Lists the rendering intents you can use.  A rendering intent maps the colors of an image to the color gamut of a monitor or printer.  The color gamut is the range of color that a device can produce.

Pictures is the best for photographic images.  All the colors of one gamut are scaled to fit within another gamut.  The relationship between colors is maintained.

Proof is the best for logo images, in which a few colors must be matched exactly.  The colors that fall within the gamuts of both devices are left unchanged.  However, other colors may map to a single color, resulting in tone compression.

Graphics is the best for graphs and pie charts, in which vivdness is more important than actual color.  The relative saturation of colors is maintained from gamut to gamut.  Colors outside the gamut are changed to colors of the same saturation, but different degrees of brightness, at the edge of the gamut.

Match is used for mapping to a device-independent color space.  The result is an idealized print viewed on a perfect paper with a large dynamic range and color gamut.

Enable in

View windows.  Check this button to enable color management in view windows.

Slide show.  Check this button to enable color management in a slide show.

Thumbnail view.  Check this button to enable color management in the thumbnail view.

Enable for images of type

Truecolor.  Check this button to enable color management for truecolor images.

Grayscale.  Check this button to enable color management for grayscale images..

Indexed (palette).  Check this button to enable color management for palettized images.

Obtain current monitor profile from Windows on program startup. Check this button to initialize color management at program startup and get the default monitor profile..


Main Window - Options | Customize - Info Colors
Main Window - Options | Customize - Info Colors	Ctrl+Q

View Window - View | Customize - Info Colors

Menus     Toolbar     Colors     Info Colors

Click on any of the links above to see other customizable settings.

Use this dialog tab to select the colors for the various Info tab items. To modify a color, simply click on the button and select a new color from the color picker dialog.

EXIF fields. These color settings affect the text and background colors of any EXIF items displayed in the Info tab.

User fields. These color settings affect the text and background colors of any User Fields displayed in the Info tab.

IPTC fields. These color settings affect the text and background colors of any IPTC/NAA items displayed in the Info tab.

Image info. These color settings affect the text and background colors of any image info items displayed in the Info tab.  This includes items pertaining to image files (file name, size, date, dimensions, etc).

Use Defaults.  CLick this button to restore the default color settings.


Main Window - Options | File Loading - DCR

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

This tab sets the options for loading DCR files.

Note: Support for DCR files is available only in the ThumbsPlus Professional edition.


Main Window - Opitons | File Loading - MRW / ORF

JPEG     EXIF     Fonts     WP Graphics     UUdecode     PhotoCD
Raw        GIF        Movie / Sound        DCR        MRW / ORF

Click on the links above to see help for the individual file loading options.

This tab sets the options for loading MRW and ORF files.

Note: Support for MRW and ORF files is available only in the ThumbsPlus Professional edition.

Leveling factors.  Click this button to configure the leveling factors.


Main Window - Options | File Loading - MRW Levels


Image Stamp - File Information Items

File information items can be added to a text stamp by selecting the desired type of information from the file information button menu.  After selecting the type of item desired, an item selection dialog will be displayed.  Select the desired item(s) and click [OK].  The selected items will then be added to the current stamp text.

The following is an example file information item text string.  It contains the items: Image info:File name, EXIF:Aperture, IPTC:By-line, User field:Photographer, current date, current time, database name and a newline character.

Eg: \i:File name;\x:Aperture;\c:By-line;\u:Photographer;\d\t\b\n


Color Management
ThumbsPlus - Color Management

The purpose of image color management is to provide a standardized way of accurately representing image color data across a wide array of devices - digital cameras, scanners, printers, and display monitors.  In the past, a limited mechanism of gamma correction was used for display devices.  In ThumbsPlus, color management can be enabled separately for color, grayscale and indexed (palette-based) images.

When working with image color profiles, it is often necessary to convert an images color profile from one color space to another.  Except for very dark, very light and very saturated areas of the image, or in the case of unusual color profiles, conversion of image data from one colorspace to another does not generally change the viewed appearance significantly -- as long as the resultant colorspace's profile is used by the application viewing the image.  However, significant changes in the underlying image data may occur.  For example, consider pictures with image data in the "Wide Gamut RGB" colorspace.  If these images are displayed in a typical web browser, which does not implement color profile, they appear bland and unsaturated.  This is because of how the "Wide Gamut RGB" colorspace is defined.  However, if these images are converted to the sRGB colorspace, they will appear normal.

The following image color profile operations are defined within ThumbsPlus:

Set:  Setting an image's color profile to a given profile indicates that "the pixel data in the image *is in* the given colorspace".  The given color profile will be embedded within the image file.

Convert:  Converting an image to a given color profile is the process where the image's pixel values are transformed from it's current colorspace (or from sRGB if no profile is embedded within the image) to pixel values within the desired colorspace.

Remove: Removing the color profile from an image is simply the process of saving the image file without the embedded color profile.  The image pixel data is unchanged, thus no implicit conversion of colorspace occurs.

Some general rules to follow when using image color management:

1. If images are being converted for public consumption (web, e-mail, etc.), the sRGB colorspace format should be used.  If they are in a different colorspace, they should be converted to sRGB.

2. Once converted to sRGB, image file size can be reduced by removing the color profile before uploading.  The sRGB colorspace is generally recognized as a cross-platform default.

3. If photos come from a source, generated with a known colorspace, those images should be set to use the corresponding color profile within color management aware applications.  For example, some digital cameras create images in the "Adobe RGB (1998)" colorspace, so setting that profile is appropriate.

4. When editing images in Photoshop, and using "Adobe RGB (1998)" as your working profile, time can be saved by converting working images to that profile.

5. If a service bureau or print lab asks for images with a special profile, those images should be converted to that profile.

6. For screen captured images, the color profile can be set to the same profile used by the display monitor and then converted to sRGB for general use.

To configure color management options in ThumbsPlus, Select Options | Viewing - Color Management from the main menu.


Automatically expand and collapse items when dragging files or folders.  When checked, this option causes ThumbsPlus to expand and collapse folder tree entries when mouse dragging over a [+] or [-] folder tree branch icon.


Location Bar
Features - Location Bar

The location bar, located above the folder tree, main function is to provide quick button shortcuts to common folder navigation areas.  You can enter the full path name to a desired folder or select previously visited folder paths from the dropdown list.  You can also enter the full pathname to a file and the folder will be located and the file will be selected and opened in a view window.

  Click this button to navigate up one folder to the parent folder.

  Click this button to display a popup menu of the currently defined favorite folders.  See also: Main WIndow - Tree | Goto | (Favorite)

Click on any of the tab buttons along the bottom of the location bar to quick navigate to the desired folder tree group.


	Favorites
This button causes ThumbsPlus to display a popup menu of the currently defined favorite folders.


Folder Selection.

You can enter the full path name to a desired folder or select previously visited folder paths from the dropdown list.  You can also enter the full pathname to a file and the folder will be located and the file will be selected and opened in a view window.


View Window | Edit | Fade (Operation)
View Window | Edit | Fade (Operation)	Ctrl+Shift+F

Select this menu option to fade (combine) the last undo buffer contents with the current image pixel data.  The last undo buffer contains the prior image pixel data for this image.

Note: This operation will be disabled if the dimensions of the undo buffer image and the current image do not agree (i.e. the last operation performed on the image modified it's width or height).

See also: View Window - Edit | Undo.


View Window - Edit Redo
View Window - Edit | Redo	Ctrl+Y

Use this menu selection to redo a previously undone image operation.  This menu item will show what will be redone beside the "Redo" menu text.  If there is nothing to redo, the menu selection will be disabled.

See: View Window - Edit Undo for more information.


View Window - Edit | Cut
View Window - Edit | Cut	Ctrl+X

This menu selection cuts the currently selected area in the view window to the clipboard, and then fills the selected area with the current view window background color.


View Window - Edit | Delete
View Window - Edit | Delete	Del

This menu selection deletes the currently selected area in the view window by filling it with the current view window background color.

Note: You can enable file deletion via the Delete key (when no area selections exists) by checking Delete the file when pressing DELETE with no selected area Under Options | Viewing | Other.